OCE 3121 3122 Service Manual

Oc
Technical Service Manual
Oc 3121/3122
3121/3122
Contents TSM Oc 3121

CAS-C Oc 3121
INSTALLATION
IMAGE QUALITY
TROUBLE SHOOTING
GENERAL
01 - PHOTOCONDUCTOR
02 - CHARGING
04 - EXPOSURE
05 - DEVELOPING
06 - TRANSFER
07 - CLEANING
08 - IMAGE PROCESSING
10 - RDF
11 - DIGITAL DOCUMENT HANDLING
12 - PAPER
13 - SPECIALITY INPUT
16 - DUPLEX
17 - FIXING
19 - DELIVERY
21 - SORTER
22 - POWER & CONTROL
23 - DRIVE
MISCELLANEOUS
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL DATA
SDS DESCRIPTION
PARTS LIST Oc 3121
Oc 3121
CAS-C
01.Photoconductor
05.Developing
10.RDF
001 Unit positioning

002 OPC, mechanical damage
003 OPC, end of life
004 Potential sensor & PBA
161 Developing roller

162 Developing clutch CL4
163 Toner agglomeration
164 Toner level sensor TS1
165 Toner bias
361 Fax document separation/

output
362 * Separation assy
363 * Stamp
364 * Delivery sensor S12
198 Mechanical connections

199 Electrical connections
200 Others
370 Document separation

371 * Reverse roller
372 * Registration roller
373 * Photo sensors
374 * Paper separation assy

040 Others
02.Charging
06.Transfer
045 Charging roller
046 Cleaning pad
080 Others
380 Platen glass transport

381 * Rollers
382 * Feed belt
383 * Feed belt motor M3
201 Transfer roller

202 Static eliminator
240 Others
390 Gears
391 Motors
395 RDF controller PBA assy
396 Set indicator PBA
04.Exposure
07.Cleaning
121 Platen glass
241 Waste toner sensor PS10
122 Scanner
123 * Sensors document size
124 * Scanner motor M2
125 * Scanning lamp FL1
126 * Home pos.sensor PS 1
127 * Scanning lamp intensity
adjusting sensor
140 Others
142 Laser
143 * Laser unit
144 * Beam detector PBA
145 * Laser driver PBA
146 * Laser motor M3

400 Others

280 Others
11.Digital Document Handling
08.Image processing
401 Fax
402 * Fax PBA
403 * Fax settings
404 * Fax software
281 Image Processor PBA

282 Flash ROM IC 103/104
283 Analogue processor PBA
284 CCD unit
285 CCD driver PBA
405 Fax customer environment

406 * Fax telephone exchange
system
407 * Fax telephone line/quality
408 * Fax customer applications
409 * Fax Oc driver software

320 Others
411 * Fax mechanical connections

412 * Fax electrical connections

160 Others
ACTIONS
SYMPTOMS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
General copy quality

Image position/ deformation/ size
Spots/ stripes/ pullution
Fusing/ finishing (delivery)
Jammed or damaged original or copy
Total stop
Control
Noise/ odour/ damage/ others
ed.1, January 1998, Code no. 0109329
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Replace (life time)

Replace (defective)
Install (missing part)
Adjust,correct
Repair/fix
Clean/ dismount/ lubricate
Replenish/ drain
Instruct/ install
-
Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.
Oc 3121
413 Controller
414 * Controller PBA
415 * Controller interface PBA
416 * Controller hard disk
417 * Controller power supply
418 * Controller settings
419 * Controller software
423 * Controller mechanical connections
424 * Controller electrical connections
425 Controller customer environment
426 * Customer software applications
427 * Customer network hardware/software
428 * Oc driver software
429 * Oc utilities software
432 Scan-to-file
433 * Scan-to-file PBA
434 * Scan-to-file software
436 * Scan-to-file mechanical
connections
437 * Scan-to-file Electrical connections
438 Scan-to-file customer environment
439 * Scan-to-file customer application
440 * Oc TWAIN driver
CAS-C
465 * Separation roller
466 * Feeding roller
467 * Paper pick-up PBA
468 * DC-controller PBA
737 * Mechanical connections

738 * Electrical connections
739 * Others

480 Others
13.Specialities input
481 Manual feed arm
482 Speciality pick-up roller
483 Speciality roller clutch CL2
520 Others
16.Duplex
601 Inlet
602 * Lower feeding inlet assy.
620 Lower paper feed
621 * Retarding roller
622 * Re-pick up roller
623 * Photo sensors PS11,PS12
624 * Re-pick up clutch CL5
625 * Retarding/Re-pick up motor
M6
640 Others
12.Paper trays
17.Fixing
441 Paper trays main

442 * Drive assembly
444 * Registration roller clutch
CL1
445 * Separation roller
446 * Vertical path clutch CL3
447 * Feeding roller
448 * Pick-up roller
449 * Paper pick-up PBA
641 Fixing film

642 Fixing heater H4
643 Heatsink roller
644 Presssure roller
645 Separation claw
646 Static charge eliminator
647 Fixing heater driver PBA

459 Others
460 4 Cassette pedestal
461 * Drive assy.
462 * Pick-up roller
464 * Registration roller clutch
CL1

680 Others
19.Delivery
721 Delivery assembly
722 * Rollers
723 * Separation claws
724 * Deflectors
740 2 Bin output tray

741 * Rollers
742 * Separation claws
743 * Deflectors
758 * Mechanical connections
759 * Electrical connections
760 * Others
21.Sorter
801 Sorter bins
802 * Rollers
803 * Deflectors
804 * Bin assy
805 * Delivery sensors
806 * Control panel PBA
810 * Stapler assy
811 * Stapler slide assy.
820 Fax & printer bins A/B
821 (A/B) Print/Fax delivery assy.
822 Tray controller PBA
840 Others
22.Power & control
841 Control panel assy
842 LCD unit
843 CPU PBA
844 DC controller
845 Power supply
875 Engine software bug
880 Others
23.Drive
881 Main drive assy
882 * Motor M1
883 Fixing drive assy
920 Others
Oc 3121
CAS-C
24.Accessories
960 Others
25.Customer/ environment/
material/ installation
961 No fault on arrival
962 Customer
963 * Speciality incorrectly positioned
964 * Original incorrectly positioned
965 * Paper jam incorrectly
removed
966 * Toner not refilled
968 * Others
971 Environment
972 * Relative humidity
973 * Ambient temperature
974 * Incorrect mains supply
979 * Others
980 Material
981 * Paper quality
982 * Original quality
983 * Specialities
984 * Toner
986 * Other
990 Installation
991 * Packing
992 * Covers
993 * Language download
999 * Machine OK
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
INSTALLATION
Contents
Installation
The site 1
Unpacking and installation 3
Relocating the Machine 24
Installing the Control Card V 25
Installation of the Cassette unit 29
RDF Installation procedure 32
Sorter installation 36
The 3-tray delivery unit 47
Installation of the Fax 55
Installing the expansion memory 64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ed.1
Installation
Installation
1 The site
Requirements:
1 A mains supply of the correct rating.
2 The site must be 7.5 to 32.5C in temperature and 5% to 85% in humidity.
3 Avoid areas near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, refrigerators; near
to sources of fire, or dust or ammonia gas; places subject to direct sunshine.

4 Further requirements are:
The site must be well ventilated.

A level floor, so that all feet of the machine are supported, and the machine
will remain level.
Allow at least 10 cm of space between the machine and any wall, for maintenance work.
A modular connection for the telephone.
Otherwise, you need to convert it into a modular type.
Space required for Servicing
ed.1
Installation 1
6.5 cm
170 cm min.
180 cm min.
6.5 cm
70 cm min.
210 cm min.
6.5 cm
170 cm min.
200 cm min.
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
2 Unpacking and installation

Condensation can occur when a machine arrives at the destination.
If the copier has just been moved from a cold place, allow it to acclimatise for
at least one hour before unpacking.
Unpacking
No.
Adjustments
Unpack the machine, and

remove the plastic covers.
If necessary, unpack the
pedestal.
Holding the copier by the

grips, place the copier on the
pedestal (this is work for two
people).
Remarks
Grips
Grips
Open the cardboard box, and

remove the contents.
ed.1
Grips
Grips
Check the contents:

Copy tray
User Manuals
Mains supply cable
OPC unit
Toner
Lower cover
Size label for the cassette (inside the cassette)
Key pad label (for machines with fax function)
Modular cable (for machines with fax function)
Document delivery tray (for machines with RDF)
Tray hinge (RDF only)
Hinge cover (RDF only)
Installation 3
No.
Adjustments
Remove the screw that is fixing the scanner. There is a

label attached.
Slide out the cassette.

Remove the packing from
inside the copier.
Open the front door.
Turn the lever, releasing the

feeding unit.
Turn the lever to the left,

releasing the developing unit.
Remarks
Scanner fixing screw
Scanner fixing screw
Locking lever for the developing unit
Lever for the feeding unit
Loosen the screw, releasing

the dummy drum.
Keep the removed screw. It
is to secure the OPC unit.
10
Pull the dummy drum out to

the front.
Dispose of the dummy
drum.
TSM Oc 3121
Dummy drum
Screw
Installation
Filling toner
No. Adjustments
Holding the ivory coloured

grip, pull out the developing
unit, until it stops.
Remarks
Developing
unit
Developing
assembly
Ivory
colour grip
Ivory-color
grip
Shake the toner cartridge several times.
Place the toner cartridge on

the developing unit. Push the
cartridge down, releasing the
grip.
The cartridge will be held in
place on the developing unit.
Toner
Tonercartridge
cartridge
Open/close grip
Open/close knob
While holding the toner cartridge, pull the grip forwards

until it stops.
ed.1
Installation 5
No. Adjustments
Tap lightly on the top of the

toner cartridge so that all
toner will fall off.
Push the black cover back into

the developing unit.
The toner cartridge will be
released.
Remove the toner cartridge
Push in the developing unit

until it stops.
Turn the locking lever in the

direction of the arrow, to
lock the developing unit in
place.
Remarks
locking lever
Developing assembly
locking lever
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Stirring the Toner

No. Adjustments
Remarks
Insert the brush into the

release opening, locking the
fuser unit.
2
1
cleaning brush
Separation static eliminator

cleaning brush
Insert the dummy actuator in

the door switch.
Door switch actuator

Connect the mains supply

cable.
Switch ON.
Main
switch
Mainpower
power
switch
ed.1
Installation 7
No. Adjustments
Remarks
Toner stir screen

Switch to service mode, as
follows:
*4*FUNCTION 02
CANCEL
1) Press the service switch.
TONER_S [240]
2) Check that $ is displayed
START
(OK)
on the LCD. Then, press *
STOP (OK)
twice.
3) Press FUNCTION (* 4
*). Then, press OK .
4) Press
to turn pages
to the Toner Stirring screen.
5) Press START. Then, press
OK .
+
OK
The stirring of the toner will
start.
The stirring of the toner takes 4 minutes. It will stop
automatically.
Install the output tray.
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Installing the OPC

No. Adjustments
Turn OFF the main power

switch.
Release the developing unit

lever.
Remove the static eliminator, and clean with the special cleaning brush. After
cleaning, put back the static
eliminator. (Push it until a
click is felt.)
Remarks
static
eliminator
Seperation
static
Remove the dust-proofing

glass, and clean it with
lint-free paper. Then, refit
the glass
Unpack the OPC unit.

Remove the two spacers from
between the rollers.
120 V:
Do not remove the drum
cover
Grip the centre of the OPC

unit, when taking it out of
the box. This is to prevent
damage.
ed.1
eliminator
Dust
proofing glass
Dust-proofing
glass
Primary charging roller

releasing roll (Remove)
releasing roll (Remove.)

releasing roll (Remove)
releasing roll (Remove.)
Do
remove
Donot
not
remove
Installation 9
No. Adjustments
Remarks
Check that the developing

unit is released. Then, slide
the OPC drum unit slowly
along the rail.
Rail
Rail
Rail
Rail
Drum
Drumunit
unit
120V model:
Do not remove the drum
cover
Drum unit
Drum unit
Drum
Drumcover
cover
10
Secure the OPC unit, using

the screw that was previously
removed.
TSM Oc 3121
Screw
Screw
Drum unit
Drum
unit
Installation
No. Adjustments
Enter the data on the label.

Attach the label to the front
cover of the drum unit.
Turn the lever, locking the

developing unit in place.
Lock the feeding unit in
place.
Remarks
date
date Datum
counter
compteur Zhler
notes
note Notiz
Developing
lever
Developing unit
assembly
releasing lever
Feeding unit lever

Feeding assembly
releasing lever
ed.1
Installation 11
Installing the Cassettes

No. Adjustments
Remarks
Slide out the cassette.
Confirm the size of paper to

be used. Then, moving the
selector switch, select A/B or
Inch configuration.
Each cassette has its own
switch. Set all switches
according to requirements.
Switch
Switch
Fix the appropriate label to

the rotary switch. (the recess
in the label should fit exactly
over the notch on the dial).
Label
Label
Note:
Ensure that the correct label is
used: for A/B or Inch configuration.
Notch
Boss
12
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
No. Adjustments
Holding the lever of the

width guide and the length
guide, slide the guides to
suit the index of the appropriate paper size.
Set the paper size dial to the

appropriate paper size.
Remarks
Paper size
Paper
size
ed.1
Installation 13
No. Adjustments
Attach the cassette size label,

as shown, to identify the size
of the paper.
Note: Sizes A3 and 11 x
17 cannot be handled by
the cassettes 3 and 5. As
counted from the top.
Place copy paper in the cassette.
Remarks
P5-14-6 (1)
P5-14-6 (2)
14
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Machine Specifications: Setting Mode (* 5 *)

No. Adjustments
Remarks
Turn ON the main power

switch.
Press user mode . Set the

following:
Date
Time
Place the machine in mixed

text/photo mode, so that the
LCD displays the text mode,
mixed text/photo mode and
photo mode.
Switch the machine OFF/ON.

Select Custom Copy Settings (in additional function
features).
Select photo mode ON (screen 2/3).
Select Standard Settings (screen 3/3).
Select Store and Yes.
Press Done twice.
Now the three symbols are visible and in the display
the text/photo button is selected.
Press the service switch, and A $ will be displayed on the LCD. The screen for the
Service Mode Menu will be displayed.
press the * key twice.
Press OPTION (*5*) to

highlight. Then, press OK.
Select the item to set.
Examples:
COPY-LIM:upper limit of copy count.
SHUT-OFF:ON/OFF of switch to sleep mode.
CST-U1:ON/OFF of notation of U-size cassette paper
size.
Fax Settings (FAX)

1 Executing All-Clear (in service mode)
No. Adjustments
Press Cancel. The screen for the Service Mode Menu will
appear.
Press FAX (*8*) to highlight. Then, press OK.
Press #8 CLEAR to highlight. Then, press OK.
Press ALL on the screen to highlight. Then, press

OK.
Turn OFF the main power switch.
ed.1
Remarks
Installation 15
2 Connecting to the Telephone Line

No. Adjustments
Remarks
Connect the modular cord to the connector at the rear of the * The top connector is for
copier.
the telephone line.
Connect the other end of the modular cord to the telephone

socket.
3 Setting the dialling type

No. Adjustments
Turn ON the main power switch.
Press the User Mode key, and press 'FAX spec settings'
on the screen that has appeared.
Remarks
Press ' Basic Registration '.

The setting screen for the basic registration will appear.
Press the down key to open the 2/3 screen. Then,

press 'Selecting Line Type'.
Select the appropriate telephone line type, and press

OK.
16
20 pps
10 pps
Touch tone
Press the 'Close' key several times to return to the Standard screen.
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
4 Adjusting the transmission level
No. Adjustments
Enter *8* in service mode
Press #5 TYPE .
Select the appropriate country.
Then, press OK .
Press '#2. MENU' on the

Menu screen, and press
OK.
Press ' ATT (P) ', opening the

Value Input screen.
Press the appropriate item,
causing it to highlight.
Enter the appropriate value
using the keypad.
Then, press OK .
Remarks
If you wish to adjust NL, go

to step 3 of NL adjustment.
If you are not adjusting NL,
press Cancel , and press
Reset twice, to end service
mode.
5 Adjusting NL
No. Adjustments
Enter *8* FAX in service

mode
Press '#2. MENU' on the

Menu screen, and press
OK.
Press ' NLEQ ', causing it to

highlight.
When the ON and OFF Setting screen appears, press '
ON ' or ' OFF '. The selection
will highlight.
Press OK .
Press the Cancel key, and

press the Reset key twice to
end service mode.
ed.1
Remarks
Installation 17
6 Communications Test (for machines equipped with fax functions)

No. Adjustments
Remarks
Remove the brush and the

door switch actuator. Then,
close the front door.
Perform test print to make Taking Test prints

sure that the images are nor- Press FAX to select the FAX screen.
mal.
Press Special features.
Press Test print . Place a document, and press OK.
Try communications tests to

check the operation and the
images.
18
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Checking the copy images

No. Adjustments
If in service mode, press the Reset

key twice to end it.
If the copier is not on a pedestal,

install the lower right cover as shown.
Then, slide out the upper and lower
cassettes, and fit and tighten a screw.
Remarks
If the front door is open, remove the switch

actuator and the brush. Then, close the front
door.
Screw
Screw
P5-23-2 (1)
Using test chart 1, make copies to

check the images.
Clean the area around the machine,

and fill out the service sheet.
ed.1
Optimum Images
Text: The white background is free of fogging.
Text/Photo:Step edge No. 10 is barely visible. The white background if free of fogging.
Photo: The white background is free of fogging. (Moire near the step edge of halftone
bands may be ignored).
Installation 19
1 Shading Adjustment
No. Adjustments
Remarks
Start service mode, and exe- Start service mode:

Open the front door
cute shading
Insert the brush into the release opening, locking the
fuser unit.
Insert the actuator in the door switch.
Using a thin pin, press the

service switch.
Press * twice
Press FUNCTION (* 4 *) on
the LCD, causing it to highlight. Then, press OK .
Press
to turn pages to
the Shading screen.
* 4* FUNCTION 03
AUTO SHEADING START (OK)
CANCEL
Now [xxxxxxxxxxxxx]
WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH
GDA1 xxH GD2 xxH CDA3 xxH
CDA4 xxH ADDA5 xxH
D-ODD xxH D-EVN xxH
+
6
Press AUTO SHADING

START on the LCD, causing
it to highlight.
Press OK .
Shading will be executed.
Shading will stop when
Now [END] is displayed.
20
TSM Oc 3121
OK
Installation
2 Automatic Density Adjustment
No. Adjustments
Execute the automatic density

adjustment.
Execute PD, 200PWM, and
600PWM.
Press Reset once, to end service

mode.
$ will be indicated in the upper
left corner of the screen.
Holding the feeder or the platen

cover at about 45, make two A4
copies (solid black).
Press * twice.
Press FUNCTION (* 4 *) on
the screen to highlight. Then,
press OK.
Press
to turn pages to the
PD Density Automatic Adjustment screen.
Remarks
* 4* FUNCTION 04
PD PRINT (START)
WHITE MEASURE (OK)
DENSITY SANPLING (OK)
DATA SET
A= + xxx, B= + xxx, D= + xxx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
MULTI
0
> CASSETTE1 A4 1
CASSETTE 2
A4 1
+
7
Close the front cover as far as

possible, and press PD PRINT
on the screen, causing it to highlight. Then, press the copy button.
The copier will generate a test
pattern. (This will be used later.)
Place a blank white sheet of copy

paper (A4/LTR or larger; not for
colour copiers; but the whitest of
all used by the user) on the platen
glass. Then, close the feeder or
the platen cover.
Press WHITE MEASURE on

the screen to highlight. Then,
press OK.
ed.1
CANCEL
OK
The scanner will make a single scan.
Installation 21
No. Adjustments
Remarks
10
Align the test pattern with the V mark at the

rear (left) of the platen. (If the sheet is not
placed correctly, the adjustment may not be
accurate.)
11
Place the test pattern on the platen,

as shown. Close the RDF or the
platen cover.
Then, press DENSITY MEASURE on the screen, and press OK
.
The scanner will make 13 scans.
Place the test pattern face down on the platen,
After executing DENSITY

SAMPLING, check that the settings under A, B, and D are
as specified:
Insert
PD:
20 <= A <= 50
200PWM:
40 <= B <= 40
0 <= D <= 8
20 <= A <= 60
600PWM:
-70 <= B <= 20

0 <= D <= 8
If the settings are correct, press
SET, causing it to highlight.
Then, press OK .
This ends the automatic density
control. Execute the 200PWM
density adjustment.
12
13
Press
200PWM Density Automatic
Adjustment screen.
Perform the 200PWM density
adjustment.
Proceed as described for the PD
density adjustment.
Face down, i.e., the printed side at the bottom.

* 4* FUNCTION 05
200PWM PRINT (START)
WHITE MEASURE (OK)
DATA SET
MULTI
0
> CASSETTE1 A4 1
CASSETTE 2
A4 1
22
TSM Oc 3121
CANCEL
OK
Installation
No. Adjustments
14
15
Press
600PWM Density Automatic
Adjustment screen.
Perform the 600PWM density
adjustment.
Proceed as described for the PD
density adjustment.
Remarks
* 4* FUNCTION 06
600PWM PRINT (START)
WHITE MEASURE (OK)
DATA SET
MULTI
0
> CASSETTE1 A4 1
CASSETTE 2
A4 1
CANCEL
OK
16
Press the Reset key twice.
17
Place the test chart 1 on the platen, Optimum Images

For text mode, the background must remain
and close the front cover as far as
possible.
white.
Then, make copies at density set In text and photo mode, step wedge No. 10
ting 5:
should be barely visible.
- in text mode,
And the background should remain white.
- in test and photo mode,
- and in photo mode.
In photo mode, the background should remain
Try all the cassettes and the speciwhite. (Moire in the halftones may be ignored.)
ality tray.
After completing the installation, install the optionals: sorter, etc.
ed.1
Installation 23
3 Relocating the Machine

Perform the following work if the machine needs to be relocated, by truck or
other means of transportation:
1 Points to note
If it is necessary to move the copier from room to room, and the copier is on
the pedestal, do not lift the copier with your hands in the grips. This could separate the copier from the pedestal.
2 Before relocating the Machine
Step Adjustments
Checks
Remove the OPC.
Put the OPC unit in a separate box for transport.
Fix the scanner in place.
Tape the charging assemblies

and the feeding unit releasing
lever in place to prevent displacement by vibration.
Tape the front door and the

delivery unit in place.
Place a single sheet of A3 copy

paper on the platen, and tape
the platen cover (feeder) in
place.
3 Lifting the copier off the pedestal

Step Adjustments
Open the pedestals right corner, and

release the guide (shift to the right)
used to join the pedestal and the
copier.
Hold the copiers grips, and lift the

copier upright so that the pedestals
pin will slide off the holes. (Work in
a group of two.)
Lower the copier on the floor or on a

desk.
24
TSM Oc 3121
Checks
Installation
4 Installing the Control Card V

Warning: Ensure that the MEMORY TX/RX indicator is OFF, before switching
off the copier.
Removing the Control Panel
1 Remove the following, so that the inside cover can be removed:
Front door
Fuser cover
OPC unit (Release the developing unit.)
The lever of the feeding unit
The knob of the registration roller
The upper cassette
2 Remove the inside cover (5 screws, see chapter Miscellaneous).

3 Remove the following, so that the control panel can be removed:
Fuser control PBA (1 screw)

The magnet plate from the top of the control panel (1 screw)
The RS232C connector (1 screw)
4 Remove the four screws, and disconnect the four connectors.
Then, remove the control panel, and turn it over.
Before installation of the control card

1 Remove the face plate (1) of the card slot.
ed.1
Installation 25
2 Remove the screw from the face plate (2).
3 Remove the backing sheet from the display of the Control Card V.
Installing the Control Card
1 Position the Control Card (1) on the control panel, using four screws (2).
1
Note: Slide a card in and out, and fix the Control Card V when a card can be
moved smoothly.
Note: Check that the connector (3) for the printer is aligned over the hole.
26
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
2 Connect the earthing wire (4) of the Control Card V, taking care not to trap the
wires.
3 Fit the control panel to the copier.
4 Fit the fuser control PBA (5).
At this time, be sure to fix the grounding wire (6) of the Control Card V in
place by tightening the screw.
5 Cut the cable tie (7), and disconnect the bridge connector (8).
7
ed.1
Installation 27
6 Lead the 4P connector (9) from the copier, and through the saddle (10).
7 Connect the 4P connectors (10) and (11).
10
11
8 Position the plastic (12) in the hole in the control panel.

12
9 Remove the backing sheet from the face plate.

10 Attach the face plate (13) to the control panel.
13
11 Attach the memory record and the transparent sheet.

12 Switch OFF.
Check the functioning of the Control Card V.
28
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
5 Installation of the Cassette unit

Unpacking
DO NOT LIFT label
Cassette unit
label set
Contents:
Cassette unit: 1 unit.
Do not lift label: 1pc.
Label set: 2 or 4 sets
Preparations
If the lower right cover is fitted to the copier, remove it.

1 Disconnect the mains supply cable.
2 Slide out the upper cassette and the lower cassette.
3 Remove the screw from the lower, right side cover.
Screw
ed.1
Installation 29
4 While pulling the centre of the cover, disengage the hook and remove the cover.
Hook
lower right cover
Installation
1 Open the right-hand panel.
2 Open the vertical transport unit.
Vertical transport unit
right door
3 Holding the copier by its grips, carefully place the copier on the pedestal.
4 Close the vertical transport unit, and close the right door.
30
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
5 Ensure that the mains supply cable is disconnected. Connect the cable from the
cassette feeding unit to the copier
6 Continue with the work for each cassette as described at Installing the Cas-
settes on page 12.

7 Attach the DO NOT LIFT label, as shown.
label
8 Perform Adjusting the Registration in Rear/Front Direction on page 301 from
12 papertrays, to correct the registration in front/rear direction.
ed.1
Installation 31
6 RDF Installation procedure

Unpacking the machine
RDF 1 unit
Stepped screw 1 pc.
Delivery tray 1 pc.
Tray hinge 1 pc.
Hinge cover 1 pc.
Screw (M4x30) 1 pc.
Screw (M3x4) 2 pcs.
Guide base 1 pc.
Stamp 1 pc.
32
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Fitting the RDF

1
2
3
4
Ensure that the copier has been properly installed.

Keep the mains supply cable disconnected during the installation work.
Identify the screws by type (length, diameter, location).
Some screws come with a washer to protect against static electricity. Ensure
that these are used.
1 Lift the platen cover, and remove it from the copier.

2 Remove the two screws, and remove the platen retainer from the right-hand
side. Then, install the guide base to the right side of the copier (2 screws).
platen strip
screws
guide
3 Assemble the tray hinge and the hinge cover to the delivery tray. Then, install
the unit (2 screws).
screw
Screw (M4 x 30):

tray hinge
delivery tray
hinge cover
.
ed.1
Installation 33
4 Insert the supports of the RDF into the holes in the copier.
Ensuring that the bolts of the supports are at the bottom of the holes. Close the
RDF.
RDF
Supports
5 Remove the connector cover.
RDF connector
6 Connect the RDF connector.

Warning: Ensure that the mains supply cable is disconnected.
34
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
7 Remove the cap and fit the stamp in the RDF.

Stamp
Cap
Cap
Stamp
Caution: Do not touch the stamp face. Immediately rinse your hands if you
touch the ink.

Checks after Installation
After installation, adjust the following:

the height of the RDF, see 10: adjustment 1
the document position, see 10: adjustment 2, 3 & 4
the sheet distance with image composition mode, see 10: adjustment 5
ed.1
Installation 35
7 Sorter installation
Unpacking
Red sticker
yellow sticker
Contents:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
36
sorter, 1 pc.
Paper on Tray indicator, 1 pc.
Staple (spare 2 sets), 1 pc.
Stapling position label A, 1 pc.
Stapling position label B, 1 pc.
Tray label, 1 pc.
Stepped screw (6 x 11), 2 pcs.
Cable bushing 1 pc.
Latch plate, 1 pc.
TSM Oc 3121
Harness band, 1 pc.

Guide plate, 1 pc.
Delivery guide, 1 pc.
stepped screw (6 x 27.7), 2 pcs.
Reinforcement plate, 1 pc.
Binding screw (black M4 x 6) 3
pcs.
16 Cable retainer, 1 pc.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Installation
Unpacking and removing the metal fixings

1 Remove the packing material and keep the sorter upright.
2 Remove the two screws and two butterfly screws. Then remove the metal fix-
ing A from the sorter. Remove the screw and remove the metal fixing B.
Butterfly screw Metal fixing A
Screw
Metal fixing B
Butterfly screw
Screw
Screw
3 Remove the taping and cushioning material from the bins.

Cushioning material
ed.1
Installation 37
Installation
1 Mount the delivery guide.
Delivery guide
2 Install the latch plate with the two stepped screws (6 dia. x 11).
Cushioning material
Stepped screws
Mounting hole
38
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
3 Remove the hinge cover of the copiers left cover, using a screwdriver.
Hinge cover
4 Fix the reinforcement plate in place to the copier with two screws (black M4 x
6).
Reinforcement plate
Screw
ed.1
Installation 39
5 Reinstall the hinge cover

6 Hook the sorter on the two cut-offs on the copiers left side.
Warning: Be sure to support the bottom of the sorter when lifting the sorter. Do
not hold the stapler cover.
Cut-offs
Stapler cover
Note: To facilitate the work, put cushioning material as shown in the figure and
extend the rail.
Cushioning materials
40
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
7 Fix the sorter in place with two stepped screws (6 dia. x 27.5).
Stepped screw
Stepped screw
8 Remove the connector cover from the rear of the copier.
For 3-tray output unit
Warning: Be sure that the mains cable is disconnected.

9 Connect the sorters cable to the copier.
ed.1
Installation 41
DIP switch settings
Check the mode of communication with the copier.

1 Release the latch and separate the sorter from the copier.
2 Open the sorters right cover and remove the rear right cover (4 screws) while
detaching the solenoid cable.

Screw (with toothed washer)
Solenoid cable
Rear right cover
Screws (with toothed washers)
Right cover
3 Check to make sure that bit 4 of the DIP-switch SW1 on the tray controller
PBA is at ON.
Tray controller PBA
42
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Installing the paper on tray indicator

1 Attach the cable bushing.
Cable bushing
2 Insert the cable into the hole.
Indicator
Cable bushing
Magnet plate
ed.1
Installation 43
3 Connect the cable with J15 on the tray control PBA.

4 Bend the cable into two, hold it in place with a harness band. Then keep the
cable in place to the machine using the cable retainer.

Harness band
Cable retainer
Cable
8 mm .
5 Attach the guide plate.

Paper on Tray indicator
Guide plate
6 Install the rear right cover and close the right cover. Then set the sorter on the
copier.
44
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Attaching the labels

1 Attach the label A to the rear of the platen.
Label A
5 mm
platen
2 Attach the label B so that the leftmost illustration on the Warning label on the
DF is hidden.
Label B
Warning label
3 Attach the appropriate tray label to the side of each tray.
Tray label
ed.1
Installation 45
Checking the operations

1 Switch on the copier.
2 Place three sheets of paper in the upper bin and butt them against the front
guide plate.
Bin unit
Copy paper
Stapling position
Guide plate
3 The manual staple button must turn on. Then press the button.
4 After stapling, check that the Add Staple indicator has started to flash. If it is
not flashing, adjust the detection level set for staples as instructed in the TSM.
5 Supply the stapler with staples. (instructions in the stapler door).
6 Check the following operations:
46
Connection/disconnection between the copier and the sorter.

Up/down movement of the bins.
Feeding of copy paper.
Auto stapling
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
8 The 3-tray delivery unit
Unpacking
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Height adjusting plate, 1 pc.

Interlock retaining plate 2, 1 pc.
Delivery unit, 1 pc.
Tray sticker, 1 pc.
External cover, 1 pc.
Tray, 2 pcs.
Edge saddle, 1 pc.
Hinge, 1 pc.
Stop spacer, 1 pc.
Delivery unit spacer, 1 pc.
Screw, 12 pcs.
Wire saddle, 1 pc.
ed.1
Installation 47
Removing the delivery unit

1 Switch off the machine and disconnect the mains supply cable.
2 Open the front cover.
3 Open the delivery unit and remove the connector cover (1). (The cover is
hooked in place, use a finger to snap it off).
4 Release the hook (3) of the lower cover (2)
48
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
5 Close the delivery unit and shift the lower cover to remove.
6 Remove the hinge cover (1) with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
7 Disconnect the connector of the delivery unit.

8 Open the delivery unit and remove the wire (1) from the copier (2 screws (2)).
9 Pull out the spacer (1) from the right side of the delivery unit.
ed.1
Installation 49
10 Release the bushing (1) to the left.
11 Move the delivery unit to the right. Detach the left side of the unit first and then
the right side.

Installing the delivery unit to the 3-tray delivery unit
1 Remove the bushing and pull out the fixing shaft (1).
2 Remove the lower delivery guide (3) (4 screws (2)).
3 While paying attention to the spring, release the hook of the lever (4) with a
flat-blade screwdriver and remove the lever.
4 Detach the wire from the delivery unit side (1 screw).
50
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
5 Replace the interlock retaining plate 1 (5) with the one for the 3-tray delivery
unit.
The fixing shaft, lower delivery guide, lever, wire and interlock retaining
plate 1 will not be used.
6 Place the 3-tray delivery unit (1) on its side so that the tray side is at the bottom.
7 Install the delivery unit to the 3-tray delivery unit with 4 screws (pay attention
to the spring (3) on the 3-tray delivery unit side. Further, you may refer to the
hook (4) as a guide to facilitate the work).
ed.1
Installation 51
8 Install the edge saddle (5) that comes with the 3-tray delivery unit to the edge
off the delivery unit.

9 Remove the cable (7) from the delivery unit.
10 Lead the cable through the edge saddle and connect it to the connector (8) of
the 3-tray delivery unit.
11 Install the hinge (1) with six screws.
12 Install the height adjusting plate (1) with a screw.
13 Check to make sure that the hole used to fix the height adjusting plate in place
is tapped. If not, use the stepped screw from the wires to tap the hole.
14 Install the height adjusting plate (1) using the binding screw that comes with
the tray.
52
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Placing the 3-tray delivery unit on the hinge

1 Holding the delivery door by its latch with one hand and the bottom of the
3-tray unit with the other, place the 3-tray unit on the hinge pins (1) of the
hinge. (At this time, make sure that you set the 3-tray unit on the bottom shaft
and then the top shaft).
Warning: You will not be able to install the 3-tray unit securely if the opening
angle is not 40 to 50.
2 Lead the cable through the edge saddle (2).

3 Install the wire saddle that comes with the unit and lead the cable through it.
4 Connect the two connectors (3).
5 Insert the stop spacer (4).
6 Close the delivery unit.
ed.1
Installation 53
Installing the external cover, tray and spacer

1 Locate the four hooks on the external cover (1). Engage the top hooks (2) first
and then the bottom hooks (3).
2 Attach the appropriate tray label to the side of each tray.

3 Install the spacer (4) with one screw.
Checking the operation

1 Switch off and on the main power to check that the 3-tray delivery unit shifts
correctly.
2 Perform a copy job while testing the sorting function of the delivery unit.
Identifying the obsolete parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
54
Lever
Hinge unit cover
Bushing
Spacer
Delivery unit lower cover
Lower delivery guide
Fixing shaft
Wire
Interlock retaining plate 1
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
9 Installation of the Fax

INSTALLATION
Preparation
1 The Basic Expansion Kit is required.
2 If the Basic Expansion Kit is already installed, remove its component units be-
fore starting.
3 Ensure that the mains supply cable is disconnected before starting.
4 If a PBA other than the FAX PBA is fitted in the Base Unit, first remove that
PBA before installing the FAX PBA..

5 If the Printer PBA is fitted, cut the cable tie (as shown in the figure), and re-
move the CORE PBA from the Base Unit.
(Be sure to use the new cable tie when refitting the CORE PBA.)
1 Ensure that the copier has been properly installed.
2 Ensure that the mains supply cable is disconnected before starting the instal-
lation.
3 Identify the screws by type (length, diameter, location).
4 Some screws come with a washer to protect against static electricity. Ensure
that these are used.

The installation should proceed in the following sequence:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Speaker
Setting the Bits on the NCU PBA
Modular Unit
Base Unit
CORE PBA
Modular Unit Harness
FAX PBA, Earth Cable, Harness, Cover
Making Settings (line, NL, transmission level, etc.)
ed.1
Installation 55
Installing the Speaker

1 Put the speaker into the speaker holder.
Speaker
Speaker
Speaker
shell
Speakerhol
der
2 Fit the speaker and the speaker shell in the expansion unit.
Fit the notches on the speaker shell into the holes in the expansion unit. Turn
it to lock.
Speaker
holder
Speaker
holder(with
speaker
inside)
(w ith speaker
inside)
56
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Setting the NCU
To operate the unit, make correct settings using the following NCU switches.
NCU Switch Configuration (The NCU for France has no switches.)
J2
J3
J4
J5
NCU PBA
N C U PC B
A SW 1B A SW 2 B A SW 3 B
NCU Switch Settings

SW1
SW2
SW3
Europe (general)
Sweden
UK/Australia/Asia/Ocea- B
naia
France
Modular unit
1 Fit the modular unit in the Expansion Unit (1 screw).
Hook
H ook
2 If the CORE/IP PBA has not yet been installed, install it.
ed.1
Installation 57
Base Unit
Fit the expansion unit to the copier.

When fitting, ensure that the connector (1) is kept straight. This can best be
seen from the CORE/IP PBA side.
Screw
Screw
Check
C heck by
by
the
the eye
eye.
Base
Baseunit
U nit
Core
Position the core in the Base Unit. Using the cable tie, seccure the core in the
appropriate manner.
1 Type 1, with a Square Hole (4 holes)
Core
CO RE
Base
Base unit
U nit
Hole
H ole
58
TSM Oc 3121
Tie
wrap
Tiew rap
Installation
2 Type 2, with a Round Hole (1 hole)

Tie
Tie-wwrap
rap
Core
CO RE
Modular Unit Harness
Connect the modular unit to the connectors J2, J3, and J4 on the NCU PBA of
the FAX PBA.
Harness
modular
H arnessofof
m odularunit
unit
J3
J2
J4
NCU
N C UPBA
PC B
Europe (except France)

When positioning the core (round), take care that bits 1 through 3 of the switch
on the NCU will not interfere with the core.
SW2
SW 3
SW 2 SW3
Core
C O R(round)
E (round)
SW1
SW 1
NCU
NCU
ed.1
Installation 59
Insert the FAX PBA

1 Ensuring that the cable for the speaker is in front of the FAX PBA, insert the
FAX PBA and check to make sure that it is secure.
FAX
FAX Board
Board
2 Connect the cable for the speaker to J2, as shown. Then, lead the harnesses for
the earth cable and the modular unit through the square bush. Lead behind Ql.
Speaker
Speaker
Lead
Lead behind
behind QQ1
1
Earth
cable
AR G cabl
e
Square
Squarebush
bush
60
TSM Oc 3121
Core
CO RE
(round)
(round)
Installation
3 Arrange the core of the harness for the modular unit, as shown. Insert the FAX
PBA in the Expansion Kit.

Harness
unit
H arnessof
ofmodular
m odularuni
t Core
C O R(cube)
E (cube)
Earth
AR G cable
cable
Lock support
Lock support
4 Free the harness, coming from the copier, from the edge saddle.
Edge
Edgesaddle
saddle
Harness
H arness
ed.1
Installation 61
5 Connect the 5-pin connector (large), and the 3-pin connector (small). Fit the
harness in the edge saddle, as shown.

Core
C O R E(cube)
(cube)
Harness
Edge
H arnessofofm odul
arsaddle
modular
unit unit
Edge saddle
3-pin connector (small)

3-pin connector(sm all)
5-pin connector (large)
5-pin connector(large)
6 Before fitting the front cover. Ensure that all bits of the switch, as shown in the
figure, are shifted to the top positions.
Bit
Bitswitch
sw itch
62
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
7 Secure the earth cable (blue), as shown

earth
AR Gcable
cable
Screw
washer)
Screw (+
(w /
w asher)
8 Shift the slide switch SW2 from OFF to 3.
O FF
9 Fit the cover to the expansion unit. Be careful not to trap any wires.
Screw (+ washer)
10 Remove the jack cover from the rear panel of the copier.
11 Fit the the rear panel to the copier.
ed.1
Installation 63
10 Installing the expansion memory

Note: Prior to the installation, switch OFF the copier and disconnect the
mains supply cable.
The expansion memory may either be 3Mb or 9Mb. Installing the memory in
slot A or B on the Fax PBA provides the following functions:
Slot A:
used for page memory

3Mb memory may be installed
as resolution Ultra Fine Mode may be selected
Slot B:
Used for image memory

9Mb or 3Mb may be installed
increases memory for transmission/reception images.
Installation
1 Turn OFF SW2 on the Fax PBA
2 Remove the rear cover of the copier and the expansion unit cover. Slide out the
Fax PBA, halfway.

Slot
A
SlotA
Slot
B
SlotB
Fax
FaxPBA
Board
SW2
SW 2
3 Open the claw of the slot. Insert the expansion memory straight down in the
slot.
4 Turn ON SW2 on the Fax PBA.
5 Slide the Fax PBA back into the original position, and replace the covers.
64
TSM Oc 3121
Installation
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
IMAGE QUALITY
Contents
Image quality
Initial check 1
Image adjustment basic procedure 3
Check and adjustment of the image registration
Trouble shooting: image faults 6
Isolating a PBA : FAX image fault 21
Shading for service 22
Automatic correction of the copy density 24
Shading for R&D and factory 28
AE adjustment 30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ed.1
Image quality
Image quality
1 Initial check
The site
1 Ensure that the mains supply voltage is according to specifications.
2 Make sure that the site is not subject to ammonium gas.
The quality of the documents
Define whether the problem is due to the quality of the documents, or the function of the machine.
1 The exposure control should be set to 5 1.
2 Copies of documents with a reddish background tend to have a poor contrast.
3 Check the contrast of the documents:- diazo documents or transparencies can
produce vague copies,- documents with pencil drawings or pencil text tend to
produce light image copies.
Checking the platen cover, the platen and the standard white plate.
Check that the platen cover, the platen, and the standard white plate are all
clean. Replace as necessary.
Checking the charging rollers
1 Check that the charging rollers are clean.
Checking the quality of the paper
1 Check that the paper is of a recommended quality.
2 Check that the paper is dry.
Try to make copies with fresh paper.
ed.1
Image quality 1
Checking the parts replaced at fixed intervals
Check that the scheduled parts have not exceeded their scheduled lifetimes. If
the scheduled life has been exceeded, replace the relevant parts.
Others
When a machine is brought from a cold location to a warm location, it is possible that condensation will occur. This leads to various problems.
1 Condensation in the document exposure system, or the laser exposure system
(glass, mirror, lens), causes light or dark images.
2 Condensation in the charging system can cause leakage.
3 Condensation in the pick-up system, or on the feeding guide, can cause feeding
problems. If condensation is noted, wipe the part until it is dry, or leave the machine switched on 10 to 20 minutes.
Warning: The image adjustment: basic procedure should be followed if any of
the following occur:- uneven density (difference in density between front and
rear),- light images,- or a grey background .
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
2 Image adjustment basic procedure
ed.1
Image quality 3
3 Check and adjustment of the image registration

For confirmation of the image registration we have the next adjustments.
1
2
3
4
the image read position in the sub scanning and main scanning direction
the LASER-write position in the sub scanning and main scanning direction.
The cassette position
the rear/front registration for the lower feeding assembly
1. The Image Read Position.
To adjust the CCD reading start position in the sub scanning direction
SDS *3*ADJUST 04 V-ADJ
A higher setting delays the registration ON timing.
To adjust the CCD reading start position in the main scanning direction.
SDS *3*ADJUST 04 H-ADJ
An increment shifts the read start position to the right.
2. The LASER-Write position.
Sub scanning direction: the leading edge marging

Check the leading edge margin. This margin must be 2.5 1.5mm
Adjustment: *3* ADJUST 04 RESIST
This adjustment adjusts the timing of the registration clutch.
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
Main scanning direction: left right registration:

Check the the margin on the front. The margin must be 2.5 1.5mm
Adjustment: *3*ADJUST 04 PVE-OFST (offset LASER centre)
This adjustment influences the result for all the cassettes in the same way.)
3 The cassette position
For the different cassettes the front margin of the copy must be the same (2.5
1.5mm) . For adjustment of the cassettes see: 12 - Paper trays -adjustments
4. Lowerfeeding assemely, 2nd side of two sided/overlay copies
Rear/front adjustment for images on paper from the lower feeding assembly:
Check to make sure that the printing position of the image on the second side
of a two-sided/overlay copy is 2.5 2.0 mm.
Decrease the value of
'RSID-SENSHP'.
(A decrease by 23 causes
a change of 1 mm.)
Increase the value of

'RSID-SENSHP'.
(An increase by 23 causes
a change of 1 mm.)
2.5mm2.0
If the value is not as specified, select (*3*) RSID-SENSHP in service mode

and make adjustments.
An increase by 23 of RSID-SENSHP will shift the image print position to
the rear by 1 mm. A decrease by 23, on the other hand, will shift the position to the front by 1 mm.
ed.1
Image quality 5
4 Trouble shooting: image faults

The copy is too light (half-tone only)
Cause
Step
Checks
Carry out the image

Yes End.
adjustment procedure. Is
The image will be much
the problem corrected?
lighter if the pattern print
Is the pattern print placed
is placed in reverse
in reverse (left/right) ori(left/right) orientation.
entation?
Ensure correct orientation of the test chart.
Incorrect AE adjustment 2
Make copies in AE
Yes Carry out AE adjustment
In the case of image
mode. Are the images too
light?
quality priority mode,
increase the setting
*3*->ADJUST->AE_DARK.
In the case of speed
priority mode, increase
the setting under
*3*->ADJUST->ABC_TBL.
Position of the developing unit
Is the developing roller in No

correct contact with the
OPC?
Check that the lever for

the developing unit is
correctly positioned, and
check the surface of the
developing roller for foreign matter.
Developing unit
Is there an even coating

of toner on the developing roller?
Check the developing

unit.
Scanner (dirty)
Clean the mirror, the lens Yes End.

and the exposure aperNo Replace the OPC unit
ture. Is the image corrected?
OPC
TSM Oc 3121
Y/N Action
No
Image quality
The copy is too light. (including solid black)

Cause
Transfer unit
(Transfer fault)
Paper
(Transfer fault)
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Carry out the image

Yes End.
(left/right) orientation.
Switch OFF in the mid- No

dle of the copying cycle.
Open the front door. Is
there a fairly normal
toner image on the OPC ?
Is the transfer unit properly installed?
No
Correctly fit the transfer

unit.
Is there a leakage of
charge from the transfer
roller?
Yes Check the transfer unit.
Is there dirt, cracks or

scratches on the transfer
roller?
Yes Replace the transfer

charging roller.
Check the spring for the

transfer roller:- undamaged,- correct tension.
No
Using an alternative copy Yes

paper, is the image
darker?
Correct the position of

the spring, or replace the
spring.
Transfer guide
(Transfer fault)
High-voltage cable, high

voltage transformer, DC
control PBA
(Transfer fault)
ed.1
Go to step 9
The paper may be

moist. Advise the user
regarding the correct
method of storing paper.
Advise the user that the
use of non-recommended paper may reduce
the quality.
Position the feeding unit Yes Check the mechanical

in the operating position.
connection of the metal
Measure the resistance
components (e.g. the side
between the transfer
plate of the feeding unit).
guide and the support of
No Check the high-voltage
the rail for the transfer
unit. Is the resistance 0
cable for electrical conohm?
tinuity.
Check the high voltage
transformer, and the
DC control PBA
Image quality 7
Cause
Step
Checks
Developing unit
(Development fault)
Is the developing unit fit- No

ted correctly? Ensure that
the developing rollers are
in firm contact with the
OPC.
Refit the developing unit.
Toner detection
(Development fault)
10
Does the developing unit No

contain toner?
OPC unit
11
Image processor PBA

Analogue processor
PBA
TSM Oc 3121
Replace the OPC unit. Is

Y/N Action
Check the toner sensor.

Check the connector
and the harness for
electrical continuity.
Yes End.
No
Try replacing the image

processor PBA , or the
analogue processor PBA.
Image quality
The copy is very light (overall)

Cause
Transfer unit
(Transfer fault)
High voltage cable

Transfer unit
(Transfer fault)
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Carry out the image

Yes End.
(left/right) orientation.
Switch OFF in the mid- No

dle of the copying cycle.
Open the front door. Is
there a fairly normal
toner image on the OPC ?
Go to step 7
Is the transfer unit properly installed?
No
Correctly fit the transfer

unit.
roller?
Yes Check the transfer unit.
Is there electrical continuity between the power

supply PBA and the
transfer roller?
No
High voltage transformer.

DC control PBA
(Transfer fault)
Transfer guide
(Transfer fault)
ed.1
Replace the high voltage cable.

Check the transfer unit.
Yes Check the power supply

PBA and the DC control
PBA.
6
Position the feeding unit Yes Check the mechanical

in the operating position.
connection of the metal
Measure the resistance
components (e.g. the side
between the transfer
plate of the feeding unit).
guide and the support of
No Use an alternative copy
the rail for the transfer
paper.
unit. Is the resistance 0
ohm?
Is the developing roller in No Refit the developing unit.

correct contact with the
Yes Check the developing
OPC?
unit.
bias.
Paper
(Transfer fault)
(Development fault)
Image quality 9
There is background on the copy. (overall)

Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Scanner (dirty)
Clean the scanning lamp, the

exposure reference strip, the mirror, the lens and the exposure
aperture. Is the image corrected?
Yes End.
Carry out the image adjustment

procedure. Is the problem corrected?
Yes End.
Execute Function 15 in service Yes Set AGS NON of

mode ( * 4 * ;
OPTION ( * 5 * ) to
SERCT_GAMMA_NUM ,
1.
AGC_MEASURE ).
If the resulting image is
Open the * 4 * , FUNCTION
satisfactory, keep the setting to 1 as a temporary
15 screen, and press the copy
remedy. However, be sure
button.
to take proper action, as
Check the following:
there may be a problem
on the image processor
SERCT_GAMMA
AGC_MEASURE
_NUM
PBA or the DC control
PBA.
~-28.0 uA
AGC
-28.1 ~ -36.5 uA
-36.6 ~ -43.0 uA
-43.1 uA ~
Is the variation of value too large?

Developing unit 4
Is the developing roller insulated

from the earth of the machine?
Switch OFF. Disconnect J205
from the power supply PBA.
Check the electrical continuity
between J205-1 and the side of
the developing unit, and between
J205-1 and the side frame of the
machine.
Developing unit 5
Replace the power supply PBA. Is Yes End.

the problem solved?
No Replace the DC control
PBA
10
TSM Oc 3121
No

roller and the components adjacent to the connector of the developing
unit.
Image quality
The copy has vertical lines of background

The copy has black lines. (vertical, thick, fuzzy)
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Charging roller
Clean the charging roller in user Yes End.

mode. Is the problem solved?
Scanner (dirty)
Clean the mirror, the lens and the Yes End.

exposure aperture. Is the problem solved?
Developing unit
Is there an even coating of toner

on the developing roller?
No
OPC
Light (intrusion)
Are there scratches on the OPC,

in the peripheral direction.
Check the edge of the

doctor blade.
Wipe the surface of the
developing roller, until
it is dry.
Yes Replace the OPC unit.

No
Check whether the OPC

is being subjected to
exposure from an outside source.
The copy has black lines. (vertical, thick, fuzzy)

Cause
Step
Checks
Laser exposure
system
Make a test copy, using ( * 4 * No

), L-TEST2 in service mode.
Does the copy have black lines?
Charging roller
Clean the charging roller in user

mode. Is the problem solved?
OPC
Are there scratches on the OPC, Yes Replace the OPC unit.
If there are scratches,
in the peripheral direction.
Try wiping the black lines (if
check to find the cause.
visible) from the OPC, using a
cloth coated with toner. Check
whether the copies no longer
have black lines.
Fusing unit
Are there any scratches or black

lines on the surface of the fixing
film? In peripheral direction?
ed.1
Y/N Action
The scanner system may

be faulty.
Clean the mirrors 1 to 3.
Yes End.
Yes Replace the fuser unit.

No
Check that there is no dirt

in the entry of the fuser
unit.
Image quality 11
The copy has white spots (vertical pattern)

The copy has white lines (vertical)
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Laser exposure system
Execute ( * 4 * ) ,
L-TEET1 in service
mode. Are there white
lines in the resulting
image?
Yes Go to step 7.
Transfer roller and the

static eliminator for the
separator
Is there dirt or foreign

matter on the transfer
roller, or on the static
eliminator?
Yes Clean the transfer roller,

or the static eliminator. If
the problem is still not
solved, replace the transfer unit, or the static
eliminator.
Developing unit

No
Check the edge of the

doctor blade.
If there is no toner in the
developing assembly,
refer to The ADD
TONER message is not
displayed.
Fusing unit
Are there scratches on

the fixing film, in the
peripheral direction.
Yes
Replace the fuser unit.

Clean the separation
claw.
Check the separation
claw.
Fuser entry
Is there dirt or foreign

matter in the entry to the
fuser?
Yes Clean the area.
OPC
Are there scratches on

the OPC, in the peripheral direction.
Yes Replace the OPC unit

Check to find the
source of the scratches.
Aperture glass
Replace the aperture

glass.
Clean the exposure refer- No

ence strip and all the mirrors.
Is the problem solved?
12
TSM Oc 3121
Change the value of ( *

3 * ), ADJ-S in service mode, and change the
point of shading measurement.
Image quality
The copy has white spots (horizontal).

Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Developing unit
Execute ( * 4 * ) ,
L-TEET1 in service
mode. Are there white
lines in the resulting
image?
Yes Go to step 4.
Developing unit
Is the problem repeated

at intervals of approximately 35 mm?
Yes
OPC unit

Yes
Clean the developing

roller.
Wipe the surface of the
developing roller, until
it is dry.
If scratches are found
on the developing cylinder, replace the developing unit.
Clean the OPC.
If there are scratches,
replace the OPC unit.
Paper
Using an alternative copy Yes The paper may be moist.

paper, is the image
Advise the user regarding
darker?
the correct method of
storing paper.
Transfer unit
Are there white spots on

the photosensitive drum
during copying?
No
Developing bias
Are there white spots on

the photosensitive drum
during copying?

bias.
The scanning rail, and

the scanner cable

at the same location on
every copy?
Yes
ed.1
Check the transfer unit

assembly for leakage.
Check the scanner rail

for foreign matter.
Adjust the tension of
the scanner cable.
Image quality 13
The back of the copy is soiled

Cause
Bias for the transfer

guide
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Switch OFF, while copy

paper is passing through
the feeding unit. Is the
back of the copy paper
soiled at this time?
No
Is the voltage between

No
the transfer guide and the
side plate of the machine
-600V or more? (connect
+ to the transfer guide).

Developing unit and the 3

registration roller
Yes
Go to step 0.
OPC cleaning unit
Fusing unit
Transfer roller
14

No
Is there soiling of the

lower roller in the fusing
unit?
Yes
Check the bias for the

transfer unit.
Clean the transfer
guide.
Clean the registration
roller.
Clean the transfer
guide.
unit for leakage of toner.
Clean the feeding unit
Check the waste container unit for leakage
of toner.
Clean the lower roller
in the fusing unit?
Clean the entry guide
for the fusing unit.
Execute cleaning of the

roller, in user mode.
Make several black copies
Is there excessive soiling Yes Replace the transfer unit.

of the transfer roller?
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
The copy has faults with the fusing

Cause
Step
Checks
Paper
Is the paper in use a thick Yes Set ( * 5 * ) ,

type of paper, or a paper
SPCL-PPR to 1. Then,
that is difficult to fuse?
set the following and
advise the user:
Select a cassette for
thick paper as the special cassette.
Select the following
icon for the selected
cassette (2nd column
from the right and 3rd
row from top). Thick
paper icon
Advise the user to use
this cassette for thick
paper.
Is a recommended type
of paper being used?
Fusing unit label (

FILM-LANK )
Decrease the setting of (

* 3 * ), FILM-LANK
. In service mode.
Fusing unit
Is the problem evident in Yes Check the fixing film for

the vertical direction?
scratches or wrinkles. If
any, replace the fixing
unit.
Fusing heater
Open the MIN_TH

screen in service mode
(*1*) and press the copy
start key. Thereafter, is
the value of MAIN_TH
200C or more?
ed.1
Y/N Action
No
No
Make a test run, using

recommended paper. If
the results are satisfactory, advise the user to
use recommended paper.
Refer to: The fusing

heater fails to switch ON.
Yes Check the DC control

PBA, and the thermistor.
Image quality 15
The copy has a displaced leading edge

Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Is the RDF being used?
Yes Solve the problem, by

referring to the RDF section.
Document
Is the document position

correct?
No
The pick-up roller, the

feeding roller, and the
separation roller
Has the relevant roller

reached the end of its
scheduled lifetime?
Yes Replace the roller
( * 3 * ), REGIST
Execute REGIST in
service mode (*3*).
The registration roller,

the pick-up roller and
the feeding guide.
Is the problem evident

No Check the lower fuser
only on the second side
roller
of a two-sided copy, or an
Yes Check and clean:
overlay copy?
Registration roller
The pick-up roller and
the feeding guide.
Place the document correctly?
The copy has blurred images

Cause
Step
Checks
Scanner cable
Is the cable twisted or

Yes Correct the routing of the
frayed on the pulley,
cable, or replace the
when the scanner is movcable.
ing?
Scanner rail
Move mirror 1 by hand.

Does it move smoothly?
No
Clean the surface of the

scanner rail, using alcohol. Then, apply a drop
of lubricant.
Drive for the OPC, and

the OPC

Yes

at intervals of 35 mm?

unit.
Gear for the developing

roller
OPC drive
OPC unit
Y/N Action
No
16
TSM Oc 3121
Check the drive of the

OPC
Check for scratches or
foreign matter at the
ends of the OPC. These
are in contact with the
developing roller.

OPC
Replace the OPC unit
Image quality
The copy has horizontal lines of background
Cause
Step
Checks
Is the location of the

Yes Go to step 4
problem area on the copy
consistent for all copies
made in direct mode?
Scanning lamp, power

supply PBA
Does the scanning lamp

flicker while the scanner
is moving?
Yes Check the scanning lamp

and the power supply
PBA (lamp ON circuit),
and the 2.4V power supply.
Developing unit

No
Scanner
Make reduced size copies. Compare the copies

with the copies made in
direct mode. Has the
location of the problem
changed?
Yes Check the scanning system
OPC drive
OPC unit
Y/N Action
No

bias.
Check the feeding system
The copy is not sharp

Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Is a printed photo (with

raster pattern) copied in
photo mode?
Yes Advise the user that

moir may occur at
times.
Platen
Is there oil on the platen? Yes Clean the platen
Scanner (dirty)
Clean the scanning lamp,

the exposure reference
strip, the mirror, the lens
and the exposure aperture.
Position of the mirror
Is the horizontal reproduction ratio within the

specified range, in direct
mode?
No
Adjust the distance

between the mirror 1 and
the mirror 2.
Developing bias
Is the developing bias

generated correctly?
No
OPC unit, the transfer

system
ed.1
Replace the OPC unit. Is

No
Replace the power supply PBA

Replace the DC control
PBA
Check the transfer system
Image quality 17
The copy is completely blank

Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Locking lever for the

developing unit
Is the developing unit

locked against the OPC
drum, during copying?
No
Drive for the developing

unit
Does the developing

No
roller rotate during copying?

developing unit.
Developing unit
Is toner available?
No
Refer to: The ADD

TONER message fails
to switch ON.
Execute test printing

using ( * 4 * ) ,
L-TEST1-7 . In service
mode. Is the image correct on the OPC?
No
Go to step 11.
Is the transfer unit fitted

correctly?
No
Insert it securely
roller?
Yes Check the transfer unit
High voltage cable for

the transfer
Is there an open circuit or Yes Reconnect the cable, or

poor contact on the transfit a new HT cable.
fer HT cable? (The cable
leads from the transformer 502 on the power
supply PBA).
DC control PBA

PBA
Power supply PBA
Replace the power supply OK End.

PBA
?
Transfer unit
Power supply to the CCD 10

unit
Is the voltage correct

from the analogue processor PBA to the CCD
unit?
Check the locking of the

developing unit.
OK End.
?
No
Laser unit, the image

processor PBA
OPC unit
18
TSM Oc 3121
11
Check the cables between the CCD and the

power supply PBA. If
undamaged, replace the
CCD.
Check the power supply
PBA
Remove the developing

No Replace the laser unit
unit and make a copy of a
Replace the image
solid black document. Is
processor PBA
a laser beam striking the
OPC?
Yes Replace the OPC unit.
Image quality
The copy is completely black

Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N Action
Scanning lamp

remain ON during copying?
No
Charging roller
Is there a correct contact, No

and a correct connection
between J205-3, on the
power supply PBA, and
the charging roller?
Reconnect
Execute test printing

using ( * 4 * ) ,
L-TEST1-7 . In service
mode. Is the image correct on the OPC?
Go to step 5
Connect the test probe to No Replace the DC control

J102-B5 (+) on the DC
PBA
control PBA. Is the voltage 0V during copying? Yes Replace the power supply
PBA
Execute ( * 4 * ) ,
No Replace the image procIP-CHK . In service
essor PBA
mode. Is OK displayed
Yes Replace the CCD unit
as the result?
DC control PBA
Power supply PBA
Image processor PBA
CCD unit
ed.1
No
Refer to: The scanning

lamp fails to switch ON.
Image quality 19
20
Isolating a PBA : printer image fault
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
5 Isolating a PBA : FAX image fault
ed.1
Image quality 21
6 Shading for service

There are two types of automatic correction of shading: for service and for
R&D. ( * 4 * , 3rd screen and 12th screen).
For the automatic correction of shading, various data is monitored and stored
in RAM on the image processor PBA. The stored data is used as a target value
for the correction of shading carried out prior to the copying cycle.
Auto shading for service
This mode should be used in the following situations:

When replacing the image processor PBA
After executing ( * 4 * ), RAM INIT .
Before executing ( * 4 * ), COPY AUTO DENSITY CORRECTION .
After replacing the power supply PBA
After replacing the laser unit.
After replacing the CCD unit.
After replacing the analogue processor PBA.
1 Open the front door, and insert the brush in the fuser release.
Separation static eliminator cleaning brush
Separation static elim inatorcleaning brush
2 Insert the switch actuator in the door switch.

3 Using a thin pin, press the service switch.
22
A $ will be displayed in the upper corner of the screen.
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
4 Press * twice
The Service Mode Menu screen will be displayed.
5 Press FUNCTION ( * 4 * ) . It will highlight.
Then, press OK.
6 Press the Page key
to bring up the shading screen (3rd screen).
7 Press AUTO SHADING on the LCD , causing it to highlight. Then, press
OK .
Shading Auto Correction will be executed.
8 After a time, NOW [END] will be displayed, indicating the end of the shading correction.
ed.1
Image quality 23
7 Automatic correction of the copy density

There are three manners of automatic correction of the copy density. The three
manners should be executed as a single set. (automatic correction of shading
should be executed before correction of the copy density).
1 Automatic correction of PD density
2 Automatic correction of 200PWM density
3 Automatic correction of 500 PWM density
This mode is executed to correct the following:

Laser characteristics
Developing bias
This mode should be used in the following situations:
After replacing the laser unit.
After replacing the power supply PBA
When image faults occur.
When replacing the image processor PBA
Operation

24
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
4 Press * twice
The Service Mode Menu screen will be displayed.
5 Press FUNCTION ( * 4 * ) . It will highlight.
Then, press OK.

Press the Page key
to bring up the shading screen (3rd screen).
Execute automatic correction of shading .
At the end of automatic correction of shading , press once on RESET .
With the RDF raised, or the platen cover open, make two totally black copies.
2) Check that $ is displayed on the LCD. Then, press * once.
Press FUNCTION ( * 4 * ), causing it to highlight.
Then, press OK .
to bring up the PD Density Auto Correction screen (4th
screen).
6
7
8
9
10
11
13 Select either MULTI, CASSETTE 1, or CASSETTE 2. (Press the appro-
priate item to select so that the cursor (
) points to the item.
14 Make a PD pattern copy. Press PD PRINT . It will highlight. Press the copy
button.
The pattern copy will be used later.
15 Place five to ten sheets of blank paper on the platen. Close the RDF or the cover.
ed.1
Image quality 25
C opy paper
C opyboard glass
16 Press WHITE MEASURE on the screen , causing it to highlight. Then, press
OK .
The scanner will move forward, to scan the blank paper.
17 Remove the paper from the platen. Place the pattern copy on the platen, aligning it with the V marking. (Position the pattern copy correctly. Otherwise, correct adjustment will not be possible).
Place the test pattern face down on the platen,
If the pattern copy is positioned wrongly, the image will be much lighter.
.
Printed side down

Printed side dow n
18 Press DENSITY SAMPLING , causing it to highlight. Then, press OK .
The scanner will make 13 scans.
19 At the end of the sequence, check that the values A, B and D on the LCD are
as follows. If incorrect, restart the adjustment at step 7, as the adjustment may

be wrong.
26
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
A, B and D are approximate values. Optimum images may still be obtained

even if the values are outside the range. You may omit temporary remedy if
the images are optimum.
For PD and 200 PWM
20 <= A <= 50
-40 <= B <= 40
0 <= D <= 8
For 600 PWM
20 <= A <= 60
-70 <= B 20
0 <= D <= 8
20 Check the above and press DATA SET . It will highlight.
Then, press OK.

This will set the measured values under A, B and D.
21 Press Page and execute 200 PWM: density automatic adjustment . Follow the same steps, starting with step 9.
22 When 200 PWM density automatic adjustment is finished, execute 600
PWM density automatic adjustment. Follow the same steps, starting with
step 9.
23 Press Reset twice, ending the service mode. If the values for A, B and D do
not match, after repeated execution of copy density automatic correction ,
and it proves to be impossible to obtain optimum images, the follow temporary
remedy can be used. The temporary remedy will enable normal copying. However, as the image quality is inferior, correct the faults as soon as possible.
Then, execute copy density automatic correction .
Possible fault
OPC unit
Scanning lamp
Laser unit
Power supply PBA
Analogue processor PBA
Image processor PBA
ed.1
Image quality 27
8 Shading for R&D and factory

There are two manners of shading correction: for service and for R&D.
For the automatic correction of shading, various data is monitored and stored
in RAM on the image processor PBA. The stored data is used as a target value
for the correction of shading carried out prior to the copying cycle.
Shading for R&D and factory
Execute the R&D mode in the following situations:

After replace the exposure reference strip.
After replacing the scanner lamp.
After replacing the DC control PBA.


4 Press * twice, to exit service mode.
28
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
5 Press ' FUNCTION ' on the Menu screen ( * 4 * ).Press OK .

to bring up the Shading screen (12th screen).
7 Place 5 to 10 sheets of paper on the platen.
C opy paper
C opyboard glass
8 Press AUTO SHADING START on the LCD , causing it to highlight. Then,
press OK .
Shading Auto Correction will be executed.
9 A beep will sound while the lamp is adjusted, LAMP LEVEL will be displayed. Press OK when the beep stops.
If no beep is heard, remove the rear cover and turn VR1, on the DC controller
PBA, until you hear the beep. If you still hear no beep while VR1 is turned
fully clockwise, press OK while keeping VR1 at the maximum setting.
10 After a time, NOW [END] will be displayed, indicating the end of the shad-
ing correction.
ed.1
Image quality 29
9 AE adjustment
The AE auto density adjustment mode may be either priority on speed
or priority on image quality . Each of these modes may be adjusted in service
mode. The concepts used for the modes are as follows:
Priority on speed mode
Use ABC_TBL , under ADJUST . In service mode ( * 3 * ).

A lower value for ABC_TBL will make the image darker. (value 1 ~ 9).
A higher value for ABC_TBL will make the image lighter. (value 1 ~ 9,
default = 3).
The adjustment will modify the density correction curve.
C opy density
W hite
H ighersetting Low ersetting
Black
Black
O riginaldensity
W hite
Priority on image quality mode

1 AE_SLOP
For priority on image quality an AE table is selected, based on a computation of the density histogram which is prepared during a pre-scan. The slice
level, distinguishing the data into text (black) and background (white), can be
adjusted under AE_SLOP . In service mode ( * 3 * , ADJUST ).
AE-SLOP : A higher setting makes the image darker. (value 1 ~19).
30
TSM Oc 3121
Image quality
2 AE_LIGHT or AE_DARK
The AE table, selected as a result of a pre-scan, may be corrected to suit the

preference of the user.
AE-LIGHT : A higher setting emphasises the background of the document.
A lower setting softens the background of the document. (value: 0 ~ 40, default
= 20.
AE_DARK : A higher setting will increase black, a lower setting will decrease black. (value: 0 ~ 40, default = 20).
Slide leveldividing w hite area (background)and black area
(text;m ay be changed under'AE_ SLO P'of'AD JU ST'in service m ode (*3*)).
Low er
setting
D egree
H igher
setting
W hite H igher
setting
O riginal
density histogram
Low ersetting
O utput
Signallevel
Light
(w hite)
D ark
(black)
Text
M ay be adjusted
under'AE_LIG H T'
of'AD JU ST'in
service m ode (*3*).
Black
D ark
(black)
Background
W hite
W hite
O utput
O utput
AE table
Light
(w hite)
Input
M ay be adjusted
under'AE_DAR K'
of'AD JU ST'in
service m ode (*3*).
Low er
setting
H ighersetting
Black
Black
D ark
(black)
Input
ed.1
Light
(w hite)
D ark
(black)
Input
Light
(w hite)
Image quality 31
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Contents
Trouble shooting
1
2
3
4
5
Introduction to this chapter 1

Error codes descriptions 2
Detecting errors on the composite power supply PBA
Self diagnosis of the RDF and the 12-bin sorter 11
Detection of jams 12
10
Error code solving / machine fault solving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
E000 The fixing temperature fails to rise. 14

E001 The fixing temperature is abnormally high. 15
E002/E003 The fixing temperature is abnormally high. 15
E007 The fixing film has become displaced. 15
E007-01 The fixing film does not realign. 16
E010 Main motor fails to lock 17
E030 The total counter fails. 17
E031 The fax counter fails. 17
E032 The copy data controller is faulty. 18
E051 The home detection of the horizontal registration has failed. 18
E064 The high tension supply is faulty. 19
E100 A beam detection error has occurred. 20
E110 Scanner motor fails 21
E190 RAM error. 21
E191 Error in serial communication between DC controller PBA and composite power supply PBA 22
E202 Scanner home position is not detected. 22
E220 The scanning lamp operates incorrectly. 23
E240 An error has occurred in the communication between the DC control
PBA and the image processor PBA. 23
E243 Error in communication between control panel and image processor
ed.2
Trouble shooting
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
PBA 24
E261 zero cross error 24
E310 The intensity of the scanning lamp is incorrectly adjusted. 25
E400/E712 25
E401 26
E402 26
E403 27
E411 27
E500/E713 28
E510 29
E515 30
E521 31
E530 31
E531 32
E540 33
E541 33
SCSI interface E601 (The communication between the SCSI board and the
machine has a fault.) 34
SCSI interface E603 (The SCSI fuse has an open circuit.) 34
Fax Unit E674 (The fax unit has a fault.) 35
X2e Controller E675 35
Communication Errors E677 (The communication between the printer board
and the machine has a fault.) 35
Communication Errors E710 (The IPC communication chip on the image
processor PBA has a fault.) 36
E711, E712, E713, E716 (IPC communication error) 36
E717 Error in the communication with the copy data controller. 36
E803 24 V output error from the composite Power supply PBA. 37
There is no AC power. 37
There is no DC power. 39
The OPC does not rotate 40
No pick-up from the cassette 42
The lifter does not rise. 42
Pick-up failure: specialities 43
The registration roller fails to rotate. 43
The scanner fails to move forward or in reverse. 44
The pre-exposure lamp fails to switch ON. 44
The scanning lamp fails to switch ON. 45
The fixing heater fails to switch ON. 45
The counter fails to operate. 46
The Add Paper display remains ON. 46
The Jam display remains ON. 47
The Add Toner display remains ON. 47
The fax error display remains ON. 48
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Contents
RDF Self Diagnosis
FAX related error codes
ed.2
Trouble shooting
Trouble shooting
1 Introduction to this chapter
The Oc 3121/3122 has several ways to inform you about malfunction. The
most important is the self-diagnosis system which generates an error code if
there is something wrong with the basic machine. Besides that, the composite
power supply of the machine can indicate malfunction in the power supply area, by a flashing LED on the composite power supply PBA.
Also the RDF and the 12-bin sorter have their own self-diagnosis system which
are able to generate error codes and alarm codes. The error codes are displayed
on the copiers display, the alarm codes will cause an appropriate message on
the display. In service mode, it is possible to read the alarm code number.
In the first part of this chapter, you find the descriptions of the error codes and
the description of the LED at the composite power supply.
The second part gives you procedures to solve faults by error code or by fault
situations.
The third part is a list of fax related error codes.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 1
2 Error codes descriptions

The Oc 3121/3122 has a self diagnostic mechanism that indicates a code on
the control panel upon detection of an error.
Code
Main cause
Description
E000
The fixing temperature fails to rise.

Thermistor (TH1; poor contact, open
circuit)
Heater driver (faulty)
DC control PBA
E001
The fixing temperature rises abnormally.

Thermistor (TH1, TH2; short circuit)
DC control PBA (faulty)
TSM Oc 3121/3122
The main thermistor (TH1) detects

less than 50C for 200 ms 1 sec after
voltage has been applied to the heater.
voltage has been applied to the heater.
The sub thermistor (TH2) detects less
than 90C for 200 ms 4 sec after voltage has been applied to the heater.
more than 250C for 200 ms during
copying operation.
The sub thermistor (TH2) detects
more than 260C for 200 ms during
copying operation.
The main thermistor (TH1) detects a
temperature in excess of a specific
temperature by 30C or more for 200
ms during copying operation.
The thermistor (TH1, TH2) detects an
increase in temperature of 40C or
more during stand-by.
The main thermistor (TH1) detects an
more in 1 sec.
The main thermistor (TH1) detects in
more in 1 sec.
Trouble shooting
Code
Main cause
Description
E002
The fixing temperature fails to reach a

specific value.
Thermistor (TH1, TH2; off contact,
poor contact, open circuit)
Fixing heater (open circuit; cracking)
Fixing heater drive circuit (faulty)
E003
The main thermistor detected less

than 105C for 200 ms 1 sec after it
has detected 90C.
The main thermistor (TH1) detected
it has detected 105C.
The main thermistor detected less
than 120C for 200 ms after it has detected 105C.
The fixing temperature drops abnormally.

Thermistor (TH1, TH2; off contact,
poor contact, open circuit)
Fixing heater (open circuit, cracking)
Fixing heater drive circuit (faulty)
E007
The fixing film has become displaced.

Fixing film (wrong position, tear)
Tension roller (wrong position,
wrong operation)
Fixing film motor (faulty)
Fixing film sensor (faulty)
The output of the fixing film sensor

continues to be 1 or 0 for 2.1 sec or
more.
E007-01
The fixing film has become fully displaced.

Fixing film (recovery mechanism
fault)
The displacement is not corrected after executing film recovery mode

which turns on when the main power
is tuned off and on in response to
E007.
E010
The main motor fails to lock.

Main motor (M1; faulty)
The value is outside a specific range,

and the main motor does not lock for
3 sec.
E030
The total counter fails.

Total counter (CNT1,CNT2; open
circuit)
A check is made immediately before

the counter turns on and off. (Normal,
if the counter drive signal is 0 when
the counter turns on.)
ed.2

less than 150C for 200 ms after it has
detected 150C.
The sub thermistor (TH2) detects less
than 150C for 200 ms after it has detected 150C.
Trouble shooting 3
Code
Main cause
Description
E031
The option counter fails.

Option counter (CNT3; open circuit)
A check is made immediately before

the counter turns on and off. (Normal,
if the counter drive signal is 0 when
the counter turns on.)
E032
The copy data controller counter is

faulty.
Communication (counter data between Copy Data Controller and copier)
The count data is not detected by the

Copy Data Controller within a specific period of time after the copier has
generated the copy start signal.
E051
The home position detection of the

horizontal registration fails.
Horizontal registration sensor PS14
Horizontal registration motor M9
DC control PBA
The home position is not detected after generation of the horizontal registration drive signal.
E064
The high voltage supply is faulty:

charging, transfer and developing
Composite power supply PBA
DC control PBA
Wiring (short circuit, open circuit)
The difference between the high voltage control signal and the actual high
voltage output is more than a specific
value.
There is an output error on the primary charging roller, transfer charging
roller or the developing roller.
A beam detection error has occurred.

Laser unit
BD detection PBA
Laser driver PBA
Image processor PBA
The laser scanner motor fails.

Laser scanner motor M3
Laser scanner driver PBA
DC control PBA
E100
E110
E190
RAM error.
E191
An error has occurred in the serial

communication between the DC control PBA and the composite power
supply PBA.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
The BD signal is not generated within

2 sec after the laser has been turned
on.
The BD signal cycle has a discrepancy
A specific speed is not reached, after
the laser scanner motor drive signal
has been generated.
The speed deviates, after it has
reached a specific speed.
The communication data is not updated within 8 sec.

Three consecutive errors occur with
the check sum of the communication.
Trouble shooting
Code
Main cause
Description
E202
The scanner home position cannot be

detected.
Scanner home sensor PS1
Scanner motor M2
DC control PBA
The scanner does not return to home

position after it has started to move.
Scanning lamp (error activation)

Scanning lamp
DC control PBA
Activation of the lamp has been detected during stand-by.

Deactivation of the lamp has been detected during copying.
E240
An error in the communication with

the DC control PBA has occurred.
DC control PBA
Image processor PBA
E243
An error has occurred in communication with the control panel.

Control panel CPU
Image processor PBA
An error has been detected in the communication between the CPU on the
control panel and the image processor
PBA.
E261
There is an error in the zero cross signal.

Power supply frequency (fluctuation)
The intervals of zero cross signals are

outside the allowed range.
E301
The intensity of the scanning lamp is

incorrectly adjusted.
Intensity sensor
Scanning lamp
DC control PBA
E400
(RDF)
Fault in data communication with

copier
The communication is monitored at

all times. This error is identified when
the communication with the copier is
interrupted for 5 sec or more.
E401
(RDF)
Pick-up motor M1: fails to rotate

Pick-up roller sensor S5
A vane is fitted to the shaft of the

pick-up motor M1. The rotation is
monitored by checking the passage of
the vane past the sensor S5. This error
is identified if S5 is not switched on
and off twice within 1 sec.
No code
indication.
Keys on
control
panel
locked.
E220
ed.2
An error has been detected in the

communication between the DC control PBA an the image processing
PBA.
Trouble shooting 5
Code
Main cause
Description
E402
(RDF)
Belt motor M3: fails to rotate

Belt motor M3
Clock sensor S10 for the belt motor
The number of clock pulses for 200 ms

is below a specific value.
E403
(RDF)
Feeder motor M2: fails to rotate

Feeder motor M2
Feeder motor clock sensor S9
The number of feeding motor clock

pulses for 200 ms is below a specific
value.
E411
(RDF)
Original tray paper sensor S1

Registration sensor S3
The sensor output is 2.3 V or more in

the absence of paper.
E422
The home position sensor for the tray

(3-bin out- shift mechanism fails.
put unit)
The home position detection signal

does not turn on within 5 sec during
shift tray home position search.
E500
The CPU (Q7) or the communication

IC (Q11) on the tray controller PBA
are defective.
An error has occurred in the communication between the multi tray and the
copier.
The bin feeding motor (M2) fails to

rotate.
The clock sensor (PI2) of the bin
feeding motor has a fault.
The clock sensor PI2 does not transmit

pulses within 4 seconds after the motor
drive signal (BFMD) has been generated.
The tray feeding motor (M6) fails to

rotate.
The clock sensor (PI6) of the tray
feeding motor has a fault.
The clock sensor PI6 does not transmit

pulses within 1 second after the motor
drive signal (TFMD) has been generated.
The tray shift motor (M7) fails to rotate.

The tray position sensor (PI12) has a
fault.
The position sensor PI12 does not

switch on or off within 2.5 seconds
after the tray shift drive signal has been
generated.
(12-bin
output
unit)
E510
(12-bin
output
unit)
E515
(12-bin
output
unit)
E521
(12-bin
output
unit)
(12-bin
output
unit)
The drive motor (M4) for the guide bar The position sensor PI5 does not switch
fails to rotate.
on or off within 2.5 second or more
after the guide bar swing signal has
been generated.
E531
E530
(12-bin
output
unit)
The stapler motor M3 does not rotate.

The stapler swing motor M5 does not
rotate.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
The sensor MS7 does not switch within 1 second after the stapler motor
CW (M3) signal was generated, and
the sensor MS 7 does not switch within 1 second after the stapler motor
CCW signal is subsequently generated.
The stapler position sensor PI4 is not
switched off within 1 second after
motor M5 was started.
Trouble shooting
Code
Main cause
E540
(12-bin
output
unit)
The bin shift motor M1 does not rotate.
Description
The cam home sensor PI1 does not

switch OFF within 1 second after the
motor M1 drive signal has been generated.
E601
The communication between the

machine and the SCS1 board has a
fault.
An error exists in the communication

between the SCS1-CPU and the
IP-CPU.
E603
The SCS1 fuse has blown.
The SCS1 fuse has blown.
E604
The image memory has a fault.

The RAM has a fault.
The expansion memory is not fitted
properly.
A white fault is detected when image

data is written to the image memory.
E605
The image memory battery has a fault.

The battery has a fault. (The image
memory battery is an accessory to the
FAX board.)
The voltage of the image memory battery is lower than a specific value (if
after an adequate charging time and the
power was turned on within a charge
life.)
E674
The fax unit has a fault.

The chip has a fault.
The fax unit has poor connection.
An error is detected when writing to the

chip while receiving a fax message.
E675
Tolerance in power supply of the

expansion B2 kit
Bad communication between IP-board

and X2e controller
E677
The communication between the

machine and the printer board has a
fault.
The communication with the printer

board has an error.
E710
The IPC chip self diagnosis has an

error. An error exists in the IPC chip
self diagnosis mechanism on the
image processor PBA.
The IPC chip self diagnosis mechanism

on the image processor PBA does not
end normally when power is turned on.
E711
The IPC communication has a fault.

The cable has poor contact.
The cable has a fault.
The options print PBA unit has a
fault.
The accessory IPC chip has a fault.
The communication between the IPC

chip on the image processor PBA and
the IPC chip (accessory) has a fault.
E712
The communication with the feeder

has a fault.
The communication is interrupted.
E713
The sorter IC has an error.
E716
The communication with the pedestal

has a fault.
(Cassette
unit)
ed.2
Trouble shooting 7
Code
Main cause
Description
E717
The communication with the copy

data controller has a fault.
E803
An error has occurred in the output

Incorrect output voltage (+24VU or
voltage of the composite power supply +24VR) of the composite power supply
PBA. Both ends of the fluorescent
PBA.
lamp are blackened: because of deterioration.
E901
(Cassette
unit)
Pedestal motor M20 (faulty)

Pedestal control PBA is faulty
TSM Oc 3121/3122
The rpm failed to reach a specific value within 10 second, after the pedestal
motor was turned on.
The rpm deviated from a specific value for 3 sec or more.
Trouble shooting
Action in response to error codes
When the diagnostic system has switched ON, and an error has been logged,
the machine can be reset by switching the ON/OFF switch OFF, then ON.
E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, and E00701, and E717 cannot be reset by
switching OFF and ON.
Resetting:
1 Go to *4* FUNCTION in service mode.
2 Press ERROR on the LCD to highlight; then, press the OK key.
This will interrupt the mains supply for an instant.
Note:In the case of E007, turning off and then on the main power switch will
activate film recovery mode (FILM_COMEBACK in service mode *4*),

thereby resetting the machine after returning the film to its correct position.
If the film fails to return to the correct position after executing this recovery
mode, E007-01 will be indicated. If this happens, replace the fixing assembly
or take appropriate measures, return the film to its correct position, and execute ERROR in service mode (*4*).
Note that E007-01 in service mode will be indicated as E007, omitting the
last two digits under ERR of DISPLAY in service mode (*1*).
After the film has returned to normal position, following the execution of
'FILM COMEBACK', switch OFF, then ON: without touching the other buttons.
Note:In the case of E202, the keys on the control panel will be locked without
indicating an error code; use ERR under DISPLAY in service mode (*1*)
if this is the case.
Operation in Response to an Error E5XX or E713 (12-bin output unit)
1 The copiers message display indicates TURN ON POWER.
2 When the copiers power has been turned off and then on, the copier will reset
the error if the results of self diagnosis it has run are good. (it will indicate an
error code if any error is detected).
Copier operation with an Error Code On
1 The copier indicates E5XX or E713.
2 The copier allows making copies when the multi-tray is detached from it*.
3 A message will be displayed if a sorter application is selected.
* Turn off the joint sensor (MS3; feeding the multi-tray from the copier); you
need not disconnect the communication connector to the copier.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 9
3 Detecting errors on the composite power supply PBA

The composite power supply PBA has a self diagnostic function for errors in
the output of the PBA and its communication with the DC controller PBA.
The errors are indicated by the flashing frequency of LED100 on the DC controller PBA (See the table below). At the same time, the control panel displays
an error code.
Deterioration of the scanning lamp is also checked by this detection mechanism. (In this case you need to replace the lamp to clear the error)
VR1
LED100
Status indications by flashing LED

Pattern
10
Message
Description
0.5 seconds ON, 0.5 seconds Normal

OFF
The composite power supply PBA

is functioning in a normal manner.
2 seconds ON, 2 seconds

OFF
Excess current
An excess current has been

detected. Or, an error in the load
relation of +24VR or +24VU outputs.

OFF
Low-voltage
control error
in stand-by
The difference between the setting for +24VR output and the
control value in stand-by is larger
than specified. Upon detection,
error data is sent to the DC controller PBA. E803will be indicated on the control panel.

OFF
Error in the
communication with the
DC controller
PBA
A communication error: DC control PBA to composite power supply PBA. The communication
data was not renewed within 8
seconds. LED100 may fail to
flash. E191 is logged.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Trouble shooting
Pattern
Message
Description

OFF
Low voltage:
control error
during copying *
Unacceptable difference between

the +24VR output and the actual
control value.
Error data is transmitted to the
DC control PBA.
E803 is logged.

OFF
+5.1V output: control

error
Output is incorrect. All output

from the composite power supply
PBA will stop. The display will
also be OFF.

OFF
Check sum
Two consecutive check sum errors
error on the
have been detected by the CPU on
DC controller the DC control PBA.
PBA
* Can also be due to a faulty fluorescent lamp. Check that the glass at each end
of the tube is not black.
4 Self diagnosis of the RDF and the 12-bin sorter

The RDF control PBA and the sorter control PBA have a self diagnosis mechanism which generates an error/alarm code. You may check the code in the
copiers service mode (*1* DISPLAY 03). For a description of these codes, see
the SDS description chapter, *1* DISPLAY 03.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 11
5 Detection of jams
Seven paper sensors (figure) are used to check whether copy paper is moving
properly.
The microprocessor on the DC controller PBA runs checks the presence/absence of paper at specific sensors at specific times. When it detects a jam, it
will turn OFF the main motor and indicate a jam message on the control panel.
PS13
PS7
PS5
PS4
PS8
PS12
PS11
Sensor
Signal
Connection
PS4
Sensor for the speciality tray
MFPD
J113-A11
PS5
Sensor for the pre-registration
PDP 1
J113-A5
PS7
Fuser sensor PS7
PDP 3
J109-6
PS8
Sensor for the vertical transport
PDP 4
J113-A2
PS11
Sensor for the re-pick entry
PDP 5
J103-2
PS12
Sensor for the re-feed unit
PDP 6
J105-B2
PS13
Sensor for the output tray
PDP 7
J105-A2
12
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Trouble shooting
Types
The microprocessor identifies jams as follows:

Delay
The paper did not reach the appropriate sensor within the specified time: i.e.
the sensor is not ON.
Stationary
The paper did not leave the appropriate sensor within the specified time: i.e.
the sensor does not switch OFF.
Persistent
The paper remains over a sensor, with power ON. i.e. the sensor detects paper.
Note:A jam will be signalled in any of the following occur, during copying:
- the front door is opened,

- the right door is opened,
- the output door is opened,
- or the cassette is withdrawn.
Record of jams
The machine retains a history of the jams which have occurred. The history can
be checked in service mode.
In memory are:
The remaining number of copies, and
the relevant copying mode.
This memory will be used for job recovery, after the jam has been removed.
Note:If the message Return Original and Press Start appears on the control
panel after removing the jam, put the original back into the feeder as they were
set initially.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 13

1 E000 The fixing temperature fails to rise.
.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No
Action
The thermistor
1
relay connector J50
is disconnected.
Clear the error using

No
ERROR in service
mode (*4*). Is the connection of the connector
J50 (4-wire harness
under the counter mount)
good?
Reconnect it.
Thermistor: open
circuit.
Let the fixing assembly

No
to cool; then, disconnect
J50, and measure the
resistance of the thermistor. Is the reading as follows? J501/-2 (yellow
line) about 1388 kohm
J503/-4 (white line)
about 3636 kohm
Heater: open circuit.
Disconnect the connector J4 (near the door

switch assembly), and
check electrical continuity. Is there electrical
continuity?
Thermistor: poor
contact.
Replace the fuser unit. Is Yes

End.
Fixing heater driver 5
Replace the fixing heater Yes

driver. Is the problem
No
corrected?
End.
DC control PBA
14
TSM Oc 3121/3122
No

PBA
2 E001 The fixing temperature is abnormally high.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No
Thermistor:
short circuit.
Clear the error using ERROR in service

Yes
mode (*4*). Let the fixing assembly to
cool; then, disconnect J50, and measure the
resistance of the thermistor. Is the reading
as follows? J501/-2(yellow line) about
0kohm
J503/-4 (white line) about 0 kohm
Replace the
fixing unit.
Fixing heater
driver
Replace the fixing heater driver. Is the prob- Yes

lem corrected?
End.
DC control
PBA
Yes
Action
Replace the
DC control
PBA.
3 E002/E003 The fixing temperature is abnormally high.

Cause
Thermistor:
short circuit.
Step
Checks
Clear the error using ERROR in serv- Yes

ice mode (*4*). Is any of the following
correct after the machine has booted?
The fixing heater fails to switch ON.
E000 is indicated.
See the appropriate section.
Check the cables between the thermistor and connection J108, on the DC
control PBA.
No
Repair the cable

connections.
Replace the DC control PBA. Is the

problem corrected?
Yes
End.
No
Replace the fixing heater driver.
Fixing heater 3
driver
DC control
PBA
Yes/No
Action
4 E007 The fixing film has become displaced.

Yes/No
Cause
Step
Checks
Film (displacement)
Switch OFF, then ON. Is the problem corrected?

Yes
Switching OFF/ON automatically starts the film
recovery mode. If the film fails to return to the cor- No
rect position,
E007-01 will be indicated, and no recovery can
be made by switching the machine OFF and ON.
ed.2
Action
Trouble shooting 15
5 E007-01 The fixing film does not realign.

Cause
Step
Checks
Front cover (the

switch actuator)
Switch OFF. Is the switch Yes

actuator damaged?
Replace the front cover.
Roller
Have any of the rollers

slipped off? The lower
roller, the tension roller
or the cleaning roller.
Yes
Fixing film
Is the film cut, or bent, or Yes

torn?
Have more than 200,000

copies been made with
the fixing unit?
Yes
Releasing lever
Is the releasing lever

faulty?
Yes
Detect lever
Is the tension spring of

the detect lever in good
condition? Also, does it
move smoothly?
No
Correct it.
Film sensor PS2
Is the sensor PS2 in good No

condition?
Check the wiring

between: the DC control
PBA, via the connector
J47, to the sensor. If
sensor.
M5 Fixing film
motor
Turn on the main power, No

and reset the error using
Yes
ERROR in service
mode (*4*). When the
main power turns off
automatically thereafter,
turn it on once again, and
execute FILM COMEBACK in service mode
(*4*). Is the operation of
the fixing film motor
(M5) normal?
Replace the motor (M5).
16
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/No
Action
6 E010 Main motor fails to lock
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Does the main motor

rotate until E010 is
indicated?
No
Go to step 4.
Main motor
(including motor
driver PBA)
Is MLCK 0 V (main
No
motor specific speed signal), while the main
motor is running?
Replace the main motor.
DC power supply
Is the voltage between

No
the following connectors
on the main motor driver
normal? J150-1: 24 V
J150 2 = 0 V.
Check the wiring from

J204-3 (24 V)/J204-4 (0
V) on the composite
power supply PBA to the
main motor; if normal,
see DC power is
absent.
Main motor
Replace the main motor. Yes

Is the problem corrected?
No
End.
DC control PBA

PBA
7 E030 The total counter fails.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Check the operation of

the counters.
Counter 1 (right): total
copy counter
Counter 2 (centre):
printer counter
No
See The counter fails

to operate.
Yes

PBA
DC control PBA
8 E031 The fax counter fails.

Cause
DC control PBA
ed.2
Step
Checks
Yes/No
Action
Check the operation of

the fax counter.
Counter 3 (left): fax
counter
No
The counter fails to

operate.
Yes

PBA PBA
Trouble shooting 17
9 E032 The copy data controller is faulty.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Connector
1
(poor contact)
Check the connection of the commu- No

nication cable, between the copy data
controller and the copier.
Connect the
connector correctly.
Communica- 2
tion cable
(open circuit)
Is there an open circuit in the connec- Yes

tion between the copy data controller
and the copier.
Replace the
communication
cable.
Copy Data
Controller
Replace the copy data controller. Is

the problem corrected.?
DC control
PBA
Yes
End
No
Replace the DC
control PBA
10 E051 The home detection of the horizontal registration has

failed.
Cause
Step
Checks
Is the registration sensor PS14 function- Yes

ing normally?
Procedure:
Open the right door, and insert copy
paper into the pick-up feeding assembly
through the lower feeding assembly.
While paying attention to DC PC0 in
service mode (*2*), move the inserted
paper toward the rear. Does the value
under DC PC0 change from 1 to 0?
Go to step 3.
Check the cables between the DC control PBA and the registration sensor:
connection J114.
Yes
Replace the sensor.
Horizontal
3
registration
motor connector (poor contact)
Check the cables between the DC control PBA and the registration motor:
connection J115.
No
Connect the connector correctly.
Motor for the

side registration
Replace the horizontal registration

motor. Is the problem corrected?
Yes
End.
No
Replace the DC
control PBA
Registration
sensor PS14:
faulty.
DC control
PBA
18
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/N
o
Action
11 E064 The high tension supply is faulty.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Trapped
cables
Turn OFF/ON the power

switch, and set the copy
count to 1. Is E064 indicated after copying?
Yes
Check the harness of

the DC controller PBA
and the composite
power supply PBA.
composite
power supply PBA
Set the count to 1 once

again, and make a copy. Is
E064 indicated after copying?
Yes
Perform steps 3 to 6.
Then, replace the composite power supply
PBA.
Transfer
charging
assembly/transfer
charging
roller
Check the connections of the Yes

transfer unit and the transfer
roller.
Replace the transfer

unit or the transfer
roller.
Primary
charging
roller
Remove the OPC, and check

the charging roller.
Check the connection of the
charging roller.
Replace the OPC unit.
Developing
unit
Yes
assembly, and check the
developing cylinder and the
contact. Is the developing
cylinder or the contact faulty?
Replace the developing

cylinder or the developing assembly.
High tension
cable
Yes
Are there any scratches or
tears in the high tension
cables? Inspect the cables for
the charging, the transfer and
Replace the high tension cable.
ed.2
Yes
Trouble shooting 19
12 E100 A beam detection error has occurred.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
J602
J603
Are the connectors J602 and

J603 of the laser driver connected?
No
Reconnect
Yes
Check the connector

J518: on the image
processor PBA. If correct, go to 2.
J518
J5041
J504
BD PBA
(soiled face)
Is J5041 connected to the BD No

PBA?
Yes
Reconnect.
Clean the face of the BD

PBA. Is the problem solved?
Yes
End.
Yes
Try replacing the following items:

BD PBA
Laser unit
Image processor PBA
BD PBA,
laser unit,
image processor PBA
20
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Check the connector

J504: on the image
processor PBA. If correct, go to 3.
13 E110 Scanner motor fails

Cause
Step
Checks
J153
No
Inspect the connection of
J153, to the laser driver PBA.
Connect the connector.
Perform key operation during Yes

stand-by. Is the sound of the
rotation of the laser scanner
motor heard?
Go to step 4.
Is there a power supply to the No

laser driver PBA?
J152 1 = 24 V.
J152 2 = 0 V.
Check the wiring

between the connector
J152 on the laser scanner driver PBA to the
connector J204-5/-6 on
the composite power
supply PBA.
Yes

Laser scanner drive
PBA
Laser unit
DC power
supply
Laser scanner drive

PBA, laser
scanner unit
DC control
PBA
Yes/No Action
Replace the DC control PBA. Yes

No
Laser unit
End
Replace the laser unit
14 E190 RAM error.

Cause
Image processor PBA

DC control
PBA
ed.2
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Switch OFF, then ON. Is the

problem corrected?
Yes
Execute IP-CHK in service No

mode (*4*). Is OK indicated after execution?
Yes
End
Replace the image processor PBA

End if the problem is
corrected after turning
OFF/ON the main
power supply. If E190
is indicated, replace the
DC controller PBA.
Trouble shooting 21
15 E191 Error in serial communication between DC controller

PBA and composite power supply PBA
Cause
Connector
(poor contact)
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

problem corrected?
Yes
Is the connection between the No

connector J102 on the DC
controller PBA and the connector J209 on the composite
power supply PBA normal? Yes
composite
power supply PBA and
the DC control PBA.
End
Reconnect

DC control PBA
composite power supply PBA
16 E202 Scanner home position is not detected.

Cause
Scanner
home sensor
PS1
Scanner
motor M2
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Is the scanner at home position when E202 is indicated?
Yes
See The scanner fails

to move forward/in
reverse.
Inspect the Scanner home

sensor PS1.
No

to PS1; if normal,
replace PS1.
Replace the scanner motor. Is Yes

the problem solved?
DC control
PBA
22
End.
PBA
TSM Oc 3121/3122
17 E220 The scanning lamp operates incorrectly.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

switch ON?
No
See The scanning lamp

fails to turn ON.
Scanning
lamp (low
intensity)
Are both ends of the scanning Yes

lamp black?
Replace the scanning

lamp.
The scanner may fail to
move forward, due to
low intensity.
DC control
PBA


PBA
No
Check the wiring of the

DC controller PBA and
the composite power
supply PBA; if normal,
replace the composite
power supply PBA.
composite
power supply PBA
18 E240 An error has occurred in the communication between the

DC control PBA and the image processor PBA.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

problem corrected?
No
Connector
(poor contact)
Is the connection of the con- Yes

nector J111 on the DC controller PBA and the connector
J509 on the image processor
PBA good?
Connect the connector

properly.
DC control
PBA

End
Image processor PBA
ed.2
No
End
Trouble shooting 23
19 E243 Error in communication between control panel and image processor PBA
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

problem solved?
Yes
End
Is the connection of the connector J517 on the image

processor PBA and the connector J905 on the control
panel good?
No

properly.
The operating 3
panel
Replace the control panel. Is

Yes
End
No
Connector
(poor contact)
Image processor PBA
20 E261 zero cross error

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

problem solved?
Yes
Connector
(poor contact)
Is the connection of the con- No

nector J102 on the DC controller PBA and the connector
J209 on the composite power
supply PBA good?

properly.
DC control
PBA
Replace the DC control PBA.

Yes
End
No
Replace the composite

Power supply PBA
Composite
Power supply PBA
24
TSM Oc 3121/3122
End
21 E310 The intensity of the scanning lamp is incorrectly adjusted.

Cause
Checks
Yes/No Action
Step
Press the copy button. Does

the scanning lamp switch
ON?
No
Check the cables between the No

DC control PBA and the
lamp intensity sensor. Connection J112.
Correct it.
Intensity sen- 3
sor is dirty
Clean the face of the intensity Yes

sensor. Is the problem
solved?
End
Intensity sen- 4
sor
Replace the intensity sensor.

Yes
End
No

PBA
Connector
(poor contact)
DC control
PBA
See The scanning lamp

fails to turn ON.
22 E400/E712
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Turn off and on the

power switch. Is the
problem corrected?
Yes
End. (Check the wiring

between the copiers DC
controller PBA and the
RDF controller PBA.)
Wiring
Set the meter to the

No
200VDC range, and connect the + probe to J2-6
and the probe to J2-4
on the RDF controller. Is
the voltage about 24 V?
Check the wiring for the

supply of power from the
copier.
RDF controller PBA
Replace the RDF controller PBA. Is the problem corrected?
Yes
End.
No
Replace the copiers DC

controller.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 25
23 E401
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Pick-up roller
sensor (S5)
Set the meter to the 20VDC

No
range, and connect the + probe to
J5-2 and the probe to J5-3 on
the RDF controller PBA. Turn the
flag (light-blocking plate) of the
pick-up roller shaft by hand; is
the voltage about 5 V when the
flag is at the sensor and about
0.15 V otherwise?

the pick-up roller sensor
(S5) to the RDF controller PBA; if normal,
replace the pick-up roller
sensor (S5).
Pick-up motor
(M1)

Yes
J12-1 and probe to J12-2 on the
RDF controller PBA. Does the
meter reading change to about 22
V when the Copy Start key is
No
pressed?

the pick-up motor (M1)
to the RDF controller; if
normal, replace the
pick-up motor (M1).
Replace the RDF controller PBA.
24 E402
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Belt motor clock 1

sensor (S10)

No
the RDF controller PBA. Does
the reading alternate between 5 V
and 0 V when the clock disk is
turned slowly by hand?

the belt motor clock sensor (S10) to the RDF
controller PBA; if normal, replace the belt
motor clock sensor (S10).
Belt motor (M3) 2

Yes
the RDF controller PBA. Does
the reading of the meter change
to 23 V when the Copy Start key
No
is pressed?

the belt motor (M3) to
the RDF controller PBA;
if normal, replace the belt
motor (M3).
26
TSM Oc 3121/3122
25 E403
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Feeding motor
clock sensor
(S9)

No
range, and connect the + probe
to J9-15 and the probe to J9-16
on the RDF controller PBA.
Does the reading alternate
between 5 V and 0 V when the
clock disk is turned slowly by
hand?

the feeding motor clock
sensor (S9) to the RDF
controller PBA; if normal, replace the motor
clock sensor (S9).
Feeding motor
(M2)

Yes
range, and connect the + probe
to J11-1 and the probe to J11-2
on the RDF controller PBA.
Does the reading of the meter
change to 23 V when the Copy
No
Start key is pressed?

the feeding motor (M2)
to the RDF controller
PBA; if normal, replace
the feeding motor (M2).
26 E411
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Original tray
1
paper sensor (S1),
Registration sensor (S3)
Connect the probes of the meter Yes

to the connectors on the RDF
No
controller PC shown below. Is
the reading of the meter 2.3 V or
lower when nothing blocks the
sensor?
Original tray sensor S1:
(+) J5-7, (-) J5-8
Registration sensor S3:
(+) J9-20, (-) J9-21
S1, S3
Is the light-receiving face of

each sensor soiled with paper
lint?
LED1, LED2 (for 3

sensor)
ed.2
Go to step 2.
Yes
Clean the light-receiving

face of the sensor with a
cotton swab, and go to
step 3.
Connect the probes of the meter No

to the connectors of the RDF
controller PBA shown below. Is
the reading of the meter about
0.6 to 1.1 V?
LED1: (+) J9-1, (-) J9-2
LED2: (+) J9-3, (-) J9-4

the LED to the RDF controller PBA; if normal,
replace the LED.
Trouble shooting 27
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Output level (sen- 4

sor)
After steps 2 and 3, check the

output according to the table in
step 1. Is the reading of the
meter 1.2 V or lower?
No
Mount the sensor correctly.
Sensor
Perform step 4. Is the problem

corrected?
Yes
End.
No
Replace the sensor.

(After replacement, be
sure to adjust each sensor.)
27 E500/E713
Cause
Step Checks
Communication
cable: to the copier
Check the connection of No

the communication cable,
between the copy data
controller and the copier.
Connect the cable correctly.
Multi tray communication mode
Is the mode set correctly? No

Use the DIP switch, on
the tray control PBA, to
set the mode.
Reset the mode set.
Circuit breaker CB1 2
Press the circuit breaker Yes

CB1, on the tray control
PBA. Is the problem corrected?
End.
Resistor R12, on
the tray control
PBA
Check the continuity over No

the resistor R12, on the
tray control PBA.
Approximately 2.2 Ohm?
Replace the tray control

PBA.
24V power supply
Set the meter to the DC

range. Connect the + to
J1-2 and the to J1-1 on
the tray control PBA.
Does the voltage change
to approximately 24 V?
Check the copiers 24V

power supply.
28
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/No
No
Action
Cause
Step Checks
Tray control PBA
DC controller PBA
(copiers)
Yes/No
Replace the tray control Yes

PBA. Is the problem corNo
rected?
Action
End.
Replace the copiers DC
controller PBA.
28 E510
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Switch on joint sensor.
Yes
Go to step 3.
Set the DIP switch SW3, on the

tray control PBA, as follows:
No
Check the cables

to motor M2. If
undamaged,
replace the motor
M2.
Bin drive motor 2

M2
Does the motor M2 rotate when the

manual staple button is pressed? To
stop, press the button again.
Tray control
PBA
Bin unit clock

sensor P12.
ed.2
Disconnect J5 from the tray control No

PBA. Check the resistance between
J5-1 and J5-2: cable side. Correct is
approximately 100 Ohm.
Replace the tray

control PBA.
Set the meter to the 500V DC

Yes
range. Connect to the tray controller PBA: + to J5-1 and - to J5-2.
Does the meter reading change to
approximately 24 V, when the manual staple button is pressed?
Replace the bin

unit clock sensor
P12.
Trouble shooting 29
29 E515
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N
Switch on the joint sensor. Set the Yes

DIP switch SW3, on the tray control PBA, as follows:
Action
Go to step 3.
Does the motor M2 rotate when

the manual staple button is
pressed? To stop, press the button
again.
Tray drive
motor M6
Disconnect J10 from the tray con- No

trol PBA. Check the resistance
between J10-1 and J10-2: cable
side. Correct is approximately 100
Ohm.
Check the wiring to the

tray drive motor. If
motor.
Tray control
PBA
Set the meter to the 50V DC

range. Connect the + to J10-1 and
the to J10-2 on the tray control
PBA. Does the voltage change to
approximately 24 V?
No

PBA.
Yes
Replace the clock sensor

PI6.
Motor clock
sensor PI6.
30
TSM Oc 3121/3122
30 E521
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Switch on the joint sensor. Set the

No
DIP switch SW3, on the tray control
PBA, as follows:
Replace the tray motor

M7.
Does the tray motor M7 rotate in

response to each press on the manual staple button?
Connector
J12: poor
contact
Sensor for the 3

tray position
PI12
Tray control
PBA
Check the connection of J12 to the

tray control PBA.
No
Set the meter to the DC range. Con- Yes

nect the + to J12-7 and the to
J12-8 on the tray control PBA. Is
the voltage approximately 0 V
when the tray is at the front, and 5
No
V when the tray is at the rear?
Improve the connection.

tray position sensor PI12.
If undamaged, replace
the sensor.
PBA.
31 E530
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N
Action
Obstruction
Is something obstructing the guide

bar?
Yes
Remove the obstruction.
Connector
2
(poor contact)
Check the connection of J4 to the

tray control PBA.
No
Guide bar:
3
home position
sensor PI5
Set the meter to the DC range. Con- Yes

nect the + to J4-5 and the to J4-7
on the tray control PBA. Is the voltage approximately 5 V?

home position sensor
PI5. If undamaged,
replace the sensor.
Motor M4 for 4
the swing
guide
Replace the motor M4. Is the problem solved?
Yes
End.
No
Replace the tray control PBA.
Tray control
PBA
ed.2
Trouble shooting 31
32 E531
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Connector (poor
contact)
Check the connection of J7 to

the tray control PBA.
Yes
Motor M5 for the 2

staple swing
Connect the + to J7-1 and the Yes

to J7-2 on the tray control
PBA. Does the voltage change
to approximately 24 V, when
the stapler swings?
Replace motor M5.
Stapler motor M3 3
Disconnect J7 from the tray

controller PBA. Is the resistance between J7-10 and J7-11
on the harness side about 20
ohm?
No
Replace motor M3.
Connect the + to J7-11 and the Yes

PBA. Does the voltage change
to approximately 24 V?
Replace motor M3.
Stapler: detection 5
of position PI4
Set the meter to the DC range. Yes

Connect the + to J7-3 and the
PBA. Is the voltage approximately 5 V?

stapler position sensor
PI4. If undamaged,
replace the sensor.
Stapler home sen- 6

sor MS7
Set the meter to the DC range. Yes

Connect the + to J7-8 and the
PBA. Is the voltage approximately 5 V?

MS7. If undamaged,
replace the sensor.
32
TSM Oc 3121/3122
33 E540
Cause
Step Checks
Y/N Action
Does the bin unit move up or

down when SW2 or SW3 is
pressed? (On the tray control
PBA).
Yes
Drive belt for the

lead cam
Is the drive belt correctly fitted? No
Fit the belt correctly.
The bin shift

motor M1
Disconnect J5 of the tray controller PBA. Is the resistance

between J5-3 and J5-4 on the
harness side about 30 ohm?
No

bin motor M1. If undamaged, replace the motor
M1.
Bin: home sensor

MS1
Disconnect J8 of the tray con- No

troller PBA. Is the resistance
between J16-3 and J16-4 ohm
when MS1 is pressed and 0
ohm when released?
Replace the home sensor

MS1
Lead cam: home

position sensor
PI1
Connect to the tray controller

Yes
PBA: + to J8-6 and - to J8-5.
Does the meter reading alternate between 5 V and 0 V, when
No
the lead cam is moving?
Replace the home position sensor PI1
Tray control PBA
Go to step 4.

PBA.
34 E541
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
Switch OFF, then ON. Is the tray

now in the forward position?
Yes
Go to step 4.
DC control
PBA
Connect a meter to J104-7 + and to No

J104-3 - on the DC control PBA.
The correct reading is 5V, when the
vane is blocking the sensor, and 0
V when the vane is out of the sensor.
Disconnect and reconnect the connector. If the

reading is normal, replace
the DC control PBA.
Shift motor

There should be continuity. (70 to
80 ohms).
Check the wiring; if it is

normal, replace the shift
motor.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 33
Cause
Step
Checks
Y/N
Action
DC control
PBA

The correct reading is 5V, when the
machine is switched ON.
Check the wiring and the

mains supply. If it is normal, replace the DC control PBA.
Sensor for
5
the tray position PS16

The correct reading is 24V: immediately after switching the machine
ON.
Replace the sensor for the

tray position
35 SCSI interface E601 (The communication between the SCSI

board and the machine has a fault.)
Cause
PBA
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Turn off and then on the main

power.
YES
End.
Is the SCSI board firmly connected to the system motherboard?
NO
Correct the connection.
SCSI board
Replace the SCSI board. Is the YES

problem corrected?
System motherboard
End
Replace the system
motherboard image processor PBA.
36 SCSI interface E603 (The SCSI fuse has an open circuit.)

Cause
Fuse
Is there continuity in the
fuse on the
SCSI board?
34
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

power. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Is there electrical continuity in NO

the fuse on the SCSI board?
YES
TSM Oc 3121/3122
End.
Replace the fuse.

Replace the SCSI board.
37 Fax Unit E674 (The fax unit has a fault.)

Cause
Step
Checks
Connector
Is the connection of the follow- YES

ing normal?
between fax PBA and system
motherboard
NO
between system motherboard
and image processor PBA
(between fax unit and machine)
Fax PBA
Yes/No Action

At this time, check the
pins for deformation.
Replace the fax PBA.
38 X2e Controller E675

Cause
Step
Power supply from B2 kit

See Modification bulletin
survey on page 6
Checks
Yes/No Action
Replace the power supply
39 Communication Errors E677 (The communication between the

printer board and the machine has a fault.)
Cause
Step
Checks
PBA
Check the connection between YES

the printer board and the PDL
I/F board and the system motherboard. Is any of the pins bent
or otherwise not normal?
Printer board
Replace the printer board. Is

YES
End.
NO
Replace the PDL I/F

board, system motherboard, and image processor PBA
PDL I/F
board, System motherboard, Image
processor
PBA
ed.2
Yes/No Action
Trouble shooting 35
40 Communication Errors E710 (The IPC communication chip on

the image processor PBA has a fault.)
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

power supply. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
NO
Check that the image

processor PBA is free of
dust or foreign matter;
then, replace the image
processor PBA
Image processor PBA
41 E711, E712, E713, E716 (IPC communication error)

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action

problem solved?
Yes
End
No

PBA
DC control
PBA
42 E717 Error in the communication with the copy data controller.

Cause
Copy Data
Controller
DC control
PBA
36
Step
Checks
Yes
Clear E717 by executing
ERROR in service mode
(*4*); thereafter, turn
OFF/ON the main power supply. Is the problem corrected?
End
Replace the Copy Data Controller. Is the problem corrected?
Yes
End
No

PBA
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/No Action
43 E803 24 V output error from the composite Power supply PBA.

Cause
Scanning
lamp
DC control
PBA
Step
Checks
Yes
Turn OFF/ON the main
power switch. Is the problem
corrected?

remain OFF?. Or does the
scanning lamp remain dim,
when the copy button is
pressed?
Yes/No Action
Yes

No
Composite
Power supply PBA
End
If the lamp does not

turn ON, see The scanning lamp fails to turn
ON.
If the lamp switches
ON, check the ends of
the lamp. If the ends are
black, replace the lamp.
End

Power supply PBA
44 There is no AC power.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Error code
Is an error code displayed,

when the main ON/OFF
switch is switched ON?
Yes
See the description for

the relevant error code.
2
Mains supply is disconnected.
Is the copier connected to the No

mains supply?
Connect the mains supply cable.
Mains power 3
supply
Is the rated supply available? No
The problem is not of

the copier. Advise the
user.
Is the wiring from the power No

supply cord mount to the
composite power supply PBA Yes
normal?
Correct it.
Wiring
Noise filter
ed.2
Check the fuse of the

noise filter. If blown,
replace the fuse.
Trouble shooting 37
Cause
Step
Checks
ON/OFF
switch
No
Disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet, and
connect the tester probes to
Yes
both terminals (fastons) of
the main power switch. Is the
resistance 0 ohm when the
switch is turned ON and
ohm when the switch is
turned OFF?
Noise filter,
AC supply
38
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/No Action
Replace the main

ON/OFF switch.
Check the wiring of the
AC line and the connector for contact; if normal,
replace the noise filter.
45 There is no DC power.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Error code
Turn ON the main power sup- Yes

ply switch. Is the error code
indicated?
AC power
supply
(faulty)
Is there an AC supply?
No
See the description for

the relevant error code.
See AC power is
absent.
3
Wiring and
the DC loads
No
switch, and disconnect all
following connectors Composite Power Supply PBA
J204, J211, J213, J214, J215
ACC Power Supply J134,
J142. Is the output voltage of
each terminal (Table) normal?
Turn OFF the power

switch, connect one of
the disconnected connectors, and turn ON
the power switch.
Repeat this for all connectors to find the connector that activates the
protection circuit. Then,
check the wiring from
that connector and DC
loads.
Fuse and wir- 4

ing
Has a fuse blown?
Yes
Replace the fuse. Check

the related DC loads,
and the wiring.
No
Replace the power supply PBA. or the ACC

power supply PBA.
The composite Power

supply PBA
and the ACC
power supply PBA
ed.2
Trouble shooting 39
Composite Power supply PBA

Connector
Pin
Output
Connector
Pin
Output
J204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+24VU
0Vu
+24VU
0Vu
+24VU
0Vu
+24VU
0Vu
+24VU
0Vu
J213
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V
+15V
+15V
12V
12V
12V
J214
1
2
3
+15V
0V
12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+5V
0V
+5V
0V
+5V
0V
+5V
0V
+5V
0V
J215
1
2
+7V
0V
J211
ACC Power supply PBA

Connector
Pin
Output
J142
1
2
3
4
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
J143
1
2
3
4
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
46 The OPC does not rotate

Cause
40
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Is E010 indicated?
Yes
TSM Oc 3121/3122
See the descriptions for

E010.
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Position of
the OPC
Reposition the OPC unit. Is

Yes
End
No
Remove the drum drive

assembly, and correct or
replace the parts as necessary.
OPC drive
ed.2
Trouble shooting 41
47 No pick-up from the cassette

Cause
Position of
the cassette)
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Does the Add Paper message fails to turn OFF?
Yes
Slide out and then in the cas- Yes

sette. Is the problem corrected?
Pick-up roller 3
Has the pick-up roller

exceeded its scheduled lifetime?
Pick-up
motor
Replace the pick-up motor. Is Yes

the problem solved?
Yes
No
Fuse: F1601
on the
pick-up PBA
See if The Add Paper

message fails to turn
OFF.
End
Replace the pick-up

roller.
End
Check the fuse F1601

on the pick-up PBA. If
it is intact, go to the
next step.
DC control
PBA
Yes
Is the leading edge of the
paper against the registration
roller?
See if the registration

roller fails to rotate.
DC control
PBA

End
No
Pick-up
assembly
Replace the pick-up

unit.
48 The lifter does not rise.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Cassette
Slide out the cassette. Does

the holding plate move
smoothly, when lifted by
hand?
No
Check the inside of the

cassette for foreign matter.
Is the lifter position sensor

normal?
No
Replace the lifter position sensor.
Sensor for the 2

lifter
42
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Lifter drive
Is the lifter drive assembly

normal?
No
Correct it.
Yes
Replace the pick-up

unit.
Pick-up
assembly
49 Pick-up failure: specialities

Cause
Step
Yes/No Action
1
Pick-up
clutch CL2
for the speciality tray
Select speciality pick-up, and No

press the copy button. Does
the pick-up roller rotate?
Check the wiring. If it is

normal, replace the
clutch CL2.
Select speciality pick-up, and Yes

press the copy button. Does
the guide plate jump up?
Check the position of

the cam and the separation pad. Adjust as necessary, or replace it.
Multifeeder 3
holding plate
releasing
solenoid
(SL3)
Connect the + to J14-B12 and Yes

the to J14-B13 on the DC
control PBA. Does the meter
reading change from 0V to
approximately 24 V when the
copy button is pressed?
No
Check the wiring. If it is

normal, replace the
solenoid SL3.
Cam for the

paper guide
Checks
DC control
PBA

PBA
50 The registration roller fails to rotate.

Cause
Step
Checks
Registration
roller
Press the copy button. Does Yes

the registration roller start
rotating immediately after the
scanner starts to move?
DC control
PBA
Connect the + to J114-B10

and the to J114-B1 on the
DC control PBA. Does the
meter reading change from
0V to approximately 24 V
when the scanner starts to
move?
Clutch CL1
for the registration roller
ed.2
Yes/No Action

registration roller.
No

PBA
Yes

the DC control PBA. If
clutch CL1.
Trouble shooting 43
51 The scanner fails to move forward or in reverse.

Cause
Step
Scanner cable 1
Checks
Yes/No Action
Is the scanner drive cable

positioned correctly?
No
Reposition the cable.
No
Check the surface of the

scanner rail for foreign
matter or an object that
comes into contact with
the scanner.
The scanner
path is dirty.
Inspect the scanner rail for

dirt or obstructions. Check
that the scanner moves
smoothly.
Connector
(poor contact)
Check the wiring/connection No

from the connector J116 on
the DC controller PBA to the
scanner motor. Is it normal?
Correct it.
Scanner
motor M2
Replace the scanner motor. Is Yes

the problem solved?
End.
DC control
PBA
No

PBA
52 The pre-exposure lamp fails to switch ON.

Cause
Step
Checks
Pre-exposure
lamp
Yes
Connect the + to J107-A11
and the to J107-A12 on the
DC control PBA. Does the
meter reading change from
0V to approximately 24 V
when the copy button is
No
pressed?
DC control
PBA
44
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Yes/No Action

to the pre-exposure
lamp; if normal, replace
the pre-exposure lamp.
PBA
53 The scanning lamp fails to switch ON.

Cause
Step
Checks
Scanning
lamp
Are both ends of the scanning Yes

lamp black?
Position of
the scanning
lamp
Is the scanning lamp positioned correctly?
Connector
(poor contact)
Is the connection of the relay No

connectors J20 and J95 normal? Further, is the connection of the connector J802 on
the composite power supply
PBA normal?
Reconnect.
DC control
PBA

End
Composite
Power supply PBA
Yes/No Action
No
No
Replace the scanning

lamp.
Refit it.

Power supply PBA
54 The fixing heater fails to switch ON.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Is E000 indicated?
Yes
See the descriptions for

E000.
Replace the fixing heater

driver. Is the problem corrected?
Yes
End
Replace the fuser unit. Is the

problem corrected?
Yes
End
No

PBA
Fixing heater 2
driver
3
Fixing unit
DC control
PBA
ed.2
Trouble shooting 45
55 The counter fails to operate.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Counter
No
switch, and disconnect the
following connectors: is the
resistance on the counter side
about 480 ohm? Total copy
counter (CNT1):J57 Print
counter (CNT2):J93 Fax
counter (CNT3):J94
Replace the counter.
DC control
PBA
Does the voltage of the follow- Yes

ing connectors on the DC controller PBA change from 0 V to No
24 V and then to 0 V after copy
paper is discharged?
Total copy counter CNT1:
J107-B3 (+)
J107-B4 ()
Printer counter CNT2:
J107-B5 (+)
J107-B6 ()
Fax counter CNT3:
J107-B7 (+)
J107-B8 ()
Replace the counter.

PBA
56 The Add Paper display remains ON.

Cause
Paper sensor
DC control
PBA
46
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Does the ramp rise?
No
Put paper in the cassette, and Yes

check P-SENS in service
mode (*1*; 7th page). Is the
value 0? (upon detection,
No
1)
TSM Oc 3121/3122
See The lifter fails to

move up.
Check the sensor lever;
if normal, replace the
sensor in question.
PBA
57 The Jam display remains ON.

Cause
Step
Checks
Jam
Is there paper around the sen- Yes

sor which has turned on?
(Check by referring to the
jam code in service mode
(*1*; JAM).)
Sensor
Inspect the sensor, identified

by the jam code (* 1 *).
DC control
PBA
Yes/No Action
Remove all paper.
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes

PBA
58 The Add Toner display remains ON.

Cause
Step
Checks
Yes/No Action
Stirring
spring

assembly. Is the spring used
to stir the toner around the
toner sensor (TS1) installed
correctly?
Yes
Refit it.
Toner sensor
Replace the toner sensor. Is

the problem solved?
Yes
End.
No

PBA
DC control
PBA
ed.2
Trouble shooting 47
59 The fax error display remains ON.

Cause
Step
Lack of paper 1
Checks
Yes/No Action
Do all the installed cassettes

contain paper?
No
Add paper.
The fax error indication
(lamp) flashes if all cassettes contain paper.
Advise the operator.
Fax
Is the fax reception normal?
No
Check the connection to

the telephone system.
Image processor PBA
Replace the image processor

PBA. Is the problem solved?
Yes
End
No
Replace the fax PBA.
FAX PBA
48
TSM Oc 3121/3122
RDF Self Diagnosis

RDF Self Diagnosis
The microprocessor, on the RDF control PBA, is equipped to check the condition of the machine. When it detects an error, the copier will display an error
code on the screen.
Cause
Code
Description
Fault with data communication with copier

(faulty)
The communication is monitored at

all times, and this error is detected if
the communication is interrupted for
5 seconds or more.
Pick-up motor M1; fails

to rotate
Pick-up sensor S5;
faulty.
A vane is attached to the shaft of the

pick-up motor (M1). The rotation of
the motor is monitored as the vane
blocks the pick-up sensor (S5).
This error is detected when S5 does
not turn on and off twice or more
within 1 sec.
Belt motor M3: fails to

rotate.
Clock sensor S10, for
the belt motor: faulty.
The number of clock pulses within

200 msec is below a specific
number.
Feeding motor M2:

fails to rotate.
Clock sensor S9 for the
feeding motor: faulty.
The number of clock pulses within

200 ms is below a specific number.
Paper sensor S1 for the

document tray: faulty.
Registration sensor S3:
faulty.
When there is no paper present, the

output of the sensor is 2.3 V or more.
Note:
1. When the self-diagnosis mechanism is activated, switch off the copier once
to reset.
2. You may continue to make copies while the RDF is out of order; simply open
the RDF, and place documents on the platen.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 49

User error codes
#001 (trans) The document has jammed.
Main cause
50
The document has jammed while being fed.

The size or the thickness of the document is
outside the specifications.
The internal mechanism has a fault.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Remove the document, and restart.

Make a standard size copy of the document,
and restart.
Check the electrical connections (e.g., PBA
of the feeder; sensors, motors).
#003 (trans/recep) Time-out occurred while transmitting or receiving a single-page

document.
Main cause
The document is too long: requiring longer

than specified for transmission or scanning.
Reception is taking longer than specified.
Action
Split the document into several pages, and

restart.
Increase the setting of the page timer, using

bit 0/1 of #1 SSSW/SW12.
Ask the other party to split the document
into several pages for transmission.
Increase the setting of the page timer, using
bit 0/1 of #1 SSSW/SW12.
of the feeder; sensors, motors).
#005 (trans/recep) Time-out occurred during initial identification (T1).

Main cause
Action
Incorrect tone and pulse setting.
The delay for a line connection is too long.
The other machine does not respond.
The communication mode (e.g., G2, G3) of

the other machine is incorrect (mismatch).
The other machine malfunctions: because of
an echo during transmission.
The machine malfunctions: because of an
echo during reception.
Correct the tone and pulse settings, using

[TEL LINE TYPE] with user data.
Allow a relatively long pause when registering for auto dialling. This delays the timer
start function.
Increase the T1 timer setting, using # 3
NUMBER-IC Param. 10 (service data).
Preventing time-out.
Contact the other party, and enquire about
the cause.
No corrective action is available. (Some machines do not offer certain communication
modes.)
Prevent echoes, using #1SSSW SW03: with
service data.
#009 (recep) The recording paper has jammed or run out.

Main cause
The recording paper has jammed.

The recording paper has run out.
Action
ed.2
Remove the jam.

Check the jam sensor.
of the pick-up section; sensors).
Trouble shooting 51
#011 (recep) A polling reception error has occurred.

Main cause
Action
No document is available.
The document was positioned incorrectly at

the time of transmission, triggering polling
reception.
Ask the other party to reposition the document.

Reposition the document.
#012 (recep) The other machine has run out of paper.

Main cause
The other machine has run out of paper.
Action
Ask the other party to refill with paper.
#018 (trans/recep) An auto calling error has occurred.

Main cause
Incorrect tone and pulse setting.

The delay for a line connection is too long.
The other machine is occupied, causing a
time-out.
The other machine is disconnected, or
switched off, causing a time-out.
The other machine has run out of paper,
causing a time-out.
Action
Correct the tone and pulse setting.

Allow a relatively long pause when registering for auto dialling. This delays the timer
start function.
Increase the T1 timer setting, using # 3
NUMBER-IC Param. 10 (service data).
Preventing time-out.
Try calling once again.
Contact the other party.
Ask the other party to refill with paper.
#021 (recep) DCN has been received during polling reception.

Main cause
The polling password is incorrect.
Action
Contact the other party to obtain the correct

password.
#022 (trans) Calling fails.

Main cause
52
Broadcasting transmission or multi-polling

reception was used, without registering the
telephone number of the other machine for
auto dialling.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Register the telephone number of the other

machine for auto dialling.
#037 (recep) The memory overflowed during reception.

Main cause
Action
The volume of reception (document) exceeded the limit, during reception.
Ask the other party to delete unnecessary

image data, prior to transmission.
#039 (trans) Failure of closed net transmission.

Main cause
The closed-net transmission switch is off.
The closed-net transmission switch of the

other party is off.
The closed net ID of the machine does not
match that of the other machine.
Action
Set the closed-net transmission switch to 1.

(bit 7 of SW07 under #1SSSW, service data).
Ask the other party to turn on the closed-net
reception switch.
Match the closed net IDs of both machines
(SW08 of #1SSSW).
#995 (trans/recep) Memory transmission reservation has been cancelled.

Main cause
Action
The user has cancelled the memory transmission reservation.
Ask the other party to start transmission.
SERVICE ERROR CODE
Service error code: output and display

Set bit 0 of SW1 under #SSSW (service data) to 1. This is to include service
error codes, when generating communications control reports, reception results reports, error transmission reports, or system dump lists. (The appropriate error code will be displayed, in response to an error.)
Check the following, for specifics:

To increase the level of transmission,
Set service data #2MENU Parameter No. 07 to 0. (dBm).
To decrease the level of transmission,
Set service data #2MENU Parameter No. 07 to -15. (dBm).
Echo
Change the following bit switches of #1SSSW SW03 (service data):
bit 4: 1 To ignore the first DIS signal sent by the other fax machine.
0 To ignore the first DIS signal sent by the other fax machine.
bit 5: 1 To transmit a tone signal (1850 or 1650 Hz), when the other fax machine sends a DIS signal.
0 Not to transmit a tone signal, when the other fax machine sends a DIS signal.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 53
bit 6: 1 To transmit a 1850-Hz tone signal, when bit 5 is set to 1.

0 To transmit a 1650-Hz tone signal, when bit 5 is set to 1.
bit 7: 1 To transmit a tone signal, before sending a CED signal.
0 Not to transmit a tone signal, before sending a CED signal.
54
TSM Oc 3121/3122
EPT
Change service data #1SSSW SW03 bit 1.
bit 1: 1 To transmit an echo protect tone.
0 To transmit an echo protect tone.
To adjust NL equaliser,
Set service data #2MENU Parameter No. 05 to ON.
To reduce the start speed of transmission.
Reduce the transmission speed, by changing user data [SYSTEM SETTINGS] [TX START SPEED].
To loosen the TCF standard,
Function is not available for this machine.
To loosen the RTN transmission conditions,
Change service data #3 NUMERIC . Parameter No. 02 to 04.
No. 02: percentage of errors in all lines. Set close to 99%.
No. 03: number of lines of burst condition. Set close to 99 lines.
No. 04: lines below the burst condition. Set close to 99.
To increase the non-sound time after CFR reception.
Change service data #1SSSW SW04 bit 4 to 1.
bit 4: 1 To time when the low-speed signal is ignored, after sending a CFR
signal: 1500 ms
0 To time when the low-speed signal is ignored, after sending a CFR signal:
700 ms
ed.2
Trouble shooting 55
##100 (trans) The number of times that the protocol signal has been transmitted
during transmission has exceeded the limit.
Main cause
Action
(if after transmission of the Q signal, following an image signal)

The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the image signals or the Q
signal.
(if after transmission of TCF, prior to an

image signal)
The level of transmission is too low. The
other machine cannot correctly receive
NSS, TSI, DCS, TCF, or training signals.
an echo.
56
TSM Oc 3121/3122
So that the other party can correctly receive

the Q signal.
1. Increase the level of transmission of the
modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU
(service data).
2. Adjust the NL equaliser, using parameter
05 of #2 MENU (service data).
Decrease the start speed.
Attach EPT to the V29 modem signal, using
bit 1 on SW03 of #1 SSSW (service data).
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU
(service data).
Prevent echoes, using SW03 of #1 SSSW.

Pause for a relatively long time after the telephone number, when requesting auto dial,
so that the machine will not respond to the
first DIS.
##101 (trans/recep) The modem speed of the machine doe not match that of the
other party.
Main cause
(during transmission)
The modem speed of the machine doe not
match that of the other party.
The fall-back speed of the machine doe not

Action
No corrective action is available. (Some

machines do not offer certain communication
speeds.)
(during reception)
The modem speed of the machine doe not
So that the other party can correctly receive

the TCF signal.
1. Increase the level of transmission of the
modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU.
2. Adjust the NL equaliser, using parameter
05 of #2 MENU.
first DIS.
Ask the other party to decrease the level of
transmission, so that it will not receive echoes.
No corrective action is available. (Some

machines do not offer certain communication
speeds.)
##102 (trans) Fall-back fails during transmission.

Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct transmission of TCF.
Action
The other machine has malfunctioned

because of an echo.
ed.2
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU.

Adjust the NL equaliser, using parameter 05
of #2 MENU.
first DIS.
Trouble shooting 57
##103 (recep) EOL cannot be detected for 5 seconds, during reception.

Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of image signals.
Action

Ask the other party to decrease the start
speed of the transmission, using parameter
05 of #2 MENU.
Adjust the echo monitor time used, after
transmission of CFR, permitting correct reception of image signals.
##104 (trans) RTN or PIN has been received during transmission.

Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the image signals.
Action

an echo.
58
TSM Oc 3121/3122

bit 1 on SW03 of #1 SSSW.
of #2 MENU.
first DIS.
transmission.
##106 (reception) The protocol signal is not received for 6 seconds, during reception.
Main cause
Action
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the protocol signal.
an error.

Decrease the level of transmission of the

transmission, permitting correct receipt of
the protocol signal.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 59
##107 (recep) Fall-back failure, on the transmitting machine, during reception.

Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the signals, after starting
the 2400 bps reception mode.
Action

echo.
Ask the other party to increase the level of

the signal.
of #2 MENU.
Loosen the transmission conditions, using
02 through 04 of #3 NUMERIC Parameters,
so that RTN is not transmitted.
##109 (trans) During transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP
has been received, after transmitting DCS. This results in too frequent transmission of the protocol signal.
Main cause
There is an error in the protocol signal.
Action
Record the communication procedure

sound on DAT, for analysis by a technical
centre.
#111 (trans/recep) A memory error has occurred.

Main cause
60
Due to noise, an error occurred during the

printing of data stored in image memory.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Print all data, delete it, and store it once

again.
#114 (recep) RTN has been received during reception.

Main cause
Action

echo (CFR).

the image signals.
speed of the transmission.
of #2 MENU.
Loosen the RTN transmission conditions,
using 02 through 04 of #3 NUMERIC Parameters, so that RTN is not transmitted.
Preventing receipt of an echo of the transmitted CFR.
##200 (recep) EOL The carrier, within a reception image, cannot be detected for 5
seconds: during reception.
Main cause

A CFR echo has prevented the reception of
the training signal, causing a time-out.
Action
ed.2

the image signals.
Ask the other party to decrease the speed of
the transmission.
Decrease the level of transmission of parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Preventing receipt of
an echo of the transmitted CFR.
Trouble shooting 61
##201 (trans/recep) DCN has been received, in the absence of the normal binary
procedure.
Main cause
The other machine has run out of paper,

causing a time-out.
The telephone number of the other machine* has not been registered. *If RICOH
3000L.
The polling password does not match.
No document is ready for polling transmission.
The machine has no paper, when transmission reservation has been selected on the
other machine.
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the protocol signals, by the
other machine.
echo.
The number of times that the protocol signal
has been transmitted has exceeded the limit,
without detecting either image signals or the
Q signal on the other machine.
The line condition is poor. Preventing the
use of fall-back by the other machine.
Action
62
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Ask the other party to set the other machine

for reception.
Register the telephone number.
If the other machine is a Canon machine,
contact the other party for the correct password. Otherwise, contact the other party,
and ask to set the other machine so that it is
ready for polling transmission.
Position the document, and ask the other
party to make the call again.
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the protocol
signal.
Preventing receipt of an echo.
the signals.
Adjust the NL equaliser, using 05 of #2
MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the
signals.
Adjust the NL equaliser. Permitting correct
receipt of the signals.
Loosen the transmission conditions, using
02 through 04 of #3 NUMERIC Parameters.
##204 (trans) DTC was received in the absence of transmission data. Transmission
data is absent, even though DIS has been received. after transmitting image data in
abbreviated procedure 2 of direct transmission.
Main cause
Action
(if during DTC reception)

(if during DIS reception)
During transmission (in abbreviated procedure 2) the state of the other machine, as
stored in memory, does not match the actual
state of the other machine.

centre.
Try transmission once again.
centre.
ed.2
Trouble shooting 63
##220 (reception/transmission) A system error has occurred. (The main programme has run incorrectly.)
Main cause
The CPU has malfunctioned, because of

noise.
Action
Switch OFF, then ON.
##224 (trans/recep) An error has occurred in the protocol signal, in G3 communication mode.
Main cause
Action

centre.
##232 (trans) The unit for ENCODE control has malfunctioned.

Main cause
The UPI operation for ENCODE control did

not end normally.
Action
Replace the unit (e.g., system control PBA)

for ENCODE control.
##237 (recep) The UPI for DECOE control has malfunctioned

Main cause
The UPI operation for DECODE control did

not end normally.
Action

for DECODE control.
##238 (recep) The unit for PRINT control has malfunctioned

Main cause
The UPI operation for PRINT control did

not end normally.
Action

for PRINT control.
##261 (trans/recep) A system error has occurred in the modem, or the gate array.
Main cause
64
The internal unit has a fault. When RS is set

to 1, CS will not change to 1.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Replace the modem PBA.

Replace the system control PBA.
##280 (trans) The number of times that the protocol signal has been transmitted
Main cause
The level of transmission is too low. The

other machine cannot correctly receive the
appropriate signal, after transmission of
TCF.
an echo.
Action
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the appropriate
signal.
Press start, after hearing the first DIS from
the other machine: in manual calling mode.
first DIS.
##281 (recep) The number of times that the protocol signal has been transmitted
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Image signals or

EOP are not transmitted correctly, preventing reception of the appropriate signal after
transmission of EOP.
Action
ed.2
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the appropriate
signals.
image signals or EOP by the other machine.
Attach EPT to the V29 modem signal.
Adjust the continuous transmission time 1,
used before transmitting image signals. Permitting correct receipt of the image signals.
Increase the period of silence, after reception of CFR. Permitting correct receipt of
the image signals.
Trouble shooting 65
##285 (recep) DCN has been received, after transmitting EOP during transmission.
Main cause
Stop has been pressed during communication.
Action
##286 (trans) DCN has been received, after transmitting EOM during transmission.
Main cause
Action
##287 (trans) DCN has been received, after transmitting MPS during transmission.
Main cause
Action
##288 (trans) A signal, other than PIN, RIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN, has been received
during transmission.
Main cause
Action

centre.
after transmission of EOM.
Main cause
Action
Record the communication procedure on

DAT, for analysis by a technical centre.
after transmitting MPS during transmission.
Main cause
66
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Record the communication procedure on

DAT, for analysis by a technical centre.
##750 (trans) The appropriate signal could not be received, after transmitting
PPS-NULL during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
signal was transmitted exceeded the limit.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing transmission of PPS-NULL.

The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of signals.
Action
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS- signal.
PPS-NULL signal.
bit 1 on SW03 of #1 SSSW.
the signals.
##752 (recep) DCN has been received, after transmitting PPS-NULL during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the PPS-NULL signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-NULL
signal.
##753 (trans) T5 time out (60 seconds) has occurred. Or, the number of times the
protocol signal has been sent has exceeded the limit in ECM transmission after
transmitting PPS-NULL.
Main cause
The page buffer of the other machine is full

or busy. The RNR cannot be received correctly, after transmitting PPS-NULL, and
the appropriate signal cannot be received
correctly after transmitting RR.
ed.2
Action
Increase the T5 timer setting, to avoid an error.

Change the ECM frame size: from 256 bytes
to 64K bytes.
Trouble shooting 67
##754 (trans) The number of times that the protocol signal has been received has
exceeded the limit, after transmitting PPS-NULL in ECM.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. PPS-NULL has

been transmitted, PPR has been received
four times, CTC has been transmitted. But,
the other machine cannot receive it correctly.
The line condition is poor. PPS-NULL has
the other machine cannot receive the appropriate signal correctly.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the CTC signal.
the signals.
##755 (recep) The number of times the protocol signal has been transmitted has
exceeded the limit. Without receiving the appropriate signal, after transmitting
PPS-MPS in ECM transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing transmission of PPS-MPS.

Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-MPS signal.
receipt of the PPS-MPS signal.
the signals.
##757 (recep) DCN has been received, after transmitting PPS-MJPS during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the PPS-MPS signal.
Action
68
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Increase the level of transmission of the modem, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-MPS
signal.
transmitting PPS-MPS.
Main cause

or busy. The RNR cannot be received correctly, after transmitting PPS-MPS, and the
appropriate signal cannot be received correctly after transmitting RR.
Action

to 64K bytes.
##759 (recep) The number of times the protocol signal has been transmitted has
exceeded the limit. Without receiving the appropriate signal, after transmitting
PPS-MPS in ECM transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. PPS-MPS has

The line condition is poor. PPS-MPS has
the other machine cannot receive the appropriate signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission, using parameter 07 of #2 MENU. Permitting correct

receipt of the CTC signal.
the signals.
PPS-EOM during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing transmission of PPS-MPS.

Action
ed.2
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-MPS signal.
receipt of the PPS-MPS signal.
the signals.
Trouble shooting 69
##762 (trans) DCN has been received, after transmitting PPS-EOM during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the PPS-EOM signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-EOM signal.
transmitting PPS-EOM.
Main cause

or busy. The RNR cannot be received correctly, after transmitting PPS-EOM, and the
appropriate signal cannot be received correctly after transmitting RR.
Action

to 64K bytes.
##764 (trans) The number of times the protocol signal has been transmitted has
exceeded the limit. After transmitting PPS-EOM in ECM transmission.
Main cause
70
The line condition is poor. PPS-EOM has

The line condition is poor. PPS-EOM has
the other machine cannot receive the appropriate signal.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
the signals.
##765 (recep) The appropriate signal could not be received, after transmitting
PPS-EOP during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol signal was transmitted exceeded the limit.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the PPS-EOP signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-EOP signal.
receipt of the PPS-EOP signal.
the signals.
##767 (trans) DCN has been received, after transmitting PPS-EOP during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the PPS-EOP signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the PPS-EOM signal.
transmitting PPS-EOP.
Main cause

or busy. The appropriate signal cannot be received correctly, after transmitting RR in response to RNR. RNR was received after
transmitting PPS-EOP.
ed.2
Action

to 64K bytes.
Trouble shooting 71
##769 (trans) The number of times the protocol signal has been transmitted has
exceeded the limit. After transmitting PPS-EOP in ECM transmission.
Main cause
72
The line condition is poor. PPS-EOP has

The line condition is poor. PPR has been
transmitted, PPR has been received four
times, CTC has been transmitted. But, the
machine cannot receive the appropriate signal.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
transmission. Permitting correct receipt of
the signals.
EOR-NULL during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-NULL signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-NULL signal.
the signals.
##772 (trans) DCN has been received. After transmitting EOR-NULL during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-NULL signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-NULL signal.
transmitting EOR-NULL.
Main cause

or busy. The appropriate signal cannot be received correctly, after transmitting RR in response to RNR. RNR was received after
transmitting EOR-NULL.
ed.2
Action

to 64K bytes.
Trouble shooting 73
##774 (trans) ERR has been received. After transmitting EOR-NULL during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Frequently preventing correct reception of the image signals.
an echo.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the signals.

receipt of the image signals.
Reduce occurrence of echo.
first DIS.
EOR-MPS during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-MPS signal.
Action

the EOR-MPS signal.
the signals.
##777 (trans) DCN has been received. After transmitting EOR-MPS during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
74
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-MPS signal.
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-MPS signal.
transmitting EOR-MPS.
Main cause

or busy. EOR-MPS has been transmitted.
The RNR has been received correctly, after
transmitting RR. But, the appropriate signal
cannot be received.
Action

to 64K bytes.
##779 (trans) ERR has been received. After transmitting EOR-MPS during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
an echo.
Action
first DIS.
EOR-EOM during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-EOM signal.
ed.2
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-EOM signal.
Ask the other party to increase the level.
Permitting correct receipt of the signals.
Trouble shooting 75
##782 (trans) DCN has been received. After transmitting EOR-EOM during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-EOM signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-OEM signal.
transmitting EOR-EOM.
Main cause

or busy. EOR-EOM has been transmitted.
cannot be received.
Action

to 64K bytes.
##784 (trans) ERR has been received. After transmitting EOR-EOM during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
an echo.
Action
76
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the image signals.
first DIS.
EOR-EOP during ECM transmission. And, the number of times that the protocol
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-EOP signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-EOP signal.
the signals.
##787 (trans) DCN has been received. After transmitting EOR-EOP during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of the EOR-EOP signal.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the EOR-EOP signal.
transmitting EOR-EOP.
Main cause

or busy. EOR-EOP has been transmitted.
cannot be received.
ed.2
Action

to 64K bytes.
Trouble shooting 77
##789 (trans) ERR has been received. After transmitting EOR-EOP during ECM
transmission.
Main cause
an echo.
Action
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the image signals.
first DIS.
##790 (recep) ERR has been received. After transmitting EOR-Q during ECM transmission.
Main cause
echo.
Action

the signals.
##793 (recep) Time-out has occurred, without detecting an effective frame, during
high-speed reception in ECM reception.
Main cause
The line condition is poor. Preventing correct reception of CFR.

The training signal cannot be received, because of a CFR echo.
Action
78
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Increase the level of transmission. Permitting correct receipt of the signals.

the signals.
##795 (trans/recep) An error has occurred in the decoding processing, during communication.
Main cause
The coding mechanisms for communication

are occupied.
Action

##799 (trans) A system error has occurred.

Main cause
An attempt was made to transmit EOR: as a

part of an abbreviated procedure.
Action

ed.2
Trouble shooting 79
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
GENERAL
Contents
General operation
System 1
Nomenclature 2
Image Formation 4
Auxiliary Process 10
High voltage system 10
1
2
3
4
5
ed.1
General operation
General operation
1 System
Principle of operation
The following optionals can be added to the machine configuration:

FAX PBA
Printer PBA
Sorter
RDF
SCSI PBA
FAX Motherboard PBA
CORE/IP PBA
Protocol control PBA
System motherboard PBA
1st copying
In this mode, specific jobs of the copier, fax, or printer are executed continuously.
Specifically, a copier image, a fax image, and a printer image can be placed alternately on copy paper , while it is being fed continuously. Thus executing
three types of jobs, without suspending operation.
To take advantage of this mode, the machine must be equipped with the 12-bin
sorter or the 3 tray output unit.
Print
paper
for copier
: Print paper
for copier
image image
Print
fax image
: Print paper
paper for for
fax image
Print
paper
for printer
: Print paper
for printer
image image
C
C
F
Conceptual
diagram
of Non-Stop
copying
Conceptual Diagram
of Non-Stop
Copying
ed.1
General operation 1
2 Nomenclature
External View
Model with RDF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output tray
RDF
Control panel: ON/OFF switch
Document tray (for RDF)
Speciality tray
ON/OFF switch
Cassette pedestal (optional)
Front door
2
3
1
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Copy delivery
The operating panel
Platen
Lever for the developing unit
Developing unit
Lever for the feeding unit
OPC unit
Aperture for releasing the fuser unit
Economy-mode switch
SLEEP 1 (top):
Quick start mode
Anti-condensation function ON
SLEEP 2 (bottom):
Power saving mode
Anti-condensation function OFF
Switch for the cassette heater (optional)
Service-mode switch
Counter (total)
Counter (prints)
Contrast control for LCD display
TSM Oc 3121
1
5
6
9
7
8
10
11
12
SLEEP 1
SLEEP 2
15
14
13
General operation
Cross-section
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Mirror 3
Mirror 2
Mirror 1
Scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp)
Laser unit
OPC cleaning unit
Pre-exposure lamp
Lens
Charging roller
OPC unit
CCD
Laser mirror
Aperture glass
Developing unit
Specialities: pick-up roller
Speciality tray
Vertical transport: roller 1
Cassette pick-up (lower)
ed.1
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Cassette pick-up (upper)

Cassette 2: separation roller
Cassette 2: feeding roller
Cassette 2: pick-up roller
Cassette 1: separation roller
Cassette 1: feeding roller
Cassette 1: pick-up roller
Refeed unit: exit roller
Registration roller
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Retarding roller
cassette 1
Feeding unit
Fan
Cassette 2
Fusing unit
Delivery roller 1
Deflector
Delivery roller
General operation 3
3 Image Formation
Outline
The Oc 3121 employs an indirect photographic method of reproduction.

Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Lens
CCD
Image processing
assembly
Laser scanner assembly Primary charging
roller
Developing
assembly
Pre-exposure
lamp
Drum unit
assembly
Copy paper
Fixing assembly
Copy paper
Static eliminator
Transfer
charging roller
latent
imageimage
formation
block
Latent
formation
Primary
2.Primary charging
charging
block
laser
exposure
3.Laser
exposure
pre-exposure
1.Pre-exposure
development
4.Development
drum
cleaning
8.Drum
cleaning
transfer
5.Transfer
delivery
Delivery
fixing
7.Fixing
separation
6.Separation
flow of of
copy
paper
Flow
copy
paper
rotation of drum
Rotation
of drum
registration
Registration
speciality
input
Multifeeder
cassette
Cassette
The image formation process consists of the following steps:
TSM Oc 3121
General operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pre-exposure
Charging (AC + negative DC)
laser exposure
Development (AC + negative DC bias)
Transfer (positive DC)
Separation (negative DC)
Fusing
OPC cleaning
The OPC has a layer construction. The outer layer is a photo-conductive layer
of OPC. The inner layer is a conductive aluminium substrate.
photoconductive
layerlayer
Photoconductive
Formation of the latent image
The image creation is in three phases. Ultimately, negative charges remain on

the OPC in the areas where the document is white. The negative charge is dissipated in those areas which correspond with the black areas on the document.
These images on the OPC, created by the negative charges, are invisible to the
human eye. They are referred to as static, or latent images.
Time (t)
Surface
potential (V)
Light areas
(dark areas of originals)
-1000
ed.1
Primary charging (step 2)
-500
Pre-exposure (step 1)
substrate
Substrate
Dark areas
(areas not exposured by the laser)
Laser exposure (step 3)
General operation 5
Pre-Exposure
Prior to charging, light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed onto the surface
of the OPC. This removes any residual charges, later preventing uneven copy
density.
Primary Charging
primary
chargingroller
roller
Primary charging
The charging roller is a conductive rubber. The use of direct charging requires
a lower application voltage that the conventional corona charging system. Also, it produces almost no ozone.
An AC bias is applied to stabilise the charges applied to the photosensitive
drum.
The primary charging roller is a special roller and is not the same as the transfer
roller.
Laser Exposure
laser
Laser light
light
dark
Darkarea
area light
Light area
area
A laser beam, containing the darker areas of the document image, is directed
onto the surface of the OPC. This neutralises the charges. The areas of this laser image on the OPC will later attract toner, during the development phase.
TSM Oc 3121
General operation
Development
blade
Blade
cylinder
Cylinder
magnet
Magnet
developing cylDeveloping
cylinder
inder
The static image on the surface of the OPC is made visible by the application
of toner.
As shown in the figure , the developing assembly consists of a developing cylinder (made of a fixed magnet and a cylinder rotating around it) and a magnetic
blade.
The main ingredients of the toner are magnetite and resins. The toner has insulating properties and is charged to a negative potential by friction against the
cylinder.
The Oc 3121 deposits toner over the areas on the surface of the drum whose
charges have been neutralised by a laser beam (light areas); for this reason, the
polarity of the toner is negative, which is the same as the polarity of primary
charging.
developer
Developer
blade
Blade
magnetic
Concentrated
magnetic field
field
magnet
Magnet
Magnet
magnet
A concentrated magnetic field occurs from the magnet to the edge of the blade,
attracting toner.
Once inside the field, the toner becomes virtually immobile because of the
strong bond with the blade so that, when deposited, it forms an even, thin layer
on the cylinder.
An AC bias and a DC bias (negative component) are applied to the developing
cylinder and the blade at the same time (developing bias); the negative component of the developing bias is stronger than the positive component.
positive
component
Positive component
negative
Negative component
component
DC
DC bias
bias
During copying, toner is attracted to the image areas on the OPC. The latent
image is then a visible image created by the negatively charged toner. The excess toner is removed from the OPC. This is due to the positive bias on the developing roller and the surface potential on the OPC.
ed.1
General operation 7
Transfer
Transfer guide
transfer
guide
trans.
Transfer
roller
roller
The transfer roller applies a positive charges to the rear of the copy paper. This
is to transfer the toner image from the surface of the OPC to the copy paper.
The Oc 3121 uses a roller transfer method, which requires less transfer voltage than a corona transfer method and generates virtually no ozone.
To prevent transfer faults or soiling of the back of copy paper, the transfer guide
is given a negative bias.
Separation
transfer
roller
Transfer roller
static
Static eliminator
eliminator
Use is made of the rigidity of the copy paper. This assists the separation of the
paper from the OPC. (curvature separation). As thin paper is less rigid, it tends
to stick to the OPC. To prevent this, a negative potential is applied to the static
eliminator. This reduces the static bond between the OPC and the paper, allowing an improved separation.
TSM Oc 3121
General operation
Fusing
main
Mainthermistor
thermistor(TH1)
(TH1)
sub
Subthermistor
thermistor(TH2)
(TH2)
fixing
Fixingfilm
film
fixing
heater
Fixing
heater
toner
Toner
fixing cleaning
Fixing
roller
cleaning
roller
lower
Lowerfixing
fixingroller
roller
copy
Copypaper
paper
After separation, the copy paper is passed between the fusing film and the fuser
roller. The toner image is fused to the fibres of the paper.
The fixing heater is a plane-shaped heater; it serves to eliminate warm-up time
by heating the area of contact with the fixing film.
The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by the main thermistor (TH1)
located at the centre of the heater. (The fixing heater is controlled to a specific
temperature at all times.)
A sub thermistor (TH2) is provided at the end of the fixing heater to monitor
the temperature of the area which remains free of contact with paper when
small-size paper is moved through the fixing assembly, thereby preventing
overheating.
The fixing cleaning roller is made of aluminium and is kept in contact with the
lower fixing roller to remove toner from the lower fixing roller. (It also serves
to discharge heat from the lower fixing roller.)
The metal core of the lower fixing assembly is given a positive bias to prevent
offset of toner to the fixing film.
OPC cleaning
cleaning
Cleaning blade
blade
blade
Blade
scoop-up
Scoop-up sheet
sheet
The remaining toner on the OPC is scraped off by the cleaning blade. This as
a preparation for the next copy. The toner that is scraped off is caught by a melinex strip, and moved to the waste container by a rotary blade.
ed.1
General operation 9
4 Auxiliary Process
Static elimination during output
As it leaves the fuser, the copy carries residual charges from the transfer stage.
To dissipate these charges, a static eliminator is provided at the output side
charges (earthed brush).
5 High voltage system

HT transformer circuit
The HT circuit for the formation of the image is a part of the power supply
PBA. It is used for the following:
Limiting the charging voltage
Limiting the transfer voltage
Limiting the current for the static eliminator, for the separation
Limiting the DC developing bias
Switching the AC developing bias ON and OFF
Applying a potential to the transfer guide
Switching the fusing bias ON and OFF
The power supply PBA also incorporates the circuits for the lamp regulation
and for the control of the power supply for the lamp.
composite power supply
primary charging
roller
drum
developing unit
HVT circuit
transfer guide
lower fixing roller
10
TSM Oc 3121
static
eliminator
transfer roller
General operation
Timing of operations
STBY
INTR2
Control panel power

supply OFF
SCFW
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
INTR1
Copy Start
key ON
STBY
SLEEP
SCRV
Main power
supply ON
Main motor (M1)

Fixing heater (H4)
Scanner motor (M2)
HPsearch
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

Scanning lamp (FL1)
Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS8)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Primary charging roller bias DC component
Primary charging roller bias AC component
Transfer charging roller
Developing bias DC component
Developing bias AC component
Transfer guide bias

Fixing bias
ed.1
General operation 11
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
01 PHOTOCONDUCTOR
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1 Replacing the OPC unit
401
Functional description
501
1 Resistance of the OPC drum
ed.1
01 Photoconductor
Dis-/assembly
1 Replacing the OPC unit
When you replace the OPC, record the date and the latest counter reading on
the label. Attach the label to the front cover of the new OPC.
ed.1
01 Photoconductor 401
1 Resistance of the OPC drum
The resistance of the OPC tends to decrease as time elapses. The Oc 3121
makes use of this phenomenon to determine the deterioration of the drum.
To measure the resistance, the surface of the OPC is charged to a uniform level
at a specific voltage (DC + AC). The CPU on the power supply PBA samples
the current of the charges as they are applied and can then determine the resistance of the OPC. The result is converted into a density correction curve. This
is used to control the reliable generation of good quality images. This mode of
control is called automatic density correction, through curve selection (ADC).
The timing of the measurements are:
During initial rotation, after a press on the copy button

During initial rotation, after opening or closing the front door (except for jam
removal)
During initial rotation, after switching ON the copier.
During final rotation, after generating 500 copies/prints.
Handling the OPC after installation
The OPC is highly susceptible to light, and mere exposure to room lighting can
lead to the production of copies with white spots or black stripes. Observe the
following, so avoiding problems:
Try to finish jam removal work within 5 minutes.

When taking the OPC out of the copier for servicing:- wrap it in fresh copy
paper,- keep it in a dark place.
Do not touch the surface of the OPC.
If the surface of the OPC is soiled, wipe it with a flannel cloth coated with
toner. (Do not use paper: lint-free or otherwise.)
Do not use solvents.
ed.1
01 Photoconductor 501
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
02 CHARGING
Contents
501
1 Limiting the charging bias

2 Roller cleaning 503
ed.1
02 Charging
1 Limiting the charging bias
Outline
The bias for the charging roller is controlled by the power supply PBA, following the instructions from the DC control PBA.
In addition, an AC bias is applied to the charging roller to ensure stable charging.
The power supply PBA serves the following functions:
Limiting the DC bias to a specific voltage

Limiting the AC bias to a specific current
Primary charging
assembly
T300
Composite power supply PCB
Photosensitive
drum
T101
Rectification
Q605
Drum ambient
temperature detection
AC drive
circuit
Frequency
division
Hgih-voltage drive
clock
AC control signal
DC control signal
current detection
DC
current
setection
DC component
T101 drive signal
Drive
circuit
DC component voltage detection
T101
AC component
current detection
CPU
J102-B9
Serial communication
J209-B2
DC bias level
switching signal

ON/OFF signal
J209-B6
J209-A4~A9
J102-A1~A7
J102-B5
IC101 CPU
DC controller PCB
ed.1
02 Charging 501
Switching the charging roller ON and OFF
The charging roller is switched ON and OFF by the charging roller ON/OFF
signal (HVPDC) from the DC control PBA.
The primary side of the main transformer (T101) on the power supply PBA is
controlled by the CPU (Q605). When the HVPDC signal is sent to the power
supply PBA, the CPU (Q605) generates the DC control signal (PPWM) to
switch ON the secondary side of T101. A DC bias is applied to the charging
roller.
Then, the CPU generates the AC control signal (PAPWM) following the commands created via the serial communications with the DC control PBA. As a
result, the transformer T300 applies AC to the charging roller.
Controlling the charging bias
The output values of the DC and the AC applied to the charging roller are controlled by:
the DC control signal (PDPWM)
the AC control signal (PAPWM)
These are pulse signals, generated by the CPU (Q605).
For the DC bias, the output voltage value is returned to the CPU (Q605). This
continuously varies the duty ratio of the DC control signal. Thereby controlling
it to a specific voltage (constant voltage control).
For the AC bias, the current value of the AC output is sent to the AC drive circuit.
The AC drive circuit uses the reference signal (AC control signal PAPWM) and
the value of the AC current to generate signals to drive the transformer T300.
These limit the AC bias to a constant current.
Correcting the Apparent Surface Voltage on the Drum
The apparent surface voltage of the drum fluctuates in relation to changes in

the ambient temperature inside the machine. This is corrected by varying the
charge voltage. The temperature is measured by the thermistor, positioned on
the rear frame of the copier. The data is sent to the CPU on the DC control
PBA.
The CPU and the DC control PBA compute the data, and the results are sent to
the power supply PBA in serial communication mode.
The power supply PBA, in response, uses the data to determine the DC charge
level.
502
TSM Oc 3121
2 Roller cleaning
Outline
The copier is equipped to automatically clean the charging roller.

Solenoid (SL1) is switched ON, while the charging roller is rotating, to move
the cleaning pad against the charging roller. The cleaning pad oscillates in the
axial direction of the charging roller.
The cleaning occurs:
After each series of 50 copies: for run lengths exceeding 50 copies.

At the end of the copying cycle: for run lengths exceeding 500 copies and for
run lengths below 50 copies.
When adjustment/cleaning is executed in user mode. (In this case, a cleaning bias is applied to the charging roller and the transfer roller).
SL1
(energised)
SL1 (ON)
Oscillation
Back-and-forth
movement
Cleaning pad
charging
roller roller
Primary charging
Cleaning pad
OPC
Photosensitive drum
ed.1
02 Charging 503
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
04 EXPOSURE
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Removing the Scanner Motor 401

Removing the Scanner Cable 402
Routing the Scanner Cable 404
Preparing the tool for the positioning of the mirror
Adjusting the position of the mirror 406
Replacing the exposure lamp 407
Replacing the CCD Unit 409
Removing the Fan Duct 1 410
Replacing the Laser Unit 411
Replacing the Analogue Processor PBA 412
Standard white plate 412
405
1
2
3
4
5
The Document Exposure System 501

Varying the Reproduction Ratio 502
Scanner Motor 503
Controlling the Exposure Lamp 504
Identifying the Size of Documents 506
Laser Exposure System
1 Laser Processing Unit
ed.1
509
04 Exposure
Dis-/assembly
1 Removing the Scanner Motor
1 Remove the rear cover (4 screws).

2 Remove the flywheel (3 screws).
3 Detach the spring (3) and remove the scanner motor (1) (3 screws).
ed.1
04 Exposure 401
2 Removing the Scanner Cable

1 Remove the following:
The platen
The operating panel
The rear covers, the right cover and the left cover.
2 Remove the metal clamps (1) (front and rear) from the scanner cable.
3 Release the front cable spring (2) and the rear cable spring (2) screws (3).
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
4 Loosen the set screw (4), and remove the cable (front and rear).
ed.1
04 Exposure 403
3 Routing the Scanner Cable

Note: The following tools are required when routing the scanner cable:
1.The tool for the positioning of the mirror
2.The pulley sleeve
Proceed as follows:
1 Place the steel ball into the pulley hole (1). Wind the cable 3.5 times toward the
inside and 6 times toward the outside (both front and rear).
Secure the cable, using the pulley sleeve.
Locate the tool for the positioning of the mirror (2).
Thread the cable as shown (3),(4),(5),(6).
Loosen and, then, tighten the set screw (7) of the drive pulley, so that the tension of the scanner cables is equalised.
6 Fix the mirror support No. 1, and refit the cable clamps (8).
7 Adjust the cable pulley, until the spring length is 32 1 mm (9).
2
3
4
5
Loosen the set screws,

so that the pulley is free
to rotate.
Set
screws
Prepare the tool for

the positioning of
the mirror.
404
TSM Oc 3121
Place the steel ball into the

pulley hole. Wind the cable 3.5
times toward the inside
Pulley
and 6 times toward
sleeve
the outside.
Then, snap on
the pulley
sleeve.
Steel ball
Dis-/assembly
4 Preparing the tool for the positioning of the mirror
Before using the positioning tool, the arrangement of the pins needs to be set.
The figures show the positions (1), (2) and (3) for the pins and A, B, and C.
(the pins arranged for the front of the machine)
1 The arrangement of the pins for the front and the rear of the machine.
Insert the longest

pin in (1)
Insert the shortest

pin in (3)
Note: The pin A of the positioning tool is not used.
ed.1
04 Exposure 405
5 Adjusting the position of the mirror

(the optical length of the mirror No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3)
1 Prepare the positioning tool. see Preparing the tool for the positioning of the
mirror on page 405.

2 Move the mirror support No. 1 forwards until the hole in the side plate and the
hole in the slide for the mirror support No. 1 are in line and, also, the holes for
the mirror support No. 2.(Do the same for the rear side plate.)
3 Fit the positioning tool to the mirror support No. 1 and to the mirror support
No. 2.(Both front and rear).
For rear
Mirror support No. 1
For front
Mirror supports No. 2 & 3
4 Tighten the set screw of the pulley.

5 Remove the tools.
406
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
6 Replacing the exposure lamp

Warning:
1) Ensure that the surface of the exposure lamp has cooled before starting the
work.
2) Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the exposure lamp. (in particular, on the transparent side).
3) If the surface of the exposure lamp is soiled, wipe it with a clean, dry cloth.

2 Remove the platen.

4 Remove the document feeder or the platen cover. Then, remove the upper cover
from the rear of the copier (2 screws).

5 Disconnect the connector. Release the clips (3). Then, remove the cooling fan.
ed.1
04 Exposure 407
6 Move the Mirror support No. 1 until it is as shown; when viewed from the rear.
7 Remove the cover (4) from the fluorescent lamp (1 screw).Then, pull out the
scanning lamp.
8 Mount the new lamp and refit all the removed parts.
Warning:
The exposure lamp has a fixed orientation. Note the following:

1) Ensure that the manufacturers name on the lamp is at the rear of the machine.
2) Keep the transparent side of the lamp facing the reflector.
3) Do not touch the transparent side of the lamp.
Transparent side of the lamp
Reflector
9 Execute: * 4 *; FUNCTION: 12: R & D SHADING.
408
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
7 Replacing the CCD Unit

2 Remove the platen.
3 Remove the CCD cover (1).
4 Remove the screw that holds the document-size sensor (2), and move the sen-
sor away from the CCD unit.
5 Remove the retaining spring (3) that holds the CCD unit (1 screw). Disconnect
the connector (4). Release the flat cable (5), and remove the CCD unit.
ed.1
04 Exposure 409
Warning:
Do not touch any paint-locked screws

Particularly, never remove the screw (6).
6 Mount the new CCD unit and refit all the removed parts.
7 Execute: * 4 * FUNCTIONS: 04: AUTO SHADING START.
8 Removing the Fan Duct 1

1
2
3
4
5
410
Remove the rear cover (4 screws).

Remove the cooling fan.
Remove the flywheel (3 screws).
Release the clips, and remove the cable guide.
Remove the fan duct (1) by sliding it to the left (2 screws).
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
9 Replacing the Laser Unit
1
2
3
4
Remove the rear cover, and fan duct.

Remove the platen, the CCD cover, the IP cover, and the IP PBA.
Remove the fan duct 2 (1), by sliding it to the rear.
Release the clips, and remove the cable guide (3).
5 Remove the cable (4), and the five screws (5). Disconnect the connector (6).
Then, remove the laser unit (7).
6
7
8
9
Replace the laser unit and refit all removed parts.

Execute * 4 * FUNCTIONS: 04: PD PRINT.
Execute * 4 * FUNCTIONS: 05: 200PWM PRINT.
Execute * 4 * FUNCTIONS: 07: 600PWM PRINT.
ed.1
04 Exposure 411
10 Replacing the Analogue Processor PBA

Note: If you replace the analogue processor PBA, (part of the CCD unit) you
must execute (*4* Function 03 Shading Auto Start)
11 Standard white plate

Note: If you replace the standard white plate, you must execute (*4* Function
13 R&D Shading Start).
412
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
1 The Document Exposure System
Outline
The document exposure system refers to the illumination of a document, and

the projection of the reflected image onto the CCD.
Document
exposuresystem
system
Original exposure
Scanning
Scanninglamp
lamp
mirror
2 2 mirror
number
mirror
1 1 mirror
number
Lens
Lens
CCD
CCD
Analogue
Analog
processor
PBA
processor
mirror
3 3 mirror
number
PCB
Image
Imageprocessing
processingsystem
system
CORE/IP
PBA
CORE/IP
Board
Printer
PBA
Printer
FAX
PBA
FAX
Board
Board
Image
ImageProcessor
processor
PBA
PCB
Laser
Laser
driver
Driver
Laser
Laser
Laser
Laserbeam
beam
Laser
Laser
mirror
mirror
Laser
system
Laserexposure
exposure
system
PhotoOPC
drum
sensitive
drum
outline
ed.1
04 Exposure 501
Scanner
motor
Scanner
motor
M2
M2
Scanner home
Scanner
sensor
PS1 home
position sensor
PS1
Forward
Forward
Mirror support 1
number 1 mirror mount
Reverse
Reverse
Mirror
support
Mirror
mount 2
general view
2 Varying the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in the forward direction is changed by skipping image
signals (reduction), when writing into line memory. Or reading a multiple
number of times (enlargement), when reading from the line memory.
The reproduction ratio in the reverse direction is changed by moving the mirror
faster (reduction) or slower (enlargement).
502
TSM Oc 3121
3 Scanner Motor
Outline
The scanner motor (M2) is a stepping motor. The motor is controlled by the
DC control PBA.
The CPU on the DC control PBA transmits signals through the I/O circuit to
the motor controller PBA. The signals are: clockwise rotation (moving the
scanner forward), counter-clockwise rotation (moving the scanner in reverse),
and rotation speed.
The motor control circuit follows the instructions from the CPU, and sends
pulse signals to the power control circuit. The power control circuit, in turn, accordingly supplies power to the scanner motor (M2), causing the scanner motor to rotate.
DC controller
24V
1
CPU
I/O
Motor
controller
M2
ed.1
04 Exposure 503
4 Controlling the Exposure Lamp

Outline
The exposure lamp is a fluorescent lamp. It is controlled by the power supply

PBA:
Controlling the preheating of the exposure.

Switching the exposure lamp ON and OFF.
Controlling the intensity of the exposure lamp.

PCB
Scanning lamp
(fluorescent lamp)
T501
T101
Scanning
lamp
pre-heat
circuit
Scanning
lamp ON
circuit
FLON
MPCLK
FLPWM
FLPWM
PRTCT
FLOFF
T101 Drive signal
Logic circuit
FLPRTH
FLPRTH
Scanning lamp
intensity sensor
T101
Drive
circuit
Q605
CPU
DC controller PBA
PCB
IC 102
Gate array
FL_SFLS
IC101
CPU
Control of the preheating
The exposure lamp is pre-heated. This shortens the time required for the intensity of the exposure lamp to reach its optimum value, after a press on the Copy
button.
Preheating may be initial preheating or exposure lamp ON preheating.
Initial Preheating
Power is applied during initial rotation.
Preheating in ON situation
Power is applied during the copying operation.
504
TSM Oc 3121
Switching the exposure lamp ON and OFF
The exposure lamp is switched ON and OFF by the lamp ON signal (FLPWM).
The signal is from the DC control PBA.
The FLPWM signal is sent to the logic circuit together with the MPCLK (pulse
signals), generated by the power supply PBA. The logic circuit uses these two
signals to generate the signal for exposure lamp ON, thereby switching on the
scanning lamp.
Varying the Intensity
The FLPWM signal is a pulse signal. This is used to control the intensity of the
exposure lamp to a specific level by varying the duty ratio. This is based on the
results of the automatic shading correction as executed in service mode, and in
accordance with the output of the exposure lamp intensity sensor.
Detecting Errors
If the exposure lamp fails to switch ON, although the lamp ON signal has been
generated, the exposure lamp ON circuit detects the condition. The error detection signal (PRTCT) is sent to the CPU.
In response, the CPU generates the exposure lamp OFF signal (FLOFF). The
CPU does not wait for a command from the DC controller.
ed.1
04 Exposure 505
5 Identifying the Size of Documents

Outline
The document-size detection by the copier or by the feeder is used to detect the
size of a document placed on the platen or in the feeder. The size data that is
obtained is used for the following:
Auto paper selection,
Auto ratio selection.
. AB-Configuration
Sensor 0 Sensor 1
B5R
A4R
A5
Sensor 2 B5
Sensor 3
B4
A3
A4
. Inch-Configuration
Sensor 0 Sensor 1
STMT
LTRR
LGL
Sensor 2
LTR
11x17
Operation of the Document-size Sensors
A reflecting type sensor is located below the platen. This detects the size of a
document placed on the platen.
When the platen cover is lowered to approximately 30, the sensor (PS3), located at the rear of the copier, is switched ON. The vane interrupts the light
beam to PS3.
506
TSM Oc 3121
The output level of each sensor is read for 15 seconds. Or, when the platen cover is down, at intervals of 0.128 seconds until the copy button is pressed. If the
output level remains unchanged during the period, a document is presumed to
be present at the sensor position. The size of the document is identified as
shown in the tables.
For cases a & b: the output level will remain unchanged.
For case of c: A3 will be given priority. If no cassette contains A3 paper, the
cassette that is selected under standard mode will be selected.
a) A3 black document
b) Book document (the thickness of a book prevents any changes to the output
level from the sensor.)
c) The platen cover is not closed. (PS3 is OFF.)
Note: In cases of a, b, or c, the size detection could be incorrect.

Platen cover
Document
30
PS3:ON
Platen
ON
Document
detection 1
ON
OFF
Document
detection 2
No change in
the level
ON
Change in
the level
Detecting the Size of the Documents
The combination of the outputs from the sensors represents the presence or absence of a document. Using this information, the image processor PBA determines the size of the document.
Unchanged
Indicates that there has been no change in the sensor output. The presence of
a document is assumed. (The sensor output is checked every 128 ms).
Changed
Indicates that a change has occurred in the sensor output. The absence of a
document is assumed.
ed.1
04 Exposure 507
Size
Document-size sensor
1
A3
Unchanged
Unchanged
A4R
Changed
Unchanged
A4
Unchanged
Changed
None
Changed
Changed
A-configuration
Size
Document size sensor

0
11x 17
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
LGL
Changed
Unchanged
Unchanged
LTR-R
Changed
Unchanged
Changed
LTR
Unchanged
Changed
Changed
Inch configuration
Dimensioning of the Documents, by the Document Feeder
The document feeder detects the width of a document and the length of a document, and communicates the result to the image processor.
The RDF dimensions the document: recording the width as detected by the
side guides, and the length as detected in the feeding direction. The size is determined when the document is picked up. The applicable sizes are any of the
default sizes, as follows:
A-configuration: A5, A4, A4R, A3.
B-configuration: B5, B5R, B4.
Inch-configuration: STMT, LTR, LTRR, FOOLSCAP, LGL, 11x17.
508
TSM Oc 3121

1 Laser Processing Unit
Outline
The main components of the laser unit are:

a laser unit, as the source of laser beams
a scanner motor, which is equipped with a 6-facet mirror
a BD detection PBA, for the detection of the laser beams.
The laser beam generated by the laser unit is directed to the 6-facet mirror. The
mirror rotates at a specific speed. The laser beam reflected by the mirror is
passed through the imaging lens. The optical path is bent by the laser mirror
before it reaches the photosensitive drum. Meanwhile, the laser beam is bent
to an acute angle by the BD mirror, located inside the laser unit. This is for the
BD detection PBA.
As the mirror rotates, the laser beam scans the surface of the OPC. This removes charges and, as a result, creates a latent image.
ed.1
04 Exposure 509
Document exposure system
Exposure lamp
mirror 2
mirror 1
Lens
CCD
Analogue
processor
PBA
mirror 3
Image processing system
CORE/IP PBA
Printer
PBA
FAX
PBA
Image Processor
PBA
Laser
driver
Laser
Laser beam
Laser
Mirror
OPC
drum
outline
510
TSM Oc 3121
DC control PBA
DC controller PCB
Laser
Laser motor
scanner motor
6-facet
mirror
6-facet
mirror
Laser
Laserscanner
scanner
motor
PBA
motor drive
drive PCB
Imaging
Imaging
lens
lens
Laser
Laser unit
unit
Laser
laser scanner
scanner motor
motor drive
drivesignal
signal
Laser drive signal

Laser drive signal
Image processor PBA

Image processor PCB
BD
BD PBA
PCB
Laser mirror
Laser mirror
Laser
PBA
Laser driver
driver PCB
BD
BDmirror
mirror
OPC drum
Photosensitive drum
laser exposure
Generating the BD Signal
A laser ON signal (horizontal, synchronised signal) is needed when directing

a laser beam to the OPC. The laser beam detection signal (BD) is used to generate this start signal.
If two-sided copying or overlay copying is in progress, the edge of the copy
paper is detected. This determines any discrepancy with regard to the position
of the paper perpendicular to the transport direction
The result of this measurement varies the laser ON timing, in relation to the BD
signal. This ensures that the image will be at a specific position on every copy.
For details on how the side edge of copy paper is detected, see chapter 16, Duplex.
ed.1
04 Exposure 511
LaserLaser
unit scanner unit
Polygon
mirror
(6-facet)
Polygon mirror
(6-facet)
Imaging lens
Imaging lens
Laser
Laser
BD BD
mirror
mirror
BD
PBA
BD detection
detection PCB
OPC
Photosensitive drum
Front
Front
Laser
ON
Laser
ON
LaserOFF
OFF
Laser
Laser
ONON
Laser
Laser OFF
Laser
OFF
Rear
Rear
Image area
Image
area
Image area when

Image area when
moved
shiftedback
to the rear
Paper
Copy paper
Copy
papershifted
moved back
Copy paper
Image
Imagearea
area
to the rear
Sensor
the side regisHorizontalfor
registration
tration
sensor
Horizontal registation
Horizontal
registration
sensor detecting
sensor:
detects
copy paper
shiftedthe
to thecopy
rear
paper that is moved backwards
Laser Driver Circuit
Operation
The optical output of the laser (semi-conductor laser) is sensitive to changes in
the ambient temperature. A control circuit automatically varies the laser drive
current, to suit the ambient temperature, thereby ensuring a specific output.
When the copy button is pressed, the image processor PBA sends the bias control signal (APCON*) and the laser drive signal (LSRD) to the laser driver
PBA. These activate the bias control circuit and the constant current circuit on
the laser PBA. The laser beam is switched ON.
The laser beam is detected by the pin photo-diode (PD) (not in this drawing).
The pin photo-diode (PD) is built into the laser element. The photo-output voltage from the PD is returned to the bias control circuit.
The photo-output voltage is sampled and compared to the reference voltage
supplied by the setting circuit for the laser intensity. This determines the value
of the laser bias current. This laser bias current is varied continuously to compensate for the changes in temperature, so ensuring a specific output.
512
TSM Oc 3121
This procedure occurs several times during each signal line of scanning.
Laser
driver
PBA
Laser
driver
PCB
Sample
Sample hold
signal
(SH)
signal (SH)
Intensity
selecIntensity selection
tion
signal
0
signal
0 (SW0)
Intensity selecIntensity selection
tion
signal
1
signal
1 (SW2)
Intensity selecIntensity selection
tion
signal
2
signal
2 (SW2)
Image
processor
Image
PBA
Bias control On
Bias control
ON
signal
(APCON*)
signal (AP CON*)
5V
Setting circuit
the
Laserfor
intensity
laser
intensetting
circuit
sity
VR1202 VR1205 VR1206
Bias control
Bias control
circuit
processor
PCB
circuit
Laser
drive
Laser drive
signal
(LSRD)
signal(LSRD)
5V
Laser
Laserelement
element
VR1204
Limiting
Limiter
circuit
circuit
VR1203
Current
Current
switch
switch
Constant curConstant
current
rent
circuit
circuit
VR1201
:: Do
Donot
nottouch!
touch in the field.
output
characteristics
Laserlaser
output
characteristics
Laser
outputcharacteristics
characteristics
Laser output
at temperature
at temperature
T1T1
at
at temperature
temperature T2T2
Photo-output
Photo
output
Laser
output
Laser output
current
current
Ib(T1)
Ib (T1)
Ib(T1):
Bias current for temperature T1
Ib (T1) : Bias current for temperature T1
Ib(T2):
currentforfor
temperature
Ib (T2) :Bias
Bias current
temperature
T2 T2
Ib(T2)
Ib (T2)
Drive
current
Drive current
The laser bias current
ed.1
04 Exposure 513
Switching the Laser Output
The laser output can be: high, medium, or low. Thus ensuring the best image
for the selected mode. The output is limited by the output signal intensity selection signal 0, 1, 2 from the image processor PBA.
The laser output is used for its respective mode, as shown:
Laser output
Mode
High
Text mode, text and photo mode
Medium
Photo mode, Fax output
Low
Printer output
Controlling the Scanner Motor
The scanner motor rotates in accordance with the instructions received from
the DC control PBA. The power supply is controlled by the scanner driver
PBA.
The scanner motor (M3) rotates when the laser scanner motor drive signal
(LMD=1) is sent, by the DC control PBA, to the scanner driver PBA. At this
time, the hall IC signal is returned from M3. This signal is used to control the
power supply for M3.
The timing of the power supply is controlled in phase with the rotation reference pulses (FS) from the DC control PBA. Thus ensuring a specific speed of
rotation.
6-facet
6-facetmirror
mirror
DC controller
control PBA
DC
PCB
Laser scanner motor drive PBA

Laser scanner motor drive PCB
24VU
24VU
FS
FS
LMD
LMD
LOCK
LOCK
514
TSM Oc 3121
Laser
Laser
scanner
scanner
motor
motor
(M3)
(M3)
Motor drive
Motor drive
circuit
circuit
Hall IC
Hall IC
output
output
Switching the Laser Scanner Motor ON and OFF
The timing of the start of the laser scanner motor (M3) varies in accordance
with the setting of the time to quiet mode. This is set (in user mode) to 19
or 0.
If the time is set to 19, rotation starts when the following occurs during
stand-by:
a button is pressed
the platen cover is opened, or the document feeder is opened
a document is placed in the document feeder.
If the time is set to 0, rotation starts when the copy button is pressed.
Main power Control panel Copy Start

switch ON power switch ON key ON
SLEEP
STBY
INTR
LSTR
SCFW
STBY
SCRV
The laser scanner motor is switched OFF in accordance with the settings in
time to quiet mode. (If the time is set to 0, the rotation stops at the end of
LSTR.)
Main motor (M1)
B
A
Laser scanner motor (M3)
A: If the setting of time to quiet mode is not 0, one of the following situations apply:
a button has been pressed,
a document has been placed in the document feeder, or, the platen cover has
been raised.
B: Can be varied in user mode (quiet mode). If 0 is set, there will be no B
period.
ed.1
04 Exposure 515
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
05 DEVELOPING
Contents
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the doctor blade
301
Dis-/assembly
1
2
3
4
Developing Clutch 401

Removing the Toner Sensor 402
Blade Mount 403
The position of the magnetic seal in the developing unit
404
1 Controlling the Developing Bias 501

2 The cleaner in the developing unit 503
ed.1
05 Developing
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the doctor blade
This is a factory adjustment.
Blade
Blade
approx 0.21mm
0.210.03mm
Developing cylinder
Developing cylinder
Note: The gap between the developing roller and the doctor blade is adjusted
in the factory (high precision). Do not try to adjust it in the field.
ed.1
05 Developing 301
302
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Dis-/assembly
1 Developing Clutch
rear cover (4 screws),

flywheel (3 screws),
and the cable clip (high-voltage cable).
2 Disconnect the connector (3), and remove the developing clutch (2 screws).
ed.1
05 Developing 401
2 Removing the Toner Sensor

1 Remove the developing unit.
2 Remove the screw (2). Disengage the hook (3). Then, remove the grip (1) from

3
3 Remove the two screws (4) . Disconnect the connector (5), and take out the ton-
er sensor.
5
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
3 Blade Mount
1 Disengage the four fasteners (3). Remove the two screws (2) and take off the
cover (1).
1
2 Remove the two screws (5) , and remove the blade mount (4).
ed.1
05 Developing 403
4 The position of the magnetic seal in the developing unit

When fitting the magnetic seal, hold it firmly against the opening. Ensure that
the magnetic seal and the housing are in firm contact.
Magnetic seal
Magnetic seal
Magnetic
seal
Magnetic
seal
404
TSM Oc 3121
Opening (reference for

Opening
butting)
(reference for butting)
(Rear)
(rear)
(Front)
(front)
Dis-/assembly
1 Controlling the Developing Bias
Outline
The circuit for the control of the developing bias, on the power supply PBA ,
has the following functions:
Switching the AC developing bias ON and OFF.

Switching the DC developing bias ON and OFF.
Limiting the DC developing bias to a specific voltage.

T101
Developing AC
drive circuit
Photosensitive
drum
Developing
cylinder
AC drive signal
High-voltage drive clock
Voltage
detection
circuit
DC voltage
detection signal
T101 drive signal
T101
drive
circuit
DC bias control signal
+5V
Q605
J102-B8
DC drive signal
J102-A1~A7
J209-B9
DC application
mode
J209-A4~A9
CPU
J209-B3
J209-B8
J102-B2
J102-B3
IC101
CPU
DC controller PCB
ed.1
05 Developing 501
Switching the DC developing bias ON and OFF
The DC developing bias is switched ON and OFF by the DC bias ON/OFF

signal (DCON). The signal comes from the DC control PBA .
The primary side of the main transformer (T101), on the power supply PBA,
is controlled by the CPU (Q605). When the DCON signal is sent to the power
supply PBA , the CPU (Q605) generates the DC bias control signal (BPWM).
This switches on the secondary side of the main transformer (T101), applying
the DC developing bias.
Limiting the DC Developing Bias to a Specific Voltage
When the DC developing bias is being applied, the CPU (Q605) on the power
supply PBA receives the application voltage from the voltage detection circuit.
Thus, the duty ratio of the BPWM signal is varied, ensuring that the DC output
voltage is maintained to a specific value.
Switching the AC developing bias ON and OFF
The developing AC drive circuit on the power supply PBA receives drive pulse
signals from the CPU (Q605). When the AC drive signal (ACON) is directed
from the DC control PBA to the AC drive circuit, the AC transformer (T400)
is switched ON. This supplements AC to the DC developing bias.
Application frequency: 1838 Hz

Application voltage: 800 Vp-p
Varying the DC Developing Bias
The density of the image is adjusted by varying the density correction curve
(DC developing bias).
During printing (printer function), the density is adjusted by fixing the density
correction curve. Then, varying the bias DC to maintain correct gradation.
To compensate for variations in the OPC, the control is carried out according
to a specific timing. (with AGS measurement to increase the developing bias).
502
TSM Oc 3121
2 The cleaner in the developing unit

Outline
The developing unit is locked mechanically by the locking levers on each of

the developing rails.
The drive from the main motor rotates the following:
the developing roller,

the stirring rod in the developing unit,
the rotary blade inside the drum cleaner.
The level of toner is detected via the toner absent signal (TEP), from the toner
level sensor (TS1) inside the developing unit
The waste toner is collected by the rotary blade. The waste toner sensor (PS10)
turns on when the waste container is full.
Detecting the level of toner
A toner sensor (TS1) of an oscillator type is provided to monitor the level of

toner. The sensor is located inside the developing unit.
When the level of toner in the unit is above a specific level, the output of the
toner sensor is 1. When the toner falls below that level, the output of the toner
sensor is 0.
When the developing clutch (CL4) is energised, the CPU on the DC control
PBA reads the output of the toner sensor. It then computes the period during
which the toner sensor output remained ON to issue a message to supply toner.
ed.1
05 Developing 503
Result
Operation
Resetting
Toner absent level 1 is

assumed if the toner is
absent state continued
for 20 seconds or more
during the last two
checks.
Toner supply is initiated.

Copying is prohibited.
(FAX reception and
printer output are possible.)
Resetting occurs when

toner has been stirred: by
keeping the developing
clutch ON for 6 seconds.
This is after the control
panel power switch was
switched ON, or the
front door was opened
and closed.
Toner absent level 2 is

assumed if the toner is
absent state continues
for 160 seconds or more.
Toner supply is initiated.

Copying, FAX output,
and printing are all prohibited.
Resetting occurs when

toner has been stirred: by
keeping the developing
clutch ON for 30 seconds. And, toner is
present is detected after
the control panel power
switch was switched ON
or the front door was
opened and closed.
Computation of Level
Result cleared
Result cleared
Toner present
Toner absent
(TEP*occurs)
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
When the toner is stirred by the stirring rod, the toner is absent or the toner is
present state is repeated at intervals.
The absence of toner is assumed by monitoring the TEP* signal. This occurs
only while the developing clutch remains energised. The periods during
which the developing clutch remains ON are added.
The time elapsed from the first toner absent (TEP*) signal up to the end of
the last toner absent signal is referred to as T1.
The time elapsed from the start of the next toner absent signal until the end
of the toner absent signal is referred to as T2.
Then, the sums are cleared and replaced by alternately adding subsequent T1
and T2.
Based on the results, the absence of toner is assumed for the following:
504
(T1 + T2) > 20 seconds: toner absent, level 1

(T1) or (T2) > 160 seconds: toner absent, level 2
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
06 TRANSFER
Contents
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the bias for the transfer roller
301
Transfer 501
Controlling the bias to the transfer roller 502
Controlling the bias for the transfer roller 504
Controlling the bias for the Static Eliminator during separation 505
Controlling the bias for the transfer guide and the bias for the fixing roller
506
1
2
3
4
5
ed.1
06 Transfer
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the bias for the transfer roller
If image faults occur, as a result of an incorrect transfer charging roller bias,
the transfer bias may be adjusted. Carry out TRN-1, TRN-2TS, or
TRN-20L in service mode (*3*; ADJUST).
An image fault may be any of the following:
1 Background is noted in the margin along the trailing edge, because of stray to-
ner.
2 The density of copies increases every 94 intervals (approximately) when ma-
king half-tone copies (entire surface).

In the case of 1, increase the setting; in the case of 2, decrease the setting.
Use TRN-1 to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 1st side.
Use TRN-2ST to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 2nd side of a
two-sided copy.
Use TRN-20L to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 2nd side of an
overlay copy.
ed.1
06 Transfer 301
1 Transfer
Transfer
Transferguide
guide
Transfer
Transfer
roller
roller
The transfer roller applies a positive charge to the rear of the copy paper. This
is to transfer the toner image from the surface of the OPC to the copy paper.
A roller transfer method is employed. This requires less transfer voltage than
a corona transfer method, and this method generates virtually no ozone.
The transfer guide is given a negative bias. This is to prevent transfer faults
occurring, and to avoid soiling of the back of the copy paper.
Note: If the transfer guide was connected to earth, it would dissipate the
charge on the back of copy paper: leading to transfer faults. If separated completely, the transfer guide would be charged. This would soil the transfer guide
and, ultimately, soil the rear of the copy paper.
Note: If the image from the OPC was not fully transferred to the copy paper
(because of a jam), toner could stick to the transfer roller. A negative voltage
is applied to the roller, during the initial rotation and the final rotation. Any
remaining toner, carrying a negative charge, is returned to the OPC.
Transfer
roller
Transfer roller
ed.1
06 Transfer 501
2 Controlling the bias to the transfer roller

Outline
The copier uses direct transfer executed by means of a roller. Four charging potentials are applied to the transfer roller. These have the following functions
and timing:
Photosensitive
drum
24VU
24VU
Transformer
T502
Constant
current
control
24VR
T101
drive
circuit
Transfer bias
control signal
Cleaning bias
drive signal
T101 drive signal
Overcurrent
detection
IC101
CPU
J209-B5
J102-B7
Transfer output mode 1
J102-B6
Transfer output mode 0
Q605
J209-B4
Transformer
output
detection
High-voltage AC drive pulse
5V
24VU
Transfer bias ON signal
Transforemer
(increase)circuit
Transfer output detection signal
T101
J209-A4~A9
J102-A1~A7
CPU
DC controller PCB
Transfer Bias
This positive bias is used to transfer the image from the OPC to the copy paper.
502
TSM Oc 3121
Cleaning Bias
As the machine uses direct transfer, toner from the OPC could stick to the
transfer roller (because of a jam). To counteract this, a negative voltage is applied. This returns the toner from the transfer roller to the OPC:
During the initial rotation, after a press on the Copy button.

During a part of the last rotation.
During a roller cleaning, initiated in user mode adjustment and cleaning'. In
this case, the charging roller is cleaned at the same time.
Reference Bias
The reference bias is applied each time the copy button is pressed. Thus correcting the voltage level.
Sheet-to-Sheet Distance
During copying runs, the bias value is decreased. This is to prevent adhesion
of toner to the transfer roller between sheets of copy paper.
Control power Copy Start

switch ON
key ON
SLEEP
STBY
INTR
SCFW
LSTR
SCFW
STBY
SCRV
Main power
switch ON
SCRV
At times, the transfer efficiency varies. This is due to changes in the environment or changes in the resistance of the charging roller. To prevent loss of image quality due to such variations, a correction is made to the level of the
voltage to the transfer roller.
Main motor (M1)

Cleaning bias
Reference bias
Sheet-to-sheet bias
Transfer bias
ed.1
06 Transfer 503
3 Controlling the bias for the transfer roller

The bias for the transfer roller is controlled by the CPU (Q605) on the power
supply PBA. This is according to instructions from the DC control PBA .
Switching of the application of bias
The bias types are switched, based on combinations of the transfer output
mode 0 (HVTM0) and the transfer output mode 1 (HVTM1) from the DC control PBA .
HVTM0
HVTM1
Bias type
Cleaning bias
Transfer bias
Reference bias
Sheet-to-sheet bias
Switching ON and OFF the Cleaning Bias
When the cleaning bias drive signal is 1 (TREVON from the power supply
PBA), the secondary side of the main transformer (T101) is switched on. This
applies a cleaning bias (negative) to the transfer roller.
The timing of the application of the cleaning bias is determined by serial communication data, exchanged with the DC control PBA .
Switching the transfer roller ON and OFF
The bias for the transfer roller bias is switched ON and OFF by the transfer
bias control signal (TFWPWM) and the transfer bias ON signal (TFWON).
When the TFWON signal is 0, the transformer T502 switches ON.
504
TSM Oc 3121
4 Controlling the bias for the Static Eliminator during separation

Switching ON and OFF the bias for the static eliminator
The CPU (Q605) on the power supply PBA, receives the separation static eliminator ON signal (SEBON). This causes the separation static eliminator bias
drive circuit to apply a bias to the static eliminator.
Controlling the voltage
The output for the eliminator bias is returned to the bias drive circuit. This is
used to control the voltage to a specific value.
Switching the bias voltage for the static eliminator
The separation bias differs physically for copying on the first and second side
of a two-sided copy or for an overlay copy.
Photosensitive
drum
T101
Transformer
(increase)
circuit
Separation
static eliminator
T101 drive signal
T101
drive circuit

drive siganl 1
drive siganl 2
Separation static
eliminator bias
drive circuit
Q605
J209-B7
J102-B4
CPU
Separation static
eliminator
ON/OFF signal
To suit differences, the separation static eliminator drive signal 1/2 is used to
switch the bias voltage. This ensures efficient separation.
J209-A4~A9
J102-A1~A7
IC101
CPU
DC controller PCB
ed.1
06 Transfer 505
5 Controlling the bias for the transfer guide and the bias for the
fixing roller
Bias for the transfer guide
The negative bias (-600 V DC) for the transfer guide is used to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide. The same potential is applied to the toner.
Application of the bias continues when the control panel power remains ON.
Bias to the lower fixing roller
A positive bias is applied to the steel core of the lower fixing roller. This is to
prevent offset to the fixing film.
The electrode terminal on the end of the lower fixing roller shaft is for this purpose. Pay attention to the orientation of the lower roller if you have removed it.
Fixing
assembly
Photosensitive
drum
T101
Fixing bias ON signal
Transfer
guide
T101 drive signal
T101
drive
circuit
DC controller PCB
Q605
CPU
J209-A4~A9
J102-A4~A7
IC101
CPU
506
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
07 CLEANING
Contents
501
1 Waste Toner
ed.1
07 Cleaning
1 Waste Toner
The waste toner that has been scraped by the cleaning blade is moved away to
the waste container at the rear. The toner is moved by the rotary blade situated
below the drum cleaner.
The drive claw is pushed against the rotary blade by a spring. This transmits
the drive of the main motor to rotate the blade.
When the waste container is full of toner, the rotation of the rotary blade is
blocked. This forces the drive claw outwards against the switch lever. The
waste toner sensor (PS10) is switched ON and OFF alternately.
The DC control PBA monitors the switching of PS10 for approximately 8 seconds after the main motor is switched ON. The waste container is assumed to
be full if, during those 8 seconds, 10 or more signals are received from PS10.
Upon detection, the Waste Toner Case Full message will be displayed: during
standby.
Waste
sensor
PS10
Waste toner
sensor
PS10
Rotary
blade
Waste toner
feeding blade
waste container
Cleaner housing
main
Main motor
motor
Coupling
drive
claw
M1
OPC
drum
Photo sensitive drum
ed.1
07 Cleaning 501
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
08 IMAGE PROCESSING
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1 Replacing the IP PBA 401

2 IP software update 403
1 Image Processing 501

2 Analogue Image Processing 503
3 Digital Image Processing 505
ed.1
08 Image processing
Dis-/assembly
1 Replacing the IP PBA
Disassembly
1 Before you disassemble the IP PBA:
Use (*4* Function 18 PRM_PRNT) to print out all registration data (one
touch dialing, speed dialing, user data list, etc; these are important if the machine is equipped with the fax PBA).
Take notes of the settings in user mode and others.
Note: *4* Function 18 is only available if the fax PBA has been installed.
2 Remove the platen, and remove the CCD cover.
3 Return the mirror support No. 1 to the home position.
4 Remove the four screws (2), and move the IP cover (1) to the front. Then, re-
move the PBA, first lifting the rear of the PBA.

2
ed.1
08 Image processing 401
5 Remove the size sensor (4). Then, remove the flat cable and all connectors
from the IP PBA (5).
6 Remove the IP PBA (4 screws).

Assembly
Perform the actions which are described above in the reverse order.
Switch on the copier.
Enter service mode.
Perform (*4* Function 17 RAM Init)
Enter the values in service mode (*3* Adjust) which are recorded on the service label on the front door.
6 Enter the values which are recorded on the service label on the IP PBA:
600 PWM MIN
600 PWM MAX
200 PWM MIN
200 PWM MAX
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
402
Execute (*4* Function 03 Auto Shading Start).

Execute (*4* Function 04 PD Print).
Execute (*4* Function 05 200 PWM Print).
Enter the relevant settings/values under (*5* Options) and in user mode.
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
2 IP software update
The software for the image processing system resides in two flash ROMs
(IC103 and IC104). These are of the DIMM-type (Dual In-line Memory Module). There are two ways to update the system software:
1 By replacing the flash ROM.
2 By downloading new software to the existing flash ROM.
Replacing the flash ROM
Switch OFF.
Disconnect the mains supply cable.
Remove the following:- the platen,- the lens cover- and the IP cover.
While opening the claw, lift the ROM to remove.
1
2
3
4
ed.1
5 Holding it at an angle, insert the new flash ROM into the slot.
6 Press flash ROM downwards,
Press it down until click is heard.
7 Refit the removed covers. Connect the mains supply cable. Then, switch ON.
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
The downloading method
Requirements are:
A PC or laptop with the download-utility
A diskette with the new system software installed
A RS232C null-modem cable.
1 If the download utility, and the Oc 3121 system software are already installed
on your laptop, then continue with step 8.

2 Insert the diskette with the download programme in your laptop.
3 Select [Run] on Windows Start menu. Type [A:\Setup.exe] or use the
[Browse] button.
4 When the setup programme starts and for approval of the source drive, click
the [Continue] button.
ed.1
5 When a message appears asking for approval of the destination directory, click
the [Continue] button. In response, a folder will automatically be created with

the name Download. The download programme will be installed in that directory.
6 The following message will appear after a while. Press the [OK] button.
After clicking OK, another message appears. This is the same message, but then in Japanese. In english Windows 95, it looks garbled
7 Now the download programme has been installed. You will find it in the
C:\Download directory.
The next step is to install the file with the new system software for the image
processor. Initially, you will have this file on a floppy, in a compressed format.
You must use the following procedure to install it on your PC.
406
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
8 Start the download programme. You can use the [Start] button in Windows 95.
Select then [Programs] -> [Download] -> [Download]. The next dialog box
will appear
:
9 Select the baud rate to 19200 bps. Then click [OK].

10 Click [Save ROM Image:
11 Click [Create File]:
ed.1
12 When the following message appears, click [OK]:
13 Then, insert the floppy with the system software for the image processor and
click [OK]:
14 The floppy disk must have a volume label 1. Otherwise you will get the fol-
lowing message:
The official floppies will be OK. But if you make a spare copy of the disk, do
this by using a disk duplicating utility. Another option is to change the label to
1 afterwards. (By changing the properties of [3.5 Floppy A:] in Windows Explorer).
When all is correct, the files will be extracted and installed on your PC. You
will return to the [Create File] menu.
Next, you will connect the PC to the copier: with the null-modem cable.
408
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
15 Shut down and switch off the PC and the copier.

16 Connect the null-modem cable to the COM-port of your PC and to the service
connector of the copier.

Cover
17 Switch on the copier and enable service mode.

18 Select (*5* Option 2 > Baud rate). Put this on 0. This specifies 19200 bps.
19 Then set the copier in downloading mode: Use (*4* Function 13). Select (IP
Download). The machine will switch off and on, and then respond with IP
FDIMM download program.
* 4* FUNCTION 13
CANCEL
IP DOWN LOAD
PRCON DOWN LOAD
JUMP
OK
20 Switch on the PC.

21 Start the download programme and select [Download]:
ed.1
22 The next instruction will appear, click [OK].
23 The next screen appears, check if the device name is as shown. Then click [Se-
lect File].
24 Then click on the appropriate file and click [Select].
410
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
25 Ensure that the confirmation is correct:
26 Start the download process by clicking on [START]:
27 The next message will appear during the download process. This will last for
10 minutes (changing language) up to 60 minutes (complete system software

download).
28 Normal termination:
ed.1
29 After clicking [OK], the next instruction appears:
Follow the instructions to finish the procedure.
412
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
1 Image Processing
Outline
The image processing system converts the optical image on the CCD into electrical signals (image signals) for correction and processing.
The routing of the correction functions and processing functions.
Analog processor
PCB
Laser driver
PCB
Image processor PCB
D/A
conversion
A-D
conversion
circuit
Shading
correction
circuit
Image
processing
circuit
Binary
processing
Laser
driver
circuit
CCD
Binary
Reproduction
processing ratio
for fax
processing
Video signal
switching circuit
Command conversion
circuit
Protocol controller PCB
ed.1
CORE/IP
Board
G3 FAX
Board/NCU
Printer
Board
Network I/F
Board
PBA
Correction/processing
Analogue
processor PBA
Image processor PBA
Core/IP PBA
FAX PBA
Protocol controller PBA
502
TSM Oc 3121
Destination
A/D conversion
ABC (automatic background
compensation)
To the image processor

PBA
Shading correction
Reproduction ratio processing
Filter processing
Negative/positive reversal
Framing/blanking
Density processing
Binary processing (for copy images)
To the laser driver PBA

and the Core/IP PBA
Binary processing (for fax images)

Reproduction ratio processing
(for fax images and printer default
transmission)
To the FAX PBA

through the Fax motherboard. (also, to the electronic sorter)
Coding/decoding
Rotation
To the telephone line
Protocol control
Protocol exchange (between
printer PBA and Network Interface PBA)
2 Analogue Image Processing

Outline
The Analogue processor PBA converts CCD drive signals and CCD output
signals (Analogue signals) to digital signals. (It also executes AE measurement.)
CCD/CCD Driver
The copiers CCD is a linear image sensor consisting of a single line of 7500
photocells. The signals subjected to photoelectric conversion in the photocell
unit are forwarded to the CCD drive circuit. (The even-number pixels and the
odd-number pixels are sent separately.) The CCD drive circuit synthesises the
signals coming separately in even-number units and odd-number units for output to the A-D conversion circuit.
ed.1
A-D Conversion Circuit
The A-D conversion circuit converts Analogue signals from the CCD to 8-bit
digital image signals.
In general, the A-D conversion signal performs A-D conversion based on the
reference voltage. As such, increasing or decreasing the reference voltage will
increase or decrease the dynamic range (difference between maximum output
level and minimum output level). Thus affecting the signal level after A-D conversion. (This means faithful digital conversion of Analogue inputs is not possible.)
The ABC circuit takes advantage of this fact. The reference voltage is varied
according to the A-D conversion circuit output signal level to vary the dynamic
range. Also, cancelling the background density of documents. (This processing
is executed for every main scanning line.)
ABC (automatic background control)
If priority on speed is selected, the ABC circuit operates as part of AE (automatic exposure control settings. Image signals after A-D conversion are returned to the ABC circuit for the following processing.
Identifies the A-D conversion circuit output signal level.
Varies the reference voltage, based on the results of identification.
The reference voltage obtained here is sent to the A-D conversion circuit. The
priority on speed function can be adjusted in service mode (*3*).
504
TSM Oc 3121
3 Digital Image Processing

Outline
The digital image processing serves to process image signals from various
PBA.
Shading Correction
1
2
3
4
The output of the CCD will not be constant for the following factors (even
when the light reflected by a document with even density is projected to the
CCD).
The sensitivity of each pixel of the CCD is not the same.
The variations of the lens: centre versus edges.
The variations of the exposure lamp, between the centre and the ends.
The exposure lamp can deteriorate.
Shading correction is performed to correct the above discrepancies. Shading
correction may be executed for each copy, or executed automatically, according to the target value determined in service mode.
ed.1
Shading Automatic Correction
Shading automatic correction is executed by using service mode (* 4 *; FUNCTION).

In this type of correction, the density of blank paper and the density of the exposure reference strip is measured and stored in memory. The stored data is
computed and, subsequently, used as the target value for shading correction.
Exposure reference strip
Scanning lamp
mirror 2
mirror 1
Lens
CCD
mirror 3
Shading Correction
Shading correction is executed during the scanning of each document.

The light from the exposure lamp is directed at the exposure reference strip.
The reflected light is turned into digital signals by the analogue image processing block. The reflected light data, which was converted into digital signals, is
sent to the shading circuit of the image processor PBA.
The shading circuit compares the pre-determined target value and shading data
and computes the difference as the shading correction value.
The shading correction value is used to correct variations among CCD pixels
that occur during the scanning. This is to ensure a specific image density level.
506
TSM Oc 3121
CCD output
Characteristics
after correction
Target value
Measurement
data
Characteristics before
correction
Exposure reference
strip
Document density
Total Processing
The total processing block handles the following:

Reproduction ratio
Shift
Mirror image
Slanting
Repeat
Folding
Reproduction Ratio
1 Horizontal Reproduction Ratio (forward scanning direction)
When writing image data into memory, data units may be skipped for reduction. When reading data from memory, data units are read several times (enlargement).
2 Vertical Reproduction Ratio (reverse scanning direction)
The speed of the scanner movement is varied. This changes the width of scanning a document. The table below gives an impression of how the copier processes reproduction ratios.
3 Zoom Fine-Adjustment
The vertical reproduction ratio or the horizontal reproduction ratio using zoom
adjustment in user mode (in 0.1% increments).
For instance, for adjustment width +1% (both X and Y),
50% -> 51%
100% -> 101%
400% -> 401%
ed.1
Direct
Reduce
Enlarge
All data is written

as-it-is into memory.
To reduce to 1/2, every

other data unit is
skipped during the
writing into memory.
To enlarge to 200%, all

data units are written
as-it-is ,but the data
units are read twice
when reading from
memory.
The speed at which the

scanner is moved is
increased. This
increases the width of
the scanning of the document in relation to a
single pixel.
The speed at which the

scanner is moved is
decreased. This
decreases the width of
the scanning of the document in relation to a
single pixel.
Document
(image data)
(writing)
Line memory
(reading)
Copy
Reproduction
ratio in forward scanning direction
Reproduction
ratio in reverse
scanning
direction
Shift Processing
Samples of image shifting, and conceptual outlines of shifting in the forward

scanning direction and in the reverse scanning direction.
508
TSM Oc 3121
Shift in
the reverse
Shaft
in mainscanning
scanningdirection
direction
<Document>
<Original>
Shift in the reverse scanning

Shift in sub scannig direction
direction
The
reverse
scanSub
scanning
direction
ning
direction <--
The Main
forward
scanning <Copy>
scanning
<Copy>
direction
--> direction
a b c
a b c
Principle
single
scanning
lineline
is read
Principle : When
Whendata
dataforfora a
single
scanning
is
from
memory,
readingreading
starts with
a midway
readline
from
line memory,
is started
pixel.
Or,
the
timing
at
which
the
data
of
the
with a midway pixel or the timing at which
first
pixel of
is read
is delayed,
the data
the first
pixel isthereby
read isshifting
delayed,
the
pixel
thereby shifting pixel position.
<Copy>
<Copy>
a b c
a b c
Principle
Principle :
The
position
is varied,
the
The
position
or theortiming
timing
at which
document
at which
the the
original
illuminating
system
is started
illuminating
system
is started is
is varied,
varied to
to shift
shiftthe
theposition
position of
of the
the image.
image.
Shifting
the forward
Shifting in
in Main
Scanningscanning
Direction
direction
Main scanning derection
a b c
a b c
a b c
Not
Notread
read
The
reading
Reading
startsstarts with this pixel
with this pixel.
<memory>
<Memory>
a b c
--> TheMain
forward
scanning
scanning
direction
a b c
a b c
a b c
The Reading
reading starts
startswith
withthis
this
pixel
pixel.
Not read
Not read.
The image of a document may be shifted by combining shifts in the forward

scanning direction and shifts in the reverse scanning directions.
1 Corner Shift
The co-ordinates (X1, Y1) of the corner of a specific area is moved to any of
the four corners of the copy.
2 Centre Shift
The co-ordinates (Xm, Ym) are computed from the size of the area to be shifted and the size of the copy, so that the margins at the top and the bottom and
the margins at the left and the right will be identical; the area will be moved to
X1 and Y1.
Note: Xm= (Xmax(X2X1))/2, Ym= (Ymax(Y2Y1))/2
3 Free Shift
The co-ordinates (X1, Y1) of a specific area is moved to a specific point (Xp,
Yp).
ed.1
(0,0)
1 Corner
CornerShift
Shift
X1
(Xmax)
X 2 (Xmax)
(0,0)
Paper
Copy paper
Y1
Y2
(Vmax)
(Ymax)
Area to
Area
to be
beshifted
shifted(may
Document
be entire
original)
be entire
(document)
Original (may
CenterShift
shift
2 Centre
Xm
ym
Ym
xm
(Xmax)
Xmax
Paper
Copy paper
xm
ym
Ymax
3 Free
FreeShift
shift
Xp
Y1
X1
(Xmax)
Xmax
Paper
Copy paper
Yp
(Ymax)
Ymax
Reduced Image Composition
Reduced image composition mode may either of the following:

1 2-on-1 mode: in which two documents are reduced for copying on a single
sheet of copy paper.

2 4-on-1 mode: in which four documents are reduced for copying on a single
sheet of copy paper.

Executing these modes requires control of a combination of:- reproduction ratio processing,- shift processing,- and overlay processing.
For reproduction ratio processing: a ratio is computed, based on the size of the
document and the size of the copy.
Formula for Lengthways Direction
a:copy paper length (document length x 2)
b:copy paper length document length
Formula for Widthways Direction
c:copy paper width (document width x 2)
d:copy paper width document width
If the reproduction ratio in lengthways direction and that in widthways direction are different, the smaller of the two will be selected. However, the reproduction ratio will be between 25% and 800%.
Shift processing and overlay processing are controlled as explained on the next
page. The table shows which modes are available in relation to different combinations of the RDF and the duplexing unit.
510
TSM Oc 3121
Mode
Duplexing
unit
RDF
Lengthwise
ratio
Widthwise
ratio
2-on-1
(overlay)
Required
Not required
2-on-1
(continuous)
Not required
Required
2-on-1
(two-sided)
Required
Required
4-on-1
Not required
Not required
2-on-1 mode
(continuous,
two-sided)
Document (A4 x 2)
Mode
Orientation of docu- Image after copy- Remarks

ments on the platen ing (arrow indicating feeding
direction
Book mode Document

RDF in use
Paper
Two documents are

placed on the platen,
side by side.
ed.1
Copy (A4R x 1)
Executed in reduced copying

only
May be executed for two sided
copying
When feeding documents, this
uses the reversing function of
the RDF, thereby changing the
sequence of the documents (2
then 1 instead of 1 then 2)
2-on-1 (overlay)
Document (A4 x 2)
Copy (A4R x 1)
2
Mode
Book mode
Orientation of documents on the platen
Image after copy- Remarks

ing (arrow indicating feeding
location)
Document
Copy
Combines the following:

Reduced copying
Image shifting
Overlay copying
2
1
RDF in use
1st
1st
copying
copying
2nd
2nd
copying
copying
Document
Copy

Reduced copying
Image shifting
Overlay copying
2nd
2nd
copying
copying
TSM Oc 3121
1st
1st
copying
512
copying
4-on-1
4 documents (A4)
1 copy (A4)
1 2
3 4
Copying
Book mode 1st copying
Orientation of
the documents
on the platen
Image after cop- Remarks

ying (arrow indicating the
feeding direction
Document
Copy
2nd copying
Document

Reduced copying
Image shifting
Overlay copying
Copy
3 4
1st copying
Document
4
2nd copying
Copy
When feeding documents, this uses the

reversing function of
the RDF. This changes
the sequence of the documents. (4 3 2 1 instead
of 3 4 1 2)
Document

Reduced copying
Image shifting
Overlay copying
Copy
1 2
RDF in use
3 4
3 4
1 2
1 2
Mode
Enlarged Image Composition
In enlarged image composition, the reduced image of a document is returned

to its document size. It may be any of the following:
2-on-1, generating 2 outputs
2-on-1 two-sided, generating 4 outputs
4-on-1, generating 4 outputs
4-on-1 two-sided, generating 8 outputs.
ed.1
1 2-on-1, Generating 2 Outputs

Document
Outputs
Original
Outputs
1 2
1 + 2
1) 2-on-1
1) 2-on-1
Outputs
Document
B Original
X
Outputs
1
2
2) 2-on-1
2) 2-on-1
The image (document width) of continuous 2-on-1 is divided vertically for

output.
The image (document length) of continuous 2-on-1 is divided horizontally
for output.
Documents may be placed on the platen or in the RDF.
2 2-on-1 Two-Sided, Generating 4 Outputs

Document
Outputs
Original
1 2
Face
Face
Outputs
3 4
Back
Back
Document
1
2
1)
--> One
sided
1)1-on-2
1-on-2two-sided
two-sided
One
sided
Outputs
Original
4+3 +2 +1
Outputs
3
4
4+3 +2 +1
2)2)1-on-2
two-sided
--> One
sided
1-on-2
two-sided
One
sided
Y
Face
Face
514
Back
Back
The image (document width) of continuous 2-on-1 is divided vertically for

output.
The document (document length) is divided horizontally for output.
TSM Oc 3121
3 4-on-1, Generating 4 Outputs

Outputs
Document
Original
Output
1 2
3 4
4+3 + 2+ 1
No number of effective areas of the last document is specified; i.e., if section

4 of the document is blank, output 4 will be blank.
4 4-on-1 Two-Sided, Generating 8 Outputs

Outputs
Document
Outputs
Original
1 2
3 4
Face
Face
5 6
7 8
Back
Back
8+ 7 + 6+ 5
+4+3+2+1
No number of effective areas of the last document is specified; i.e., the same
as in the case of 4-on-1, generating 4 outputs.
ed.1
Repeat
Slant
<Document>
< Original >
Forward scanning --> direction
<Document>
< Original >
Forward scanning --> direction
Main scanning
direction
Reverse
scanning
direcSub scanning
direction
Reverse
scanning
direcSub scanning
direction
Main scanning direction
Address S
Address S
Address E
Address E
<copy>
<
Copy >
a b c
<copy>
< Copy
a b c
a a a a
Principle
When reading data for a single scan
from RAM, a start address (address
S) and an end address (address E) are
specified. Then, reading is started at
address S. When address E is
reached, a return is made to address
S. A specific image is repeated by repeating these operations.
>
a b c
Principle
When reading data for a single scan
from RAM, the start address is shifted for each reading. Thereby slanting
the image.
Address
Image Signal
Image Signal
Address
1 pixel (1 bye)
1 pixel (1 byte)
Reading
516
TSM Oc 3121
Reading
1st line
2nd line
3rd line
4th line
Sharpness/Filter Processing
In sharpness/filter processing, computations are performed so that a crisp or

soft image may be obtained as specified on the control panel.
Figure B shows the output level occurring as the result of selecting sharpness
mode weak for the image data shown in figure A.
In sharpness mode weak, the variations in the density of an image are
smoothed out to generate a soft image. (The effect may be used to make moir
less conspicuous.)
Figure C shows the output level occurring when sharpness mode strong is selected.
In sharpness mode strong, the variations in the density of an image are emphasised to generate a crisp image.
Black

White
After output
A
Black
Black
White

White
After output
B sharpness mode weak
ed.1

After output
C sharpness mode strong
AI Outline processing
AI outline processing emphasises the edges of characters.

When image data input is as shown in figure D, the CPU assumes the presence
of characters and initiates outline processing.
Black
Black
White

White
When image data input is as shown in figure F, the CPU assumes the presence
of a photo and does not initiate outline processing.
Black

White
Negative/Positive Reversal
The negative/positive reversal circuit executes the following image processing:

Negative/positive reversal
Framing
Blanking
Pasting
518
TSM Oc 3121
a) Negative/Positive Reversal
Level conversion is executed so that the white area of a document will be black
and the black area will be white on copies.
Output level
(Document)
(Copy)
Input level
b) Framing/Blanking
For framing/blanking, areas may be as many as 4 areas; for a rectangle, as
many as 10 points may be specified.
Framing
The signals representing non-specified areas are forced to represent white.
Area
Blanking
As opposed to framing, the signals representing the specified area are forced
to represent white.
Area
c) Pasting
This function may be used when the Retention Memory Unit (option) is installed. Images stored in the retention memory in advance and the image on the
platen are synthesised for output.
ed.1
Density Processing
a) Logarithmic Correction
The CCD output has linear characteristics in relation to the light reflected by a
document. However, the density of a document as perceived by the human eye
does not show linear characteristics in relation to the light reflected by the document.
The relationship between the density as perceived by the naked eye and the
output of the CCD are as shown.
CCD output
Black
White
Density of document
To correct the discrepancy, the correction curve is used to execute level conversion.
Output level
Input level
520
TSM Oc 3121
b) Density Processing
1
2
3
4
The correction curve for density processing varies according to the following:
Setting of the Copy Density key on the control panel.
Results of AE measurement
Selection of text and photo mode, or photo mode
Results of OPC resistance
According to the setting of the Copy Density, the curve will be for darker or
lighter: see figure A.
When text/photo or photo mode is selected, the curve shown in figure B will
be selected to ensure good gradation and faithful reproduction of the density of
a document.
Copy density
Copy density
Text mode
Darker
Text and photo

mode, and photo
mode
Lighter
Text mode
Density of document
A
Density of document
B
The AE may be priority on speed (default) or priority on image quality.

(Here, the discussions are on priority on image quality; for priority on
speed, see ((((()
In priority on image quality, the density correction curve is varied according
to the type of document.
In priority on image quality, the scanner is moved forward to suit the size of
the detected document, thereby executing full scanning for measuring the density of the entire document.
ed.1
In this manner, the density of the background and the density of the image are
measured to classify the document into any of the following three types:
1 Background Type Document
Documents which are white, or light in density, carrying text.
2 Reversal Type Document
Documents which are coloured, or light in density, carrying light text or reversed text.
3 Other Documents
Documents with slight variation in density (e.g., photos).
Depending on the type of document, one of the following three AE tables is
selected to generate a correction table suitable for density correction of the
document.
Adjustment of the priority on image function in service mode (*3*); see
(((((()
When AE is executed using the RDF, AE is initiated for each document which
is picked up.
In page separation, a signal AE scan is used to check the density of all documents for the selection of an AE table.
Copy density
Copy density
Density of document
AE Table for Background Type
Copy density
Density of document
Density of docuAE Table for Reversal Type AE Table for Other Type
Binary Processing
The binary processing circuit converts multiple-value image signals into binary signals. The method used is called the PD method, which enables better reproduction of highlight areas than the median density (MD) retention method.
Binary processing is executed in text mode, and text and photo mode.
D-A Conversion
The D-A conversion circuit is used to convert multiple-value image signals

into analogue signals. D-A conversion is executed in photo mode.
522
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
10 RDF
Contents
Adjustments
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Adjusting the RDF Switch (MS1) 301

Switch (MS2) for the upper cover 302
Adjusting the height of the RDF 302
Adjusting the Solenoid SL2 303
Adjusting the Solenoid SL3 305
Adjusting the document width (VR1) 305
Parallel transport 2 307
Adjusting the parallel transport 2 309
Adjusting the transport distance 311
Adjusting the Sheet Distance: in Image Composition Mode 314
Adjusting the Switch (MS1) 317
Adjusting the pressure of the separation belt 318
Adjustment of the Electrical System 324
Location of the electrical Parts 327
Components on the PBA: variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED),
: check pins. 330
ed.1
10 RDF
Dis-/assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
External View 401

Removing the RDF 402
Removing the Body Cover 403
Lock for the side guide 404
Removing the Pick-Up Motor Unit 405
Removing the feeding motor 406
Removing the belt motor 407
Replacing the belt motor unit 410
Removing the clutch unit 411
Pick-up roller unit 412
Pick-up roller 415
Separation Belt 416
Feeding Rollers 417
Registration roller 420
Delivery and reversing roller 424
Delivery Roller (copier mode) 429
Delivery Roller (fax mode) 430
Reversing guide 431
Removing the stop solenoid 434
Fixing the stop solenoid 434
Stamping Solenoid SL4 435
Feeding Belt 438
Cleaning the belt 440
Sensors 440
Cleaning the sensor S1 441
TSM Oc 3121
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Features 501
Specifications 502
Nomenclature 504
Operation 506
Functional design 508
Communication with the copier 509
Inputs to the RDF Control PBA 510
Outputs from the RDF Control PBA 512
Principle of operation 513
Checking the quality of the documents 519
Pick-up of documents for copying 526
Turning the documents over 534
Image Composition Mode 536
Delivery 546
Stamping function 555
Controlling the pick-up motor 557
Controlling the belt motor 559
Detecting of jammed documents 561
Document is positioned incorrectly 564
Power supply 567
Electrical diagrams
1 RDF
ed.1
701
10 RDF
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the RDF Switch (MS1)
Note: Two micro-switches are fitted. These prevent operation of the RDF when
either the body is opened, or the upper cover is opened. MS1 monitors the
body, MS2 monitors the upper cover.
As a rule, skip the following adjustment; make adjustments only when necessary.
1 Remove the cover.
2 Open and close the RDF. Adjust the retaining plate (2), until switch MS1 (1)
switches on and off when the lower edge of the RDF is between 10 and 100
mm from the platen.
(1)
(2)
RDF
10 ~ 100 mm
Copier
ed.1
10 RDF 301
2 Switch (MS2) for the upper cover

1 Check that both the switch for the front cover and the switch for the rear upper
cover are actuated: when the upper cover is closed.
3 Adjusting the height of the RDF

1
2
3
4
Remove the rear cover.

Close the RDF, and check that there is a 0.2 0.1 mm gap.
To adjust, loosen the nut and turn the bolt of the appropriate support.
After adjustment, tighten the nuts to lock.
*Approximately two sheets of paper (80 g/m2) may be inserted.
RDFRDF body
Rubber
foot
(front)
Rubber
foot
(front)
aa
Support
Support
Rubber foot
Rubber foot
(rear)
(rear)
The
rear docHorizontal
ument
guide
a=0.2
+ 0.1 mm
a=0.2+0.1mm
size plate
Rear
cover
Rear
cover
(copier)
(copier)
NutNut
Bolt
Bolt
Copier
Copier
Platen glass
Copyboard
5 Also, at the front, check that both of the rubber feet are touching the platen
glass.
302
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
4 Adjusting the Solenoid SL2

1 Prepare a test sheet.
Cut a sheet of A4 or LTR copy paper (64 g/m2) lengthways into strips of about
70 mm wide.
70 mm (approx.)
Vertical direction
Press switch SW3.

The pick-up roller will rotate. The roller will stop rotating when it is at the
pick-up position for the fax mode.
2 Remove the front cover and remove the cover from the RDF control PBA.
3 Shift bit 5 and 6 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
4 When the pick-up roller stops, push the switch SW3.
The motor will stop.
ed.1
10 RDF 303
5 Push the plunger (1) of the solenoid SL2. Adjust the position of SL2 so that
rollers (2) and (3) are touching.

(2)
(3)
(1)
6 Push in the test sheet, prepared in step 1, between the delivery roller and the
pick-up roller while the plunger of the paper retaining solenoid is fully pushed;
check to make sure that the delivery roller rotates when the test sheet is pushed
in to the pick-up roller of the rear and the front.
Test sheet
Note: When the test sheet is pulled, the one-way clutch prevents the delivery
roller from rotating.
7 If the delivery roller does not rotate when the test sheet is inserted, repeat the
adjustment: starting with step 3.

8 Shift the bits back to the initial positions: DIP switch DSW1.
304
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
5 Adjusting the Solenoid SL3

1 Remove the cover.
2 Adjust the position of the solenoid (1), so that the stroke is 4.5 mm.
(1)
6 Adjusting the document width (VR1)

1 Loosen the screw (2), and remove the side guide.
(1)
(2)
2 Fully open the rear guide (3) and the front guide (4).
(3)
(3)
ed.1
10 RDF 305
3 Fit the gear (5).

(5)
4 Turn the width gear (6) fully counter-clockwise. Then, turn it clockwise (a half
of a tooth).
Equivalent of
1/2 tooth
(6)
5 Fit the lock for the side guide. Adjust the document width.
(8)
(7)
(9)
(6)
306
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
7 Parallel transport 2
Parallel transport 2
1 Remove the RDF cover (1 screw).
Cover
Cover
Screw
Screw
2 Shift bit 1 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
1
1
CB1
4
J1
1
J2
2
J3
1 J14 5
J8
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
J10
1
LED1
LED2
DSW1 SW1 SW3 SW2
6
1
TP2
SW1
SW3
SW2
ON
9
11
1
2
J9
23
24
3
1
2
1
2
12
J5
2
J13
J6
J7
J11
J12
J4
3 Place a sheet of A4 or 11x 17 paper (80 g/m2) on the document tray.

4 Press once on the switch (SW3) on the RDF control PBA.
The paper will be picked up, and stopped on the platen.
5 Open the RDF slowly, and ensure that the difference between l1 and l2 is 1 mm
or less.
The rear document
guide
l1
l2
150 mm
Paper
Standards:
* l1 - l2 = 0 1 mm
ed.1
10 RDF 307
6 If the difference is excessive, loosen the nut at the rear of the right hinge to ad-
just it.
Right hinge
7 When turning the adjusting screw, force the hinge in the direction of the arrow
A.
A
Hinge (right)
Nut
Adjusting screw
Right support
Turning the Adjusting Screw and l1 / l2
Rotation
L1 and L2
Clockwise
l1 < l2
Counter-clockwise
l1 > l2
8 After adjustment, fix the adjusting screw with the nut.
308
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
8 Adjusting the parallel transport 2

Note: Adjust the parallel transport 2 only after adjusting parallel transport.
8
1
1
6
5
CB1
4
J1
1
8
J2
2
J3
1 J14 5
J8
J10
1
LED1
DSW1 SW1 SW3 SW2

6
1
TP1
SW1
SW3
SW2
ON
LED2
9
11
J9
1
2
23
24
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
2
12
J5
2
J13
J6
J7
J11
J12
J4

4 Open the RDF slowly, and ensure that l3 is as indicated at the centre of the copy
paper and that distances a and b are 1 mm. or more.

The rear document guide
L3= 2.3 1 mm
A3 document
a >= 1
b >= 1
The rear document guide
a
L3= 11.1 1 mm
document 11x 17
a >= 1
b >= 1
ed.1
10 RDF 309
5 If the distance is incorrect, loosen the fixing screw and the positioning screw
on the RDF document tray. Adjust the position of the RDF document tray.
delivery tray
Fixing screw
Fixing screw
Positioning screw
RDF Original Tray Movement and L3

Direction of movement L3
Decreases
Increases
6 After adjustment, tighten the screws securing the RDF document tray.
310
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
9 Adjusting the transport distance

Note: Adjust the transport distance only after adjusting the parallel transport
1 and the parallel transport 2.
SW1
SW3
SW2
Copier mode
1 Shift bits 1 and 4 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.

4 Open the RDF slowly, and measure the document stop position l4; then, close
the RDF slowly.

platen
L4
document
Standards:
Stop position L4 = 11.6 1mm
ed.1
10 RDF 311
5 Press the switches SW1 and SW2 to adjust the transport distance.
Each press on the switch changes the stop position by 0.34 mm. When the position is appropriate, press the switch SW3 once to discharge the document and
store the value.
Change of the position of the document
Push switch
Direction of change
SW1
Trailing edge
SW2
Leading edge
RDF
document
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
platen
Example
If the stop position l4 is 10 mm from the leading edge of the glass platen when
the switch SW3 on the RDF controller was pressed once, the document was
stopped on the glass platen, and the RDF was opened. Close the RDF leaving
the copy paper as is.
To change the gap 1.6 mm toward the trailing edge: press the switch SW1 five
times. 1.6 mm/0.34 = 4.70.
After pressing the switch SW1 five times, press once on switch SW3. The paper will be ejected and the value will be stored.
SW1
SW3
SW2
Fax mode
1 Shift bits 1, 4, and 5 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
312
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
2 Place an A3 or 11 x 17 document (80 g/m2) on the document tray.

3 Press once on the switch SW3 on the RDF control PBA.
The paper will be picked up, and carried onto the platen.
4 Open the RDF slowly, and measure the stop position l4 of the document; then,
close the RDF slowly.

platen
L4
document
Standards:
Stop position l4 = 11.6 1mm
5 Press the switches SW1 and SW2 on the RDF control PBA to adjust the trans-
port distance. Each press on the switch changes the transport by 0.34 mm.
When the position is correct, press once on the switch SW3. The paper will be
ejected and the value will be stored.
Direction of change
Push switch
Direction of change
SW1
Trailing edge
SW2
Leading edge
RDF
document
Leading
edge
ed.1
Trailing
edge
platen
10 RDF 313
10 Adjusting the Sheet Distance: in Image Composition Mode

Adjust the sheet distance after adjusting the height of the RDF and adjusting the parallel transport 1 .
SW1
SW3
SW2
Copier mode
1 Shift bits 1, 2, and 4 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
2 Place two sheets of A4 or LTR paper (80 g/m2) on the document tray.
Be sure to use A4 paper for an A/B-configured RDF and to use LTR paper for
an INCH-configured RDF.
4 Open the RDF slowly, and measure the distance l5 between the two sheets of
paper; then, close the RDF slowly.
platen
Paper
Paper
L5
Standards:
Sheet gap L5 = 0 3 mm
314
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
5 Use the switches SW1 and SW2 on the RDF control PBA to adjust the trans-
port distance. Each press on the switch changes the sheet distance by 0.34 mm.
When the position is appropriate, press once on the switch SW3. The paper
will be ejected and the value will be stored.
Sheet gap
Push switch
Sheet gap
SW1
Increases
SW2
Decreases
6 After adjusting parallel transport 1 , adjusting the parallel transport 2, ad-
justing the transport distance, and adjusting the sheet distance in image composition mode, switch off. Shift all bits to OFF: DIP switch (DSW1).
Switch ON, and check that the RDF functions correctly.
RDF-configuration
Document size (length in feeding direction)
A/B
220 to 250mm
INCH
220 to 260mm
Fax mode
1 Shift bits 1, 2, 4, and 5 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
SW1
SW3
SW2
Note: Shift bit 7 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1). Only if the document size (length
in feeding direction) is as follows:
2 Place two sheets of A4 or LTR paper (80 g/m2) on the document tray.
Be sure to use A4 paper for an A/B-configured RDF and to use LTR paper for
an INCH-configured RDF.
ed.1
10 RDF 315
4 Open the RDF slowly, and measure the distance l5 between the two sheets;
then, close the RDF slowly.

platen
Paper
Paper
L5
Standards:
Sheet gap L5 = 0 3 mm
5 Use the switches SW1 and SW2 on the RDF control PBA to adjust the trans-
port distance. Each press on the switch changes the sheet distance by 0.34 mm.
When the position is appropriate, press once on the switch SW3. The paper
will be ejected and the value will be stored.
Sheet gap
Push switch
Sheet distance L5
SW1
Increases
SW2
Decreases
6 After parallel transport 2 , adjusting the sheet distance to the rear document
guide, adjusting the transport distance, and adjusting the sheet distance in image composition mode, switch OFF. Shift all bits to OFF: DIP switch (DSW1).
Switch ON. Check that the RDF functions correctly.
Note: Shift bit 7 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1). Only if the document size (length
in feeding direction) is as follows:
316
RDF-configuration
Document size (length

in feeding direction)
A/B
220 to 250mm
INCH
220 to 260mm
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
11 Adjusting the Switch (MS1)

1 .Remove the cover.
2 Open and close the RDF. Adjust the retaining plate (2) until switch MS1 (1)
switches on and off when the lower edge of the RDF is between 10 and 100
mm from the platen.
(1)
(2)
(1) RDF switch (MS1), (2) Retaining plate
Right Hinge
RDF
10~100 mm
Copier
ed.1
10 RDF 317
12 Adjusting the pressure of the separation belt

Symptoms prior to adjustment:
- documents start to skew
- because of wear on the separation roller or the feeding roller.
Also, the adjustments should be carried out after replacing the separation belt
or the feeding roller.
Outline
The pressure of the separation belt varies for copier mode and fax mode.
Turning the adjusting screw varies the pressure on the belt.
To adjust the pressure for copier mode, adjust the two outer separator tracks.
For fax mode, adjust the centre separator track.
Gauge
Separation roller
Adjusting screw
Separation belt
Belt tension
Test sheet for the belt tension
Feeding roller
Pressure of the
separation belt
Preparing for Adjustment

1 Prepare a test sheet for the belt tension.
Cut an A4 or LTR sheet of copy paper (64 or 80 g/m2) into strips of about 70
mm wide.
Put a length of cellophane tape on both sides, and make a hole.
70 mm (approx.)
1/3
1/3
1/3
Vertical direction
paper(A4)
10 mm (approx.)
Stick the tape on both sides
Make a hole
70 mm (approx.)
35 mm
20 mm (approx.)
300 mm (approx.)
318
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Copier mode
1 Remove the cover from the RDF control (1 screw).
Screw
Cover
2 Shift bit 2 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA. Select the
3
2
1
3 Place five to ten sheets of A4 LTR paper on the document tray. Press the switch
SW3 on the RDF control PBA: to select continuous pick-up and delivery
mode.
4 After approximately 2 minutes, press the switch SW3 once again to stop the
operation.
5 Shift bit 2 to OFF: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA. Then, shift
bit 6 to ON, to select the cleaning mode for the separation belt and the feeding
roller. (service mode for copier mode). Remove the paper from the document
tray.
continuous pick-up and delivery mode. Switch ON.
ed.1
10 RDF 319
6 Press the switch SW3, on the RDF control PBA.
Let the test sheet you have prepared move into the separation assembly at the
front to measure the power of feeding at the front.
Points to note, when measuring the belt tension
Check that the three separator belts are in contact with the test sheet.
Take care to pull the test sheet straight, in line with the separator belt.
Check the tension only when the trailing edge of the test sheet is aligned with
the edge of the document tray.
Upper cover Test sheet
Gauge
Rear
While taking measurements, keep the

trailing edge of the test sheet in line with
Front
Spring gauge: range 0 - 600 g.
Measuring the belt tension (front)
7 Open the cover of the RDF.

8 Loosen the lock nut (1). Turn the screw (2) until the correct tension is reached.
Tighten the lock nut (1).
glued to lock
(1)
(2)
glued to lock
320
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Test sheet
tension in gr.
64 g/m2 paper
52020
80 g/m2 paper
57020
Guide: the tension should be equal at the front and at the rear.
Turning
Tension
Clockwise
Decreases
Counter-clockwise
Increases
9 Adjust the tension at the rear in the same manner as the front.
10 Check the tension at the front and at the rear. When correct, tighten the lock
nut.
11 Shift bit 6 to OFF: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA. This switch-
es off the service mode.
Guide: A 90 turn of the adjusting screw changes the power of feeding by about
25 g. Adjustment Screw and Power of Feeding
12 Refit the cover over the RDF control PBA.
ed.1
10 RDF 321
Fax mode
1 Remove the cover from the RDF control PBA.
Screw
Screw
Cover
RDF controller cover
2 Shift bits 5 and 6 to ON: DIP switch (DSW1) of the RDF control PBA. Select
the cleaning mode for the separation belt and the feeding roller: for fax in service mode.
3 Press the switch (SW3), on the RDF control PBA. Allow the test sheet to feed
into the separator, so that the tension can be checked.

Points to note, when measuring the belt tension
Check that the three separator belts are in contact with the test sheet.
Take care to pull the test sheet straight, in line with the separator belt.
Check the tension only when the trailing edge of the test sheet is aligned with
Upper cover Test sheet
Gauge
Centre
While taking measurements, keep the trailing edge of the test sheet in line with the
edge of the document tray.
Measuring the tension (centre )
322
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
4 Open the cover of the RDF.

5 Loosen the lock nut (1). Turn the screw (2) until the correct tension is reached.
Tighten the lock nut (1).
(1)
(2)
glued to lock
Test sheet
tension in gr.
64 g/m2 paper
27020
80 g/m2 paper
30020
Tension
Turning
Tension
Clockwise
Decreases
Counter-clockwise
Increases
Adjusting screw and tension

Guide: A 90 turn of the adjusting screw changes the power of feeding by about 25 g.
6 After adjustment, tighten the nut.

7 Shift bit 5 and to OFF: DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA. This
will switch off the service mode.
ed.1
10 RDF 323
13 Adjustment of the Electrical System

After replacing the main components
Main components
RDF control PBA
Adjustments
The level of the document sensor (S1).

And the registration sensor (S3).
The width of the document (VR1).
The parallel transport 1 .
The sheet gap in the image composition mode.
The sensor for the document tray (S).
The level of the sensor in the document tray (S1).

The registration sensor (S3).
Registration sensor
(S3).
The level of the document sensor (S1).

And the registration sensor (S3).
Document width (VR1)
The document width detection (VR1).
Adjusting the sensor (S1) in the document tray, and the registration sensor (S3)
1 Remove the RDF cover.
Shift bit 4 to ON : DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
324
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
2 With no document on the document tray, press the switch (SW3) on the RDF
control PBA.
LED 1 and 2 switch ON . On the RDF control PBA.
If LED 1 and 2 fail to switch ON within 30 seconds, there is probably a fault
in the sensor (S1), for document tray , or a fault on the RDF control PBA.
3 After checking that LED 1 and 2 have switched ON , press the switch (SW3)
on the RDF control PBA.
The two LED are switched off. The functional test is finished.
4 Shift bit 4 to ON : DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA.
Adjusting the document width (VR1)
1 Prepare one sheet of A4 or LTR Paper.
2 Remove the RDF cover. Set the DIP switch (DSW1) on the RDF control PBA
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
(using A4 paper)
as follows.
Note: Different settings are used for different sizes of paper.
(using LTR paper)
3 Place the paper on the document tray, in A4/LTR orientation. Adjust the side
guide to suit the paper.
ed.1
10 RDF 325
4 Press the switch (SW3), on the RDF control PBA.
LED1 is on when the RDF control starts to read data.

Then, LED1 is off, and LED2 is on.
5 After LED2 is ON, place the paper in the document tray. This time in
A4R/LTRR orientation. Adjust the side guides.
6 Press the switch (SW3), on the RDF control PBA.
LED1 and LED2 are on, on the RDF control PBA . The function test is finished.
If an error is found, LED1 and LED2 start to flash.
7 Shift the bits back to the initial positions. DIP switch (DSW1).
326
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
14 Location of the electrical Parts
Motors, Solenoids, and Sensors
LED 101
ed.1
LED 102
10 RDF 327
Symbol
328
Name
Number
Description
Motor
M1
M2
M3
M4
Pick-up motor
Feeding
Belt
Re-circulating
Clutch
CL1
Clutch
Brake
BK1
Belt stopping
Solenoid
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
Stop plate
Paper retainer
Paper deflector
Stamp
Variable resistor
VR1
Width detection
Microswitch
S1
MS2
RDF open or closed

Upper cover
Photo-transistor
S1
S3
Paper in the document tray

Registration
Sensor
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
Upper cover
Pick-up roller
Delivery roller
Pick-up
Reversal
Feeding clock
Clock sensor
Registration clock
Delivery 2
Re-circulation
LED
LED101
LED 102
Set indication
Set indication
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
B.PCB
Name
Number
Description
RDF control PBA
(1)
Controls the RDF
Display PBA
(2)
Indicates the presence of

a document
ed.1
10 RDF 329
15 Components on the PBA: variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), : check pins.
Warning: Do not touch the unlisted variable resistors (VR) and the unlisted
check pins.
The unlisted items are for factory use only, and require special tools and high
precision instruments for adjustment.
RDF Control PBA
Note:
1.Some LEDs emit dim light when off because of leakage current; this is a normal condition and should be kept in mind.
2.VRs that may be used in the field
<symbol > Black VR
VRs that must not be used in the field
<symbol > White VR
330
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
LED
Display
LED1
Use it to check the output of the original tray paper sensor.
LED2
Use it to check the output of the registration sensor.
LED on the RDF Control PBA

Display
TP1-1
TP1-2
TP1-3
TP1-4
TP1-5
TP1-6
+5V
Earth
Checking the output of the paper sensor in the document tray and the output of the registration Sensor
The output from the various sensors requires checking, in the following cases:
- if the RDF control PBA has been replaced
- if the paper sensor in the document tray has been replaced
- the registration sensor has been replaced.
Check that the output of each sensor is correct, as the light source and the light
destination are on separate components.
Procedure:
1 Switch OFF.
Test Pins on the RDF Control PBA
3 Switch ON.
4 With no paper on the document tray, press once on the switch (SW3) on the
RDF.
5 Check that LED1 and LED2 have switched on, on the RDF control PBA.
Check that voltage of TP2-1 and TP2-2 is 1.1 0.1 V. If the voltage is incorrect,
check the position of the sensor. The alignment of the light source and the light
destination of the sensor may be wrong.
ed.1
10 RDF 331
Display PBA
LED
Description
LED101
Indicates that an original has been set.
LED102
Indicates that an original has been set.
LED on the Display PBA

Functions of the DIP Switch DSW1 on the RDF control PBA.
Purpose
DSW1 settings
Description
To select normal operation
With all bits at OFF, normal operation

mode is assumed.
To execute pick-up and

delivery
Each press on the switch (SW3)

causes the pick-up and the delivery
operations to repeat.
(copier mode)
To adjust the sheet gap:

for image composition
mode
(copier mode)
(fax mode)
To execute the pick-up, to

reversal, to delivery operation
After a press on the switch (SW3),

two documents and fed in and, then,
placed side by side on the platen.
Then, the switches and SW2 are used
to adjust the gap between the sheets.
Switch (SW3) is then pressed, to store
the adjustment value. Setting bit 6 to
ON, in FAX mode, puts a stamp mark
during delivery.
Each press on the switch (SW3)
repeats the pick-up, then the reversal
and, finally, the delivery operations.
(copier mode)
332
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Purpose
DSW1 settings
To adjust parallel transport 1

(copier mode)
(fax mode)
For continuous
pick-up/delivery operation
(copier mode)
Description
After a press on the switch (SW3), a

document is fed and placed on the
platen. Then, using the switches and
SW2 , the parallel transport 1 is
adjusted. Then, the switch (SW3) is
pressed, to store the adjustment value.
Setting bit 6 to ON, in FAX mode,
puts a stamp mark during delivery.
Placing three or more sheets of paper
on the document tray, and pressing the
switch (SW3), causes the pick-up
operation and the delivery operation
to repeat continuously.
To check the sensor

level
Each press on the push switch on

the RDF controller PCB causes the
original tray paper sensor and the
registration sensor to be ready for a
check on the output level.
To use non-default original size
Shift the bit to ON when using any

of the following size:
To clean separation
belt/feeding roller
A press on the push switch (SW3)

on the RDF controller PCB causes
the pick-up motor to rotate, thereby
cleaning the separation belt and the
feeding roller. To stop, press the
push switch (SW3) once again.
(copier mode)
(fax mode)
To store original size

(horizontal direction)
Use it to store the position of the

original tray side guide for A4 or
LTR.(see cocerning adjustment)
(Using A4)
(Using LTR)
ed.1
10 RDF 333
Dis-/assembly
1 External View
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
r
(1) Upper cover; (2) Body cover; (3) Original tray; (4) Body front cover.
Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning, checking, or repairing the machine.
ed.1
10 RDF 401
2 Removing the RDF

1 Switch OFF.
2 Open the front door
3 Standing at the rear of the copier, pull the RDF vertically to remove it.
Note: The hinge feet are equipped with a locking mechanism to prevent slippage. Open it fully, before removing it from the copier.
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
3 Removing the Body Cover

1 Remove the seven screws (1).
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
2 Remove the two screws (2), and remove the document tray (3).
Warning: The original tray is connected with a cable. Take adequate care not
to damage it during work.

(3)
(2)
3 Remove the body cover and the body front cover.
ed.1
10 RDF 403
4 Lock for the side guide

The side guide is fitted with a lock. This prevents the guide opening further
than 297 mm (A4 and A3).
To handle documents that are larger than 297 mm, remove the lock. Maximum
width is 304 mm or 12.
1 Loosen the screw (4), and remove the lock.
Lock
Plate
Screw
Warning: Before making copies, make sure that the size guide is adjusted to the
size of the original. If not set correctly, the originals tend to move askew.
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
5 Removing the Pick-Up Motor Unit

1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the cable tie.
3 Disconnect the connector J12 (2) from the RDF control PBA (1).
(2)
(1)
4 Remove the screw (3), and remove the cable guide (4).
(5)
(4)
5 Disconnect the connector (5) from the sensor (S4).

6 Remove the two screws, and remove the pick-up motor (7).
(6)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ed.1
10 RDF 405
6 Removing the feeding motor

1 Remove the pick-up motor
2 Remove the cable tie.
3 Disconnect the connector J11 (2) from the RDF control PBA (1).
(1)
(2)
4 Disconnect the connector (3) for sensor (S9) and remove the two screws (4).
e
r
(4)
r
(4)
5 Detach the two drive belts (5), and remove the feeding motor (6).
(5)
t
y
(6)
406
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
7 Removing the belt motor
1
2
3
4
Remove the RDF from the copier.

Remove the feeding motor.
Remove the cable tie.
Remove the screw (1), and remove the cable clip (2).
q
(1)
(2)
w
5 Remove the four screws (3), and remove the right hinge (4).
(3)
(3)
e
ed.1
r
(4)
e
(3)
10 RDF 407
6 Remove the feeding motor.

7 Disconnect the connectors J6(5), J7(6), and J13(7) from the RDF control PBA.
(7)
u
(5)
t
(6)
y
8 Disconnect the connector (8) for the sensor (S10).
(8)
i
408
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
9 Using a scriber, mark the position of the belt motor (9). Remove the three
screws (10).
(9)
(10)
!0
(10)
!0
(10)
!0
10 Detach the belt (11) from the roller (12). Remove the belt motor (9).
(9)
ed.1
(11)
(12)
10 RDF 409
8 Replacing the belt motor unit

1 Fix the belt motor unit (2), with three screws (3) . There should be a slack of 3
1 mm, when the timing belt (1) is pressed down with a force of 200 20 g.
(2)
(1)
(3)
2 Pull the belt tensioner (4), with a force of 500 50 g, and fix it with the screw
(5).
(4)
(5)
410
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
9 Removing the clutch unit

1 Remove the belt motor (1).
2 Detach the drive belt (2).
(5)
(4)
3 Remove the E-ring (3).

4 Slide the bush (4), in the direction of arrow A, and remove the clutch unit (5).
(4)
(3)
(5)
5 When installing the clutch unit, make sure that the stop ring (6) is engaged with
the stopper (7) of the mount.

(6)
ed.1
(7)
10 RDF 411
10 Pick-up roller unit

1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the two screws (1). Remove the support (2).
(1)
(2)
(1)
3 Remove the two screws, and remove the guide (4).
(4)
(3)
(3)
412
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
4 Remove the pick-up motor

5 Remove the E-ring (5), and remove the gear (6). (Take care not to drop the pin).
(5)
(6)
6 Remove the E-ring (7), and remove the bush (8).
u
(7)
i
(8)
7 Remove the screw (10), and remove the solenoid (9).
(9)
t
ed.1
y
(10)
10 RDF 413
8 Detach the timing belt (11), and remove the E-ring (12) and the gear (13).
(11)
(13)
(12)
9 Remove the bush (14), and remove the pick-up roller (15).
(14)
414
TSM Oc 3121
(15)
Dis-/assembly
11 Pick-up roller
1 Remove the cover.
(2)
(1)
(1)
3 Remove the two screws (3), and remove the guide (4).
(3)
(3)
(3)
4 Rotate the pick-up rollers (5), so that they are as shown. Then, remove the
screws (6), and remove the pick-up rollers (5).

(5)
(5)
ed.1
10 RDF 415
12 Separation Belt
1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the drive belt (1).
(1)
3 Remove the two screws (2) and remove the separation belt (3), together with
the fixing plate (4).

(3)
416
TSM Oc 3121
(2)
(4)
(2)
Dis-/assembly
13 Feeding Rollers
1 Remove the cover.
(1)
(1)
(2)
3 Remove the two screws (3) , and remove the guide (4).
(4)
(3)
(3)
4 Remove the separation belt.

5 Remove the four screws (5), and remove the guide plate (6).
(5)
ed.1
(6)
(5)
10 RDF 417
6 Remove the two screws (8), and remove the inside guide (7).
(8)
(7)
(8)
7 Remove the screw (9), and remove the ring (10).

(9)
(10)
8 Remove the E-ring (11), and remove the idler gear (12).
9 Remove the E-ring (13), and remove the gear (14) and the timing belt (15).
(Take care not to drop the pin.)

(12))
(11)
(14)
418
TSM Oc 3121
(15)
(13)
Dis-/assembly
10 Remove the E-ring (16), and slide the arm (17) and the gear (18) inwards.
(17)
(16)
(18)
11 Remove the E-ring (19), and slide the bush (20) inwards. Then, remove the
feeding roller (21).

(21)
ed.1
(19)
(20)
10 RDF 419
14 Registration roller
1
2
3
4

Remove the cover.
Remove the feeding roller.
Remove the five screws (2), and remove the right hinge.
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)

(4)
420
TSM Oc 3121
(3)
Dis-/assembly
6 Remove the screw (5) , and remove the solenoid support (6).
y
(6)
(5)
!1
7 Detach the spring (7) and the screw (8). Then, remove the arm (9).
(7)
(9)
(8)
ed.1
10 RDF 421
8 Remove the E-ring (10), and remove the bush (11). Then, remove the shaft
(12).
(10)
(11)
!0 !1
(12)
!2
9 Remove the two screws (13), and remove the sensor support (14).
(14)
!4
(13)
!3
E-ring (15), spring (16), bush (17), and the two screws (18)
(16)
(18)
!6
!8
(17)
!7
(15)
!5
(18)
422
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
grip ring (19), disc (20), sensor support (21), and the spring (22)
(21)
@1
(22)
(20)
(18)
grip ring (23), spring (24), bushing (25), and two screws (26).
Then, remove the registration roller (27).
(25)
@5
(26)
@6
(24)
@4
(26)
@6
ed.1
(23)
@3
(27)
@7
10 RDF 423
15 Delivery and reversing roller

1
2
3
4
5

Remove the cover.
Remove the pick-up roller
Remove the registration roller.
Remove the following:
E-ring (5), gear (6), timing belt (7), and bush (8).
(7)
u
(5)
t
(6)
y
(5)
t
(8)
i
6 Remove the grip ring (9)of the gear (10).
(Take care not to drop the pin.)
(10)
!0
424
TSM Oc 3121
(9)
o
Dis-/assembly
7 Remove the gear while unlocking it.

.
8 Remove the grip ring (11), and remove the bush (12).
(12)
(11)
9 Detach the spring (13) and remove the screw (14). Then, remove the strip (15).
(15)
ed.1
(14)
(13)
10 RDF 425
10 Remove the spring (16).
(16)
!6
11 Remove the screw (18), and remove the sensor cover (17).
Then, disconnect the sensor connector (19).

Remove the registration sensor (20): pulling it upwards.
(18)
(17)
(20)
(19)
426
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
12 Remove the paper guide (21).
(21)
13 Remove the two screws (22) at the front, and the two screws (23) at the rear.
Then, remove the reverse clip (24): pulling it downwards.
(22)
(24)
(23)
ed.1
10 RDF 427
14 Remove the screw (25), and remove the strip (26).
(25)
(26)
15 Remove the delivery and reversing roller (27).

(27)
428
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
16 Delivery Roller (copier mode)
1 Remove the cover.

2 Remove the pick-up motor.
3 Remove the screw (1).
(1)
4 Remove the E-ring (2).
(2)
5 Remove the screw (3), and remove the pin (4).
Then, remove the delivery roller (5).
(4)
ed.1
(3)
(5)
10 RDF 429
17 Delivery Roller (fax mode)

1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the screw (1), and the spring (2).
Then, disconnect the connectors (3).
(2)
(3)
(1)
3 Remove the three screws (4), and remove the delivery roller (5).
(4)
430
TSM Oc 3121
(4)
(5)
Dis-/assembly
18 Reversing guide
1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the grip ring (1), and the gear (2). Remove the timing belt (3).
(3)
(1)
(2)
Note: Remove the gear while unlocking it.
ed.1
10 RDF 431
3 Detach the springs (4) and (5) from each end of the reversing guide.
(4)
(5)
(2)
432
TSM Oc 3121
(1)
Dis-/assembly
5 Disconnect the sensor (6), and disconnect the earth cable (7).
(6)
(7)
Screw (8), the strip (9), screw (10), the pin (11).
Then, remove the reversing guide (12).
(12)
!2 (11)
!1 (10)
!0
ed.1
(9)
o
(8)
i
10 RDF 433
19 Removing the stop solenoid

1 Remove the cover.
(2)
(1)
(1)
3 Remove the two screws (3) . Disconnect the connector (4). Then, remove the
stop solenoid (5).

(3)
(5)
(4)
20 Fixing the stop solenoid

1 Fix the solenoid (1) in place where the stopper (3) (rubber block) comes into
contact with the trailing edge of the stopper plate (2) when the plunger of the
solenoid is at the end of its stroke.
(3)
434
(2)
TSM Oc 3121
(1)
Dis-/assembly
21 Stamping Solenoid SL4

1 Remove the delivery roller (fax mode)
2 Remove the screw (1), and the spring (2). Remove the guide (3).
(2)
(3)
(1)

(5)
ed.1
(4)
10 RDF 435
Two E-rings (6), gear (7), bush (8), and the delivery roller (9).
(8)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(6)
5 Remove the two screws (10) at the front, and the two screws (11) at the rear.
Then, remove the paper guide (12).

(11)
(12)
(10)
6 Remove the vane of the sensor (13). Disconnect the connector (14).
(13)
436
TSM Oc 3121
(14)
Dis-/assembly
7 Remove the three screws (15), and remove the support (16).
(16)
(15)
8 Remove the delivery roller (17), and remove the support for SL4 (18).
(18)
(17)
9 Release the clips (20), and remove the solenoid SL4 (19).
(18)
(20)
(19)
ed.1
10 RDF 437
22 Feeding Belt
1 Remove the cover.
2 Remove the spring at the front(1).
(1)
3 Detach the spring at the rear (2) from the hook (3). Attach the spring to the tem-
porary hook (4).

(2)
(4)
(3)
e
(6)
438
TSM Oc 3121
(5)
Dis-/assembly
5 Remove the four screws (8), and the side plate (7).
(8)
(7)
(8)
6 Remove the three screws (9), and remove the outer frame (10).
(9)
(10)
(9)
7 Pull the feeding belt (11) out to the front.

(11)
ed.1
10 RDF 439
23 Cleaning the belt

1 When cleaning the feeding belt, move the belt in the direction of the arrow A.
2 Moisten a sheet of paper with alcohol.
Place the paper on the document tray.

Shift bit 6 to ON: DIP switch DSW1. The document will be fed in copier mode.
Then, shift bits 5 and 6 to ON: DIP switch DSW1. The document will be fed
in fax mode.
Area moistened with alcohol
3 When the cleaning is completed, shift all the bits to OFF : DIP switch
DIPSW1.
24 Sensors
There are two sensors in the paper path. The document sensor S1 and the registration sensor S3.
(The pick-up sensor S7, the delivery sensor S6 and the reversal sensor S8 are
sensors with interrupter vanes.)
The orifice of a sensor attracts dust. The dust can lead to faulty operation. The
sensors should be cleaned as follows:
440
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
25 Cleaning the sensor S1

(1)
(2)
(1)
2 Clean the sensor S1 (3).
(3)
2. Sensor LED1 for S1

(2)
ed.1
(1)
(2)
10 RDF 441
3 Clean the orifice of the LED1 (3). The led is located behind the guide plate (1).
(1)
(3)
Registration sensor S3.

(2)
(1)
(2)
3 Remove the two screws (4), and remove the inside guide (3).
(4)
442
TSM Oc 3121
(3)
(4)
Dis-/assembly
4 Clean the sensor S3. The sensor is fitted to the inside guide (4).
(3)
(4)
Sensor LED3 for S3.

1 Remove the screw (3), and remove the cover (2) from the LED3. Reversing
roller (1).
(3)
(2)
(1)
2 Remove the reversing guide.

3 Disconnect the connector (4) from the LED3. Withdraw the LED (5) vertically.
(4)
(5)
ed.1
10 RDF 443
Separation shoes
2 Remove the separation shoes: rear (1) and front (2).
The separation shoes can be removed by pushing in the arrowed direction.

(1)
(2)
3 Clean the shaded areas of the separation shoes.
444
Wipe only in the document feed direction.
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
Separation guide
2 Remove the separation shoes: front and rear.
3 Clean the shaded areas (12 areas) of the separation guide.
Wipe only in the document feed direction.
Lubrication
The RDF requires no lubrication. Apply lubricant as necessary when replacing

gears, etc.
Caution: When applying lubricant, take care so that it will not come into con-
tact with the timing belt or the cable..
ed.1
10 RDF 445
Pick-Up Drive
Lubricate the following parts:

Rear
Lubricate
Areas to apply lubricant
Pick-up motor (M1)

Pick-up motor unit
Front
Lubricate
Area to apply lubricant
Delivery Drive.
Lubricate
Area to apply lubricant
446
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
1 Features
1 Handles fax documents for page collation.
The RDF offers two feeding modes: copier and fax.

In copier mode: it feeds the bottom page first.
In fax mode: it feeds the top page first.
2 Stamping function.
The RDF has a stamping function. The fax documents are stamped, to indicate
that they have been processed.
3 Measuring the size of documents.
The RDF measures the length (in feeding direction) and the width of documents. This information is sent to the copier.
ed.1
10 RDF 501
2 Specifications
RDF
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Pick-up of the documents Circulating system; automatic pick-up and delivery for two-sided
documents.
Orientation of documents Face up
Position of the documents
Centre reference
Separation of the documents
Fax mode: separation

from the top
Copier mode: separation
from the bottom
Type of document
Sheet documents of 50 to Non-standard lengths of

105 g/m2
documents should not be
single sided documents, used
two-sided documents
Size of document
A5/STMT to A3/11x
17
Capacity of the document Small sizes (50 sheets,

tray
maximum of 5.5 mm
high):
A5, B5, B5R, A4, A4R,
STMT, LTR, LTRR
Large sizes (25 sheets):
B4, A3, LGL, 11x 17
Paper of 80 g/m2 or less.
Capacity of the output

tray
Small sizes (50 sheets):

A5, B5, B5R, A4, A4R,
STMT, LTR, LTRR
Large sizes (25 sheets):
B4, A3, LGL, 11x 17
Paper of 80 g/m2 or less.
Document processing
mode
Processing of single
sided documents.
Processing of two-sided
documents. Processing
for image composition.
Measuring the side of the The length (in feeding

documents
direction) and the width
Detection of document in Possible, in combination
the tray
with copier systems
Continuous feeding
502
TSM Oc 3121
Provided
In fax mode only.
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Mode for various sizes of Provided

documents
Of the same width only.
Stamping function
Provided
In fax mode only.
Communication with
copier
IPC communication 2
Power supply
From copier (24 VDC)
Maximum power consumption
170 W.
Weight
14.1 kg/31 lbs. (approximately)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
684x527x161 mm / 26.9 Excluding the output tray

x 20.7 x 6.3.
Operating environment:
Temperature
Humidity
Same as for the copier
Excluding the output tray
Specifications subject to change without notice.

The following types of documents must not be used:
Documents with an opacity of 80% or less, transparencies, and transparent

documents.
Documents with a carbon coating on the back.
Documents with cut-and-paste work.
Documents with cuts, holes, or tears.
Documents with cuts, holes, or tears.
Documents with curling and wrinkling.
Note: To protect against damage, avoid feeding the same document more than
30 times.
ed.1
10 RDF 503
3 Nomenclature
External View
(1)
w (3)
e (4)r
(2)
1. Upper cover
2. Side guide
3. T-O-T-S bar
4. Set indication
504
TSM Oc 3121
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
5. Document tray
6. Tray
7. Cover
8. Output tray
Cross Section
(1)
q
(2)
w (3)
e
r (5)
t (6)
y
(7)
u (8)
i (9)
o
(10)
!0
(4)
(13)
(16)
!6(15)
!5(14)
!4!3
1. Reversing roller
(12)
!2
7. Delivery/pick-up
roller
(11)
!1
12. Retaining roll
2. Paper deflecting plate 8. Paper holding plate
13. Feeding belt
3. Feeding roller
9. Pick-up roller
14. Paper stopper plate
4. Separation belt
10. Delivery roller
15. Feeding belt drive

roller
5. Separation flapper
11. Feeding belt link

roller
16. Registration roller
6. Separation front
guide
ed.1
10 RDF 505
4 Operation
Set indication
The set indicator is switched ON when a document is placed on the document

tray.
The set indicator flashes when a document jams.
A4/B5
A3/B4
Using the RDF

1 If the document is size B5R or size A5 or larger (in feeding direction), open
the tray.
2 Set the side guide to suit the size of the original.
Note: When copying documents with a width exceeding 297 mm, it is necessary to release the guide lock.
3 Place the stack of documents in the document tray, with the first page at the top.
4 Select copier mode or fax mode, as appropriate.
5 Press the copy button.
Warnings and Actions
If the set indicator starts to flash, while the documents are being fed, this may
be due to a jammed document.
Proceed as follows:
1 Remove the documents from the document tray.
2 Open the RDF cover, and remove any document that is jammed.
Then, open the RDF to clear the warning.

Remove any documents from the platen.
3 Sort the documents into their original sequence. Replace the stack of documents in the document tray.
506
TSM Oc 3121
Replacing the stamp
If stamp marks are no longer readable, replace the stamp using a pincet.
Tweezers
Tweezers
Stamp
Stamp
ed.1
10 RDF 507
5 Functional design
Electrical circuitry
The electrical circuits are controlled by the microprocessor (CPU) on the RDF
control PBA.
The CPU receives various signals from the sensors in the RDF and in the copier. In turn, the CPU generates signals to activate the various electrical components, according to pre-programmed instructions.
RDF controller PCB
Sensor
Variable
resistor
Motor
CPU
(Q1)
ROM
(Q2)
Solenoid
RAM
(Q4)
Clutch
Communication IC
(Q3)
Brake
24V
5V
5VDC
power
supply
Display
LED PCB
Motor
Power supply
circuit
Copier
508
TSM Oc 3121
6 Communication with the copier

An IPC communication mode is used for the communication between the RDF
and the copier.
An error message E400 or E712 is displayed if any errors occur with the
IPC communication.
CPU
Copier
ed.1
CPU
RDF
10 RDF 509
7 Inputs to the RDF Control PBA

1. Inputs to the RDF Control PBA
510
TSM Oc 3121
2. Inputs to the RDF Control PBA
ed.1
10 RDF 511
8 Outputs from the RDF Control PBA

1. Outputs from the RDF Control PBA
512
TSM Oc 3121
9 Principle of operation
Outline
Three motors and a clutch are used in the RDF. These are used to pick-up the
documents, feed the documents and eject the documents.
The pick-up motor (M1) picks up the documents.
The feeding motor (M2) delivers and reverses the documents.
The belt motor (M3) carries the documents to the platen, stops the documents
and ejects them after they have been scanned.
The clutch CL1 engages and disengages the drive from the feeding motor (M2)
and the belt motor (M3)
ed.1
10 RDF 513
514
1
2
3
4
5
6
CL1
BK1
TSM Oc 3121
S7
S3
S11
SL3
S1
S4
SL2
S8
Stamping solenoid drive signal
Delivery detection signal 2
Pick-up motor drive signal
Re-circulating motor drive signal
Original set display ON signal
Last original detection signal
Stopper plate solenoid drive signal

Registration roller clock signal
Paper holding solenoid drive signal
Original tray paper signal

Pick-up roller home position detection signal
Upper cover open/closed detection signal
Pick-up detection signal
Pick-up registration signal
Delivery detection signal 1
Paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal
Reversing feeding paper detection signal
Feeding motor drive signal
Feeding motor clock signal
clutch drive signal
Belt motor clock signal
Belt motor drive signal

Feeding belt brake drive signal
RDF controller PCB
S9
M2
Display PCB
S13
M4
S6
S5
SL1
M1
S12
SL4
S10
M3
Operation
The RDF offers six operating modes:
single sided documents to single sided copy

two-sided document to single sided copies
two small-sized documents to a page-layout copy
one-sided documents to two-sided copy
two-sided document to two-sided copy
fax mode feeding
One of the following operations will be executed, according to the instructions

from the copier:
1) Single sided documents Mode
The RDF picks up the bottom page of the stack on the document tray, and carries the document to the platen.
When the scanning is completed, the document is taken off the platen, and returned to the document tray.
Document
Original
Document
Original tray tray
Positioning
the document
Setting an original.
Pick-up
Pick-up 22
Copying
Copying.
Delivery
1
Delivery1
Delivery
2 2
Delivery
ed.1
10 RDF 515
2) Two-Sided Document Mode
In this mode, the RDF reverses a two-sided document, to copy the rear side (1st side)
and the front (2nd side).
Pick-up
Pick-up
Scanner
Scanner
Pick-up for Pick-up

the first
side
for the
1st side.
Copying the the

2nd side.
Copying
2nd
side
Reversing
the
Reversingfrom
from the
2nd2nd
side side to the
to the 1st side.
1st side
Copying the 1st

Copying
theside.
1st
side
Reversing
from
1stto side
the
Reversing from
the the
1st side
the 2ndto
side.
2nd side
Delivery
Delivery.
3) Image Composition Mode
In this mode, the RDF places two documents on the platen for a reduced copy. The
following sizes of documents can be used for this mode:
516
A/B-configured RDF
INCH-configured RDF
A5
STMT
B5
LTR
TSM Oc 3121
A/B-configured RDF
INCH-configured RDF
A4
ed.1
10 RDF 517
Picking up
theup
2nd
document
Picking
the 2nd
original.
PickingPicking
up the
2nd
while reversing
up the
2nddocument,
original while reversing
1st original; atAt
thisthis
time, time,
the order
of sequence
the 1st the
document.
the
the originals is reversed.
of the documents
is reversed
1st document
1st original
2nd document
2nd original
up thedocument
1st original.
Picking upPicking
the 1st
Feeding the
original
and then theand
1st
Feeding
the2nd
2nd
document
theoriginal.
1st document
1st docu1st original

ment
Copy
Copy
original
2nd2nd
document
Reversing
from
theside
1st
the
Reversing from
the 1st
to side
the 2ndto
side.
2nd side
518
TSM Oc 3121
Delivering
original
and then theand,
2nd
Delivery
of the
the1st1st
document
then,original.
the 2nd document
4) Feeding document for faxing
The RDF picks up the top page of the stack on the document tray, and carries
the document to the platen.
When the scanning is completed, the document is taken off the platen, and
ejected to the output tray.
Setting an original.
Positioning
the document
Pick-up
Pick-up
Reading the
the original.
Scanning
document
Delivery
Delivery
11
Delivery
Delivery
22
5) Re-Circulating Mode
In this mode, the RDF assists with the sorting of the copies. Each document is
copied in sequence, so generating a complete set of copies. This operation is
repeated until the required number of sets have been made.
1
2
3
4
Using Re-Circulating Mode
Position the documents on the document tray.

Select the sort mode.
Enter the number of sets, using the numeric keypad.
Press the copy button.
ed.1
10 RDF 519
10 Checking the quality of the documents

1) Outline
The RDF carries out the following checks:

1 The presence of a document on the document tray.
2 The size of the document on the document tray.
3 The number of documents on tray, to give confirmation that all documents have
been copied.
4 The trailing edge of the last document.
2) Checking the Presence of Originals
Sensor S1 checks the presence of a document on the document tray.

When a document is placed on the document tray, the light from LED1 is
blocked. The document sensor S1 generates the original detection signal
DEP1.
When the RDF control PBA receives the DEP1 signal, the PBA switches on
the set indicator (LED101 and LED 102).
LED1
Original
Display
PCB
Original tray paper signal (DEP1)
LED101,102
Original Set indicator

ON signal (DSD)
RDF controller PCB
S1
S11
520
TSM Oc 3121
Set
indication
Original
Set indicator
Document
Original
Document
Original traytray
The measurements of the document are monitored to obtain correct control

and, for fax applications, for use in the communication protocol.
Document size (length in feeding direction)
The length of a document, in the feeding direction, is checked by the sensor

(S3) and by the clock sensor (S11).
The registration paper sensor checks the leading edge and the trailing edge of
an original, while the registration roller clock sensor checks the rotation of the
registration roller while the original moves past it. (The RDF controller computes the rotation into a length.)
Pick-up detection signal (PDP1)
RDF controller PCB
Registration paper sensor
Registration roller clock signal (RRCLK)
Measuring the Size of Documents

Outline
S1
S3
S11
Registration roller clock sensor

Registration roller
ed.1
10 RDF 521
Document size (in width direction)
VR1 measures the width of a document, while it is on the document tray.

The resistance of VR1 varies in accordance with the movement of the side
guides.
The change of resistance are translated into a width measurement by the RDF
control PBA.
Side
guides
Side guides
VR1
RDF control
PBA PCB
RDF controller
The dimensions obtained by the RDF are translated into a default size.
RDF is configured for A/B sizes
Default size
Vertical length
Width of the document
B5R
257mm
177mm to 187mm
A5
148.5mm
A4R
330mm
FOOLSCAP
330mm
B5
182mm
B4
364mm
COMPUTER paper
381mm
274 to 284mm
A4
210mm
292 to 302mm
A3
420mm
205 to 215mm
252 to 262mm
For the vertical length: the default size will be the default size 10 mm.
for the width dimension: the default size will be the default size 5 mm.
Other lengths are not considered to be default sizes.
522
TSM Oc 3121
RDF is configured for INCH
Default size
Vertical length
STMT
140mm
LTRR
279mm
FOOLSCAP
330mm
LGL
356mm
LTR
216mm
COMPUTER paper
381mm
11x 17
432mm
211 to 221mm
274 to 284mm
RDF is configured for A/B sizes
Default size
Vertical length
B5R
257mm
177 to 187mm
A5
148mm
205 to 213mm
A4R
297mm
STMT
140mm
LTRR
279mm
FOOLSCAP
330mm
LGL
356mm
B5
182mm
B4
364mm
LTR
216mm
COMPUTER paper
381mm
11x 17
432mm
A4
210mm
A3
420mm
214 to 221mm
252 to 262mm
274 to 284mm
ed.1
10 RDF 523
4) Checking the Number of Documents
The number of documents is counted. This information relates to:

- whether the documents have been copied
- the passage of the trailing edge of the last document
- how many documents there are.
1 Checking whether the documents have been copied
In copier mode, the same tray serves as the pick-up tray and the delivery tray.
It is therefore necessary to distinguish between the documents that have been
copied and the documents that still need to be copied.
For this purpose, the RDF places a top-of-the-stack bar on the top page of the
stack of documents.
When copying proceeds, and all the documents have been picked up, the t-o-t-s
bar drops through and aperture in the document tray. Sensor S12 then identifies
the last document, and the last document detection signal (LDD) is generated.
RDF
RDFcontrol
controller PBA
PCB
T-O-T-S bar
Re-circulating lever
Sensor
(S12)sensor
Re-circulating
(S12)
T-O-T-S
bar
Re-circulating lever
LDD
RDF
PBA
RDF control
controller PCB
Sensor
(S12)
Re-circulation
sensor
(S12)
Document
Original
524
TSM Oc 3121
2 Detection of the trailing edge of the last document.
Copiers with a long feeding path (from cassette to drum) usually pick up copy
paper early. This is to speed up the copying operation. Copy paper is frequently picked up before the document arrives on the platen.
For this reason, the RDF is programmed to pick up a document at the same
time as the copy paper is picked up.
If the documents are 220 mm or less, the RDF feeds the second document past
the registration roller, after setting the first document on the platen.
T-O-T-S bar
Re-circulating bar
2nd
2nd document
original
If the t-o-t-s bar is on a document, the RDF communicates to the copier the
presence of a third and subsequent document. This allows the copier to pick
up copy paper.
If the t-o-t-s bar fall through the aperture in the document tray, the RDF communicates to the copier the absence of a third and subsequent document. LDD
signal is ON. The copier not pick up copy paper.
3 Counting the documents
The number of documents do not need to be counted for:

- single-sided documents to single-sided copies
- two-sided documents to single-sided copies
- for two-sided documents to two-sided copies.
The RDF feeds the documents from the tray to the platen in a fixed sequence.
It must know, however, if the number of originals is odd or even when making
one sided to two sided copies. To enable this the RDF counts the originals
while the copier is at rest
ed.1
10 RDF 525
Note: The RDF picks up the last page of a stack for copying, making it necessary to find out whether the number of originals is odd or even when making
one-sided original to two-sided copies so that it can decide whether to copy
the first original page on the face or the back of the last page copy. As shown
in the figure, copying an odd number of originals without such data will result
in the first original page copied on the back of a copy page. You may disable
this count function in theuser mode.
1
2
3
1
3
526
TSM Oc 3121
Copier
Copier
11 Pick-up of documents for copying

1) Outline
There are two pick-up methods:

1 Copier mode: the first document if fed from the bottom of the stack.
2 Fax mode: the first document if fed from the top of the stack.
Separate feed mechanisms are used for each of the two modes.
Pick-up: copier mode
Pick-up: fax mode
ed.1
10 RDF 527
2) Changing between copier mode and fax mode.
Motor M1 switches the document feed unit to suit the application mode. When
M1 rotates clockwise, the feed unit moves to copier mode. When M1 rotates
counter-clockwise, the feed unit moves to fax mode.
When M1 rotates clockwise, the arm on the pick-up roller actuates the switching arm. The original guide is raised. The outer groups of separation belts
move downwards. The feed unit is in copier mode.
When M1 rotates counter-clockwise, the arm on the pick-up roller actuates the
switching arm. The original guide is lowered. The outer groups of separation
belts move upwards. The feed unit is in fax mode.
Original guide
controller
PCB
RDF RDF
control
PBA
Original guide
Pick-up
motor (M1)
Pick-up motor
(M1)
M1
Separation
belt
Separation belts
Switching
Switching
Arm arm
Arm
Arm
(copier mode)
RDF controller
PCB
RDF control
PBA
Original guide
Original guide
Pick-up
motor (M1)
Pick-up motor
M1
Separation
beltbelts
Separation
(M1)
Switching
Switching Arm
Arm
Arm arm
(fax mode)
3)Pick-up: copier mode

3a) Operation
The following occurs when the documents have been placed in the tray, and the
copy button is pressed:
528
TSM Oc 3121
1 Pick-up
The paper stop is lowered, and the pressure plate is lowered. This allows the
last page to be picked off the stack.
The document is fed between the separation belt and the feeding roller. This is
to make sure that only one document is fed.
Note: The pressure plate is always lowered for the first document. Normally,
for subsequent documents it does not need to move.

But, if the pick-up sensor S7 does not detect a document within 500 ms after
M1 is switched on, the pressure plate is lowered again to attempt a new feed
cycle.
2 Bulge
The document is fed against the registration roller. A bulge is created.

Pressure plate
Separation belt
Stop plate
Feeding roller
Pick-up sensor (S7)

Bulge
Registration roller
3 Feeding
The feeding belt, the registration roller, and the feeding roller are rotated. The
document is carried to the platen.
ed.1
10 RDF 529
4 Picking up the 2nd document
When the document reaches a specific position on the platen, the scanner starts
to move forwards.
If small size documents are being handled, the RDF picks up the second document.
If handling large size documents, the second document is picked up after ejection of the first document.
Small sizes
A5,B5,B5R,A4,STMT,L
TR,LTRR
Large sizes
B4,A3,LGL,11x 17
Note: For small size documents: the second and subsequent documents are fed
slightly farther than the registration roller. This shortens the time required to
feed the documents.
Feeding roller
Registration roller
Feeding belt
Slightly farther than the registration roller
530
TSM Oc 3121
Scanner
Original set Cop Start key ON

Picking up original
Feeding
Starting scanner/picking Feeding/

up 2nd original
delivery
Starting scanner
(S7)
(S3)
Reversal sensor
(S8)
Delivery sensor
(S6)
Pick-up motor
(M1)
Feeding motor
(M2)
Belt motor
(M3)
Clutch
Arching
CW
CCW
CW CCW
CW
(CL1)
Paper stopper plate solenoid (SL1)

Paper holding solenoid (SL2)
Brake
(BK1)
10 RDF 531
: Low speed
CW : Feeding belt rotates clockwise
CCW : Feeding belt rotates counterclockwise
3b) Sequence of pick-up operations (2 size A4 documents, copier mode)
ed.1
Pick-up sensor
4) Pick-up: Fax mode

4a) Operation
The following occurs when the documents have been placed in the tray, and a
fax is transmitted:
1 Pick-up
The paper stop is lowered, and the pressure plate is lowered. This allows the
top page to be picked off the stack.
The document is fed between the separation belt and the feeding roller. This is
to make sure that only one document is fed.
The separation belt and the feeding roller rotate in the opposite direction to
that used for the copier mode.
2 Bulge
The document is fed against the registration roller. A bulge is created.

Pressure plate
1st page of stack
Separation belt
Stop plate
Feeding roller
Pick-up sensor (S7)

Bulge
Registration roller
532
TSM Oc 3121
3 Feeding
The feeding belt and the registration roller are rotated. The document is carried
to the platen.
4 Picking up the 2nd document
When the document reaches a specific position on the platen, the scanner starts
to move forwards.
The second document is picked up.
If stamping is selected, the second document is not picked up.
For large size documents: the second document is picked up after the first document has been ejected.
Feeding roller
Registration roller
Feeding belt
Slightly farther than the registration roller
ed.1
Registration roller
10 RDF 533
534
Copy Start key ON

Picking up/feeding 1st original
(S7)
(S3)
Feeding 2nd original
Moving scanner
forward
Delivery sensor 2
Pick-up motor
(M1)
Feeding motor
(M2)
Belt motor
(M3)
Low speed
CW
Clutch
(CL1)
Brake
(Bk1)
Stamping solenoid
(SL4)
Paper holding plate solenoid
(SL2)
Stopper plate solenoid
(SL1)
CCW
Low speed Low speed
CCW
CCW
: The pick-up motor rotates in the direction opposite the direction in copier mode.
CW : Feeding belt rotates clockwise.
CCW : Feeding belt rotates counterclockwise.
4b) Sequence of pick-up operations (2 size A4 documents, fax mode)
TSM Oc 3121
Pick-up sensor
Starting scanner/picking up 2nd original
12 Turning the documents over

Operation
The documents are turned over only in copy mode. The turning over can be
from the first side to the second side, or from the second side to the first side.
The description is based on the situation applicable for turning over from the
first side to the second side.
1 Pick-up for the first side
A document is fed from the document tray and onto the platen.
2 Turning over and feeding
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise. This turns over the document.
3 Turning over the document and turning it back.
The deflecting solenoid (SL3) is energised, opening the deflecting plate. The
document is carried back onto the platen, turned over.
The scanner starts to move forward when the second side of the document is
positioned on the platen.
While the scanner is moving in reverse, the document is turned over: the first
side is positioned on the platen.
When the scanning of the first side is completed, the document is returned to
the document tray.
Picking up the 1st side
ed.1
10 RDF 535
Deflector
Turning over, from the 2nd side to the 1st side
Timing of operations: turning over
536
TSM Oc 3121
13 Image Composition Mode

a) Operation
The image composition mode differs for copy mode and for fax mode.
After selection of the required mode, and after pressing the copy button, the
following occurs:
As the last page is picked up first, the sequence of the documents needs to be
reversed.
b) Copier mode
The first document is picked up and carried onto the platen.

2 Turning for the first side
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise. This carries the document from the platen to the reversing roller.
4th document
3rd document
2nd document
1st document
Reversing roller
ed.1
1st document
Feeding belt
10 RDF 537
3 Turning over the 1st document and swapping the delivery
The deflecting solenoid (SL3) is energised, opening the deflecting plate. The
document is carried back onto the platen, turned over.
4 Separating the second document, and swapping the documents on the platen.
The deflecting solenoid (SL3) is energised, opening the deflecting plate.

The second document is picked up and stopped at the registration roller.
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise, leading the first document to the reversing roller.
5 Simultaneous feeding of the first and the second documents.
The clutch (CL1) energises. This eliminates the difference in speed between
the reversing roller and the feeding belt. Two documents are moved simultaneously.
The sequence of the documents has changed. The two documents overlap
slightly: for sheet gap adjustment.
Deflector
1st document
2nd document
Deflector
Registration roller
Reversing roller
538
TSM Oc 3121
1st document Feeding belt
Reversing roller
Feeding belt
(overlay)
6 Adjusting the gap between documents.
The clutch (CL1) de-energises. The feeding belt is slowly rotated counter-clockwise, eliminating the overlap and adjusting the gap between the documents.
7 Feeding
When the gap between the two documents has been adjusted to a specific value, the clutch (CL1) is energised. The difference in speed between the reversing roller and the feeding belt is eliminated, and the two documents are carried
onto the platen.
8 Returning the first document
After copying, the feeding belt is rotated clockwise slowly. The reversing roller
pulls in the first document for return to the document tray.
Note: At this time, the leading edge of the second document is moved to the appropriate position on the platen.
ed.1
10 RDF 539
Feeding belt
(overlay)
Feeding belt
delivery roller
Sheet gap
Feeding belt belt

Feeding
delivery
roller
Delivery/reversing
roller
1st original
1st
document
2nd
document
2nd original
9 Separating the third document
The third document is picked up and stopped at the registration roller.

10 Feeding up the 2nd document
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise. This carries the second document from
the platen to the reversing roller.
540
TSM Oc 3121
11 Returning the second document and picking up the third document
The clutch (CL1) is energised. The difference in speed between the reversing
roller and the feeding belt is eliminated. The second document is returned to
the tray, and the document is picked up and carried onto the platen.
Subsequently, the same procedure is repeated: starting at 1.
If there are no further documents, the second document is returned after the return of the first document.
Feeding belt
Registration roller
delivery roller
Feeding belt
2nd document
ed.1
10 RDF 541
2nd document
Feeding belt
3rd document
delivery roller
1st document
2nd document
542
TSM Oc 3121
Reversing first original
CCW
CW CW CCW
Feeding 2nd and 1st originals simultaneously
Copying Delivering 1st and 2nd originals; picking up

3rd original, and separating 4th original
(S7)
Registration paper
(S3)
sensor
Reversal sensor
(S8)
Delivery sensor
(S6)
Pick-up motor
(M1)
Feeding motor
(M2)
Belt motor
(M3)
Clutch (CL)
(CL1)
Brake
(BK1)
Paper deflecting
plate solenoid
(SL3)
CW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW CCW
*1
*1 Adjusting sheet distance
: Low speed.
CCW : Feeding belt rotates counterclockwise.
10 RDF 543
c) Sequence of operations (image composition mode; copier mode)
ed.1
Pick-up sensor
Picking up
first original
d) Fax Mode
In fax mode, the sequence of the documents does not need to be reversed.
The first document is picked up and carried onto the platen.

2 Adjusting the position of the first side, and feeding for the second side of the
document.
The first document is moved back, to adjust the distance to the second document. Then, the two documents are moved simultaneously, and stopped at a
specific position.
3 Simultaneous feeding of the first and the second documents.
The clutch (CL1) energises. This eliminates the difference in speed between
the reversing roller and the feeding belt. Two documents are moved simultaneously.
2nd document
1st document
544
TSM Oc 3121
4 Returning the first document and the second document
When the documents have been scanned, the feeding belt is rotated counter-clockwise to deliver the first and the second documents.
If a third and fourth documents exist, the operations are repeated starting with
pick-up.
ed.1
10 RDF 545
546
e) Sequence of operations (page composition: fax mode)
TSM Oc 3121
14 Delivery
a) Outline
There are two methods for returning the documents to the document tray:
1 Copier mode
2 Fax mode
In copier mode, the documents are returned to the document tray.

In fax mode, the documents are delivered to the output tray.
Document tray
output tray
b) Return in copier mode
Operation
The document is carried from the platen to the document tray.
1 By the feeding belt
The feeding belt is rotated clockwise. This carries the document from the platen to the reversing roller.
2 By the reversing roller
The document carried by the feeding belt is gripped between the lower roller
and the reversing roller. The return movement continues. If the documents are
small, two are moved simultaneously.
ed.1
10 RDF 547
3 Switching between Delivery and Reversal
The deflecting solenoid (SL3) is de-energised. The deflecting plate is closed,

and the document is returned. to the document tray.
The next document is carried onto the platen.
Feeding belt
Scanner
Reversing roller
Feeding roller
Reversal sensor (S8)
Deflector
Document tray
548
TSM Oc 3121
4 Return to the Document tray
When the trailing edge passes the reversal roller, the feeding motor is switched
to low speed. The document return is slowed.
Scanner
ed.1
10 RDF 549
550
Sequence of Operations (large sizes, and mixed sizes: pick-up and return
of the second document.)
TSM Oc 3121
10 RDF 551
Sequence of Operations (small sizes; continuous pick-up and return)
ed.1
552
Sequence of Operations (small sizes; return)
TSM Oc 3121
b) Return in fax mode
Operation
Documents are carried from the platen for delivery to the output tray.
If applicable, the stamp marks the documents.
1 Feeding the first document
The feeding belt is rotated counter-clockwise. This carries the document approximately 30 mm. (this is to create a gap before the second document).
2 Returning the first document and picking up the second document
The clutch (CL1) is energised. The difference in speed between the reversing
roller and the feeding belt is eliminated. The first document is returned to the
tray, and the second document is picked up and carried onto the platen.
3 Delivering to the output tray
When the trailing edge passes the reversal roller, the feeding motor is switched
to low speed. The document return is slowed.
1st document
2nd document
1st document
Output tray
ed.1
10 RDF 553
554
Starting scanner/
Picking up 2nd original
(S7)
Registration
paper sensor
(S3)
Feeding
second original
Starting scanner/
Picking up 3rd original
Feeding equivalent of 20 mm
Delivery sensor 2
Feeding 2nd original

to stamping position
Feeding equivalent of 20 mm
(S12)
Pick-up motor
(M1)
Feeding motor
(M2)
Belt motor
(M3)
Low speed Low speed

CCW
Clutch
(CL1)
Brake (BK)
(BK1)
Stamping solenoid
(SL4)
Paper holding
solenoid
(SL2)
CCW
CCW
CCW: Feeding belt rotates counterclockwise.
Sequence of Operations (small sizes; stamp ON)
TSM Oc 3121
Pick-up sensor
Moving 1st original to

stamping position
Starting scanner/
Picking up 2nd original
(S7)
Registration paper
sensor
(S3)
Delivery sensor 2
(S12)
Pick-up motor
(M1)
Feeding motor
(M2)
Belt motor
(M3)
Low speed Low speed

CCW
Clutch
(CL1)
Brake
(BK1)
Stamping solenoid
(SL4)
Paper holding
solenoid
(SL2)
CCW
Starting scanner/
Picking up 3rd original
Feeding 3rd original/

Picking up 1st original
Low speed Low speed

CCW
CCW
10 RDF 555
CW : The feeding belt rotates clockwise.
CCW : The feeding belt rotates counterclockwise.
Sequence of Operations (small sizes; stamp OFF)
ed.1
Pick-up sensor
Feeding second original
15 Stamping function
Outline
The stamp operates in memory transmission state or direct transmission state.

The stamping operation is initiated in response to a command from the copier.
Solenoid (Sl4) energises, placing a dot of approximately 3 mm in diameter on
the surface of documents.
Mode
Location of the stamp
Single sided documents

mode
Stamps on each document.
two-sided document mode
Stamps the first document
Image Composition Mode
Stamps on each document.
The location of the stamp.

Document
Feeding direction
Centre of the document
50 mm (approximately)
50 mm (approximately)
Operation
Stamping occurs when the document is stopped during delivery.

The document is stopped, after feeding it about 20 mm from a point where the
sensor (S12) has detected its leading edge. When the document stops, the
RDF control PBA generates the stamp solenoid drive signal (STSLD). The solenoid (SL4) energises. The stamp face, attached to the tip of the plunger of the
solenoid, is brought down onto the surface of the document.
556
TSM Oc 3121
Solenoid (SL4)
STSLD
Stamp
RDF
controller
PCB
Fax document
Sensor (S12)
Note: Reference: Each new stamp can stamp approximately 7,000 documents.
Timing of operations (stamping)
ed.1
10 RDF 557
16 Controlling the pick-up motor

Outline
Block diagram of the control circuit for the pick-up motor.

The pick-up motor is a DC motor.
The microprocessor (Q1) on the RDF control PCB sends the following signals
to the drive circuit:
- the pick-up motor drive signal (SMON)
- the pick-up motor rotation direction signal (SDIR)
- the pick-up motor rotation speed control signal (SMPWM).
The three signals trigger the drive circuit to drive the pick-up motor.
The control circuit is not equipped with a monitor circuit. The SMPWM signal
remains at a constant level.
RDF control PBA
Pick-up motor
SMON
SDIR
SMPWM
Drive
circuit
Q1
CPU
558
TSM Oc 3121
Relationship between the Pick-Up Motor and the signals (SMON), (SDIR)
and (SMPWM).
(SMON)
(SDIR)
(SMPWM)
Operation of the
pick-up motor
Pulse
The pick-up motor

rotates in the
pick-up direction
for copier mode
(counter-clockwise).
The pick-up roller

rotates in the
pick-up direction
for copier
mode(counter-clockwise) by
inertia.
Pulse
The pick-up roller

rotates in the
pick-up direction
for the fax mode
(clockwise).
The pick-up roller

rotates in the
pick-up direction
for the fax mode
(clockwise), by
inertia.
The pick-up roller

stops.
.....
ed.1
10 RDF 559
17 Controlling the belt motor

Outline
Block diagram of the control circuit for the belt motor.

The belt motor is a DC motor.
The microprocessor (Q1) on the RDF control PCB sends the following signals
to the drive circuit:
- the belt motor drive signal (BMON)
- the belt motor rotation direction signal (BDIR)
- the belt motor rotation speed control signal (BMPWM).
When the belt motor (M3) rotates, the clock sensor (S10) sends the belt motor
clock signal (BMCLK) to the microprocessor (Q1). In response, the microprocessor (Q1) compares the belt motor clock signal (BMCLK) against the
pre-set rotation speed, and varies the level of the belt motor rotation speed control signal (PMPWM), The speed of the belt motor (M3) is fixed at a specific
level at all times.
RDF control PBA
Belt
BMON
BDIR
BMPWM
Drive
circuit
Q1
CPU
Clock sensor
S10
BMCLK
560
TSM Oc 3121
Relationship between the feeding belt and the signals (BMON), (BDIR) and
(BMPWM).
Belt motor drive
signal (BMON)
Belt motor rotation direction

signal (BDIR)
Belt motor rotation speed control signal

(BMPWM)
Operation
The feeding belt

rotates in the
pick-up direction
(counter-clockwise).
0
The feeding belt

rotates in the
pick-up direction
(counter-clockwise) by inertia.
The feeding belt
rotates in the
delivery direction
for copier mode
(clockwise).
The feeding belt

rotates in the
delivery direction
for the copier
mode (clockwise), by inertia.
1/0
The feeding belt

stops.
.....
Protecting the belt motor against overload
The handling of certain types of documents can cause an overload. A current

limitation circuit is incorporated to prevent excessive loads occurring when the
belt rotates in the pick-up direction.
ed.1
10 RDF 561
18 Detecting of jammed documents

S13
M4
S4
S6
S1
S7
S3
MS1 MS2
S12
S8
Paper sensor S1 for the docu- Delivery sensor S6
ment tray
Pick-up sensor S7
Upper cover sensor S4
Reversal sensor S8
Delivery sensor S12

Recirculation sensor S13
RDF Switch MS1
Upper cover switch MS2
The RDF control PBA monitors the presence or absence of documents at various locations. These checks are compared to an internal timing memory. The
monitoring is carried out by various sensors.
The table shows the various situations that are monitored during document
handling. If a jam is detected, the copier displays a message.
562
TSM Oc 3121
P
i
c
k
u
p
R
e
v
e
r
s
a
l
Character- Sensor
istic of jam
Situation
Loss of doc- S1,S7

ument
The sensor (S7) does not detect the leading edge of a 01H
document. And, the sensor (S1) did not detect a document within 1500 ms after the motor M1 was switched
on.
Pick-up
delay
S7
The sensor S7 did not detect the leading edge of a doc- 02H
ument within 1500 ms after the motor M1 was
switched on.
Registration
delay
S3,S7
ument within 350 ms after the sensor S7 detected the
leading edge of a document.
Doublefeeding
S3
The sensor S3 detects a document, although the first

document is located on the platen.
Leading
edge delay
S3
ument after the document pick-up was started.
Reversal
delay 1
S8
During the reversal or the delivery of the document.

11H
The sensor S8 did not detect the leading edge of a document within 140 mm (or 225 ms) after the motor M3
started rotating, in the clockwise direction.
Reversal
interrupted
S8
During the reversal or the delivery of the document.

12H
The sensor S8 did not detect the trailing edge of a document.
Reversal
delay 2
S8
During the delivery pick-up of the documents. The

13H
document is carried towards the platen, together with
the document that has been picked up. This error
occurs when the sensor S8 fails to detect the advancing
document within 50 mm after the belt motor starts to
rotate in a counter-clockwise direction.
Reversal of
the initial
document
S8
During the reversal of the document. The sensor S8

detects a document.
20H
Delay in the S3, S8

reversal
pick-up
During the reversal of the document. The sensor S3

did not detect the leading edge of a document within
100 mm (or 300 ms) after the sensor S8 detected the
document.
21H
Interrupted
reversal
pick-up
The sensor S3 did not detect the trailing edge of a doc- 23H
ument, longer than 180 mm, after the sensor S8
detected the document.
ed.1
S3, S8
Code
06H
10 RDF 563
D
e
l
i
v
e
r
y
Character- Sensor
istic of jam
Situation
Code
Delivery
delay
S6, S8
During the delivery of the document. The sensor S6

41H
did not detect a document within 100 mm (or 250 ms)
after the sensor S8 detected the leading edge of a document.
Delivery is
interrupted
S6
The sensor S6 did not detect the trailing edge of a doc- 42H
ument within 100 mm (or 250 ms) after the reversal
delivery check was carried out.
RDF is open MS1
The RDF is opened while it is running
81H
Upper cover MS2, S4

is open
The upper cover is opened while the RDF is running
82H
Interruption
of the recirculation of
the document
S1
The sensor S1 does not detect a document that is deliv- 83H

ered to the document tray.
Persistent
jam
S6, S3,
S8, S7
At the start of the document pick-up. A document is

detected by any of the sensors S6, S3, S8 or, if the
paper stop is raised, S7.
84H
Document
S8
on the platen
During the pick-up of the first document. A document 88H

is detected on the platen.
Idle swing
S13
of the
t.o.t.s.. lever
(2nd document or
later)
For the second or subsequent documents. The t.o.t.s..

lever swung without touching a document.
89H
Warning: 1. Timing of jams. The operation of the RDF is suspended immedi-
ately after detection of any of the jams listed above.

2. Resetting the jam detection. For delays during the pick-up: the machine can
be reset by removing the documents from the document tray.
For other jams:
- remove the documents from the document tray
- open the RDF
- remove the jammed documents.
Note: If the jam detection concerns the first document, the RDF will generally
assume that the document has been positioned incorrectly
If the condition concerns the second document or the subsequent documents,
the RDF will assume that a document has jammed.
564
TSM Oc 3121
19 Document is positioned incorrectly

Re-circulating
S13
M4
S4
S6
S1
S7
S3
MS1 MS2
Stop plate
S12
S8
Paper sensor S1 for the document Pick-up sensor S7
tray
Recirculation sensor S13
Incorrect positioning of the documents can cause damage to occur. To ensure

the correct positioning of the document, the RDF monitors the movement of
the documents. The monitoring is carried out by various sensors.
The table shows the various situations that are monitored during document
handling. If a jam is detected, the copier displays a message.
Envelope
Sen- Situation
sor
Idle swing of
the t.o.t.s..
lever (2nd
document or
later)
S11
The t.o.t.s.. lever swung without

The RDF stops immeditouching a document: immediately ately.
after the motor M4 started running.
Pick-up fault
S7
The sensor S7 did not detect the

leading edge of a document within
1500 ms after the motor M1 was
switched on.
The separation belt, the

03H
feeding roller and the
pick-up roller are stopped
immediately. The RDF
stops after delivering the
copy made of the previous document.
Over-ride of
S7
the paper stop
The document moved over the

paper stop, when the original was
positioned.
The RDF stops immediately.
ed.1
Reaction by the RDF
Code
01H
05H
10 RDF 565
Envelope
Sen- Situation
sor
Reaction by the RDF
Code
Different
S3
number of
originals, after
jam removal
The number of documents on the

tray was changed:
See Supplement.
11H
Incorrect
number of
documents
S3
The last document cannot be

Stops after counting 100
detected, because the t.o.t.s... lever documents.
fails to fall through the aperture in
the tray.
Note:
Normally, the document tray can
hold:
- 50 sheets of A5, STMT, A4, B5,
or LTR
- or 25 sheets of A3, B4, 11x
17, or LGL.
12H
Loss of document
S11
The t.o.t.s.. lever dropped through The RDF stops immedithe aperture in the document tray: ately.
while a document was being processed.
13H
Incorrect size
of document
S3
The documents that has been

picked up is a non-standard size.
14H
1. The size of the document is not

possible, using the image composition mode.
2. The sizes of the documents are
not the same.
The RDF stops immedi- 15H

ately. See the supplement.
Incorrect size S3
of document,
or mixed sizes
of documents: for
image composition mode.
See Note 1.
Note: To reset the RDF control, remove the documents from the document tray.
Then open the RDF.
566
TSM Oc 3121
Supplement:
Normal
Example
10 originals are placed
The 8th original
on the original tray.
jams.
The originals are put

back in order, i.e., 10
originals are set.
After counting the 7 originals

that have been copied,
copying resumes starting
with the 8th original.
Error q
(7 originals copied)
Error w
the original tray.

10 (originals) - 7 (copied) = 3 originals
The 3rd original
8 originals are set on
jams.
the original tray.
(2 originals copied)
The RDF stops operation

after counting the
originals.
3 originals are set on
After counting the originals,

copying resumes starting
with the 2nd original.
10 (originals) - 2 (copied) = 8 originals
When a jam occurs, the copier knows how many documents have been copied.
When the jam has been removed, the copier sends the data to the RDF. The
RDF, in response, circulates the copied documents, and positions the remaining documents on the platen for copying.
For this reason, normal copying will not continue if there is a discrepancy in
the number of documents counted: before and after a jam has occurred.
For error 1: the RDF will stop, and the display will be different number of documents after jam removal.
For error 2: the RDF will continue to function.
Resetting
To reset the machine after it has stopped because of the incorrect positioning
of documents:
- remove all documents from the document tray.
If a message is displayed, follow the instructions accordingly.
However, if the machine is stopped during image composition mode
- open the machine after removing the documents from the document tray.
ed.1
10 RDF 567
20 Power supply
Outline
Block diagram of the control circuit for the power supply.

The RDF receives two 24 V power supplies from the copier: 24 VP and 24 VL.
The 24 VP is mainly for loads. It is interrupted when the RDF is opened or the
upper cover is opened. The circuit breaker CB1 isolates the circuits in response
to an excess current.
The 24 VL is converted to 5 V by the regulator. The 5V supply is used by the
logic circuits and the sensors. The fuse resistor R26 melts to interrupt the power supply if an overload occurs.
24VP
NO
Solenoid (SL1 through SL4)

Clutch (CL1)
J3-2
J3-1 COM
J2-6
NO
Upper cover switch

(MS2)
J2-5 COM
RDF switch
(MS1)
Brake (BK1)
J2-3
Motor (M1 through M3)

Circuit breaker
(CB1)
Sensor (S1 through S13)
Original width volume (VR1)
Logic system
Fuse resistor
(R26)
24VL
J2-1
Copier
568
Regulator
IC (Q14)
5V
Display LED (LED101, 102)

Re-circulating motor (M4)
RDF controller PCB
TSM Oc 3121
ed.1
Electrical diagrams
10 RDF 701
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
11 DIGITAL DOCUMENT HANDLING
Contents
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE 501

2 SPECIFICATIONS 502
3 BASIC CONSTRUCTION 509
ed.1
11 Digital document handling
1 PRODUCT OUTLINE
The Oc 3121 is a digital black-and-white copier equipped with communication functions that use telephone lines so that it can serve as a fax transmission/reception device as well as a copier.
ed.1
11 Digital document handling 501
2 SPECIFICATIONS
Standards and Performance
The FAX Board is designed to comply with the standards that follow, providing the levels of performance shown.
Communication Unit
Item
Description
Applicable line
General subscription telephone line network
Number of connection lines 1 line (PSTN)
502
Communication method
Half duplexing communication
Modem speed
14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 [bps]
Modulation method (image

transmission)
ITU-T V.33 (14400/12000 bps)

ITU-T V.17 (14400/12000
bps/TC9600/TC7200 bps)
ITU-T V.29 (9600/7200 bps)
ITU-T V.27ter (4800/2400 bps)
Compression method
MMR/MR/MH
Communication mode
G3 (no G2/G1/MF)
Error correction method
ITU-T ECM method (may be disabled)
Communication speed
6 sec (ECM-MMR/14400 bps; using Canon

FAX Standard Chart No. 1)
TSM Oc 3121
Recording System
Item
Description
Maximum original size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
Transmission original size A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6, B4, B5, B5R, LTR,
LTRR, LGL, 11x17, STMT, STMTR
ADF-F1: supports stream reading, long original (630
mm max.)
RDF-G1: supports two-sided original
Recording paper size
A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR,

LTRR, LGL, 11x17, STMT, STMTR (cassette
only, 6 cassettes max.)
Scanning line density
8 pels/mm x 3.851 lines/mm (Standard)

8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm (Fine)
With option memory, the following resolutions are
possible:
8 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (Super Fine)
16 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (Ultra Fine)
(400 dpi x 400 dpi)
(In direct transmission, 400 dpi is given priority.)
Reading density adjustment
3 steps + AE (density correction in 9 steps in user

mode)
Halftone
256 gradations, AA (auto adjust) mode
Maximum reception size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
Scanning line density

(recording)
600 dpi (main scanning)

600 dpi (sub scanning)
Test shot
Provided
Memory
Item
Description
Memory
1 MB (standard; using about 52 pages of Canon FAX

Standard Chart No.1)
3 MB (option; 4 MB in total; about 244 pages)
9 MB (option; 10 MB in total; about 628 pages)
Power outage back-up Battery (for 24 about 24 hr; retains image data)
Memory size indication
ed.1
Provided
Transmission
Item
Description
Memory transmission
Provided (100 reservations max.); direct transmission if memory is full
Direct (manual) transmission
Provided
Broadcasting
216 addresses max. (60 one-touch, 140 speed, 16

keypad addresses)
Memory polling transmission
Provided (memory box function)
Multi polling transmission
216 addresses max.
Fixed time multi polling
Once
Confidential function
(address-specific transmis-sion)
Uses addresses (no in-house mode)
Time sharing dialing
Provided
Transmission reservation Provided (memory, direct)
504
Batch transmission by
address
Provided
Mail post transmission
Batch by timer address; 200 max. (one-touch +

speed); 5 times
2-on-1 transmission
Provided (w/ RDF in use)
Timer transmission
200 addresses max.; 32 times
Rotation transmission
Provided
DONE stamp
Provided (w/ RDF in use); READ stamp, SENT

stamp (direct
Dual access
transmission only)
Interrupt transmission
Provided (100 reservations max.)
Error re-transmission
Provided (direct transmission)
TSM Oc 3121
Reception
Item
Description
Confidential reception
Provided (using memory box; 70 boxes max.)
Relay broadcasting
Provided (using memory box; 70 boxes max.) 200

addresses (1 box)
Substitute reception
Provided (about 52 pages; auto output)
Memory reception
Provided (about 52 pages; time may be set for

start/end)
Polling reception
Provided
Fixed time polling

reception
Provided (200 addresses max.; once)
Rotation reception
Provided
Number of reception
print-outs
1 (may be set to 1 through 99)
Reception image reduc- Provided (97%, 95%, 90%, or 75% ratio; may be
tion
auto/fixed; direction of reduction may be vertical/horizontal or vertical only)
Cassette switch (A,B,
C, D)
A: division recording
B: margin recording (same paper configuration)
C: reduction recording (different paper configuration)
D: margin recording (on paper larger than reception
document)
Reception printouts
ordering
Provided
Two-sided reception
print-outs
Provided (A4, A4R, B4, A3; model with duplexing

function only)
N-on-1 recording
reception
A5+A5 - A4, B5+B5 - B4, A4+A4 - A3 (N may be 3

max.; using short original)
Transfer
Provided (time may be set; source may be limited)
Remote reception
Provided
Memory box function
Confidential, relay, fixed time, bulletin, general-purpose
Closed network
Provided
ed.1
Dialing
Item
Description
One-touch dialing
60 addresses (120 digits max.; telephone number)
Speed dialing
140 addresses (120 digits max.; telephone number)

24 characters (destination abbreviation)
Group dialing
199 groups (one-touch, grouped abbreviations)
Keypad dialing
On-hook (120 digits max.; telephone number)
Auto re-dialing
2 min (may be between 2 min and 99 min) twice

(may be once to 15 times) For error, 1st page and
error page only (all pages yes/no selection)
Electronic telephone
directory
Provided
Reference
Item
Description
User abbreviation registra-tion
Provided
Caller name
Provided (99 max.)
Communications control
recording
Provided (40 communications)
Memory reference
Provided
Reporting
506
Item
Description
Transmission result
report-ing
At time of shipment, when in error only (yes/no

selection)
Reception result reporting
At time of shipment, no (yes/in error only selection)
Communications control
reporting
At time of shipment, auto printing after 40 communications (transmission/reception separation, time-specific printing selection)
Memory box reception

reporting
At time of shipment, yes (yes/no selection)
Multiple communications control reporting
Provided
Memory clear reporting
Provided
TSM Oc 3121
Transmission Original Editing

Description
Continuous/two-sided
Page separation
Two-sided reading (RDF only)
Reduction/enlargement
transmission
Default ratio (50% to 200%)
Original frame erasing
Provided
Area selection
Framing, blanking (keypad input; up to 4 areas)
2-on-1 transmission
Provided (w/ RDF in use)
Reading size
At time of shipment, auto reading size (reading size

may be set in manual; A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6,
B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTRR, LGL, 11x17, STMT,
STMTR; up to 2 non-default sizes may be registered)
Item
ed.1
Basic Operations
Position a document
On the platen
In the RDF
Set basic settings for transmission.

Resolution
Image quality
Reading size
Density
Abbreviation switching
<Memory Transmission>
Set the address.
One-touch dialling
Speed dialling (telephone directory dialing)
Keypad dialling
<Direct Transmission>
Press the direct key and specify an address.
One-touch dialling
speed dialling (telephone directory dialling)
Keypad dialling
Press Copy (The document will be scanned.)
Press Copy and start dialing
Transmission will start.
Initiates transmission each time a document is

scanned.
User Data
The board offers a password function which requires separate passwords: a

password used to change or delete the settings of the confidential box or the
memory box (or other boxes) and pass-word used for control by group.
What is called the "master password" is the one to be used during servicing or
when the user forgets his/her password.
Master Password 4559769
Note: The master password is intended for use by the technician only. Be sure
not to disclose it to the user.
508
TSM Oc 3121
3 BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Basic Functional Construction
The FAX Board can be divided as shown in the figure below, and the functions
are controlled by the CPU (IC506) mounted on the image processor PCB.
ed.1
Inputs to and Outputs from the FAX Board
510
TSM Oc 3121
Reading Operations
1 Reading for Memory Transmission
Originals are placed on the glass platen and are read one by one so that multiple
pages may be transmitted. When a feeder is used, on the other hand, multiple
originals set in it are read. An original placed on the glass platen and an original
picked up from the feeder cannot be joined for reading.
2 Reading for Direct Transmission
A single original placed on the glass platen is read in response to a press on the
Start key. If a feeder is used, on the other hand, all multiple originals stacked
in it are read. As in the case of reading for memory transmission, an original
placed on the glass platen and an original picked up by the feeder cannot be
joined for reading.
Memory
The machine is equipped with two types of memory:

page memory serving as buffer memory for processing images which have
been read and
image memory serving to store coded transmission image data or reception
images.
1 Page Memory
The page memory that comes as standard is as large as 1 MB, capable of storing an A3 original in Fine. It may be increased by 3 MB (option) to enable the
use of Super Fine and Ultra Fine.
2 Image memory
The image memory that comes as standard is as large as 1 MB and may be increased to 3 MB or 9 MB (option). When the image memory becomes full during memory transmission, the mode will automatically switch to direct
transmission. (See Processing in Case of Memory Full.)
Scanner
unit
Printer unit
ed.1
Binary
processing
Resolution
conversion/
Reproduction ratio
Resolution
conversion/
Reproduction ratio
Page
memory
(1MB)
Expansion
memory
(3MB)
Coding/
Decoding
Image
memory
(1MB)
Modem
NCU
Expansion
memory
(3MB or
9MB)
READ/SENT Stamp
The stamp function is found in the feeder.

The stamp may be READ or SENT, and the function operates as follows
according to how transmission function settings in user data is set:
Condition
Operation timing
READ stamp Memory

transmission
A page must be read

into memory.
When a page is read into

image memory.
SENT stamp Direct transmission
The received
response (postmessage response) must
be RTP, MCF, or PIP.
When an affirmative
response (postmessage
response) is received in
response to Q (postmessage command).
Stamping will not occur for a copier function, test shot, or reading from the
glass platen.
Stamping will be treated as mixed original mode, possibly slowing down the
reading speed.
In 2-on-1 reading mode, a stamp is printed on both originals.
In two-sided original reading mode, a stamp will be printed on the face only.
Processing in Memory Full Condition
If the image memory is expected to become full while reading for memory
transmission, direct transmission mode will automatically be selected.
If a shift to direct transmission cannot be made in memory full condition, the
image read up to that point will be discarded (not transmitted).
Test Shot
When the test shot function is used, an original is read under the exactly same
conditions as are used for actual transmission, and the data is stored first before
output (printing). This way, the quality and the arrangement of the transmission images may be checked. In addition, the function may be used to help isolate an error in image processing from reading to memory units.
In addition to a test shot, the machine allows test printing (test print or VIDEO test) using #10 TEST mode. See the figure for the flow of image signals.
512
TSM Oc 3121
ed.1
Fax Controller Board
Notation Description
J1
Speaker connector
J5
NCU interface connector
J6
RAM-A (for page memory); when installed, it enables the use of

Super Fine and Ultra Fine modes. Its installation must be followed
by installation of RAM-B. (3MB)
J7
RAM-B (for image memory); when installed, it provides more space

for storing transmission/ reception images. (3MB or 9MB).
J100
Fax Motherboard Interface connector
LED1
Remains ON ehen 5V is being supplied normally
SW1
For factory adjustment; be sure it is OFF
SW2
Use it for back-up. Turn it off once when installing expansion memory; then, turn in on at the end of the work (toward 3, for back-up). If
the board is to be installed as an accessory (post-installation) to the
Oc 3121, be sure to shift SW2 from OFF to 3 at time of installation.
NCU Board
230V Areas (outside France)
514
TSM Oc 3121
Note: The NCU in the French model do not have SW1 through SW3.
Notation
Description
J1
Fax controller Board interface connector
J2
Connector for telephone line jack
J3
Connector for extension phone jack. (Note that a face plate is provided over the modular jack upon shipment from the factory.)
J4
Connector for handset jack
J5
Not used
J6
ARG cable terminal
Switch settings
SW1 SW2
SW3
Ec (general)
Sweden
UK/Australia/Asia/Oceania
France
ed.1
CORE/IP Board
516
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
12 PAPER
Contents
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the Registration in Rear/Front Direction
301
Dis-/assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Removing the Main Motor 401

Removing the Pick-Up drive Unit 402
Vertical Path Assembly 404
Removing the Pick-Up Assembly 406
Removing the Pick-Up/Feeding/Separation Roller 407
Installing the Pick-UP/Feeding/Separation Roller 407
Removing the Feeding Assembly 407
Removing the Feeding Fan 408
Removing the Registration Roller 409
1 Pick-up and feeding 501

2 Detection of jams 522
ed.1
12 Paper trays
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the Registration in Rear/Front Direction
Aim:
Check to make sure that the margin along the image front is 2.5 1.5 mm on
copies. (Try all cassettes.)
(
(+)
2.5 + 1.5mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
Correction:
If the margin is not as indicated, perform the following:

1 Slide out the cassette from the holder to be adjusted.
2 Remove the two screws (2), and remove the horizontal registration mount (1).
ed.1
12 Paper trays 301
3 Loosen the hex screw, and move the horizontal registration plate to the rear
front so that the width is as specified.
Front
Front
Horizontal
Horizontal registration
plate plate
registration
Rear
Rear
Hex
Hexscrew
screw
Note: Adjust the horizontal registration plate by matching the inner side of the
L shape on the horizontal plate at a specific scale notch.
302
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Dis-/assembly
1 Removing the Main Motor
1 Disconnect the power plug, and remove the following:
Rear cover (4 screws)

Flywheel (3 screws)
2 Remove the four screws (2), and disconnect the two connectors (3); then, remove the main motor (1).
ed.1
12 Paper trays 401
2 Removing the Pick-Up drive Unit

1 Disconnect the power plug, and remove the following:
Rear cover (4 screws)

Flywheel (3 screws)
Scanner cooling fan (hook, connector)
2 Remove the pick-up assembly.
3 Release the belt (1).
4 Remove the harness retainer (2), two high-voltage cables (3), and power sup-
ply cord mount (4) (2 screws).

2
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
5 Disconnect the seven connectors (5).

6 Remove the registration roller clutch (6).
7 Remove the four screws (8), and remove the pick-up drive unit.
6
5
7
ed.1
12 Paper trays 403
3 Vertical Path Assembly

Pick-up assembly
Pick-up drive unit
2 Remove the two rolls, and disconnect the connector; then, remove the multifeeder assembly.
3 Remove the two screws (1) from behind the machine.
4 Release the feeding lever, and remove the three screws to remove the feeding
lever and the feeding assembly locking assembly.

5 Remove the screw (2), grounding screw (3), and E-ring (4).
2
3
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
6 Disconnect the connector (6), and remove the vertical path assembly.
ed.1
12 Paper trays 405
4 Removing the Pick-Up Assembly

1
2
3
4
Remove the cassette from the copier.

Remove the right cover.
Pull off the roll (1) of the multi tray cover.
Detach the cable of the right door (2) from the hook (3); then, remove the right
door.
1
3
5 Disconnect the connector (4) of the pick-up assembly, and remove the ground-
ing screw (5).

6 Remove the four screws (7), and remove the pick-up assembly (6).
406
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
5 Removing the Pick-Up/Feeding/Separation Roller

1 Slide out the cassette.
2 Holding the knob assembly (1), pull it off in the axial direction.
Separation
Separation
RollerRoller
Feeding
Roller
Feeding
Roller
Pick-up
Roller
Pick-up
Roller
1
6 Installing the Pick-UP/Feeding/Separation Roller

1 Holding the knob assembly, push it in until a click is heard.
7 Removing the Feeding Assembly

1 Open the front door, and remove the fixing inside cover; then, remove the fix-
ing unit. (4 connectors, 1 screw, 1 grounding screw)

2 Remove the drum unit.
3 Disconnect the connector (1), and remove the grounding screw (2).
4 Remove the screw, and remove the feeding assembly positioning pin (3); then,
remove the feeding assembly (4) from the front.
ed.1
12 Paper trays 407
8 Removing the Feeding Fan

1 Remove the feeding assembly.
2 Remove the screw, and remove the transfer charging roller unit from the feed-
ing assembly.
3 Remove the three bushings (1) and the gear (2) by disengaging the hooks.
4 Remove the screw, and remove the static eliminator (3).
5 Remove the feeding fan assembly (4) from the mount in the direction of the
arrow.
3
2
6 Disconnect the connector (5), and remove the feeding belt (6) as if to displace
it.
7 Release the hook assembly (8) of the feeding fan cover (7) with a small
flat-blade screwdriver.
8 Remove the feeding fan (9).
7
408
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
9 Removing the Registration Roller

DC controller PCB
harness guide
Power supply mount
Drive unit
Developing assembly
Drum unit
2 Remove the screw (1), spring (2), and two E-rings (3) from the rear of the machine.
3 Remove the screw (4), spring (5), and two E-rings (6) from the front of the ma-
chine.
4 Remove the transfer guide unit.

5 Remove the registration roller.
ed.1
12 Paper trays 409
1 Pick-up and feeding
Outline
The copier has a centre reference. The copy paper moves along the centre of
the pick-up and feeding unit. The pick-up system comprises two cassettes (upper, lower) and the speciality tray.
Copy paper from one of the cassettes, or the speciality tray, is controlled by the
registration roller. This roller ensures that the leading edge of the paper coincides with the leading edge of the image on the OPC.
Nine sensors are used to monitor the movement of the copy paper. Seven sensors are used to detect jams.
Notation
Name
Signal
Pin*
PS4
MFPD*
J113-A11
PS5
PDP1
J113-A5
PS7
Fuser sensor PS7
PDP3
J109-6
Q1604
Sensor for the upper cassette
UCSPD*
J114-A10
Q1605
Sensor for the lower cassette
LCSPD*
J114-A11
PS8
PDP4
J113-A2
PS11
PDP5*
J103-2
PS12
Sensor for the lower refeed
PDP6*
J105-B2
PS13
PDP7*
J105-A2
*pin on the DC control PCB.

List of sensors
ed.1
12 Paper trays 501
OPC
Feeding unit
Fusing unit
502
TSM Oc 3121
Registration roller
Vertical transport
roller
Name
CL1
Clutch for the registration roller
CL2
Clutch for the speciality roller
CL3
Clutch for the vertical transport
CL5
Clutch for the lower refeed
SL4
Solenoid for the re-pick entry
SL5
Solenoid for the paper deflector
M1
main motor
M6
Motor for the retarding roller
M7
Motor for the lower refeed
M8
Motor for the output roller
MMD
J11 4-B 6
C L 3D *
J11 4-A 4
M FC D *
J114 -B 9
C L5 D *
J1 22 -6
RGCD*
J11 4-B 11
J1 0 5
R F LD *
J10 3 -5
D C co n tro ller P C B
M a in m oto r
d rive r P C B
D C con trolle r P C B
No.
M1
CL1
M8
SL5
D F LD *
J10 5 -A 5
CL2
CL3
SL4
J10 5
M7
M6
CL5
J10 3
ed.1
12 Paper trays 503
Pick-up from the cassette
Pick-up
The paper in the cassette is supported by a ramp. This keeps the paper in contact with the pick-up roller when the paper feed occurs.
The pick-up roller is driven by the motor (M4). The roller is lowered onto the
paper during the pick-up.
A cam, turned by motor M1, lowers the roller for feeding. The down solenoid
SL2 energises to allow the cam to turn.
The feeding roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of
copy paper is fed; the copy paper is moved to the feeding assembly and then to
the registration roller by the vertical path roller 1/2.
Motor M1 drives the vertical transport and the pre-registration roller. The drive
is controlled by switching the clutch CL2 ON and OFF.
The clutch CL1 allows the motor M1 to drive the registration roller.
Number
Name
Signal
Pin on DC control PBA
M1
Main motor
MMD
J114-B6
M4
Motor for cassette pick-up
Note:
J114
CL1
Clutch for the registration roller
RGCD*
J114-B11
CL3
CL3D*
J114-A4
SL2
Solenoid for lowering the pick-up SL2D*

roller
J114-A5
Note: Pulse signal: this cannot be checked ( 0, 1) by a meter.
504
TSM Oc 3121
cassette pick-up PBA

Cassette pick-up PCB
J114-B6
J114-A5
J 1 1 4 -A4
J114
J114-B11
DC control
PBA PCB
DC controller

Cassette pick-up PCB
M1
OPC
Photosensitive
drum
Registration
roller
Registration roller
main
Main
motor
motor
pick-up
unit
Pick-up unit
CL1
pre-registration
roller
pre-registration roller
motor for casCassette pck-up
sette
roller pick-up
drive motor
M4
CL3
vertical
transVertical
path
port
roller 2
roller
3
4
9
8
-A
0
6
1
J
gear
Gear
feeding roller
Feeding roller
pick-up roller
Pick-up roller
ramp
Lifter
vertical
Vertical
transport
path roller
clutch
clutch
separation
Separetion
roller
roller
pick-up roller
Pick-up roller
SL2
pick-up
Pick-up
solenoid
solenoid
feeding roller
Feeding roller
ramp
Lifter
cam
Cam
separation roller
Separetion roller
Number
Name
Signal
Pin*
Q1604
Sensor for the upper cassette
LCSPD
J105-10
Q1605
Sensor for the lower cassette
LCSPD
J105-11
Q1606
Sensor for the upper cassette: level 0
1RPD0
J108-1
Q1607
Sensor for the upper cassette: level 1
1RPD1
J108-2
Q1608
Sensor for the lower cassette: level 0
2RPD0
J108-3
Q1609
Sensor for the lower cassette: level 1
2RPD1
J108-4
ed.1
12 Paper trays 505
The upper cassette
506
TSM Oc 3121
The upper cassette
Cassette 1, A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
Sequence of pick-up operations (cassette)
Operation of the ramp in the cassette
When the cassette is in use, the ramp is raised continuously, so maintaining the
height of the top sheet in the cassette.
Movement of the ramp during the copying cycle
The level of the paper is maintained as follows:
The movement of the ramp is started when the shaft of the pick-up roller releases the trigger and releases the cam.
The movement of the ramp stops when there is no paper in the cassette.
1 As copy paper is used, the pick-up roller is gradually lowered.
Pick-up rollers
shaft of the pick-up roller
feeding motor
pick-up opening
ramp
Paper
trigger
ed.1
12 Paper trays 507
2 The stack depletes, and the shaft of the pick-up roller moves downwards. This
causes the shaft of the pick-up roller to push the trigger. This movement frees
the cam, so that the cam starts to rotate.
feeding roller
pick-up roller
cam
trigger
3 The cam rotates, lifting the lever.

ramp segment
4 The stack is raised by the ramp. The pick-up roller moves upwards, and the
spring draws the lever against the cam.

Fe e ding rolle
r
feeding
roller
pick-up
Pick-uroller
p ro ller
ramp
L ifter
lever
L eve r
spring
Spring
shaft of thePick-u
pick-up
roller
p ro ller
sha ft
lever
L eve r
spring
Spring
Paper
C o py pa pe r
<lifter
< Lifteup>
r up >
508
TSM Oc 3121
<lifter
atrrest>
< Lifte
a t R est >
Releasing the ramp

When the cassette is withdrawn, it releases the ramp. One claw raises the ramp,
another claw holds the ramp up. When the machine is at stand-by, the ramp is
held by the retaining claw. When the cassette is opened, the retaining claw is
released, and the ramp drops.
Warning: If the power supply fails while the ramp is being raised, the claw for
raising the ramp holds the ramp up. In such cases, ensure that the machine is
switched OFF, then ON. This makes sure that the cassette is released in the
proper manner.
Operation of the pick-up from the cassette
a) Pick-Up Operation
1 The pick-up roller is driven by the motor M4, via a gear system.
2 The motor M4 is controlled by the cassette pick-up PBA. When the paper feed
is from the upper cassette, motor M4 runs clockwise. Motor M4 runs counter-clockwise when the paper is fed from the lower cassette
3 Sensor for the pick-up roller (S5)
When the cassette is closed, the pick-up roller is lowered and the ramp is raised
to bring the paper into position.
b) Drive Control
When M4 rotates clockwise, gear 1 is raised to drive the pick-up roller for the
upper cassette.
When M4 rotates counter-clockwise, gear 1 is lowered to drive the pick-up
roller for the lower cassette.
motor for cassette pick-up
gear 1
gear 1
gear 1 and clockwise rotation
gear 1 and counter-clockwise
rotation
ed.1
12 Paper trays 509
feeding roller
Motor M4 for cassette pick-up

gear 1
pick-up roller
separation roller
Pick-up drive for the upper cassette: pick-up motor rotating clockwise.
feeding roller
Motor M4 for cassette pick-up
pick-up roller
separation roller
gear 1
Pick-up drive for the upper cassette: pick-up motor rotating clockwise.
510
TSM Oc 3121
c) Movement of the pick-up roller

M1 provides the drive for the shaft of the pick-up roller. The cam is activated
by the solenoid SL2
1
2
3
4
The raised position is the stand-by position of the shaft of the pick-up roller.
The following occurs when a sheet is fed:
- Solenoid SL2 energises.
- The motor M1 rotates the cam, for a single rotation.
The single rotation of the cam rotates, releasing the trigger.
The pick-up roller is lowered to reach the copy paper, and the motor M4 rotates
and starts to pick up a sheet of paper.
The rotation of the cam raises the shaft of the pick-up roller.
frame
shaft of the pick-up

roller
feeding roller
shaft of the feeding roller
ON
pick-up roller

frame
trigger
the cam rotates when SL2 is energised
cam 1
pick-up solenoid SL2
Movement of the shaft of the pick-up roller
ed.1
12 Paper trays 511
d) Detection of 'cassette is empty'

When the last sheet leaves the cassette, the detect lever drops through the slot
in the cassette. The vane on the detect lever interrupts the sensor (Q1604 for
the upper cassette, and Q1605 for the lower cassette). The no paper message
is displayed.
The upper cassette

The lower cassette
detect lever
Cassette in the stand-by situation
The following occurs when the cassette is removed or replaced.

1 With the ramp up, and the shaft of the pick-up roller down
a) Shaft of the pick-up roller is down

When the cassette is inserted, and the machine is ON, the shaft of the pick-up
roller will be lowered until it reaches the paper.
The rear of the cassette pushes lever 1 upwards.
The motor M1, and the pick-up solenoid SL2 are switched on, following the
signal from the size sensor. The trigger turns.
The position of the shaft of the pick-up roller is controlled by the lever 1 and
the trigger.
512
TSM Oc 3121

feeding roller
lever 1
pick-up roller
cassette
Movement of the lever 1 when the cassette is inserted
b) the ramp is raised

When the cassette is inserted, and the machine is ON, the shaft of the pick-up
roller will be lowered pressing down the trigger.
When one end of the trigger is pressed by the shaft of the pick-up roller, the
ramp is raised by the motor M1.
The pick-up roller is against the copy paper. The paper has moved up to a certain position, and the shaft of the pick-up roller has risen to the highest positing. The movement of the ramp is stopped.
trigger
cam
Raising the ramp
ed.1
12 Paper trays 513
2 Moving up the shaft of the pick-up roller, and releasing the ramp and the sep-
aration roller: when removing the cassette.

Movement of the shaft of the pick-up roller
When the cassette is withdrawn, the spring rotates the lever 1. This raises the
shaft of the pick-up roller. The pick-up roller allows the withdrawal of the cassette.
feeding roller
spring
lever 1
pick-up roller
cassette
Moving up the pick-up roller

Releasing the separation roller
A bend is incorporated in the lever 1. This presses down the separation roller.
As the lever 1 turns, when the cassette is withdrawn, the bend is rotated off the
separation roller. This reduces the pressure.
bend on the lever 1
separation roller
cassette
Releasing the separation roller
514
TSM Oc 3121
Releasing the ramp

The ramp is released, when the cassette is withdrawn: in stand-by.
Detecting the level of copy paper
The ramp rises gradually as the paper depletes. Together with the ramp, the
segment also rises. This moves a vane through the sensors Q1606 and Q1607.
ramp
vane
Cassette is full
Position of the ramp
Cassette is empty
pick-up roller
pick-up roller
P ick-up roller
P ick-up roller
Paper
Paper
C opy paper
C opy paper
ramp
ramp
Segment and sensors
vane
Light blocking
plate
Q1607
Q1606
The upper cassette
(upper cassett The position of the segment when the

cassette is full
G ear w hen the cassette is full of

d) Monitoring the stock of paper in the upper cassette
ed.1
12 Paper trays 515
The stock of copy paper, the sensors and the displays.

stock
Level
500 sheets
500 sheets
Q1606
Q1607
display
Indication
on
control panel
1:The light-blocking plate is over the sensor.

0:The light-blocking plate is not over the sensor.
516
TSM Oc 3121
Detecting the size of the paper
Outline
The size of the paper is selected on the size dial, and a switch to select A/B or
inch sizes.
..
Location of the dial
A/B or Inch switch
ed.1
12 Paper trays 517
Paper sizes
The sizes of paper that can be used in the copier.
Configuration
Cassette
Main scanning
direction (mm)
Reverse scanning direction

(mm)
A/B
A4
210
148
A5R
148
210
A4
297
210
A4R
210
297
A3
297
420
B5
257
182
B5R
182
257
B4
257
364
FLSO
216
330
OFICIO
216
317
A-OFI
220
340
E-OFI
220
320
B-OFI
216
355
A-LGL
220
340
U2 FOLIO
210
330
U3 A-FLS
206
337
SP-1
Set by user
Set by user
SP-2
Set by user
Set by user
ENV1
Set by user
Set by user
U1
518
TSM Oc 3121
Cassette
Main scanning
direction (mm)
Reverse scanning direction

(mm)
Inch
STMT
216
140
STMTR
140
216
LTR
279
216
A-LTR
280
220
LTRR
216
279
A-LTRR
220
280
LGL
216
356
11 17
279
432
U4
267
203
U5
203
267
U6
203
330
U7
268
190
U8
190
268
SP-3
Set by user
Set by user
SP-4
Set by user
Set by user
ENV2
Set by user
Set by user
Configuration
rotary label: A/B
ed.1
rotary label: inch
12 Paper trays 519
Note: The U-prefix refers to the following:
U1......... FOOLSCAP
OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
A-LGL
U2.....
U3.....
U4.....
U5.....
U6.....
U7.....
FOLIO
A-FLS
G-LTR
G-LTR (R)
G-LGL
K-LGL
U8..... K-LGL (R)
Note: The prefix SP-1/2 is for special 1/2. This applies for modes using default
sizes at the request of the customer. A display icon can be selected to refer to
the special cassette. For further details, refer to the user documentation.
Size of the cassette
The upper cassette and the lower cassette differ in size. The upper cassette may
be used for copy paper of size B4 or smaller.
Inside the cassette are the side guides. The guides are manually adjustable. The
side guides are not equipped with a sensor. The setting of the rotary switch
should correspond with the settings of the side guides.
The upper cassette
For sizes A5 to B4
The lower cassette

For sizes A5 to A3
side guides
Controlling the clutch for the registration roller
The clutch CL1 times the feeding of the paper, so that the leading edge of the
paper coincides with the leading edge of the image area on the OPC.
520
TSM Oc 3121
The timing of the operation of the clutch CL1 can be set in the service mode
(* 3 * , RESIST).
Selected mode
Paper Movement
(mm)
one-sided original -> one-sided copy
one-sided original -> two-sided

copy
copying on the 1st side
copying on the 2nd side
two-sided original -> two-sided

copy
two-sided original -> one-sided

copy
page separation
-> (one-sided
copy)
copying on the 1st side (left)
page separation
-> two-sided
copy
one-sided original -> overlay

copy
two-sided original -> overlay

copy
page separation
-> overlay copy
Paper and
Image
Between 0
and 20 mm;
the drawings
show a movement of 5
mm.
copying on the 2nd side (right) B

A
Copy paper-image area when copying on 1st side

Image area when copying on 2nd side D area: Erased by blank exposure.
OPC
OPC
image on OPC
paper Ahead of image

on drum
ed.1
image on
OPC
paper Behind
image on drum
12 Paper trays 521
2 Detection of jams
Outline
Seven sensors are used to monitor the movement of the copy paper, and to detect jams.
The DC control PBA monitors various points of the paper transport, to check
the arrival and departure of the paper. If one of the sensors detects a jam, the
main motor is switched OFF, and a message is displayed on the control panel.
Sensor
Signal
Pin*
PS4
MFPD*
J113-A11
PS5
PDP 1
J113-A5
PS7
Fuser sensor PS7
PDP 3
J109-6
PS8
PDP 4
J113-A2
PS11
PDP 5*
J103-2
PS12
Sensor for the refeed unit
PDP 6*
J105-B2
PS13
PDP 7*
J105-A2
522
TSM Oc 3121
Types

Delay
The paper did not reach the appropriate sensor within the specified time: i.e.
the sensor is not ON.
Stationary
The paper did not leave the appropriate sensor within the specified time: i.e.
the sensor does not switch OFF.
Persistent
The paper remains over a sensor, with power ON. i.e. the sensor detects paper.
Note: A jam will be signalled if any of the following occurs, during copying:
- the front door is opened,

- the right door is opened,
- the output door is opened,
- or the cassette is withdrawn.
Pick-up delay
A delay will be signalled if the paper does not reach the sensor PS8 within a
specified period of time after the clutch CL3 has energised.
Timing for delay at pick-up
ed.1
12 Paper trays 523
Delay at the pre-registration sensor PS5
Delay at the pre-registration sensor PS5

Timing for delay at the pre-registration roller
Delay at the fuser sensor PS7

specified period of time after the paper passes the clutch CL1.
Timing for delay at the fuser
524
TSM Oc 3121
Delay at the output tray PS13

specified period of time after the paper passes the sensor PS7.
Timing for delay at the output tray
Delay at the separation sensor PS6

Sequence for Separation Sensor Delay Jams
Delivery Sensor Stationary Jams

A stationary jam will be identified if copy paper does not move through the delivery sensor within a specific period of time after the delivery paper sensor
(PS13) has turned ON.
Sequence for Delivery Sensor Stationary Jams
ed.1
12 Paper trays 525
Note: The distance varies according to the length of the paper.
Delay at the refeed sensor PS12

Timing for the refeed sensor PS12 (overlay copying)
Timing for the refeed sensor PS12 (two-sided copying)
526
TSM Oc 3121
Delay at the sensor PS11

Timing for PS12
Timing for delay at the sensor PS12
Record of jams
The machine retains a history of the jams which have occurred. The history can
be checked in service mode.
The memory contains:
The remaining number of copies, and
the relevant copying mode.
This memory will be used for job recovery, after the jam has been removed.
ed.1
12 Paper trays 527
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
13 SPECIALITY INPUT
Contents
Adjustments
1 The position of the multifeeder paper guide cam

2 Recording the VR settings 301
301
Dis-/assembly
1 Multi Clutch 401

2 Speciality tray 402
3 Fitting the timing belt
404
501
1 Specialities input
ed.1
13 Speciality input
Adjustments
1 The position of the multifeeder paper guide cam
Adjust the cam so that it is horizontal, when the solenoid ring is touching the
claw.
Gear 1 Control
ring
ring
Gear
1 Control
Paper
plate
Paperguide
guide
plate
Stop
Stopscrew
screwW/hex
hole
w/hex hole
Claw
Claw
Solenoid
Solenoidplate
plate
Paper
guide
plate plate
cam
Paper
guide
Gear
2
Gear
2 Recording the VR settings

After fitting a new VR, enter the relevant data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fit the paper width VR

Open the front door, and insert the brush in the fuser release.
Insert the switch actuator in the door switch.
Using a thin pin, press the service switch.
Press * twice
Press FUNCTION ( * 4 * ) . It will highlight. Then, press OK .
Press the Page key to move to the relevant screen.
ed.1
13 Speciality input 301
*4* FUNCTION 07
AD
CANCEL
=xxxx
MF-A6R =xxx
MF-A4R =xxx
MF-A4 =xxx
SIZE
=xxx.x (mm)
OK
8 Place size A6 paper in the speciality tray, and adjust the side guide to A6R.
Note: A6 is obtained by folding A4 into four, width 105 mm.
9 When the side guide is adjusted to A6R, the VR output value will be displayed
10
11
12
13
14
15
below AD=xxx . After checking the value, press MF-A6R : causing it to

highlight. Then, press OK .
The value will be stored in MF-A6R .
Place size A4R paper in the speciality tray, and adjust the side guide to A4R.
Check that the value of AD is displayed. Then, press A4R, and press OK.
The value will be stored in A4R.
Place size A4 paper in the speciality tray, and adjust the side guide to A4.
Check that the value of AD is displayed. Then, press A4 , and press OK .
The value will be stored in A4 .
Press Reset twice, to end service mode.
Switch OFF.
VR output -->
A4
A4R
A6R
A6R
(105mm)
A4R
(210mm)
A4
(297mm)
paper width-->
302
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments
Dis-/assembly
1 Multi Clutch
- rear cover (4 screws)

- flywheel (3 screws).
2 Remove the two screws (2), and disconnect the connector (3). Then, remove
the multi clutch.
ed.1
2 Speciality tray
Removing the speciality tray
1 Open the speciality tray (1). Insert a screwdriver into the top of the connector
cover (2), turn the screwdriver and remove the cover. Disconnect the connector.
2 Close the speciality tray. Open the right door. Pull out the rolls (3): left and
right.
3 Remove the speciality tray

Note: When fitting the cover, align it at the top before pushing in the bottom.
Removing the pick-up roller
1 Pull out the rolls.
2 Detach the cable from the cable, and remove the right door (1).
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
3 Remove the bush (2), and slide the roller shaft (3) to the right.
4 Remove the ring (4), and remove the pick-up roller (5).
Warning: Pay attention to the pin at the rear of the pick-up roller.
Warning: Install the new multifeeder pick-up roller (1) so that the side with a
cross -2- on the collar is pointing towards the rear of the machine.
Removing the Separation Pad

1 Remove the right door.
2 Remove the pick-up roller.
3 Pushing the end (1) of the right door in the direction of A, remove the rear of
the pad cover (2): in the direction of arrow B.
A
B
4 Release the catch (4), and remove the retainer (3).
4
3
ed.1
3 Fitting the timing belt

1 Move the rack gear against the side frame (A).
2 Move the T slide to the left.
Timing
Timing belt
belt
Pulley
Pulley
Pulley
Pulley
Rack
Rackplate
plate
Section
AA
Section
B
Slide
Slidevolume
volume
3 Carry out adjustment Recording the VR settings.
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
1 Specialities input
Outline
The paper is fed off the top of the stack in the speciality tray.
The paper guide holds the paper against the pick-up roller. The pick-up roller
is driven by the motor M1 and the clutch CL2.
The interaction of the pick-up roller and the separation pad ensure that only
one sheet of paper is carried to the registration roller. This procedure occurs for
each sheet.
Main motor driver PCB
J114-B6
DC controller PCB
J114-B8
MFCD*
M1
Main motor
Multifeeder pick-up
roller clutch
Registration roller
CL2
Pre-registration
roller sensor (PS5)
Multifeeder pick-up roller

Multifeeder paper
sensor (PS4)
Copy paper
Multifeeder tray
Paper guide plate
Separation pad
Paper guide plate drive cam
J114-B13
PRDSD*
Spling clutch
SL3
Multifeeder holding plate
releasing solenoid
Detecting the size of the paper
The width
The width of copy paper is detected by the variable resistor (VR1751) operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide. The slide guide
settings are registered when the user makes adjustments for the copy paper
set on the speciality tray.
Length
The length of paper is measured by the pre-registration sensor (PS5). The
maximum size of specialities is 432 x 279 mm (11 x 17).
ed.1
Side
Slideguide
guide
(rear)
Variable
resistor
Variable
resistor
Speciality
traytray
Multifeeder
Side
guide
Slide
guide
(front)
Sequence of pick-up (2 size A4 documents, speciality feed)

Copy Start Key ON
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Multifeeder relay
releasing solenoid (SL3)
Multifeeder pick-up
clutch (CL2)
Pre-registration roller
sensor (PS5)
Registration roller
clutch (CL1)
Main motor (M1)
502
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
16 DUPLEX
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1
2
3
4
Duplex motor M7 401

Motor M6 402
The refeed unit 403
Horizontal Registration Motor
404
1 Making Overlay Copies 501

2 Making Two-Sided Copies 503
3 The refeed unit 504
ed.1
16 Duplex
Dis-/assembly
1 Duplex motor M7
Removing the duplex motor M7

The rear cover (4 screws)
The flywheel (3 screws)
The support
DC control PBA (2 screws, connectors)
The power supply PBA (screws, connectors)
2 Remove the two screws (2) . Disconnect the connector (3), and take out the motor M7.
1
ed.1
16 Duplex 401
2 Motor M6
Removing the motor M6

The support
DC control PBA (2 screws, connectors)
The power supply PBA (screws, connectors)
2 Remove the three screws (2), and disconnect the two connectors (3). Then, remove the motor M6.
2
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
3 The refeed unit

1 Remove the inside cover and the support.
2 Lock the feeding unit in place.
3 Remove the two screws (2), and remove the door support (right) (1).
4 Remove the two screws (3). Take out the refeed unit.
5 Disconnect the connector, and remove the refeed unit.
4
ed.1
16 Duplex 403
4 Horizontal Registration Motor

Pick-up assembly (Func 12)

Pick-up drive unit (Func 12)
Vertical path assembly (Func 12)
2 Remove the two screws (2), and disconnect the two connectors (3); then, remove the horizontal registration motor (1).
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
1 Making Overlay Copies
Outline
The figure below shows the paper path used to make overlay copies.
Copy paper that has moved through the fixing assembly is sent to the lower
feeding assembly by the movement of the paper deflecting plate*. In the lower
feeding assembly, the set-back roller puts the incoming sheet in a staggered
stack and waits for the next sheet.
When picked up from this stack (re-pick up), copy paper is discharged by the
movement of the paper deflecting plate 1**.
The solenoid SL5 energises, rotating the deflector in a counter-clockwise direction.
**The paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid (SL5) deenergises so that the paper deflecting plate 1 is restrained by the force of the spring.
Registration roller
Paper deflectior
Delivery
roller
Fusing unit
vertical transport roller
Re-pick up roller
Retarding roller
Movement of the
deflector
Path of copy
paper
Path of copy
paper
Force of spring
ON
< Pulling into the lower feeding assembly

for reversed delivery when copying on
the 1st side of an overlay copy>
ed.1
OFF
< Copying on the 1st side of a

two-sided copy when delivery the
last copy >
16 Duplex 501
Sequence of Operations (overlay copying)
The deflector guides the copy paper from the fuser to the output tray or to refeed unit.
The solenoid SL5 is energised at a specified time after the paper passes the sensor PS7.
Pick-up started for 2nd side
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
Fixing rear paper

sensor (PS7)
Paper deflecting plate 1
solenoid (SL5)
*1
*2
Lower feeding assembly

inlet sensor (PS12)
Delivery sensor (PS13)
*1 : Copy paper to the lower feeding assembly.

*2 : Copy paper to the delivery assembly.
502
Electrical parts
Signal
Signal
Jack
Fuser sensor PS7
PS7
PDP3
J109-6
Solenoid for the

paper deflector
SL5
DFLD*
J105-A5
Sensor for the refeed

unit
PS12
PDP6*
J105-B2
Sensor for the output

tray
PS13
PDP7*
J105-A2
TSM Oc 3121
2 Making Two-Sided Copies

Outline
The figure below shows the paper path used when making two-sided copies.
After it leaves the fuser, the copy is directed towards the output tray. A short
time after the copy passes the sensor PS7, the delivery roller reverses*. The
motor M8 is switched on at a specified time after the copy passes PS7.
For the second side of a two-sided copy, the delivery roller rotates clockwise**. Then, the copy is sent to the output tray.
Two-sided
Overlay
1st side
2nd side
1st side
2nd side
Solenoid for the paper

deflector SL5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Motor for the output

roller M8
CW -> CCW
CW
OFF
CW
Paper
deflectorplate 1
Paper deflecting
Sensor
the
Deliveryfor
sensor
Registration
roller
Registration roller
Fuser
sensor
PS7paper sensor
Fixing
assembly
Delivery
Delivery roller
roller
Retarding
roller
Set-back rollers
of of
thecopy
copy
*1 PathFlow
paper
Re-pick
uproller
roller
Re-pick up
of of
the
copy
*2 PathFlow
copy
paper
Movement of the deflector
Details of the movement of

the paper deflecting plate
ed.1
SL5
SL5
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
16 Duplex 503
Sequence of operations (two-sided copying)
After it leaves the fuser, the copy is directed towards the output tray. A short
time after the copy passes the sensor PS7, the delivery roller reverses. The motor M8 is switched on at a specified time after the copy passes PS7.
The copy is directed down to the refeed unit, preparing for the imaging of the
second side. The figure shows the sequence of operations for two-side copies.
Pick-up started for 2nd side
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
Fixing rear paper

sensor (PS7)
solenoid (SL5)
Delivery roller motor
(PS13)
*2
*2
*1
CW
CCW
*1 : Copy paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly.

*2 : Copy paper is moved to the delivery assembly.
3 The refeed unit

Outline
The copies carried to the refeed unit, are arranged in a step formation: ready
for two-sided copying or for overlay copying.
The step formation: the leading edge of each sheet is slightly behind the leading edge of the previous sheet. This enables correct separation of the copies as
they are peeled off the bottom of the stack.
504
Parts name
Notation
Main motor
M1
M6
Motor for the exit roller
M7
PS11
Lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor
PS12
Solenoid for the re-pick entry
SL4
CL5
TSM Oc 3121
J114-B6
MMD
J103-5
RFLD*
PDP5*
J122-6
CL5D*
J103-2
J103
PDP6*
J105
J105-B2
DC controller PCB
M6
M7
M1
PSPS11
11
PS
12
PS12
SL4
Re-pick up
CL5
roller
Retarding
Set-backroller
rollers
Re-pick up roller
The
refeed
unitassembly
Lower
feeding
Sizes
Q'ty
Paper sizes (mm; main sub scanning

directions)
LTR
20
179.40 x 215.90
A4
20
297.00 x 210.00
G-LTR
20
266.70 x 203.20
K-LGL
20
268.00 x 290.00
B5
20
257.00 x 182.00
A5
20
210.00 x 148.50
STMT
20
215.90 x 139.70
Others*
*AB:
Inch:
A3, A4, A4R, B5R, A5R

11 x 17, LGL, B-OFFI, A-OFFI,
A-LGL, AUS-FLS, FOOLSCAP, FOLIO,
G-LGL, E-DFFI, OFFICIO, A-LTRR, LTRR,
K-LGLR, G-LTTR, A-LTR, STMTR
Number of sheets in refeed unit, per size
ed.1
16 Duplex 505
Retarding the copies
a) Stacking the copies (after first side was imaged)

1 The copy paper moves into the refeed unit, creating a bulge.
1st
to to
arch
1stcopy
copypaper
paperbeing
beingmade
made
arch
2 The retarding roller rotates clockwise. This feeds the copy past the sensor
PS12.
PS12
PS
12
3 If the copy is size A4 or larger, solenoid SL4 is energised. This prevents the
copy approaching the re-pick roller.

PS
12
PS12
Paper
Copy paper
PSPS11
11
SL4
Deflector
Flapper
Retarding
Set-backroller
rollers
Re-pick
Re-pickup
uproller
roller
4 The retarding rollers are rotated in the reverse direction. The paper is carried
back to a pre-determined position.

PS 12
PS12 Specific
Specific distance
distance
Paper
Copy paper
506
TSM Oc 3121
Retarding
Set-back roller
rollers
Re-pick
upup
roller
Re-pick
roller
5 The 2nd copy paper moves into the refeed unit.

PSPS12
12
2nd copy
paper
2nd
copy
1st
1stcopy
copy paper
Retardingrollers
roller
Set-back
Re-pick
Re-pickup
uproller
roller
6 The copy paper is handled in the same manner as the 1st copy.
PSPS12
12
1st
copy
1st
copy paper
Retardingroller
roller
Set-back
2nd
2nd copy
copy paper
Re-pick
Re-pick up
up roller
roller
This process is repeated until there are a maximum of 20 sheets in the refeed
unit.
The sequence of operations for stacking the copies in the refeed unit.
SCRV
LSTR

inlet roller motor (M7)
inlet sensor (PS12)
Set-back roller motor
(M6)
Flapper solenoid (SL4)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
CW
CCW
CW
*1
Re-pick up front paper

sensor (PS11)
Main motor (M1)
*1 : Varies according to the length of copy paper.
( 2 copies, size A4: Direct, two-sided or overlay)
ed.1
16 Duplex 507
B) Re-pick up: for copying on the 2nd side

The copies, in the refeed unit, are transported by the re-pick roller. The copying
of the second side commences.
1 When the stacking is completed, the set-back roller is moved clockwise. The
copy paper is moved until the re-pick up sensor PS11 detects the leading edge.
PS 12
PS12
2nd
2ndcopy
copy paper
PS
11
PS11
Re-pick
Re-pickupuproller
roller
Retarding roller
Set-back roller
1st copy
1st
copy paper
2 The copy paper is moved continuously. The solenoid SL4 is energised for an
instant after the sensor PS11 is activated. Only the first sheet moves through
the re-pick-up roller: the second and subsequent sheets will be guided over the
deflector.
Deflector
Flapper
PS PS12
12
2nd copy
2nd copy paper
SL4
Re-pick up roller
PS PS11
11
Re-pick up roller
Retarding
Set-backroller
roller
1st copy
copy paper
PS12
PS
12
2nd
2ndcopy
copy paper
SL4
Re-pick up roller
Re-pick up roller
1st
copy
1st copy paper
PS PS11
11
Retarding
Set-backroller
roller
When the trailing edge of the first copy passes the retarding rollers, the retarding rollers will reverse. The rollers carry the copy paper back to a position
when the leading edge of the next sheet will not reach the sensor PS11.
508
TSM Oc 3121
Side alignment
a) Outline
The copies carried from the refeed unit, require alignment of the leading
edge.
The detection of the sides of the copy is carried out by the sensor PS14, together with motor M9. The sensor and motor are located near to the vertical
transport roller.
The registration motor M9 moves the registration sensor PS14, to detect the
edge of the paper. The result is used to determine the position of the image.
PS 14
PS14
M9
M9
Paper
Copy paper
10 mm
(approx.)
10mm(approx.)
Detection
starts
Detection
start position
Home position
Home position
b) Operations
The home position of the registration sensor PS14 is checked when the machine is switched ON, and the front cover is closed. The movement of the sensor is started when the sheet is detected by PS8.
When the paper leaves the refeed unit, and enters the vertical transport, it is detected by the sensor PS8. The registration motor moves the sensor PS14 until
it locates the edge of the paper. The side detection occurs for every sheet as it
leaves the refeed unit.
The position of the start of the detection differs for each sheet. Ideally it is a
point approximately 10 mm from the edge of the paper that is being transported. The start position is determined by the size dictated by the cassette, or the
side guide of the speciality tray.
ed.1
16 Duplex 509
The sequence of operations for the side registration.

The next figure shows the sequence of operations for rear/front registration detection.
Main power ON
INTR/STMB
Set-back roller
motor (M6)
Re-pick up start
PFR
*1
Re-pick up flapper
solenoid (SL4)
CW
CCW
*2

re-pick up clutch (L5)
Re-pick up front
paper sensor (PS11)
*3
Vertical path paper

sensor (PS8)
Vertical path roller
clutch (CL3)
Horizontal registration
motor (M9)
Reverse
Forward
Forward Reverse
Horizontal sensor
(PS14)
H.P
Horizontal
sensor (PS14)
S.P
*4
10mm(approx.)
Edge of paper
1:
2:
During the stacking phase, the retarding roller will switch ON and OFF.
During the stacking phase, the separator solenoid SL4 will energise as necessary.
3: During the stacking phase, the sensor PS11 will detect the sheets as necessary.
4: The edge of the paper is detected: as the vane is opened by the edge of the
paper.
5: The position of the edge of the paper differs, according to the size of the copy
paper. The start position is also variable.
HP: Home position of the registration sensor PS14.
SP: Start of the detection by the registration sensor PS14.
510
TSM Oc 3121
Components for the side registration.
J114-B6
MMD
J114-A4 CL3D
J114-B2 CRGPD
J113-A2 VPPD
J115
J103-5 RFLD*
J103-2 PDP5*
J122-6 CL5D*
J103
DC controller PCB
M1
SL4
M9
M6
PS8
PS11
CL3
PS14
Re-pick up roller
CL5
Set-back rollers
Electrical components
M1
main motor
M6
M9
Motor for the side registration
CL3
CL5
SL4
Solenoid for the re-feed separator
PS8
PS11
Sensor for the refeed entry
PS14
Sensor for the side registration
ed.1
16 Duplex 511
c) Adjusting the side registration (in service mode)

If there is a discrepancy in the position of the image on the second side of a
copy, the side registration can be adjusted. To do this, enter service mode ( *
3 * ), ADJUST , RSID-SNSHP : 4th screen.
The adjustment changes the position of the laser exposure. It does not change
the mechanical position of the sensor PS14.
If the image is displaced to the rear, decrease the value.
Specific
Specificdistance
distance
Image
Image area
area
H.P
PaperCopy paper
Edge
Edge
Value
Valuedecreased
decreased
Virtual
Virtualhome
homeposition
position
If the image is displaced to the front, increase the value.

Specific
distance
Specific
distance
Image
Imagearea
area
H.P
PaperCopy paper
Edge
Edge
Value
decreased
Value
increased
512
TSM Oc 3121
Virtual
Virtual home
home position
position
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
17 FIXING
Contents
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the pressure of the fusing film drive roller.
301
Dis-/assembly
1 Fuser drive 401

2 Fuser 403
3 Replacing the fusing film
408
1 Controlling the bias for the fusing roller 501

2 Fusing the copies and output of the copies 502
ed.2
17 Fusing
Adjustments
1 Adjusting the pressure of the fusing film drive roller.
Note: Carry out this adjustment after replacing the fusing film.
1
2
3
4
5
Open the front door, and insert the brush in the fuser release.
Insert the switch actuator in the door switch.
Switch ON.
Using a thin pin, press the service switch.
Using screen 14 (FUNCTION *4*), select T-ROLLER FIX; then press the
OK key. See the following for the adjustments after T-ROLLER FIX.
Execute T-ROLLER FIX (1)
RUNNING display is OK or
NoGo
Yes
End
Have there been

seven or fewer
NGs in a row
No
Replace the fuser

unit.
Yes
If NoGo , proceed as follows:
1) Loosen the paint-locked screw 1
2) Turn the white screw for the number of click (notes 1 and 2 on the
next page) according to the display (3) to the right of FILM SPEED
3) Tighten the paint-locked screw 1
4) Execute T-ROLLER FIX (1) once again
ed.2
17 Fixing 301
White screw
turn to the left
turn to the right
Paint-locked screw
Note:You may end the adjustment if RUNNING (2) display is OK at the end of
T-ROLLER FIX (1). If the RUNNING display (2) is NG, use the value under
CW and CCW indicated to the right of FILM SPEED (3)
Note:According to the numbers under CW and CCW indicated to the right
of FILM SPEED (3), turn the white screw (see figure) for the number of clicks.
(The number represents the number of clicks on the white screw)
Example: If the number in parentheses under FILM SPEED (3) is 5, turn the
white screw clockwise for five clicks.
302
TSM Oc 3121/3122
Adjustments
Dis-/assembly
1 Fuser drive
Removing the fuser drive
1
2
3
4
5
Disconnect the mains supply cable.

Remove the flywheel (3 screws).
Remove the DC control PBA (2 screws, connectors).
Release the tension spring (2), and remove the drive belt.
6 Remove the two screws, and remove the support (3).

7 Remove the power supply PBA ( two screws, connectors).
ed.1
17 Fusing 401
8 Remove the two screws (7). Take out the fuser drive (6).
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
2 Fuser
Separation claw.
1 Open the output door
2 Remove the screw (3). Then, remove the grip (2) of the separation claw (1).
3 Remove the separation claw, by sliding it to the right.
3
4 When fitting the separation claw, make sure that the flat surface (5) is adjacent
to the limit strip (6).

5
ed.1
17 Fusing 403
5 To remove the claw, slide it as shown. First lift out the round end.
Removing the fuser unit

Note: When replacing the fuser unit, do not forget to enter the values of the la-
bel.on the fuser unit. Enter the values in service mode (Adjust *3*) 06 FILM
LANK and FIXER-RESIST.
1 Open the output door
2 Remove the inner cover (1) from the fuser (1 screw).
3 Disconnect the four connectors (2). Remove the screw (3), and the earthing
screw (4). Then, slide out the fuser unit.
404
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
Removing the upper guide

1 Slide out the fuser unit.
2 Press the notch (1), and remove the upper guide (2), by sliding it to the rear.
Removing the cleaning roller

2 Remove the two screws (1). Remove the cleaning roller (2).
ed.1
17 Fusing 405
Removing the lower roller from the fuser unit

2 Detach the springs (1).
3 Remove the E-ring (3). Remove the lever (2), at the front.
4 Remove the E-ring (6). Remove the lever (5), at the rear.
406
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
5 Detach the springs (7).
6 Remove the separation claw.

7 Remove the lower roller.
Note: The shaft of the roller is connected by an electrode, at the rear of the machine. When fitting the roller, ensure that the electrode connection is at the rear
of the machine.
Lower fuser roller end
Nipple for the electrode connection.
At the rear of the machine

Lower roller
at the front of the machine
ed.1
17 Fusing 407
3 Replacing the fusing film

Note: After replacing the fusing film carry out adjustment: Adjusting the
pressure of the fusing film drive roller.
Removing the fuser unit
1
2
3
4
5
Open the front door

Open the output door
Release the refeed unit.
Remove the inner cover (1) from the fuser (1 screw).
Cut the cable tie, and disconnect the connector. Then, remove the fuser (3
screws).
Removing the upper fuser
Warning: Before dismantling the unit, place paper under the unit.
Do not touch the outer surface of the fusing film. If necessary, protect the fusing
film with paper.
Do not touch any paint-locked screws
1 Detach the springs.
spring
408
TSM Oc 3121
spring
Dis-/assembly
2 Remove the E-ring, the washer and the tension lever. From the front and the
rear of the unit.

E-Ring
E-Ring
3 Detach the springs.
spring
ed.1
spring
17 Fusing 409
4 Open the upper unit.
Upper unit
Lower unit
5 Remove the two screws from the rear of the upper unit. Then, separate the up-
per unit and the lower unit.
Screws
Upper unit
Lower unit
Upper unit
Lower unit
410
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
Removing the film

1 Disconnect the connector, and remove the upper guide.
Delivery guide
2 Disconnect the heater, at the front (1 screw).

3 Remove the alignment motor (3 screws). Then, disconnect the heater.
Screw
Alignment motor (M5)
Screw
Screw
4 Remove the cable guide (3 screws).

Cable guide
Screw
ed.1
Screw
Screw
17 Fusing 411
5 Remove the E-ring . Remove the cam and the bush.

6 Remove the E-ring and the washer from the drive roller. Then, release the shaft.
Cam
Screw
Screw
7 Fit the tension tool to the arm of the tension shaft: at the front.
Arm of the tension shaft
Tension tool
8 Fit the tension tool to the arm of the tension shaft: at the rear.
Arm of the tension shaft
412
TSM Oc 3121
Tension tool
Dis-/assembly
9 Remove the E-ring, and remove the tension arm.

E-Ring
10 Carefully remove the upper section of the unit (1 screw).
Screw
ed.1
17 Fusing 413
11 Fit the tension tool to the arm of the tension shaft: at the front.
Warning: Do not touch the outer surface of the fusing film, or the surface of
the heater.
Fusing film
Rubber ring
Note: If you do not have the pressure tools, push the arrowed point and remove
the fusing film.
414
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
Fitting the fusing film

Warning: The film should be fitted with the alignment shaping at the rear
(semi-transparent edge).
First slide the semi-transparent edge of the film over the rollers.
Semi-transparent edge
Tension
roller
Drive
roller
Rubber
Fusring
ing
heater
Fusing
film
1 Remove the rubber ring, and align the straight edge (the darker edge) of the
fusing film with the centre index mark on the heater bar.
Drive roller
Alignment lines
on the heater
bar
Heater bar
Darker edge
Surface of the
film
2 Refit the fusing film, proceeding in the reverse sequence.
Screw
Drive roller (bearing, washer, E-ring)
3 Fit the tension arm.
E-ring
ed.1
17 Fusing 415
4 Check the alignment of the fusing film, in relation to the centre mark on the
pressure heater bar. If necessary, realign the film.

Fusing film
5
6
7
8
Alignment lines on the heater bar
Remove the pressure tools, from the front and the rear.
Fit the cam.
Fit the cable guide (3 screws).
Fit the alignment motor M5, making sure that the segment is correctly located
in relation to the hole in the hinge arm.
Hole in the hinge are
Segment
9 Reconnect the heater (1 screw).
416
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
10 The black spring is for the rear of the unit, with the smaller hook fitted to the
spring post.
Smaller hook
Black spring
spring
Correct location of the springs.

Smaller hook
Black spring
spring
11 Reassemble the upper section and the lower section of the fuser unit.
screws
springs
12 Fit the tension levers: to the front and to the rear.
washer
E-Ring
springs
Note: After replacing the fusing film carry out adjustment: Adjusting the
pressure of the fusing film drive roller.
ed.1
17 Fusing 417
1 Controlling the bias for the fusing roller
Bias for the transfer guide
The negative bias (-600 V DC) for the transfer guide is used to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide. The same potential is applied to the toner.
Application of the bias continues when the control panel power remains ON.
Bias to the fuser roller
For this reason the lower roller is connected by an electrode at the rear of the
machine. For details see Dis-/assembly Removing the lower roller from the
fuser unit.
Fixing
assembly
Photosensitive
drum
T101
Fixing bias ON signal
Transfer
guide
T101
drive
circuit
T101 drive signal
Q605
CPU
DC controller PCB
A positive bias is applied to the steel core of the fuser roller. This is to prevent
offset to the fuser film.
J209-A4~A9
J102-A4~A7
IC101
CPU
ed.1
17 Fusing 501
2 Fusing the copies and output of the copies

Outline
Motor M1 rotates the drive roller of the fuser. The drive roller turns the fusing
film which, in turn, rotates the lower roller.
The inside of the fusing film is heated by the heater. The temperature of the
heater is monitored by the thermistor TH1. The heater temperature detection
signal TH1 is transmitted to the DC control PBA. As a result, the DC control
PBA varies the heater drive signal HTRD to control the temperature of the
heater.
A thermistor TH2 is located at the rear end of the heater. This is to protect
against over-heating.
If the front door is opened, there is a reduction of pressure between the fuser
film and the lower roller.
DC controller PCB
5V
Fixing assembly end

temperature signal (TH2)
5V
Fixing heater (H4)
Sub thermistor (TH2)

5V
CPU
Fixing temperature signal (TH1)

5V
Main thermistor (TH1)
5V
5V
Fixing heater drive circuit
24V
Relay drive signal
I/O
Relay
Fixing heater drive signal (HTRD)
SW2
PWM
Composite power Zero cross signal

supply PCB
502
TSM Oc 3121
Controlling the temperature of the fuser
The heater is switched OFF when the machine is in stand-by.

1 If the temperature at copy start is less than 100C, either of further five types
of control is chosen depending on the count of copies:

1) 235 to 190C,
2) 225 to 180C,
3) 215 to 180C,
4) 205 to 180C,
5) 195 to 180C.
Normally, one of 2) through 4) is selected.
Control 1)
No of copies
1-4
5-6
7 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
235
230
225
215
210
200
190
Control 2)
No of copies
1-4
5-6
7 - 20
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
225
220
215
210
190
180
Control 3)
No of copies
1 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
215
210
200
190
180
ed.1
17 Fusing 503
No of copies
1 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100th
205
200
190
180
504
Control 4)
Control 5)
No of copies
1 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
195
190
180
TSM Oc 3121
2 If the temperature is 100C or more, or less than 140C at copy start, one of
further three types of control is chosen depending on the count of copies:

1) 215 through 180C,
2) 205 through 180C,
3) 195 through 180C:
Control 1)
No of copies
1-5
6 - 10
11 - 15
16 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 to 100
215
210
205
200
195
190
185
180
Control 2)
No of copies
1 - 15
16 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
205
200
195
190
185
180
Control 3)
No of copies
1 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
51 - 100
195
190
185
180
ed.1
17 Fusing 505
3 If the temperature is 140C or more at copy start, control is exerted so that the
temperature will be 180C at all times.

1st to 100th copy 180C
Note that, a (less than 100C at copy start) and c (100C or more and less than
140C) are always combined as follows; the notation value on label here refers to the label attached to the fuser, and the settings recorded on the label may
be entered in FILM LAMK in service mode (Adjust *3*) 06 to select a specific fuser control temperature.
Value on label
0
1
2
3
4
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
1)
2)
3)
3)
Note: Normally, as value on the label is one of 2 through 4 is selected. Select

a higher temperature (lower value) in service mode if fusing faults occur; select a lower temperature (higher value) if offset occurs. For instance, if fusing
faults occur with 2 selected, change it to 1 or 0. Try 1 first and then try 0 if necessary. If offset occurs with 2 selected, change it to 3; if offset continues,
change it to 4.
Controlling the Supply Power to the Fuser Heater
The temperature of the heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied

to the heater. The plane-shaped heater used, tends to be subject to variation because of production factors.
Because of this, you must enter the resistance in service mode (Adjust *3*) 06
FIXER-RESIST whenever you have replaced the fuser so that the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB executes appropriate power control.
Warning: The heater resistance is entered in service mode at the factory; do
not change it unless you have replaced the fuser.

The power to the heater is controlled by means of phase power control. The microprocessor controls the output timing of the heater drive signal (HTRD) so
that power appropriate to the target temperature of the heater may be supplied
(through phase control).
506
TSM Oc 3121
Protection against excess temperature of the fuser
Themistor TH2 monitors the rear end of the fusing film. This is to prevent an
excessive temperature occurring, as this could damage the fusing film: particularly when processing size B4 or smaller.
When the output of TH2 exceeds 250C. The sheet-to-sheet distance is increased, to accelerate the heat discharge of the heater. The copying run, with
the increased sheet-to-sheet distance, is continued even though the output of
TH2 falls below 250C.
If the overheating persists, after increasing the sheet-to-sheet distance, and the
temperature rises above 260C, the copying run will be interrupted. The copier
will switch OFF. E001 will be logged in the fault logging.
ed.1
17 Fusing 507
Protection circuits
The following circuits are incorporated to prevent malfunctioning of the heater:

1 Thermistor TH1, TH2
The DC control PBA monitors the signals from the thermistors TH1 and
TH2. If an exceptionally high or low temperature is detected, the machine is
switched OFF. Codes E000 through to E003 will be logged.
The maximum acceptable reading from for TH1 is 250and for TH2 it is
260C. The heater error detection signal (HTNG) is issued, isolating the machine.
2 Thermal fuse (FU1)
If the ambient temperature at the thermal fuse reaches 226 C, and remains at
that level for a certain period, the thermal fuse will melt, interrupting the power
to the heater.
3 Heater ON detection circuit (200V model only)
The time during which the heater drive signal (HTRD) remains OFF is monitored. If an error is detected, the power is switched OFF. (E004 is logged)
508
TSM Oc 3121
Alignment of the fusing film

1 Outline
During rotation, the fusing film tends to run towards the front or the rear of the
machine. This movement is monitored by the film sensor PS2. The motor M5
is used to correct the alignment.
Warning: The lower roller is released when the front door is open.
Switching the machine ON could, in such cases cause misplacement of the film
or damage to the heater.
Ensure that the roller is locked when working with the front door open.
The alignment sensor PS2 rests against the edge of the fusing film. The rear
edge of the fusing film is not straight, causing the alignment sensor to continually switch ON and OFF.
If the film is correctly aligned, the time of the ON and the OFF periods is the
same. If the film traverses to the rear, the sensor will remain ON longer than it
remains OFF. If the film traverses to the front, the sensor will remain OFF
longer than it remains ON. The DC control PBA compares the ON and OFF
times, so correcting the position of the film.
ed.1
17 Fusing 509
If misalignment occurs, the motor M5 is switched ON, to raise or lower the tension roller. The film will traverse to the centre, correcting the misalignment.
Correction is continued as necessary to ensure correct alignment of the film.
If the film has become displaced so much that the correction mechanism cannot control it, E007 will be indicated.
2 Control of the alignment motor
The alignment motor is a stepping motor, rotated by the pulse signals A, A*,
B, B*.
510
TSM Oc 3121
Locking the Fuser
The locking of the film and the lower roller is designed to be released when the
front door is opened. It is therefore necessary to secure the film and the roller
when necessary for service work. The unit is locked by inserting the handle of
the cleaning brush in the aperture.
Inserting the brush

If the fuser cover is not fitted, use this side.
If the fuser cover is fitted, use this side.
1 If the fuser cover is fitted, insert the handle of the brush as shown, and turn it
90 . This secures the fuser.
Brush
2 If the cover is not fitted, hold the hinge arm so that it is parallel to the front of
the machine and insert the brush in the gap to the right of the hinge arm.
ed.1
17 Fusing 511
Brush
Hinge arm
512
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
19 DELIVERY
Contents
Adjustments
1 The position of the deflection solenoid SL5
301
Dis-/assembly
1 Output
401
Dis-/assembly of the 3-tray unit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Removing the covers 403

Removing the 3-tray unit 404
Removing the feeder motor (M9) 405
Removing the sensor PS19 and the sensor PS17
Removing the shift unit 407
Removing the shift motor M11 408
Removing the output sensor PS18 408
Removing the output roller 409
406
1 Output
501
Functional description of the 3-tray unit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
The 3-tray unit 504

Specifications 504
Nomenclature 505
Operation 507
Basic Functions 507
Feeding drive system 513
Location of the electrical components
Service mode. 522
Self Diagnosis 523
522
Electrical diagrams
1 Delivery
ed.1
701
19 Delivery
Adjustments
1 The position of the deflection solenoid SL5
Remove the output unit
Place the output unit vertically on a level surface.
Press the plunger of the solenoid SL5 as far as it will go.
The gap between the ring on the plunger and the housing of the solenoid should
be 0.2 mm. If necessary, loosen the screws and adjust the position of the solenoid.
5 Refit the output unit.
1
2
3
4
0.2
mm
0.2mm
Solenoid for the paper deflector SL5

Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid (SL5)
ed.1
19 Delivery 301
Dis-/assembly
1 Output
Removing the lower cover from the delivery unit

1 Switch OFF. Disconnect the mains supply cable.
2 Open the front door
3 Open the delivery unit, and remove the connector cover. The cover snaps open.
4 Release the catch (3), holding the cover (2) of the delivery unit.
5 Close the delivery unit. Remove the lower cover from the delivery unit.
Note: The delivery assembly lower cover cannot be removed unless the deliv-
ery assembly is closed. Be sure to close the delivery assembly after releasing
the catch.
ed.1
19 Delivery 401
Removing the output unit

1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Open the unit and remove the screw (2). Release both ends of the cable.
2
1
3 Withdraw the spacer (1) from the right side of the unit.
4 Release the bushing (1), by shifting it to the left.
5 Move the unit to the right. Remove the unit: sliding it to the left and, then, to
the right.
402
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly

2 Removing the covers
1 Remove the output tray
2 Release the four catches for the cover (1): two at the top and two at the bottom.
Use a small screwdriver to release the lower catches.
ed.1
19 Delivery 403
3 Removing the 3-tray unit

Whenever you have to relocate the copier carry out the following procedure.
1 Remove the cover (4 catches).
2 Withdraw the strip (1).
3 Open the 3-tray unit, and disconnect the connector (2).

2
404
TSM Oc 3121
4 Free the harness from the edge saddles adjacent to the hinge.
5 Gripping the bottom of the 3-tray unit, remove the unit: supporting the top of
the 3-tray unit, near to the catch.
Warning: If the 3-tray unit is to be placed on the floor, place it with the trays
underneath.
4 Removing the feeder motor (M9)

1 Open the front door, and open the 3-tray unit.
2 Disconnect the connector (1), and release the cables from the saddle (2).
3 Remove the feeder motor (4): two screws.
1
ed.1
19 Delivery 405
5 Removing the sensor PS19 and the sensor PS17

2 Disconnect the connector (1) and release the catch (2). Remove the 3-tray sen-
sor PS19 (3) and the tray sensor PS17 (4).

1
(PS19)
(PS17)
Top
Top
406
TSM Oc 3121
6 Removing the shift unit

1 Remove the sorter from the copier.
2 Remove the motor cover (1) (2 screws).
3 Disconnect the connector (3).
4 Remove the shift unit (4) (4 screws 5).

5
ed.1
19 Delivery 407
7 Removing the shift motor M11

1 Remove the shift unit
2 Disconnect the connector (3), and remove the shift motor (1): (screw 2).
3
2
8 Removing the output sensor PS18

1 Remove the shift unit
2 Disconnect the connector (1), and remove the output sensor PS18 (2).
408
TSM Oc 3121
9 Removing the output roller

2 Release the catch (1), and remove the delivery roller (2).
ed.1
19 Delivery 409
1 Output
Outline
Two delivery modes can be selected: face-up mode or face-down mode.

a) Face-up output
The copies are fed out with the image side upwards.
Initially, face-up mode is selected, regardless of the selected copying mode.
J109-6
PDP3
J105-A2
PDP7
J105-A5
DFLD*
J105-B2
PDP6
DC controller
SL5
M1
PS13
PS7
M8
PS12
M7
ed.1
M6
19 Delivery 501
a) Face-down output
The copies are fed out with the image side downwards.
Copy paper that has moved through the fuser unit assembly is sent to the lower
feeding unit by the movement of the deflector.
A short time after the leading edge of the copy passes the sensor PS12, the delivery roller reverses. The copy is carried to the output slot: face-down.
M1
main motor
M6
M7
Motor for the lower refeed
M8
Motor for the output roller
SL5
Solenoid for the paper deflector
PS7
Fuser sensor PS7
PS12
Sensor for the lower refeed
PS13
1 When the leading edge of the last copy reaches the sensor PS7 the deflector so-
lenoid SL5 is energised, directing the copy paper to the lower delivery unit.
SL5
PS13
PS7
M8
PS12
Paper
Copy paper
Solenoid for the paper deflector 1 is energised
502
TSM Oc 3121
2 Shortly after the leading edge of the last copy reaches the sensor PS12, the mo-
tor M7 starts to rotate in reverse. Later, the output motor M8 starts running for
face-down delivery.
SL5 OFF
PS13
PS7
PS12
M8
M7
Solenoid for the paper deflector 1 is de-energised
2) Timing of operations
The sequence of operations for the face-down output.
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR

solenoid (SL7)
inlet roller motor (M7)
CW
CCW

Delivery roller motor (M8)
Face-down output
SL5 ON
SL5 OFF
Feeding
the copy
paper
the fuser
to the lower output
Feeding copy
paper
fromfrom
the fixing
assembly
unit.
to the lower feeding assembly
Movement of the deflector
ed.1
19 Delivery 503

2 The 3-tray unit
Features
Sorts fax output and printer output.

Dedicated trays can be allocated for copies, fax output and printer output.
Shift of the trays
The trays shift to the front and the rear: sorting the output into sets.
3 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Number of bins
2 trays
1 output tray (part of copier)
Modes
Copying, printing and

fax
Stacking
Face-up
Face-down (64 to 80
g/m2)
Size of paper
A5/STMT to A3/297
mm x 432 mm
Volume of stack Tray 1
100 sheets
Tray 2
100 sheets
Power supply
From copier (24 V DC)
Dimensions (W x D x H)
195 (117) x 485 x 262

mm
Weight
6.1 kg (approximately)
195 is the total width, 117 is the

width outside the copier panelling.
Maximum power consumption

Specifications subject to change without notice.
504
TSM Oc 3121
4 Nomenclature
External View
5
1
2
3
4
5
Copiers delivery assembly

3-tray unit
Tray 2
Tray 1
Output tray
ed.1
19 Delivery 505
Cross Section
1
6 7
Copier
Copier side
11
1 Tray 1
2 Output tray
3 Delivery roller 2
4 Paper deflector 3
5 Transport roller 1
6 Delivery roller 1
10
7 Paper deflector
8 Paper deflector 2
9 Transport roller 2
10 Delivery roller 3
11 Tray 2
Cross section of 3-tray unit
506
TSM Oc 3121
5 Operation
Settings are selected on the copiers LCD. Of the copier settings, the following
relate to the Multitray:
Custom common settings
To select custom common settings, select ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS and

select custom common settings.
No.
Item
Description
Factory default
PRINTING To set the level of priority: cop- Copier: 1

PRIORITY ier, fax or printer.
Fax: 2
Printer: 3
TRAY
To specify which functions are A: Copier outputs

allocated to the trays.
B: Fax/printer output
Sorting Operation
The 3-tray unit sorts the output according to the following conditions:
Whether a mode (copier, fax, printer) has been selected under TRAY in user
mode. The Multitray will sort outputs to the selected tray.
Face-down output
Face-down delivery requires a reversing function in the copiers delivery assembly and is executed as follows:
Fax Outputs: the output will automatically be face-down.
6 Basic Functions
The Multitray comes with two special trays that are designed to shift for sorting outputs and serve as a 3-bin output device with the addition of the copiers
delivery assembly.
Dedicated trays 1 and 2 can be allocated for copies, fax output and printer output.
The Multitray is supplied with 24VDC by the copier, and its electrical mechanisms are controlled by the copiers DC controller PCB.
ed.1
19 Delivery 507
7 Functional design
Functional design
The 3-tray unit has two basic functions: the drive for the shifting of the trays
and the drive for the copy transport.
Copier
Copier side
Transport drive
Feeding drive
block
Control
Control system
system
DC
(DC control
controller PBA
PCB)
Drive for
Tray shift the
drive
shifting
block
trays
The functional blocks
508
TSM Oc 3121
Electrical circuitry
The Multitrays electrical mechanisms are controlled by the copiers DC controller PCB.
3-tray unit
Multi-Output Tray-C1
<Input
<Inputblock>
block>
Copier
Copier
(control system)
(control system)
Photosensors
Photosensors
Sensor
for the
tray(PS16)
position PS16
Tray position
sensor
Deliveryfor
sensor
(PS17) 2 PS17
Sensor
the 2Delivery
Deliveryfor
sensor
(PS18) 3 PS18
Sensor
the 3Delivery
Multitray
inlet
sensor
(PS19)
Sensor
for
the
2-tray
entry PS19
DCDC
control
PBA
controller
PCB
<Input block>
<Output block>
Solenoid
Solenoid
Solenoid SL6 for the paper deflector
2 deflecting plate 2 solenoid (SL6)
Paper
Solenoid
SL6 for
the
paper deflecPaper deflecting
plate
3 solenoid
(SL8)
tor 2
Motor
Motor
Feeding
motor
(M9)
Feeding motor
(M9)
Shift
M11
Shift motor
motor (M11)
ed.1
SL
19 Delivery 509
Inputs to and Outputs from the Copiers DC Controller

1 Inputs to the DC Control PBA
DC DC
control
PBA
controller
PCB
+5V
Sensor
for
Tray position
the
tray
sensor
position
PS16
J104-2
-7
-3
PS17
J104-2
-4
-3
PS18
J104-2
-5
-3
PS19
J104-2
-6
-3
TPD
When the tray is at the front, 1.

Whenvane
the tray
the front,
The
isisinat front
of'1'.
the sensor.
(The light-blocking plate is blocking PS16.)
+5V
Delivery
sensor
Delivery 2
sensor 2
When copy paper exist over the sensor,
When copy paper exists over the sensor, '0'.

DPD2 0.
(The light-blocking plate is not blocking PS17.)
The vane is not in front of the sensor

PS17.
+5V
Delivery
Delivery 3
sensor
sensor 3

DPD30.
(The light-blocking plate is not blocking PS18.)

PS18.
+5V
Sensor for
Multitray inlet
the
2-tray
sensor
entry PS19

0.
INPD (The light-blocking plate is not blocking PS19.)
PS19.
2 Outputs from the DC Controller PBA
M9
Shift
motor
Shift motor
M11
J104-8
-3
SL 6
J104-1
-9
SL 8
J104-1
-10
Solenoid SL6
for
the
paper
Paper
deflecting
plate 2 solenoid
deflector
2
Solenoid SL8
Paper
deflecting
for
the
paper
plate 3 solenoid
deflector
3
510
J104-1
-11
-12
-13
-14
Feeding
Multitray feeding
motor
motor
TSM Oc 3121
+24V
DC
PBA
DC control
controller PCB
A
A
B
B
M9
isa astepping
stepping
M9 is
motor. motor.
The
revolution,
Changing
the order ofand the timing of the
drive
pulses
(A,
A,
B, B)
rotation, are controlled
by changing
and frequency,
the
sequence of the drive pulses A,
the revolution and the timing
A*,
B and
of rotation
areB*.
controlled.
SHMD
During
operation,
thelinesignal
During operation,
the signal
is '1'. line is 1.
(M11 turns
ONOn
whenwhen
SHMD SHMD
is '1'.)
(M11
turns
is 1.)
+24V
SL2D
During operation, the signal line is 0.

During operation, the signal line is '0'.
(SL6
is 0.)
(SL6 turns
turns ONOn
whenwhen
SL2D SL2D*
is '0'.)
+24V
SL3D
During operation, the signal line is 0.

During operation, the signal line is '0'.
(SL8
when
is 0.)
(SL8 turns
turns ONOn
when
SL3D SL3D*
is '0'.)
Outline
The 3-tray unit collects the output, according to the usage mode, and allows for
the selection of the required tray.
1 Collecting the copier output
The outputs may be sorted, and collected in the trays 1, 2 or 3.
2 Collecting the printer output
The outputs may be stacked, and collected in the trays 1, 2 or 3.
3 Collecting the fax output
The output may be stacked, and collected in the trays 1, 2 or 3.
Face-up output (normal collection)

Copier
Copier side
Path
ofcopy
thepaper
Flow of
copy paper
Collection
traytray
22
Deliveryin
to the
delivery
ed.1
Collection
indelivery
the tray
Delivery to
tray23
19 Delivery 511
The face-down output to the tray 2: with use of the lower feed unit.
The following description is based on collection in the tray 2. It is equally
applicable for the trays 1 and 3, and after turning the copies.
1 Copy paper that has moved through
the fuser unit is directed to the lower

feeding unit.
PS7
Paper
Copy
paper
Copier
Copier side
2 Shortly after passing the sensor PS7,
the paper is turned over and carried

towards the 3-tray unit.
PS7
Paper
Copy paper
3 The copy paper is collected in the tray
2.
Copier
Copier side
PS7
Paper
Copy
paper
512
TSM Oc 3121
9 Feeding drive system

Functional design
Copy paper coming from the copier is controlled by the copiers DC controller
PCB and delivered to the delivery tray.
The figure shows the transport drive system, and the location of the electrical
components. Also included are the names of the various signals.
MMD
J114-B6
Main motor
driver PCB
Copier
M1
DC controller PCB
SL5
M8
DFLD
J105-A5
SL3D
J105-A8,9,12,13
J104-10
J104-11~14
DC controller PCB
PS7
PS13
SL8
PS19
PS12
PS17
PS18
SL6
M6
M7
M9
J103-8,9,12,13
J105-B9,10,13,14
J104-9
SL2D
Diagram of the transport drive system.
ed.1
19 Delivery 513
PS19
SL6
PS17
SL8
PS18
(M11)
(PS16)
M9
PS16 is the tray position sensor, and M11 is the tray shift drive motor;
both are explained in the section on the tray shift mechanism.
Location of the electrical components: transport drive system.
Symbol
Nomenclature
Pin No. (* 2) State (*

3)
PS19
Sensor for the 3-tray entry PS19
J104-6
PS17
Delivery sensor 2
J104-4
PS18
Delivery sensor 3
J104-5
M9
Motor for the tray feeder (* 1)
J104-11~14
SL6
Solenoid SL8 for the paper deflector 2
J104-9
SL8
Solenoid SL8 for the paper deflector 3
J104-10
*1 Stepping motor.
*2 pin on the DC control PCB (signal line).
*3 late when the sensor is ON.
Electrical components, signals and signal lines
514
TSM Oc 3121
Transport drive
1 Drive and sequence of operations (face-up delivery)
Collection in the tray 2

The solenoid SL5 is energised at a specified time after the paper passes the sensor PS7.
(Copy paper is delivered to delivery tray 3 when the paper deflecting plate 3
solenoid SL8 turns ON.)
ON
Copier side
SL5
Paper deflecting
plate 1
OFF
SL8
PS7
Paper deflecting
plate 2
PS19
Delivery tray 2
PS17
Paper deflecting
plate 3
PS18
SL6
OFF
Sequence of Operations (small sizes; continuous pick-up and return)

Shortly after passing the sensor PS7, the paper is turned over and carried towards the 3-tray unit.
SCRV
LSTR
Post-fixing sensor
(PS7)
solenoid (SL5)
Multitray inlet sensor
(PS19)
Delivery sensor 2
(PS17)
Multitray feeding motor
(M9)
1: The feeding motor doubles its speed of rotation when the

paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid turns OFF.
The copy paper is collected in the tray 2 (A4. 1 sheet).
ed.1
19 Delivery 515
Movement of the trays
The delivery trays 2 and 3 shift to the rear and the front to sort outputs, thereby
stacking the outputs as shown in the Figure.
Tray
2 ortray
3 2 or 3
Delivery
Sheet
from2nd
thejob
2nd job
Sheet from
Shift
Shift
Shifting
Tray shiftsof the
tray
Sheet
from3rd
thejob
3rd job
Sheet from
Sheet
thejob
1st job
Sheet from
from 1st
Sheets
the traytray (top view)
Sheetssorted
sorted on
on delivery
516
TSM Oc 3121
Operation
a) Drive for the shift

M11 provides the drive for the shift of the copies. Gears and cams simultaneously transmit the drive action to both the trays.
The shift motor (M11) is a DC motor that rotates in one-direction only, and its
speed and timing of rotation is controlled by the drive signals from the copiers
DC controller PCB.
The diagrams show the mechanical construction of the shift of the trays, and
the location of the electrical components.
Rear
Trayframe
shifting plate
Traction gear
Crescent pulley
Shift motor
Shift motor
M11
(M11)
Tray
position
Sensor for
the
tray
sensor (PS16)
position PS16
Drive for the shift
ed.1
19 Delivery 517
(PS19)
(SL6)
(PS17)
(SL8)
(PS18)
M11
PS16
(M9)
Symbol
Nomenclature
Pin No.
State
PS16
M11
J104-7
J104-8
Sensor for the tray position

Drive for shifting the trays
0
1
Electrical components, signals and signal lines
B) Determining the position of the trays

The position of the tray is identified by the copiers DC controller PCB with
reference to the tray position signal from the tray position sensor (PS16).
The tray is considered to be at the home position when the trays are at the forward position, and the vane on the traction gear blocks the sensor.
The home position is checked when the machine is switched ON.
(home position)
Home
position
<Tray
is Rear>
backward>
<Tray at
<Tray
is forward>
<Tray
at Front>
Turning
Direction of rotation
Turning
Direction of rotation
Sensor for the

Tray
position
tray
position
sensor (PS16)
PS16
The traction gear and the position of the trays.
518
TSM Oc 3121
c) Timing of operations
The motor M11 is switched ON when the leading edge of copy paper passes
the inlet sensor PS19.
LSTR

(PS19)
Delivery sensor 2
(PS17)
Tray position sensor
(PS16)
Shift motor (M11)

1: Light-blocking plate over the sensor.
Detection of jams
1 Delay at the inlet sensor PS19
Delay at the inlet sensor PS19 (2 size A4 copies).
ed.1
19 Delivery 519
2 Delay at the output tray PS13
A delay jam is identified if the leading edge of copy paper does not reach the
delivery sensor 2 (PS17) within a specific period of time after it has moved past
the multitray inlet sensor (PS19).
Delivery Upper Sensor 2 Delay Jam (A4, 2 sheets)
3 Delivery Sensor 2 Stationary Jam
A stationary jam is identified if the leading edge of copy paper does not reach
the delivery sensor 2 (PS17) within a specific period of time after it has moved
past the delivery sensor 2 (PS17).
Delivery Sensor 2 Stationary Jam (A4, 2 copies)
520
TSM Oc 3121
4 Delivery Sensor 3 Delay Jam
A delay jam is identified if the leading edge of copy paper does not reach the
delivery sensor 3 (PS18) within a specific period of time after it has moved past
the multitray inlet sensor (PS19).
Delivery Sensor 3 Delay Jam (A4, 2 sheets)
5 Delivery Sensor 3 Stationary Jam
A stationary jam is identified if the leading edge of copy paper does not move
past the delivery sensor 3 (PS18) within a specific period of time after it has
moved past the delivery sensor 3 (PS18).
Delivery Sensor 3 Stationary Jam (A4, 2 sheets)
6 Power-On Jam
A jam will be identified if any of the sensors is on when the copiers power
switch is turned on.
Multitray inlet sensor (PS19)
Delivery tray 2 sensor (PS17)
Delivery tray 3 sensor (PS18)
ed.1
19 Delivery 521
10 Location of the electrical components
PS19
SL6
PS17
SL8
PS18
(M11)
(PS16)
M9
Symbol Name
Number
Description
Sensor
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS19
Tray: detection of position

Tray 2: detection of copy delivery
Tray 3: detection of copy delivery
3-tray unit: detection of copy at
inlet
Motor
M9
M11
Drive motor for 3-tray feed

Drive motor for shifting the trays
Solenoid
SL6
SL8
Solenoid for the paper deflector 2

Solenoid for the paper deflector 3
11 Service mode.
The service modes are controlled by the DC controller PCB, and data is indicated on the copiers LCD.
1 Control Display Mode
The logging of the jams is displayed on the second screen: the types, the locations, the history.
2 I/O Display Mode
The states of the sensors used in the 3-tray unit are displayed on the second
screen.
522
TSM Oc 3121
12 Self Diagnosis
The microprocessor of the copiers DC controller PCB is equipped with a
mechanism to check the condition of the 3-tray unit (condition of sensors, in
particular). The mechanism runs checks as necessary and indicates a specific
code on the copiers control panel if it finds an error.
Self Diagnosis
Code Cause
E540
Description
Malfunctioning of the sensor for

The home position detection signal
the detection of the home position. is not received within 5 seconds
after the shift tray is home check
is started.
Normal delivery of 2 size A4 copies to delivery tray 2

Copy Start key ON

Sequence
Post-fixing sensor
(PS7)
solenoid (SL5)
solenoid (SL6)
solenoid (SL8)
(PS19)
Delivery sensor 2
(PS17)
Multitray feeder motor
(M9)
Tray shift motor (M11)

(PS16)
1: The feeding motor doubles its speed of rotation when the paper deflecting plate 1
solenoid (SL5) turns OFF.
ed.1
19 Delivery 523
Face-down delivery of 2 size A4 copies to tray 2

Copy Start key ON
Sequence
Post-fixing paper sensor
(PS7)
solenoid (SL5)
solenoid (SL6)
Duplexing unit inlet paper
sensor (PS12)
Duplexing unit inlet motor
(M7)
Set-back motor (M6)
(PS19)
solenoid (SL8)
Delivery sensor 2 (PS17)
Multitray feeding motor
(M9)
1
1
2
2

(PS16)
1: The motor doubles its speed of rotation.
2: The motor reverses its direction of rotation. The speed is the same as in 1.
Circuit Diagram
List of Signals
Names of Signals
TPD
DPD2
DPD3
INPD
SHMD
SL2D
SL3D
524
Tray Position Detection signal

Delivery Paper Detection 2 signal
Delivery Paper Detection 3 signal
Inlet Paper Detection signal
Shift Motor Drive Signal
Solenoid 2 Drive Signal
Solenoid 3 Drive Signal
TSM Oc 3121
ed.1
Electrical diagrams
19 DELIVERY 701
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
21 SORTER
Contents
SDS
1 Tray Controller PBA
201
Adjustments
1 Adjustment of the stapling position 301

2 Adjustment of the microswitch MS6 for the stack thickness.
302
Dis/assembly of the sorter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Removing the covers 402

Removing the sorter from the copier 403
Removing the transport Unit 404
Removing the bin unit 406
Refitting the bin unit 410
Removing the bins 412
Removing the delivery sensor 414
Removing the delivery roller 415
Removing the feeding unit 415
Refitting the drive 418
Removing the swing motor 420
Removing the sensor P15 for the guide-home position 421
Removing the stapler 422
Removing the stapler mechanism 424
Removing the slide unit. 425
Removing the inlet roller 426
Removing the feed motor 427
Removing the inlet sensor PS17 430
Removing the delivery sensor for tray A 431
Removing the delivery sensor for tray B 433
Removing the solenoid for the deflecting plate 1. 434
Removing the solenoid for the deflecting plate 2. 434
Removing the special tray assembly 435
Removing the Shift Motor 435
Removing the paper sensor for tray A 436
Removing the paper sensor for tray B 437
ed.1
21 Sorter
Functional description of the sorter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Features of the sorter 501

Specifications 501
Nomenclature 503
Operation 505
Basic Functions 508
Feeding drive system 533
Stapler unit: drive system 548
Bin unit: drive system 557
Power supply 570
Electrical diagrams
1 Sorter
701
TSM Oc 3121
Contents
SDS
1 Tray Controller PBA
Switch number Switch name Description
SW1
Push switch
SW2
SW3
To move up the bin unit.

To move down the bin unit.
DIP switch
To set test-modes. (See the table below.)
The functions of the DIP switch (SW3):

Purpose
SW3 setting
Description
Normal operation
(IPC communication)
Executes normal operations in IPC communication

mode.
Normal operation
(IPC communication 2)
Executes normal operations in IPC communication 2

mode.
ed.1
21 Sorter 201
Purpose
SW3 setting
Description
Bin paper sensor

check mode
The sensor is normal if the Manual Staple key is on

when paper is in the bin and off when no paper is in the
bin.
Bin unit drive

motor operation
mode
A press on the Manual Staple key causes the bin unit

drive motor (M2) to rotate. A press on the Manual Staple key while the motor is rotating stops the motor. The
Manual Staple key is off while the bin unit drive motor
is rotating at a specific speed. The Manual Staple key
flashes when an error occurs in the rotation.
Operation check
mode
Each press on the Manual Staple key initiates the following operations:
Delivers one page to the No. 1 bin through the No. 10
bin (bin shift in normal sorting direction).
A page is delivered to special tray A and special tray
B.
The pages in the No. 1 through No. 10 bins are stapled.
The special tray shifts.
A press on the Manual Staple key stops the operation.
The Manual Staple key flashes in response to an error
in the operation.
Stapler swing
operation check
mode
Each press on the Manual Staple key causes the stapler

swing motor to rotate, moving the stapler
back-and-forth between the stapling position and the
home position.
Tray Drive
Motor Mode
A press on the Manual Staple key causes the tray drive

motor (M6) to rotate. A press on the Manual Staple
key while the motor is rotating stops the motor. The
Manual Staple key is off while the tray drive motor is
rotating at a specific speed.
The Manual Staple key flashes in response to an error
in the rotation of the motor.
Special tray
shift operation
check mode
Each press on the Manual Staple key causes the tray

shift motor (M6) to rotate, shifting the special tray
back and forth between the front and the rear.
Solenoid
ON/OFF check
mode
Each press on the Manual Staple key causes all

solenoids to repeat turning on and off.
202
TSM Oc 3121
SDS
Adjustments
1 Adjustment of the stapling position
If the stapling position is not according to the specifications, adjust the position
as follows:
1 Execute stapling, and check the stapling position.
<Specifications>
Staple
Staple
52mm
Copy Paper
paper
52mm
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
2 If necessary, loosen the screw (1), and adjust the position of the stapler guide.
ed.1
21 Sorter 301
2 Adjustment of the microswitch MS6 for the stack thickness.

If a stack of 4.5 to 5.8 mm is inserted, the microswitch MS6 will operate, preventing the operation of the stapler.
Adjust the position of MS6 if the following applies:
1 The microswitch MS6 fails to operate when stapling a stack 5.8 mm or more
in thickness.
2 The microswitch MS6 operates when stapling a stack of less than 4.5 mm.
Adjustment
1 Insert a screwdriver (1), and loosen the screw.

2 Using a hexagon socket key, turn the screw (2) to make adjustments.
1
Note:MS6 will not operate when the cover is removed from the stapler.
302
TSM Oc 3121
Adjustments

1
1 Sorter
2 Tray feeding
3 Auxiliary trays
ed.1
21 Sorter 401
1 Removing the covers
1
2
3
4
5
402
Stapler cover (2 screws)

Stapler cover, inner (1 screw)
Upper cover, front (2 screws)
Upper cover, rear (3 screws)
Lower cover
TSM Oc 3121
2 Removing the sorter from the copier

1 Release the latch, and pull the sorter away from the copier.
2 Remove the two screws (2) from the rail (1).
1
3 Gripping the front and the rear of the sorter, lift the sorter a little. Release the
catches from the rail, and remove the sorter from the copier.
ed.1
21 Sorter 403
3 Removing the transport Unit

1 Remove the upper covers.
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the tray control PBA.
With the exception of: J10 (1), J11 (2), and J12 (3).
3 Disconnect connector (4).
4
1
2
4 Open the right cover, and remove the four screws (5).
Carefully remove the transport unit.

5
404
TSM Oc 3121
Note: Points to note when refitting the transport unit.
a)Make sure that the claws, that are located at the bottom of the unit, are in the
holes in the cover.
b) Securely connect all the connectors.
Hole
Hole
Claw
Claw
Hole
Hole
Claw
Claw
ed.1
21 Sorter 405
4 Removing the bin unit

1 Check that the bin unit is in the home position.
2
3
4
5
If it is not at home position, turn off and then on the copiers power switch.
Remove the sorter from the copier.
Remove the transport unit.
Remove the stapler unit.
Disconnect the earth cables (1).
6 Disconnect the connector (2) for the shift motor and the feed motor.
406
TSM Oc 3121
7 Remove the three screws (3), and remove the cables. Remove the strip (4).
4
8 Remove the four screws (5), and remove the detection plate (6).
6
5
ed.1
21 Sorter 407
9 Detach the springs that suspend the front and rear of the bin unit. To do this,
proceed as follows:
Note: Removing the suspension springs
The suspension springs are located at the rear of the drive unit.
a) Pass the loop on the end of the string (10) through the recess (8) in the cover
and over the hook, passing the arm (9).
7
9
10
8
b) Holding the string, detach the spring from the arm.

c) When the spring is relaxed, tape the end of the string to the side of the cover.
Note: Do not remove the string from the spring . It will be used when refitting
the bin unit.
Note: The situation with the spring relaxed.
Suspension
spring
Bin suspension spring
String
String
408
TSM Oc 3121
10 Remove the two screws (11). Remove the cable cover (12).
12
11
11 Remove the cable clip (14) (1 screw), and release the cables.
13
14
12 While holding the bin unit with one hand, turn the gear A to the right (arrowed
direction). This releases the cam. Then, remove the bin unit.
Gear
A
Gear A
Lead cam
Cam
Bin
unit
Bin unit
Note: Remove the dummy pins from the grooves of the bin plate, both front and
rear, after removing the bin unit.
ed.1
21 Sorter 409
5 Refitting the bin unit

1 Place the sorter assembly (1), and slide in the bin unit (2).
2
When the fixed pin (3) is in the groove of the bin plate (4), insert the dummy
pin (5) as indicated.
3
5
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
Continue fitting the pins in the grooves of the bin plates.
410
TSM Oc 3121
2 When the fixed pin touches the cam, raise the unit as shown. The weight of the
bins will move the pins into the grooves in the bin plates.
3 While holding the bin unit with one hand, turn the gear A to the left (arrowed
direction). Continue to turn the gear until the rolls of the No. 1 bin are located
above the cams.
Cam
Lead cam
Gear
GearAA
Drive, rear
Rear drive assembly
ed.1
21 Sorter 411
6 Removing the bins

1 Remove the bin unit from the sorter assembly. (See Removing the Bin Unit.)
2 Remove the two screws (3), and remove the light transmitter (2) from the upper
cover (1).
1
3 While paying attention to the spring (4), used to keep the guide bar and the
front bin plate together, remove the four screws (6). Remove the upper cover
(5).
A
412
Viewed
from AA
Viewed
from
TSM Oc 3121
4 Remove the screw (8), and remove the guide (7).

7
5 Loosen the screw (11), securing the front plate (9) to the base frame (10).
Caution:
Warning: Do not move the fixed pin (12). If pin (12) must be moved, mark its
position with a scriber.
12
11 10
6 Remove the bins from the ribs one by one.
ed.1
21 Sorter 413
7 Removing the delivery sensor

1 Remove the transport unit
2 Remove the two screws (1). Remove the guide (2).
1
3 Disconnect the connector (3).
4 Remove the two screws (5), and remove the sensor support (4).
4
5 Remove the delivery sensor (6).
414
TSM Oc 3121
8 Removing the delivery roller

1
2
3
4
Remove the transport unit

Remove the inlet guide.
Remove the stapler unit.
Remove the screw (2), and remove the delivery guide (1).
5 Remove the delivery roller.
9 Removing the feeding unit

1 Remove the bin unit.
2 Remove the two screws (1). Remove the guide (2).
ed.1
21 Sorter 415
3 Disconnect the earth cables (3).
4 Disconnect the connector (4) for the shift motor and the feed motor.
416
TSM Oc 3121
5 Remove the three screws (5), and remove the plate (6).
6
6 Remove the two screws (8). Remove the stapler cover (7).
7 Disconnect the connector J22 (9) from the control PBA.

9
8 Remove the eight screws (12). These secure the plate (10) and the plate (11).
11
12
12
10
12
12
12
10
12
12
12
9 Holding the units tightly together, remove the drive unit.
ed.1
21 Sorter 417
10 Refitting the drive

1 Holding the holes in the cams to the front, fix the drive as shown. Then, secure
the front cam with a screw, as shown.

Drive, rear
Drive, front
Hole
Cam, rear
Cam, front
(front view)
(front view)
Warning: IF the shift motor (1) or the feed motor (2) has been replaced, fit the
cable clips (3) as shown, so protecting the cables from damage.
Note: The position of the cam requires adjustment whenever the drive has been
refitted.
418
TSM Oc 3121
2 Remove the E-ring (2) from the gear A (1).

3 Disengage gear A from gear B.
4 By turning the lead cam of the front drive assembly by hand, position it as in-
dicated in Installing the Drive Assembly.

5 Put the gear A back in its original position. Check the position of the cam, and
refit the E-ring.
ed.1
21 Sorter 419
11 Removing the swing motor

2 Remove the bin unit and the bins from the sorter assembly. (See Removing
the Bin Unit and C. Removing the Bins.)

3 Remove the screw (2), and remove the harness cover (1) from the motor assem-
bly.
4 Remove the two screws (4) . Remove the swing motor (3).
420
TSM Oc 3121
12 Removing the sensor P15 for the guide-home position

2 Remove the bin unit and the bins from the sorter assembly. (See Removing
the Bin Unit and Removing the Bins.)
3 Remove the cable cover from the swing motor.

4 Remove the screw (2), and remove the position sensor P15 (1).
Note: If the detection of the home position fails, adjust the position of the sen-
sor P15.
Adjusting screw
ed.1
21 Sorter 421
13 Removing the stapler

2 Remove the screw (2), and remove the cover (1).
3 Disconnect the earth cable (3) and release the cable clip (4).
4 Remove the two fasteners (5), and the cable ties (6) and (7).
422
TSM Oc 3121
5 Remove the spring (8).
6 Remove the two screws (9).
7 Pull out the slide rail, and remove the stapler.

Warning: After refitting the stapler, ensure that the cables are fitted correctly.
ed.1
21 Sorter 423
14 Removing the stapler mechanism

1
2
3
4
Open the stapler cover.

Slide out the stapler.
Raise the stapler.
Remove the screw (1), and remove the cover (2).
(Remove the cover in the direction B while moving it in the direction A.)
B
2
1
5 Remove the two screws (3).
6 Remove the screw (4) . Disconnect the connector (5), and take out the stapler
(6).
5
424
TSM Oc 3121
15 Removing the slide unit.

1 Remove the stapler unit.
2 Disconnect the three connectors (1).
3 Remove the three screws (2), and remove the slide unit (3) in the direction of
the arrow.
ed.1
21 Sorter 425
16 Removing the inlet roller

1 Remove the upper covers, and open the lower cover.
2 Remove the two E-rings (1). Then, slightly loosen the screw securing the drive
solenoid (2).
3
3 Remove the E-ring (4), and the gear (6) and the pulley (5).
Then, while raising the deflecting plate (7), remove the inlet roller together
with its shaft.
4
426
TSM Oc 3121
17 Removing the feed motor

1 Remove the sorter from the copier.
3 Disconnect all connectors from the tray control PBA.
Then, remove the two screws (1), and remove the tray control PBA.
4 Remove the screw (3), and disconnect the earth cable (2).
5 Remove the inlet roller

6 Release the clip (5) and remove the bush (4) from the shaft of the deflecting
plate.
5
ed.1
21 Sorter 427
7 Remove the E-ring (6) from the rear of the deflecting plate.
Then, raising the inlet guide (7), remove the deflecting plate (8).
7
8 Remove the E-ring (9), from the belt tensioner, and remove the bush (10).
(8)
o
428
TSM Oc 3121
(9)
!0
9 Remove the two screws (11). Remove the tensioner (12). Take the timing belt
(13) off the gear (14).

(14)
!4
(11)
!1
(13)
!3
(12)
!2
10 Remove the three screws (15), and remove the feed motor (16), complete with
the support.
(15)
(16)
ed.1
21 Sorter 429
18 Removing the inlet sensor PS17

1 Open the lower cover
(2)
(1)
3 Remove the screw (3), and disconnect the connector (4).
Then, remove the inlet sensor PS17, complete with the support.
(4)
430
TSM Oc 3121
(3)
19 Removing the delivery sensor for tray A

(1)
(2)
3 Unscrew the two screws (3), and remove the right hinge.
(3)
4 Open the right cover, and remove the right cover.

5 Remove the bushing (4) from the front of the shaft of the deflecting plate.
ed.1
21 Sorter 431
6 Remove the E-ring (5) from the rear of the deflecting plate.
Then, moving the deflecting plate to the rear, remove the deflecting plate.
5
6
Then, remove the inlet sensor PS17, complete with the support.
9
9 Remove the sensor from the support plate.
432
TSM Oc 3121
20 Removing the delivery sensor for tray B

1 Remove the right cover.
Then, remove the delivery sensor.

4
ed.1
21 Sorter 433
21 Removing the solenoid for the deflecting plate 1.

1 Remove the inlet roller
2 Remove the deflecting plate 1.
Then, remove the solenoid, complete with the support.
22 Removing the solenoid for the deflecting plate 2.

1 Remove the right cover.
2 Remove the deflecting plate 2.
Then, remove the solenoid, complete with the support.

2
434
TSM Oc 3121
23 Removing the special tray assembly

1 Remove the upper covers and the lower cover.
2 Remove the screw (1), and remove the cover (2).
Then, from inside, disconnect the three connectors.
3 Remove the four screws (3), and remove the special tray assembly.
24 Removing the Shift Motor

1 Remove the special tray assembly.
2 Remove the two screws (1), and disconnect the connector (2).
Then, remove the shift motor, together with the support.

2
ed.1
21 Sorter 435
25 Removing the paper sensor for tray A

2 Disconnect the earth cable (1).
1
3 Remove the two screws (2), and remove the front (3) and rear (4) supports.
436
TSM Oc 3121
4 Remove the two screws (5). Remove the special tray A.
5 Remove the two screws from the rear of the special tray A. Remove the paper
sensor, together with the cover.

6 Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper sensor.
26 Removing the paper sensor for tray B

2 Disconnect the earth cable (1).
3 Remove the two screws from the rear of the special tray B. Remove the paper
sensor, together with the cover.

4 Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper sensor.
ed.1
21 Sorter 437

1 Features of the sorter
1 Separates fax output, printer output and copier output.
Using specific trays, the sorter can separate the delivered documents according to type: fax mode or printer mode or copier mode.
The trays A & B can move forward and backward for each fax or printer output, so enabling distinction between the various jobs.
2 Handles sort, group, and staple sort modes (in copier mode).
Using the bin unit ( 1 through 10 bins), the outputs in copier mode may be
sorted according to mode: sort, group, and staple sort.
The sheets in the bin unit may be stapled: when in staple sort mode or using
the manual staple mode.
2 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Number of bins
12 bins
Modes of use
Non-sort, sort, staple sort, group, special tray modes
Stacking
Face-up, bin shift, bi-directional sorting
Stacking capacity
A5/STMT to A3/11x17
Stacking
Remarks
no. 1 bin through Non-sort:100 sheets

no. 10 bin
Sort:30 sheets (A4/LTR, A4R/LTRR,
A5/STMT, A5R/STMTR, B5, B5R)
25 sheets (B4/LGL)
10 sheets (A3/11x17)
Group:20 sheets (A3/11x17)
10 sheets (A3/11x17)
Special tray A
200 sheets
Special tray B
200 sheets
ed.1
21 Sorter 501
Item
Stapler
Specifications
Stapling method
Remarks
Punching by rotating cam
Stapling position 5 2 mm from paper edge.

Stapling capacity 20 sheets max. (of 80 g/m2 paper)
Supply of staples Special cartridge (2000 staples)
Staples
In special cartridge
Staple detection
Provided
Stapling size
A3/11x17, B4/LGL, A4/LTR, B5,

A4R/LTRR
Manual stapling
Provided (however, not on special tray)
The operating panel
Provided (manual staple button)
Display
Manual Stapling Ready/Not Ready

indication
ON when ready
Flashes for error
Add Staple indication
Flashes when staples run out
Tray occupied lamp
Flashes when a fax

or printer page
arrives
Dimensions (WxDxH)
394 x 568 x 655 mm / 15.5 x 22.4 x

25.8 inch
Weight
Sorter 12 bin
25 kg / 55.1 lbs. (approximately)
Sorter
25 kg / 55.1 lbs. (approximately)
Power supply
From copier (24 V DC)
Maximum power consumption 70 W.
502
TSM Oc 3121
3 Nomenclature
External View
1
2
3
4
5
6
The operating panel

Tray occupied lamp
Bin unit (no. 1 to 10 bins)
Bin
Special tray A
Special tray B
2
Add Staple Manual Staple key
(Staple Ready indicator)
indicator
4
5
7
8
9
10
Latch
Stapler
Stapler cover
Spare cartridge compartment
9
10
ed.1
21 Sorter 503
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Special tray B
Special tray A
Guide bar
Bin unit (no. 1 to
10 bins)
Bin unit: delivery
roller
Paper deflector 1
Inlet roller
Tray drive: inlet
roller
Tray A: delivery
roller
Paper deflector 2
Tray B: delivery
roller
6
7
8
9
3
2
10
11
1
12
13
504
TSM Oc 3121
4 Operation
Sorting: Fax or printer output
With the sorter fitted to the copier. Documents from the fax or the host computer may be sorted to specific tray A or B.
The tray occupied lamp switches on when a sheet is on the tray.
The tray occupied lamp flashes when the arrival of an incoming document is
signalled. Subsequently, the lamp remains on until the sheet is removed.
Operations in Copier Mode
When the copier is used in copier mode, the output will be delivered as follows:
The output in copier mode will not be delivered to special tray A or B; operations are selected on the copiers control panel.
1 Non-sort mode
The output will be delivered to the No. 1 bin (top bin).

2 Sort Mode and Staple Sort Mode
The bin unit will be used to sort the output as it is delivered.

In staple sort mode, the outputs will be stapled automatically.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
ed.1
21 Sorter 505
3 Group mode
The bin unit will be used to group and sort the output as it is delivered.
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
Staple mode
In this mode, the bin unit is used to staple outputs.
Note: Stapling does not occur on special tray A or B.
1 Auto Staple Mode
When staple mode is selected on the copiers control panel and the Copy Start
key is pressed, the outputs delivered to the bin will be stapled automatically.
The copy button is disabled, in staple sort mode, if stapled outputs remain in
the bin.
Remove the outputs from the bin to enable staple sort mode.
2 Manual staple mode
If the Copy Start key is pressed without selecting staple sort mode on the copiers control panel, the Manual Staple key will turn on after copying operation.
To staple the outputs, press the Manual Staple keythe outputs in the bins will
be stapled in sequence.
However, stapling will not occur if only one output has been delivered to each
bin.
Manual
staple
button
Manual
Staple
key
Note: To stop stapling in the middle of operation, press the manual staple button once more.
506
TSM Oc 3121
3 Manual insert stapling
In addition to stapling outputs delivered to the sorter, manually insertion of

sheets is also possible.
Up to 20 sheets may be stapled: 80 g/m2 paper. More sheets may cause a stapling error.
Remove all copy paper from the bin unit.
Check that the bin unit is in the home position.
Note: Otherwise, turn off and then on the copiers power switch.
Put the stack of sheets to staple in the top bin: No. 1 bin. Jog the stack against
the guide plate at the front.
Note: Manual insert stapling is available only in the top bin.
Bin
Binunit
unit
Copy paper
paper
Stapling position
Stapling
position
Guide
Guide plate
ed.1
21 Sorter 507
5 Basic Functions
Functional design
The sorter is capable of collecting output: sorting according to whether they are
generated in copier mode or received from the host computer or a fax transmission.
When the copier is used in copier mode, the output will be delivered as:
non-sort, sort, group sort or staple sort jobs.
The documents received from the host computer or the fax may be delivered to
special tray A or B according to the settings made on the copiers control panel.
The sorter can, thus, be used to sort outputs from the copier and the outputs
from the host computer and the fax transmissions.
The tray occupied lamp will illuminate when output enters the special tray A
or B.
Tray
lamp
Paper occupied
on Tray indicator
Sorter Multitray
Fax
Fax
Bin unit
Bin unit
Special
trayAA
Special tray
Special
tray
Special tray
BB
Multi
MultiDevice
Device
Controller
Controller(for
some
copiers)
(for some
copiers)
Copier
Copier
Host computer
Host computer
PS-GP
PS-GPUnit
Unit
typical system configuration
508
TSM Oc 3121
6 Functional design
Functional design
1
2
3
4
5
6
The Speciality consists of six functional blocks:

drive system for the bin unit
drive system for the stapler
feed system for the bin unit
drive system for the tray feeding
drive system for the tray shift
control system.
Control
Stapler unit:
Stapler unit
drive system
drive system
Bin unit: drive sysBin unit drive system

tem
Bin feeding:
drive
system
Bin unit feeding
assembly drive system
Tray feeding:Tray
drive
system
feeding
assembly drive system
system
Control
system
Tray shift:
Tray system
shift
drive
drive system
ed.1
21 Sorter 509
Electrical circuit
The Multitrays electrical mechanisms are controlled by the tray controller

PCB equipped with a built-in microprocessor.
The relation between the electrical circuits and the major functions of the integrated circuits.
Photosensors
Bin unit delivery sensor (PI3)

Stapler position sensor (PI4)
Guide bar home position sensor (PI5)
Tray drive motor clock sensor (PI6)
Tray drive assembly inlet sensor (PI7)
Tray A delivery sensor (PI8)
Tray B delivery sensor (PI9)
Tray A paper detection (PI10)
Tray B paper detection (P11)
Tray position sensor (PI12)
Tray
controller
PCB
SL
Motors
Bin shift motor (M1)
Bin unit drive motor (M2)
Stapler motor (M3)
Guide bar swing motor (M4)
Stapler swing motor (M5)
Tray drive motor (M6)
Tray shifting motor (M7)
Solenoids
Paper deflecting plate drive solenoid (SL1)
Paper deflecting plate 2 drive solenoid (SL2)
Inlet roller roll left releasing solenoid (SL3)
Display
Staple Ready indicator (Staple key)
Switches
Bin lower limit sensor (MS1)
Bin upper limit sensor (MS2)
Joint sensor (MS3)
Stapler home position sensor (MS4)
Stapler assembly cover open/closed sensor (MS5)
Stapler safety sensor (MS6)
Stapling home position sensor (MS7)
Staple sensor (MS8)
Sensors
Bin paper sensor (PT1)
Communication IC
DC
controller
PCB (copier)
510
TSM Oc 3121
*Multi-Output Tray 12-B2 only.
Inputs and outputs: Tray control PBA

1 Inputs to the Tray control PBA (1/4)
Tray controller PCB
Lead cam
Bin unit
drive motor clock
sensor
Bin unit delivery

sensor
Stapler position
sensor
Guide bar
Tray drive
motor clock sensor
Tray drive
assembly inlet sensor
Tray A
delivery sensor
Tray B
delivery sensor
PI1
+5V
J8-6
-4 LCHP*
-5
When the lead cam makes a single rotation and

reaches home position, '1'.
(The light-blocking plate is not blocking PI1.)
PI2
+5V
J8-1
-2 BFMC
-3
Pulses according to the revolution of

the bin unit drive motor.
PI3
+5V
J9-3
-1 BPDY*
-2
When copy paper is detected, '0'.

PI4
PI5
+5V
J7-3
When the stapler unit is at stapling position or
-5 SPLPD* home position, '0'.
-4
+5V
J4-5
When the guide bar is at home position, '1'.
-6 GBHP* (The light-blocking plate is blocking PI5.)
-7
PI6
+5V
J11-13
-11 TFMC
-12
PI7
+5V
J11-7
-5 TFPD*
-6
Pulses according to the revolution of

the tray driving motor.
When paper is detected, '0'.

(The light-blocking plate is blocking PI7.)
PI8
+5V
J11-10
-8 TAP
-9

PI9
+5V
J11-16
-14 TBP
-15

* : Negative logic.
ed.1
21 Sorter 511
Inputs to the Tray control PBA (2/4)

Tray controller PCB
Tray A paper detection
PI10
+5V
J12-3
-1
TAPD
-2
When paper exists on special tray A, '1'.

+5V
Tray B paper detection
PI11
J12-6
-4
TBPD
-5
When paper exists on special tray B, '1'.

+5V
Tray position detection
Bin home position

sensor
Bin upper limit sensor
Stapling home
position sensor
Staple absent sensor
PI12
J12-9
-7
TRP
-8
J16-4
NO C
MS1
When special tray A and special tray B is at the rear, '1'.

BHP*
When the bin unit is at home position, '0'.

(The bin position detecting plate is pushing MS1.)
BUL*
When the bin unit is at the upper limit, '0'.

(The bin position detecting plate is pushing MS2.)
SPLHP*
When stapling is at home position, '0'.
-3
J16-2
NO C
MS2
-1
J7-8
NO O
MS7
NO O
MS8
-7
-6 SPEMP*
When staples run out, '0'.
* : Negative logic.

Tray controller PCB
24V
J3-2
Joint sensor
NO O
MS3
-3
TOP*
If not connected to the copier, '0'.
24V
Stapler assembly
cover open/closed
sensor
J17-1
NO O
MS5
24V
J17-2
Stapler home position

sensor
J17-3
NO C
MS4
SPLOPN*
When the stapler assembly cover

is open, '0'.
SPUHP*
When the stapler unit is

at home position, '0'.
SPLSFT*
When the stapler safety sensor

is pushed, '0'.
24V
J17-4
Stapler safety sensor

NO C
MS6
* : Negative logic.
512
TSM Oc 3121

5V
Tray controller PCB
Control panel PCB

J9-4
SPLOK*
When '0', the LED turns ON.
STEMP*
When '0', the LED turns ON.
MNSPL*
When the Staple key is

pressed, '0'.
Staple Ready indicator
-5
Add Staple indicator
5V
-6
Manual Staple key
-7
5V
J4-1
(light-emitting unit)
LED; remains ON at all times.
-2
LED1
Bin paper sensor

(light-receiving unit)
PT1
-3
-4
BPDN*
When paper exists in the bin, '0'.
* : Negative logic.
ed.1
21 Sorter 513
Outputs from the Tray Control PBA (1/2)

Tray controller PCB
J5-3
Bin shift motor
M1
See p. 2-55.
-4
J5-1
Bin unit
feeder motor
Stapler motor
See p. 2-27.
M2
-2
J7-9
-10
-11
-12
M3
J31
Guide bar
swing motor
M4
Stapler
swing motor
M5
J42
J4-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
See p. 2-42.
See p. 2-60.
J7-1
-2
See p. 2-46.
J10-1
Tray drive motor
M6
See p. 2-31.
-2
J12-13
Tray shifting motor
M7
See p. 2-33.
-14
514
TSM Oc 3121
Outputs from the Tray Control PBA (2/2)

Tray controller PCB
24V
drive solenoid
SL1
J11-2
-1

drive solenoid
SL2
J11-4
-3
Inlet roller roll releasing

solenoid
SL3
J6-1
-2
SL1D*
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
24V
SL2D*
24V
SL3D*
TRIND*
J15-1
When '0', the LED turns ON (paper

on tray).
Paper on Tray
indication
-2
: Negative logic.
: Multi-Output Tray 12-B2 only.
Communication with the copier
The sorter communicates with the copier in IPC communication mode, using
a communication IC.
As shown, the communication IC (Q11) on the Multitrays tray controller PCB
and the copiers communication IC exchange status signals and data, and such
exchanges are controlled by the microprocessor of each machine.
IPC communication uses communication ICs, freeing the copiers microprocessor from some work loads.
Warning: If the self diagnosis function becomes activated because of a com-
munication error, turn off the copiers power supply, detach the Multitray, and
then turn on the copiers power supply. This way, the copier may be used for
making copies.
ed.1
21 Sorter 515
The Multitrays IPC communication offers a new IPC communication mode in

addition to the existing IPC communication method. IPC communication 2
provides a higher (double) communication speed than the existing communication mode.
The required communication mode can be selected on the DIP switch (SW3)
on the tray control PBA.
Mode
DIP switch settings
IPC communication
ON
Factory default
IPC communication 2
ON
micro-procmicro-procMicroprocessor
essor
(Q7)
(Q7)
communiCommunication
cationICIC
communiCommunication
cation
IC
IC
micro-procMicroprocessor
essor
(Q11)
tray controller PBA

Tray controller PCB
sorter(Multitray)
516
TSM Oc 3121
DC DC
controller
PBA
controller PCB
copier
(copier)
The Multitray offers the following modes, selected on the copiers control panel:
Non-sort Mode
Sort mode
Group mode
Staple sort mode
Special tray mode
Paper
non-sort,
and staple sort
Flow of flow
paper in
in non-sort,
sort,sort,
group,group
and
mode
staple sort mode
The output generated in copier mode may be processed in non-sort, sort, group,
or staple sort mode. At such times, the operation will use the bin unit (No. 1
through 10 bins), not using special trays A and B.
In special tray mode, the outputs will be stacked in special trays A and B: for
output received from the host computer or the fax and documents generated in
copier mode.
Paper
Flow offlow
paperin
in special
special traytray
modemode
(delivery
to special tray A)
(delivery to special tray A)
ed.1
Paper
in special
traymode
mode (delivery
Flowflow
of paper
in special tray
to special
tray
B) tray B)
(delivery to
special
21 Sorter 517
Shifting the bins
When sort, group, or staple sort mode is selected, each of the bins from No. 1
through 10 is shifted to accept the output.
The shifting of the bins upwards for sorting is referred to as normal sorting.
The shifting of the bins downwards for sorting is referred to as reverse sorting.
The home position of the bin unit is where the bin unit is moved up an equivalent of a single rotation of the lead cam from its bottom position (lower limit
sensor ON).
Note: The special trays A and B do not move up or down.
Normal sorting
Normal sorting
518
TSM Oc 3121
Reverse sorting
Reverse sorting
Principle of operation
The sequence of operations for each mode is as follows:

Non-sort mode (using bin 1)
If the copier is used in copier mode, while selecting non-sort mode, the operations will be as follows:
The copiers Copy Start key is pressed
The bin unit moves to the home position.
The guide bar moves from the home position to the escape position, and
stops. (The escape position differs, depending on the paper size.)
guide
position
Guidebar
bar home
home position
bin
Bin
paper
Papersize
size
The output is delivered to the No. 1 bin (top bin).

The guide bar swings, jogging the output against the front guide.
arrange
Arrange
position
position
Paper size
paper size
delivery
Delivery
direction
direction
The guide bar moves to the escape position.

Operations 4 through 6 are repeated for each delivery. (All deliveries are to
the No. 1 bin.)
When the required number of copies have been delivered, the guide bar returns to the home position.
paper
size
Paper size
ed.1
21 Sorter 519
Basic sequence of operations (non-sort mode)

2 Copies
Copy Start key ON
Copier registration roller

ON signal (REGD)
Copier delivery sensor
(CEJCT)
Bin unit delivery sensor

(PI3)
Bin unit drive motor (M2)
Guide bar swing motor

(M4)
Guide bar home position
sensor (PI5)
CW
1
CW
CCW
Arrange Escape
CW/CCW
Arrange/Escape
In 1 , the guide bar is moved to the escape position and kept in wait for delivery.
During this period, the bin shift motor (M1) rotates to return the bin to home position.
520
TSM Oc 3121
2 Sort Mode (using No. 1 through 10 bins)
The copiers Copy Start key is pressed.

barhome
home
position
Guide bar
position
escape posi- guide
tion
Escape position
bin
Bin
delivery
Delivery
direcion
direction
The output is delivered to the No. 1 bin (top bin).
arrange
Arrange
position
position
paper
Papersize
size
ed.1
21 Sorter 521
The guide bar moves to the escape position. The bin unit moves down one
bin.
Operations 4 through 6 are repeated for each delivery. The bin unit sorts the
output.
The next document is fed, and the bin unit commences the reverse sorting
procedure.
Operations 3 through 8 are repeated for each original that is fed.

The required number of copies are made.
The guide bar moves to the home position.
Pape
paper size
r size
522
TSM Oc 3121
;;
Note: If the DF is not used, the bin unit returns to the home position each time
a new document is positioned, and the copy button key is pressed. In this way,
no reverse sorting takes place.
Note: If the copy count is set to 11 or higher (in excess of the count allowed
Arrange Escape
Escape
Arrange
Arrange Escape

sensor (PI5)
CCW
CW
CCW

(M4)
Tray feeder motor (M6)
Bin unit feeder motor (M2)

(PI3)

(CEJCT)
CW
CW
CW (up)
ed.1

ON signal (REGD)
Copy Start key ON
CCW
CW
CCW (do
for the number of bins), a message will be indicated on the copiers control
panel to that effect.
21 Sorter 523
3 Group mode
The copiers Copy Start key is pressed.

barhome
home
position
Guide bar
position
escape posi- guide
tion
Escape position
bin Bin
delivery
Delivery
direcion
direction
The first output is delivered to the No. 1 bin (top bin).
arrange
Arrange
position
position
paper
Papersize
size
524

Operations 3 through 6 are repeated for the required number of copies.
The next document is fed, and the bin unit moves down one bin.
TSM Oc 3121
Operations 3 through 8 are repeated for each original that is fed.

The copying runs ends, and the guide bar moves to the home position.
paper
Papersize
size
Note: If the DF is not used, the bin unit returns to the home position each time
a new document is positioned, and the copy button key is pressed.
Note: If the DF is used, the copying operation will end after copying the 10th
document (for 10 bins).,
ed.1
21 Sorter 525
526
TSM Oc 3121
Copy Start key ON

ON signal (REGD)
(CEJCT)

(PI3)

Bin shifting motor (M1)

(M4)
sensor (PI5)
CW
1
CW
CCW
Arrange Escape
CW
Arrange
In 1 , the guide bar is moved to escape position and kept in wait for delivery.
During this period, the bin shift motor (M1) rotates to return the bin unit to home position.
CCW
Escape
CW
CCW
Arrange
Escape
CW/CCW
Arrange/Escape
4 Staple sort mode (using No. 1 through 10 bins)
The same operations as in sort mode are performed, and all outputs are delivered to the bins. The guide bar remains in the escape position.
copy
paper
Copy paper
paper
Papersize
size
escape
Escape position
position
The first copy of the final document is delivered. The guide bar jogs the set
of copies against the rear guide, and the stapler moves forward to staple the
set of copies.
copy
Copypaper
paper
arrange
Arrangeposition
position
ed.1
paper
size
Papersize
stapler
Stapler
21 Sorter 527
528
The stapler moves away from the paper and returns to the home position.
The bin unit moves down one bin.
Operations 2 through 5 are repeated for each bin to complete the stapling.
TSM Oc 3121
ed.1
Copy Start key ON

ON signal (REGD)
(CEJCT)

(PI3)
(M4)
sensor (PI5)
Bin UP
CW
1
CW
CCW
Arrange Escape
Bin DOWN
CW
CCW
Arrange
Stapler motor (M3)

Stapler swing motor (M5)
Stapling home position
sensor (MS7)
sensor (MS4)
Stapler position sensor
(P14)
21 Sorter 529
Bin Shift Motor
During this period, the bin shift motor (M1) rotates to return the bin unit to home position.
During this period, the bin shift motor rotates clockwise to move up the bin unit.
During this period, the bin shift motor rotates counterclockwise to move down the bin unit.
Guide Bar Swing Motor
In 1 , the guide bar is moved to escape position and kept in wait for delivery.
During this period, the guide bar swing motor rotates clockwise.
During this period, the guide bar swing motor rotates counterclockwise.
Escape
CW
CCW
Escape
Bin UP
Arrange
Escape
5 Manual staple mode
All outputs are delivered to the bins.

The guide bar is stationary at the escape position.
escape
Escape position
position
paper
Papersize
size
copypaper
paper
Copy
The manual staple button is pressed.

The guide bar swings to suit the paper size and keeps the paper in position. *
The stapler moves to the stapling position and staples the sheets.
The stapler moves away from the paper and returns to the home position.
If stapling is for sheets delivered not in non-sort mode, the guide bar returns
to a point determined by paper size + 8 mm.
If stapling is for sheets delivered in non-sort mode, the guide bar returns to
home position.
8
mm
8 mm
paper
size
Paper
size
The bin unit moves down one bin.

Operations 3 through 6 are repeated for each bin to complete the stapling.
*For the first stapling operation, the guide bar swings twice to hold the paper twice.
Then, the guide bar swings once to hold the paper for each shift of the bin unit.
530
TSM Oc 3121
6 Special tray mode
The following occurs when special tray A or B is selected for delivery of outputs from the host computer or the fax:
The Device Controller or the PS-GP Unit sends a command to the copier to
print out the received pages.
The special tray moves backward, or forward *.
rear
Rear
Special tray
special
tray
trayshift
shift
Tray
front
Front
top
view
Special
tray top view
The output is delivered to the selected tray.
special
tray A
Special trayA
paper
Paper
when
to special
When delivered
delivered to special
trayA tray A
The selected number of pages are delivered to the tray: ending the sequence.
In some situations, the special tray does not move prior to delivery. For example:
The tray moves.
The document from the 1st transmission is delivered to special tray A.
The tray moves.
The document from the 2nd transmission is delivered to special tray B.
The tray does not move.
The document from the 3rd transmission is delivered to special tray A.
In the above case, if the tray was moved before the output from the 3rd transmission was delivered to special tray A, the output would be mixed with the
output already on the tray from 1st transmission.
ed.1
21 Sorter 531
The position of the special trays at time of the delivery of the output is stored
in memory by the Device Controller, and the data is used by the sorter to determine whether or not to move the tray.
The tray does not move if the document is a printout of data from the host computer.
Sequence of Operations (special tray mode)
Delivering outputs from the controller to special tray A
Multi Device Controller sends command to copier for printout

ON signal (REGD)
Copier delivery
sensor (CEJCT)
Tray drive assembly

inlet sensor (PI7)
Tray A delivery sensor
(PI8)

drive solenoid (SL1)
drive solenoid (SL2)
Tray A paper sensor
(PI10)
Tray shift motor
(M7)2
Special tray shifts from front to rear

(PI12)1
1
2
532
Represents the sequence in which the special tray shifts from the front to the rear.
The tray shift motor (M7) does not rotate (and the tray does not shift) if the output is
of the data from the host computer.
TSM Oc 3121
8 Feeding drive system

The figure shows the feeding drive system. The output from the copier is delivered to the bin unit or the special tray, according to the mode selected by the
tray control PBA.
Bin unit
delivery
sensor (P13)
bin
unit
delivery
sensor P13
bin unit delivery

roller
Bin unit
delivery roller
paper deflecting
Paper deflectingplate
plate 1 1
tray Tray
drive
assembly
drive
assembly inletinlet
sensor
sensor
(PI7)
tray A delivery senTray A delivery sensor (PI8)
sor PI8
feeding
Feeding assembly
assembly inlet inlet
roller roller
tray
vertical
path
1
Tray
vertical path
rollerroller
1
Paper deflecting
plate 2 plate 2
paper
deflecting
tray
A delivery roller
Tray A delivery roller
tray
vertical
Tray vertical
pathpath
roller 2roller 2
trayTray
B delivery
sensor
B delivery sensor
(PI9) PI9
tray
B delivery roller
Tray B delivery roller
ed.1
21 Sorter 533
Driving the bin unit

1 Functional design
The figure below shows the drive system for the bin unit.
Output from the copier is forwarded to the bin unit by the delivery roller and
the inlet roller. These are rotated by the drive motor (M6) and the feeder motor
(M2).
Bin unit paper detection signal(BPAD)
SL1

drive solenoid drive signal(SCLID)
Delivery assembly inlet roller
M6
PI6
M2
PI2
Tray drive motor drive signal (TFMD)
Tray controller PCB

Bin unit
delivery roller
Tray drive motor clock signal (TFMC)

Bin unit feeder motor clock signal (BFMD)
Bin unit feeder motor

clock signal (BFMC)
The movement of the output is monitored by the delivery sensor (PI3).

The motors are DC motors, which rotate only clockwise. The drive of these
motors is controlled by pulses from the clock sensors.
The circuit for the drive of the bin unit.
Tray controller PCB
Q7
Microprocessor
24V
BFMD
J5-1
-2
M2
J8-1
-2
-3
PI2
Q54
5V
BFMC

clock sensor
Bin unit drive motor drive circuit
534
TSM Oc 3121
2 Overstacking (bin unit)
The number of sheets that can be stacked in each bin is limited.

Any excess will be an overstacking error.
Non-sort Mode
Maximum stacking
All sizes
100 Copies
Sort or staple sort

mode
Maximum stacking
Small sizes
30 sheets
Medium sizes
25 sheets
Large sizes
10 sheets
Size classification (sort mode, staple sort mode)
Feeding direction
(mm)
feeding
direction
(mm)
Breadthwise (mm)
breadthwise
(mm)
0
220 221
297 298
Small
size
small
size
220
221
297
298
medium
size
Medium size
364
365
large
Largesize
size
432
Group
Maximum stacking
Small sizes
20 sheets
Large sizes
10 sheets
Size classification (group mode)

feeding
direction
(mm)
Feeding direction
(mm)
Breadthwise (mm)
breadthwise
(mm)
297 298
small
size
Small size
364
365
large
Large size
size
432
ed.1
21 Sorter 535
The following occurs when the stacking limit per bin is exceeded when selecting the number of copies:
a. non-sort mode
In non-sort mode, the copying operation stops when the total number of copies
reaches 101:
A4, 2 Originals, Copy Count 70
The copy button is pressed.
70 copies are delivered to the No. 1 bin.
A second document is positioned. The operation is stopped upon delivery of
the 31st copy in the No. 1 bin.
The operation will recommence when all the copies have been removed from
the bin and the copy button is pressed.
The remaining copies will be produced.
Note: With some copires, if continuous copying is executed in non-sort mode
after setting the copy count to 101 or higher, all copies will be delivered to
the No. 1 bin without stopping operation upon delivery of the 101st copy.
b. Group mode
If the selected number of copies exceeds the limit per bin, the copier will not
start when the copy button is pressed. A message will be displayed.
c. Sort mode or staple sort mode
If the number of copies exceeds the limit per bin, the copier will stop when the
bin capacity is exceeded by more than 1 copy.
31 documents A4
Sorting has commenced.
The copier stops when the sorter has counted the 31st copy.When all copies
have been removed from the bins, and the copy button key is pressed, the
copier starts operation. (Some copiers start operation automatically.)
Feeding sequence: in special tray mode
In special tray mode, the output is fed only by the motor for the tray drive. The
drive motor for the bin unit does not rotate.
The motor for the tray drive is a DC motor. The clockwise rotation of the motor
is controlled by pulses from the clock sensors.
The output from the copier is carried through the feeding path, formed by the
deflecting plate 1. This is controlled by the solenoid SL1.
536
TSM Oc 3121
The deflecting plate 2 is located in the tray drive. The solenoid SL2 is switched
off and on, to rotate the deflecting plate 2 and to form a path to one of the special trays.
Each paper path has sensors to monitor the movement of the output.
inlet sensor PI7
tray A sensor PI8
tray B sensor PI9.
The tray movement motor M7 is used to displace the outputs delivered onto the
special trays.
ed.1
21 Sorter 537
SL1
Paper deflecting plate 1 drive signal(SLID)
M6
Tray drive inlet sensor (PI7)
Tray feeder motor drive signal(TFMD)

Tray feeder motor clock signal(TFMC)
PI6
Tray drive assembly inlet paper detection signal(TFPD)
Tray A delivery
sensor (PI8)
Tray drive assembly
Special tray A
Special ray A delivery signal(TAD)

SL2
Special tray B
Tray controller PCB
Paper deflecting plate 2 drive signal(SL2D)
Special tray B delivery signal(TAB)

Tray B delivery sensor (PI9)
M7
Tray shift motor drive signal(TSMD)
Tray controller PCB

Q7
24V
Microprocessor
J10-1
TFMD
-2
M6
Tray feeder motor
J11-13
-11
-12
PI6
Tray feeder motor

clock sensor
Q20
5V
TFMC
Tray drive motor drive circuit
538
TSM Oc 3121
Movement of the trays (special tray mode)
The special tray moves to the front or to the rear, prior to the commencement
of a job, to displace the output on the tray.
The output on the special tray is stacked as shown.
Warning: The tray movement motor M7 does not rotate when the output is a
print from the host computer.

Special tray
Output (2nd job)
Rear
Output (3rd job)

Tray shift
Front
Output (1st job)
Outputs sorted on the special tray (top view)
ed.1
21 Sorter 539
Movement of the trays
a. Drive system for the movement of the trays

Motor M7 rotates a gear and cam system to move the trays.
The motor M7 for the tray movement is a DC motor. The clockwise rotation of
the motor is controlled by the tray shift motor drive signal (TSMD) from the
tray control PBA.
b. Timing of the movement of the trays
The tray starts to shift as soon as the copiers registration roller turns on in response to the first page of a received document.
Special trays A and B move as a single unit.
Tray controller PCB
24V
Q21
MicroQ52
processor TSMD
(Q7)
J12-13
Q22
-14
M7
Tray shift motor
: Flow of current while motor rotates.
Timing of the movement of the trays

2 types of output delivered to special tray A: continuously
1
Copier registration
roller ON signal
(REGD)
Received document of 1st communication
Received document of 2nd communication
Copier delivery
sensor (CEJCT)
Tray A delivery sensor

(PI8)
Tray B delivery sensor
(PI9)
Special tray shift from front to rear
Special tray shift from rear to front

(PI12)
1 The Multi Device Controller sends a command to the copier for a printout of the 1st communication.
2 The Multi Device Controller sends a command to the copier for a printout of the 2nd communication.
540
TSM Oc 3121
c. Monitoring the position of the trays

The position of the trays is monitored by the microprocessor Q7 on the tray
control PBA. The tray position detection signal (TPD) is emitted by the position sensor PI12.
Moving the tray to the rear

The microprocessor (Q7) on the tray controller PCB judges that the special
tray has shifted to the rear when the edge of the crescent pulley blocks the
tray position sensor (PI12), i.e., when TPD goes from 0 to 1, and stops the
tray shift motor (M7).
Moving the tray to the front
The microprocessor Q7 considers the tray to be in the front position when the
crescent leaves the position sensor PI12. The tray movement motor M7
stops.
tray
Trayposition
position
sensor
Sensor PI12
(PI12)
direction
Direction
of rotation
direction
Direction
of rotation
crescent
Crescent
pulley
pulley
special
atrear
rear
Special tray
tray at
(topview)
view)
(top
special
trayatatfront
rear
Special tray
(top
(top view)
view)
tray
motor M7
Tray shift
shift motor
(M7)
crescent pulley
Crescentapulley
(makes
1/2 rota(makes a 1/2 rotation for
tion
for each shift of
each shift of the tray)
the tray)
ed.1
21 Sorter 541
Feeding sequence in two-sided copying mode
When the copier operates in two-sided copying mode, the copier pulls the output back in for copying the second side.
When such an output returns from the Multitray to the copier, the Multitrays
feeding drive system must rotate in reverse of the copier; however, since the
Multitray is not designed to do so, the inlet roller roll pressure is released to let
the output (copy paper) slip off the roller.
Copy
paper inlet
Inlet roller
roll roll
copy
paper
roller
copier
Copier
multitray
Multitray
1 Releasing the inlet pressure
The pressure is released by the solenoid S3, lifting the roll away from the inlet
roller.
inlet
roller
Inlet
roller roll
roll
tray
driveassembly
assembly
Tray drive
inlet roller
inlet
roller
542
TSM Oc 3121
inlet
roll
releasing soleInlet roller
roller roll
releasing
noid
S3 (S3)
solenoid
2 Sequence of operations (two-sided copying)

Inlet roller roll releasing solenoid drive signal ON
Inlet roller roll releasing solenoid
drive signal OFF
Copier delivery roller

Inlet roller roll pressure releasing
solenoid (SL3)
;;;;
;;;;
;;
;;
: CCW rotation
Detection of jams
When the sorter detects a jam, the jam signal (JAM) is transmitted to the copier.
In response, the copier stops copying, and displays the JAM message.
When the jam has been removed and the copy button has again been pressed,
the remaining number of copies (jam recovery) will be made and delivered to
the bins.
If a jam occurs in the copier, all sheets moving through the sorter are delivered
to a specific bin and the operation is stopped.
Note: If a jam occurs in the Multitray, disconnect the Multitray from the copier
(turning the joint sensor off), remove the jam, and turn off the copiers power
switch to reset.
ed.1
21 Sorter 543
1 Delay
Bin unit: drive delay

When the copier is used in copier mode, the bin unit delivery sensor (PI3)
does not detect paper within 2.5 sec after the copiers delivery sensor has detected paper (PDP=1).
Copier delivery
signal
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
(M2)
Bin unit delivery
sensor (PI3)
2.5
Normal
2.5
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

Varies depending on the model.
(unit: sec)
Tray drive: delay

When special tray A or B is used, the tray delivery sensor (PI8, PI9) does not
detect paper within 2.5 sec after the copiers delivery sensor has detected paper (PDP=1).
Copier delivery
signal
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
Tray drive sensor
(PI8, PI9)
2.5
Normal
2.5
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

Depends on the model.
544
TSM Oc 3121
(unit: sec)
2 Stationary
Delivery sensor: stationary

With the copier in copier mode. The delivery sensor in the copier does not
switch off within 3.8 seconds after the delivery sensor P13 has detected paper.
Copier delivery
signal
3.8
Normal
Error
3.8
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
(M2)
Bin unit delivery
sensor (PI3)
Jam signal (JAM)

(unit: sec)
Delivery sensor in the bin unit: stationary

With the copier in copier mode. The delivery sensor PI3 does not switch off
within 3.5 seconds after the paper left the delivery sensor in the copier.
Copier delivery
signal
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
(M2)
Bin unit delivery
sensor (PI3)
3.5
3.5
Normal
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

(unit: sec)
Delivery sensor in the bin unit: stationary

With the copier in copier mode. The delivery sensor PI3 does not switch off
within a specified time after the sensor PI3 was switched on.
Tray drive motor

(M6)
Bin unit drive motor
(M2)
Bin unit delivery
sensor (PI3)
Normal
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

: 522 (mm)/copier delivery speed (mm/sec)
ed.1
21 Sorter 545
Tray drive: stationary in inlet

The paper does not reach the sensor PI8 or PI9 within 3.5 seconds * after the
paper moved past the inlet sensor PI7.
Tray drive assembly

inlet sensor (PI7)
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
Tray delivery sensor
(PI8, PI9)
3.5*
Normal
3.5*
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

: Varies depending on the model.
(unit: sec)
Tray drive: stationary in inlet

The inlet sensor PI7 does not switch off within a specified time after the inlet
sensor PI7 was switched on.
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
Tray drive assembly
sensor (PI7)
Normal
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

: 552 (mm)/copier's delivery speed (mm/sec).
Tray delivery: stationary

The sensor PI8 or PI9 does not switch off within 3.8 seconds * after the paper
arrived at the sensor.
Tray drive assembly

inlet sensor (PI7)
Tray feeder motor

(M6)
Tray delivery sensor
(PI8, PI9)
3.8
Normal
3.8
Error
Jam signal (JAM)

: Varies depending on the model.
546
(unit: sec)
Start situation: stationary

The JAM signal is generated if any of the following sensors is on when the
copy button is pressed:
Tray drive: inlet sensor PI7
Bin unit: delivery sensor PI3
Tray A: delivery sensor PI8
Tray B: delivery sensor PI9
TSM Oc 3121
3 Power-on jam (persistent paper jam)
The JAM signal is generated if any of the following sensors is on when the copiers power switch is turned on:
Tray drive: inlet sensor PI7
Bin unit: delivery sensor PI3
Tray A: delivery sensor PI8
Tray B: delivery sensor PI9
4 Door open: persistent jam
The JAM signal is generated if the sorter is moved away from the copier, or the
stapler cover is opened while the machine is in operation.
ed.1
21 Sorter 547
9 Stapler unit: drive system

The stapler unit is driven by two motors:
Stapler motor M3: executes stapling
Stapler swing motor M5: moves the stapler
The stapler unit is monitored by the following sensors:
Stapler: detection of home position MS4
Stapler: detection for safety MS6
Stapling: detection of home position MS7
Stapler MS8
Stapler: detection of position PI4
stapler
safety
detection
signal (SPLSFT)
Stapler safety
detection
signal (SPLSFT)
stapling
home
position
(SPLHP)
Stapling home
position
detection signal
signal (SPLHP)
Stapler operation
stapler
operation
detecting cam
detection
cam
stapler
Stapler swing
M5 swing
motor motor
staple
safety
Staple safety
detection
detection
stapler
Stapler position
detection signal
position
(SPLPD)
detection
signal
(SPLPD)
MS6
PCB
trol PBA
PI
staple
position
Staple
position
Tray controller
tray
con- detection
detection
staple
Stapling home
home
position sensor
position
MS7
stapling
Stapling motor
motor
staple
detection
signal
(SPEMP)
Staple detection signal (SPEMP)
M3
Staple detection
staple
detect
(MS8)
MS4
stapler
home
Stapler
home
position
detection
position
detection
stapler
home
position
signal (SPLHP)
Stapler home
position
detectiondetection
signal (SPLHP)
548
TSM Oc 3121
Stapling
The motor M3 rotates and operates a cam to move the stapler up and down. The
stapler detection cam makes a single rotation each time the stapler is activated.
The rotation of the cam is monitored by the sensor MS7.
Stapling home
position
detection
(MS7) MS7
stapling
home
position
detection
stapling
detection
cam
Stapling detecting
cam
staple
push-out plate
Staple pushout plate
M3
stapling
motor
Stapling
motor
stapler
push-in
base
Stapler push-in
base
center of rotation (sta(MS8)

pling)
Center of rotation (stapling) stapling
Staple detection
detection (MS8)
Functional design
The stapler operates as follows.

Stapling cam
stapling
cam
stapling
detection
Stapling detecting
cam
cam
Controlling the stapling motor M3
Motor M3 is a DC motor.
The stapling home position sensor (MS7) remains on while stapling operation
takes plate. (See figure Stapler Construction)
Stapling takes place when the motor M3 rotates clockwise. If a staple jam prevents the motor from rotating clockwise, the motor is rotated in reverse, to return the stapler to the home position.
ed.1
21 Sorter 549
a.Direction of rotation: in relation to combinations of drive signals

STMFW
(stapling motor CW rotation
signal)
STMFW
(stapling motor CW rotation
signal)
direction
CW
CCW
at rest
Tray controller PCB

24VPC
24VPC
Q13
STMFW
STMRV
Stapling motor
CW rotation signal
Q34 STMRV
5V
J7-9
-10
Stapling motor
CCW rotation signal
Current when motor
is rotating CW
Q40
Q7
Q37
Q12
Microprocessor
24VPC
M3
Q2
Current when motor

is rotating CCW
Q35
Q33 STMFW
5V
-11
-12
Q1
Q36
Response to a stapling error
If an error occurs in the stapler and the stapling motor (M3) therefore cannot
operate normally, an alert signal is sent to the copier to indicate E531.
The error can be reset: by removing the cause and switching the copier OFF,
then ON.
1 An excess load is imposed on the stapling motor, because of a staple jam.
2 The state of the home sensor MS7 does not change for 1 second or more.
3 The stapling motor is rotated CCW; if the state of the stapling home position
sensor (MS7) does not change for 1 sec or more thereafter (i.e., stapler not returning to stapling home position), E531 will be indicated on the copiers
control panel.
550
TSM Oc 3121
Detecting the absence of staples
Sensor MS8 monitors the stock of stapes in the cartridges.

The staples inside the staple cartridges are pressed against the sensor MS8.
When all staples have been moved to the end of the stapler, the sensor MS8
opens. This informs the tray control PBA that all staples have been used. The
Add Staple display illuminates. Subsequent stapling will be suspended.
If the lack of staples is detected in stapling mode, idle stapling will occur until
the job has been completed.
Cartridge holding plate
Holding plate
Spring
Staple cartridge
Spring
Staple cartridge
MS8
MS8
Staple feeding roller
Staple
Staple
Direction of staple feeding
Stapling position
Stapling position
Staple feeding roller
MS8: Staple absence sensor

Detecting the Presence of Staples
Detecting the Absence of Staples
Stapler: detection for safety
The power for the stapling motor M3 is supplied via the following microswitches:
Stapler: detection of cover position MS5
Stapler: home sensor MS4
Stapler: detection for safety MS6
ed.1
21 Sorter 551
The supply to the stapling motor will be interrupted if any of these sensors
open.
Tray controller PCB
24V
MS5
Stapler assembly cover
open/closed sensor
sensor
J17-1
C NO
-2
MS4
NO C
-3
MS6
Stapler safety sensor
C NO
Stapling motor
-4
M3
Sensor MS6 opens when the actuator in the stapler is raised. Gap A for the
movement of the actuator is 4.5 to 5.8 mm.
Warning: MS6 will not operate when the cover is removed from the stapler.
Actuator
A
Stapler
552
TSM Oc 3121
Controlling the movement of the stapler
The stapler is moved to prevent interference with the paper in the bin.
Paper
paper
stapler
unit
Stapler unit
bin
Bin
stapling
view)
Stapling (top
(top view)
paper
Paper
stapler
unit
Stapler unit
bin
Bin
bin
shifting(top
Bin shifting
(top view)view)
ed.1
21 Sorter 553
The motor M5 moves the stapler unit mount back and forth .
The motor M5 for the stapler movement is a DC motor. The clockwise rotation
of the motor is controlled by the stapler swing motor drive signal (SPSWMD).
Tray
tray controller
control PCB
PBA
24V
Q14
MicroQ38
processor SPSWMD
(Q7)
Q15
J7-1
-7
stapling
swing motor
Stapler
M5
swing
motor
ofcurrent
current
when
the motor
: flow
Flow of
when
motor
rotates
is rotating.
Stapler position
stapler
position sensensor
sor
PI4(PI4)
Stapler unit
mount
stapler
unit
mount
stapler
swing motor M5
Stapler swing motor
(M5)
Detection of the position of the stapler during the movement
The position of the stapler is determined by combinations of the states

(ON/OFF) of two sensors:
Stapler: detection of position PI4
Stapler: home sensor MS4
554
TSM Oc 3121
Sensor
Stapling position (left

picture)
Stapler in home position (right picture)
Stapler: detection of
position PI4
ON
ON
Stapler: home sensor

MS4
ON
OFF
Bin
bin
bin
Bin
swinging
arm
Swinging cam
stapler
Stapler
joint
Joint
joint
Joint
Swinging
swingcam arm
ing
Stapler
stapler
PI4
PI4
MS4
copy
paper
Copy paper
stapling
position
(top view)
Stapling position
(top view)
MS4
copy
Copypaper
paper
bin
position
(top view)
Binshift
shift position
(top view)
Overstacking
No more than 20 sheets may be stapled. Stapling occurs as follows:

Staple sort mode is selected
a. a maximum of 20 sheets (normal operation)
Staple the sheets inside the bin.
b.More than 20 sheets (overstacking)
The machine stops without stapling. Manual stapling is also not possible.
Manual stapling, after copying in sort mode
a. a maximum of 20 sheets (normal operation)
After copying in sort mode, the manual staple button illuminates. Pressing the
manual staple button will staple the sheets in the bin.
b.More than 20 sheets (overstacking)
The manual staple button will fail to illuminate. No action will follow if the
button is pressed.
Note: In manual insert mode, stapling will occur. The sorter cannot count the
number of sheets in the bin. However, if the thickness of the stack is 4.5 to 5.8
mm or more, the safety sensor will activate, so preventing stapling.
ed.1
21 Sorter 555
Sequence of operations (stapling 2 sets)

Copy Start key ON
Staple unit swing motor (M5)

Stapling
Stapling motor (M3)

Stapling home position sensor
(MS7)
Stapler home position sensor
(MS4)
<Bin unit>
Lead cam home position sensor
(PI1)
556
TSM Oc 3121
Shift by bin
10 Bin unit: drive system

The figure below shows the drive system for the bin unit.
The bin unit moves each of the bins up and down, to sort the output from the
copier.
The home position of the bin unit is where the bin unit is moved up an equivalent of a single rotation of the lead cam from its bottom position (bin home
sensor MS1 is ON).
Note: Trays A and B do not move up or down.
Bin shift
motor
bin
shift
motor
bin
unit
DOWN
(BMDWN)
Bin unit
DOWN
signalsignal
(BMDWN)
M1
bin
unit
signal
Bin unit
UPUP
signal
(BMUP)(BMUP)
Bin paper sensor

LED1
MS2
LED ON signal
Bin upper limit signal (BUL)
Guide
guide
barbar
tray
Tray controller
controller PCB
PBA
PI1
lead cam home position sensor

(LHCP)
Lead cam home position detection signal (LCHP)
MS1
bin
position
signal (BHP)
Bin home
home position
signal (BHP)
bin Bin
paper
(BPDN)
paper detection
detection signal
(BPDN)
PT1
guide
bar
swing
Guide bar
swing
signal (GBMON)
M4
(GBMON)
guide
swing
motor
Guidebar
bar swing
motor
ed.1
21 Sorter 557
Bin unit
The figure below shows the principle of the bin unit.

The fixed pins at the front and at the rear are part of the bin unit. They are kept
in position at both sides of the bin frame.
A dummy pin is mounted to both sides of the bin unit.
The bin unit is suspended from the body by two springs.
It is held in position by rolls and cams fitted to the front and the rear of the bin
frame.
The suspension by two springs reduces the load on the cams during the movement of the bins.
Bin
bin
fixed
Fixedpin
pin
dummy
Dummy pin
pin
roll
Roll
558
TSM Oc 3121
Movement of the dummy Pin
A dummy pin is provided between the fixed pin and the roll, on both sides of
the bin unit.
The dummy pin prevents the bin unit moving down too far. The dummy pin engages with the lead cams and the fixed pins after the bin unit has reached its
lower limit.
The fixed pins are in this way always above the cams, thereby keeping the bin
unit above its lower limit.
Fixed
fixed
pin
pin
dummy
Dummy
pin
pin
pin
dummy
Dumm
pin
pin
roll
Roll
roll
Roll
fixed
Fixed pin
ed.1
21 Sorter 559
Movement of the lead cam
A lead cam is fitted to the front and to the rear of the bin unit. The cam is driven
by the bin movement motor M1. The motor rotates in two directions.
Shaft
shaft
belt
Belt
lead
Lead cam
cam
M1
When the cams rotate, and the rolls move up or down through the grooves of
the cams, the connected bin will also move up or down.
rolls
Rolls
leadcam
Lead
bin
Bin
cam
560
TSM Oc 3121
A flat section is cut in the lead cam. This is to prevent the lead cam from rotating under the weight of the bin unit.
When the bin unit is stationary, the cam home sensor (PI1) monitors the situation. The rolls are held within the flat section of the cam. The van of the sensor
is the same width as the flat section of the cam.
level
section
Level section
slopesection
Slope
section
lead
Lead cam
cam
level
section
Level section
lead
Lead cam
cam
lead cam
home position
sensor PI1
Lead cam home
position sensor
(PI1)
ed.1
lead
camflag
flag
Lead cam
21 Sorter 561
Advance rotation of the cam

In sort mode, the lead cam rotates in advance.
To ensure that the bins are in position before the copy arrives, the lead cam is
first rotated the equivalent distance to the width of the flat section. The movement commences when PI3 detects the leading edge of the sheet. The bin will
not move.
When the sheet leaves PI3, the rotation of the cam will continue for the length
of the slope until the flat section is reached. The bin will be moved.
1) An output exits the copier and its leading
1) An output arrives from the copier, and its leading edge
edge
reaches the delivery roller. (the bin
reaches the delivery roller.
unit(The
delivery
sensor
switches
bin unit delivery
sensor
turns on.)on)
binBin
lead
cam
Lead cam
roll
Roll
2) The lead cam rotates over the distance of

2) The lead cam rotates over the distance of its level secits
level section and stops (advance rotation and stops (advance rotation).
tion).
The
bin position
remains
(The
bin position
remains the
same.) the same.
level
section
Level
section
3) The trailing edge of the output moves

3) The trailing edge of the output moves past the delivery
past
the delivery roller. (the delivery
roller.
roller
off).
(Theswitches
delivery sensor
turns off.)
4) The lead cam rotates for the distance

4) The lead cam rotates for the distance of its slope secof
its
slope section. (the bin shifts).
tion. (The bin shifts.)
Slope section
slope
section
Sequence of operations (lead cam: advance rotation)


Lead cam home position sensor
(PI1)
Movement of roll on lead cam
Over level section
562
TSM Oc 3121
Over level
section
Height (stationary)
constant
Over slope
section
Bin shift (stationary)
Over level
section
Over slope
section
(station- Bin shift

Height
ary)
constant
Bin: home sensor MS1
The home position of the bin unit is determined when the detecting plate presses against the bin home sensor MS1.
When the bin unit moves to the home position, the bin unit first moves down,
then up, for a single rotation of the lead cam: after detection of the home position by the sensor MS1.
Upper sensor MS2
The motor M1 will stop if an error occurs, causing the bin unit to continue
moving until the detecting plate presses the upper sensor MS2.
MS2
MS1
bin
upper
Bin upper
limitlimit
sensor
sensor
Roll
roll
bin
position
Bin position
detecting plateplate
detecting
Bin home
position
bin
home
posisensorsensor
tion
Controlling the bin shift motor
Motor M1 is a DC motor. The direction of rotation is controlled by combinations of the drive pulses from the microprocessor.
When the motor rotates clockwise, the bin unit moves up.
When the motor rotates counter clockwise, the bin unit moves down.
The motor rotates only when:
the upper sensor MS2 is off, and
the home sensor MS1 is off, and
the stapler home sensor MS4 is on.
ed.1
21 Sorter 563
Tray controller PCB

5V
Q7
MS1
BHP*
J 16- 4
24V P B
Q43
-3
24VA
NC C
Bin home position
sensor
ZD12
Q18
Q53
B M D WN
ZD13
Q19
J 5- 3
+24VPB
Q44
24VA
M1
ZD8
-4
Q16
Q39
BMUP
ZD11
Microprocessor
Bin shift motor
Q17
Q42
5V
MS2
Q41
B UL
J 16- 2
C NC
-1 Bin upper limit
sensor
MS5
24V
SPLOPN*
J 17- 1
-2
NO C
Stapler assembly door
open/closed sensor
MS4
SPLHP*
5V
Q31
-3
C NO
Stapler home
position sensor
BMDWN: Bin unit DOWN signal
The arrows indicate the flow of current.
BMPU: Bin unit UP signal

Bin shift motor rotates CW
(bin moves up).
BHP: Bin home position signal
Bin shift motor rotates CCW

(bin moves down).
SPLHP*: Stapler home position signal
BUL: Bin upper limit signal

SPLOPN*: Stapler cover open/closed signal
Bin movement and combination of bin shift signals
564
Bin shift motor UP sig- Bin shift motor DOWN

nal (BMUP)
signal (BMDWN)
Operation
The bin shift motor

rotates CCW. The bin
unit moves down.
The bin shift motor

rotates CW. The bin unit
moves up.
The bin shift motor stops.

The bin unit stops.
TSM Oc 3121
a.Moving the bin UP

To move the bin up, the microprocessor (Q7) generates:
the bin shift motor UP signal BMUP=1
and the bin shift motor DOWN signal BMDWN=0
.
BMUP=1
Q39 is switched ON.
Q16 is switched ON.
Q17 is switched OFF.
24 V is applied to the motor M1.
BMDWN=0

A reverse current flows to ZD13, and Q19 is
switched ON.
b.Moving the bin DOWN

To move the bin down, the microprocessor (Q7) generates:
the bin shift motor DOWN signal BMDWN=1
and the bin shift motor UP signal BMUP=0
BMDWN=1
Q53 is switched ON.
Q18 is switched ON.
24 V is applied to the motor M1.
BMUP=0
A reverse current flows to ZD11, and Q17 is switched
ON.
Stopping the movement of the bin
The motor (M1) stops when the microprocessor (Q7) generates:

the bin DOWN signal BMDWN=0
and the bin UP signal BMUP=0.
The microprocessor generates BMDWN=0 and BMUP=0 when :
(1) the bin unit moves up/down by a single bin, or
(2) when the bin DOWN signal BLL=1 is generated.
ed.1
21 Sorter 565
The safety circuit used to isolate the motor M1 functions as follows:

If the microprocessor generates BMDWN=1, even though the bin home sensor
MS1 is actuated.
MS1 is actuated, with the bin at the lower limit position.

BHP=1
Q43 is switched ON.
BMDWN changes from 1 to 0, forcing M1 to stop
If the upper sensor MS2 switches ON. (The sensor does not actuate under normal circumstances.)
BMUP=1, rotating the motor M1, and moving up the bin.
The bin moves up too far, actuating MS2.
BUL=1.
Q41 is switched ON.
BMUP changes from 1 to 0, forcing M1 to stop.
An error code will be logged.

If the stapler home sensor MS4 is OFF.
The stapler is not in the home position,
If the bin moved while the stapler was not in the home position, the stapler
could touch the paper.
To prevent this, the motor M1 is prevented from rotating in either direction
when the stapler home sensor is off.
The stapler is not in the home position (MS4 is

OFF).
SPLHP* is 1.
Q42 and Q44 switch ON.
In addition, MS4 communicates to the microprocessor that MS4 is not in the

home position.
If the microprocessor generates BMDWN=1 or BMUP=1 at this time, Q42 and
Q44 switch off. The motor M1 will not rotate.
566
TSM Oc 3121
Controlling the guide bar
The guide bar is inside the bin unit. The bar swings each time an output is delivered to position the output against the side guide.
In addition, the guide bar swings for stapling operation, holding the sheets in
position.
Guide bar
guide
bar
Motor M4 drives the guide bar.

The home position of the guide bar is detected when the vane blocks the bar
home sensor PI5.
guide
swing
Guide bar
bar swing
motor
M4
motor (M4)
guide
Guide bar
bar
flag
Flag
Guide bar
home
position
guide
bar
home
posisensorsensor
(PI5)
tion
PI5
Position of the guide bar
The position of the guide bar is controlled by the paper size signals from the
bar home sensor PI5, and the signals from the copier.
ed.1
21 Sorter 567
The guide bar stops at the following four points:

1 Home position
2 Escape position
The escape position varies according to the paper size.
mm
paper
Paper width
width
Paper size
Paper width
Length R
A3/A4
297
2.5
B4/B5
257
22.5
A5/A4R
210
46
B5R
182
60
A5R
148
77
3 Paper holding position
paper
Papersize
size
guide plate
Guide plate
568
TSM Oc 3121
4 Stapling wait position (manual stapling)
If copies are made in sort mode and outputs are stapled manually, the guide bar
is held in wait position at a point paper size + 8 mm while bins are shifted.
paper
Papersize
size
88mm
mm
Controlling the motor M4
Motor M4 is a 2-phase stepping motor. Pulse signals cause the guide bar to
move to a specific position *. The signals represent a paper size and are generated by the CPU on the tray control PBA.
*See Controlling the Guide Bar Position.
The 5V supply serves as a retention current used to keep the guide bar stationary.
Tray controller PCB
5V
24VPA
Q7
GBMON
J4-13
24VPA
5V
-11
GBMA
-9
GBMA
A
M4
-10
B
-12
-8
Microprocessor
Motor driver
(Q3)
GBMB
GBMB
Guide bar
swing motor
GBMON: Guide bar swing signal

GBMA: Phase A excitation signal (pulse signal)
GBMB: Phase B excitation signal (pulse signal)
ed.1
21 Sorter 569
11 Power supply
The power for the sorter is supplied by the copier.
The 5V supply for the logic system is generated from 24V power. It is controlled by the regulator on the tray control PBA.
The power to the Multitray will be cut when the copiers power is turned off or
the connection between the copier and the Multitray is disconnected. To back
up the data in the RAM (Q8) on the tray controller PCB, the Multitray is
equipped with a back-up power supply PCB whose capacitor is capable of supplying power for about one hour.
Fuse resistor
5V
Logic
24VL
Regulator
IC(Q6)
Copier
R12
J P2
5V
Sensors
Back-up power
supply PCB
RAM
(Q8)
Circuit breaker
24VPA
M2
CB1
24VPA
M4
24VPA
SL1
Paper deflecting plate 1 drive solenoid
24VPA
SL2
Paper deflecting plate 2 drive solenoid
24VPA
S L3
Inlet roller roll releasing solenoid
MS6
24VPC
MS4
MS5
24VPD
24VL: 24V power supply for the copier

24VPA: Power supply provided by the copier through a circuit breaker.
M3
Stapler motor
Stapler safety Stapler home Stapler cover open/

sensor
position sensor closed sensor
24VPD
24VPB: Power supply provided by the

24VL: 24V power supply fro the copier.
copier through a circuit breaker and only
24VPA: Power supply provided by the copier through
when the joint sensor is on.
a circuit breaker.
M1
24VPB: Power supply provided by the copier through
Bin shift motor

24VPD
M5
Stapler swing motor
MS3
24VPB
safety sensor and the stapler home position
M6
Joint sensor
Tray feeder motor
24VPB
M7
24VPC: Power supply provided by the

a circuit breaker and only when the joint
copiersensor
through
a circuit breaker and a stais on.
pler
cover
open/closed sensor and only
24VPC: Power supply provided by the copier through
when athe
stapler safety sensor and the
circuit breaker and a stapler cover open/
stapler
home position sensor are on.
closed sensor and only when the stapler
24VPD:
Power supply provided by the
sensor are on.
copier
through a circuit breaker and only
24VPD: Power supply provided by the copier through
when athe
open/closed
sencircuitstapler
breaker and cover
only when the
stapler
sor iscover
on.open/closed sensor is on.
: Multi-Output Tray 12-B2 only.
Tray shift motor
570
TSM Oc 3121
Sorter 12 bin only.
Electrical diagrams
ed.1
21 SORTER 701
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
22 POWER & CONTROL
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1 DC control PBA 401

2 Power supply PBA 402
3 LCD PBA and CPU PBA
403
1
2
3
4
5
Electrical Circuitry 501

Fans 518
Power supply 520
SLEEP Mode 524
Signals and Abbreviations
527
Location of components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Location of the extension boards

Clutches and solenoids 603
Motors 604
Fans 605
Sensors 606
Switches and counters 607
PBAs 608
Fax related PBAs 609
Image processor PBA 610
DC control PBA 611
Power supply PBA 611
FAX PBA/NCU 612
CORE/IP PBA 613
601
Electrical diagrams
1
2
3
4
Power & Control 1

Power & Control 2
Power & Control 3
Power & Control 4
ed.1
701
702
703
704
22 Power & Control
Dis-/assembly
1 DC control PBA
Replacing the DC Control PBA
3 Remove the two screws (1) . Disconnect all the connectors. Then, remove the
DC control PBA (2).
4 Replace the new PBA with the actions in reverse order.

Note: After replacement, execute (*4* Function 12 R&D Shading Start)
ed.1
22 Power & Control 401
2 Power supply PBA

Replacing the Power Supply PBA
1 Remove the DC control PBA.
2 Remove the two screws, and remove the connector support (1).
3 Remove the two screws (3), and disconnect all connectors; then, remove the
composite power supply PCB.

3
4 Replace the composite power supply with the actions in reverse order.
5 After replacement:
402
Enter the values, which are recorded on the label attached to the composite
power supply PBA, in (*3* Adjust 03).
Execute (*4* Function 03 Auto Shading Start).
Execute (*4* Function 04 PD Print).
TSM Oc 3121
Dis-/assembly
3 LCD PBA and CPU PBA

Removing the LCD PBA and the CPU PBA
1 Remove the inside, front cover (See Miscellaneous Page ....)
2 Remove the magnetic latch plate (1 screw) of the RDF: at the front of the plat-
en.
3 Remove the RDF and the sorter power supply unit (top left).
4 Remove 2 x black and 2 x silver coloured screws, to remove the control panel
from the machine.

5 Remove the RS 232 connector from the support (2 screws).
6 Disconnect the 2 small connectors from the PBA on the operating panel (2 pur-
ple lead connectors).

7 Disconnect the connector (1), and remove the six screws (2). Then, remove the
control panel support (3).
2
2
8 Remove the four screws and the three flat cables. Then, remove the LCD PBA
(4).
9 Remove the two screws and the switch PBA (5). Then, remove the four screws
and the two flat cables, and remove the CPU PBA (6).
5
ed.1
1 Electrical Circuitry
Control
The Oc 3121s electrical mechanisms are controller by the CPU on the PBAs
shown in the Block diagram of the CPU. See the tables for an idea of the
functions of the CPU and the functions of the ROMs/RAMs and the ICs around
the CPU.
Image Processor PBA

Name
IC No
Description
CPU
IC506
Controls the image processing

Controls the laser operation
Controls the job schedules
Controls the fax sequence
Controls the system memory
Detects errors
Controls the communications with the DC control PBA
Controls the serial communications (for FLASH ROM
downloading)
Controls the control panel
Controls the feeder/editor
Controls the fax communications
Controls the copying sequence
Controls the power supply
Controls the communication with the control panel
ROM
(FLASH
ROM)
ROM
DIMM
IC1
IC2
Contains the control programmes

Controls the copying operations
Controls the fax operations
Control panel message
MASK
ROM
IC564
Controls the fonts (e.g., the fonts used for the fax headers)
RAM
IC650
IC651
Stores the service mode, the user mode, and various

parameters
DP RAM
IC528
Controls the communications with the DC control PBA
ed.1
DC control PBA
Name
IC No
Description
CPU
IC101
Controls the pick-up and feed operations

Controls the pedestal
Controls the HT sequence
Controls the laser scanner motor
Detects jams
Controls the service mode
Controls the IPC
Controls the sorter
Controls the fusing
Controls the main motor
Controls the scanner motor
Detects the cassette or paper
Detects the size of documents
ROM
IC103
IC104
Contains the control programmes
IPC
IC108
Controls the sorter and RDF combinations
Power supply PBA
502
Name
IC No
Description
CPU
C605
Controls the power supply system

Controls the HT supply
Monitors the inputs to the power switch and the de-humidifier switch
Monitors the calling indicator (fax call signal)
Controls the loading of the power supply
Controls the scanning lamp
TSM Oc 3121
Block Diagram of the CPU

2. Block Diagram of the CPU
Control panel
CPU
Serial
communication
Image processor PC
CORE/IP
Board
FAX
Motherboard
G3FAX Board
Modem
CPU
IC506
IC564
MASK
ROM
IC650
Selector
Memory
control
RAM
IC651
RAM
Memory Memory
Coding/
decoding
BAT501
IC528 DP
RAM
Main
motor
DC controller
PCB
CPU
IC101 CPU
IC103
DC loads
Clutch
Solenoid
Motor
Sensor
Etc.
Q605
Lamp
regulator
circuit
HVT
circuit
DC power
supply
circuit
ROM
IC104
ROM
IC105
RAM
Scanning lamp
ROM SIMM J527

IC1
FLASH
ROM
IC2
FLASH
ROM
Telephone
line
NCU
-12V 5V 7V
15V 24V
Laser
scanner M
motor
IC108
Sorter
RDF/ADF
Communication
control device
ed.1
IPC
General Block Diagram

Analog
processor PCB
Image processor
PCB
CORE/IP Board
FAX
Motherboard
Image processing
circuit
A/D
Binary
processing
Ratio
change
Laser
driver
G3 FAX Board
Memory A Memory B
(expansion) (expansion)
Memory A Memory B Coding/
Video
signal
switching
circuit
decoding
Memory
controller
Selector
Density
D/A
Telephone
line
Control panel
CPU
Modem
CPU
DP
RAM
NCU
Protocol controller PCB
DP
RAM
Controller
CPU
Command
conversion
circuit
Memory
Host computer
CPU
SCSI
SCSI Board
(option)
Printer board (option)
DP
CPU
RAM

CPU
IPC
CPU
DC controller PCB
DC loads
Clutch
Solenoid
Motor
Sensor
Etc.
Main
motor
M
M
Laser scanner motor
Lamp
regulator
circuit
Scanning lamp
Sorter
RDF/ADF
ASSIST
HVT
circuit
DC power
supply
Video
controller
24V 15V 7V
5V -12V
DP
RAM
System
Motherboard
CPU
LAN
controller
Network I/F Board
(option)
Note: The CORE/IP board, FAX motherboard come standard with the Oc
3121. The G3 FAX board is optional
504
TSM Oc 3121
Inputs to the major PBA
Power supply circuit
Sorter
RDF
Main switch
SW1
System
Motherboard
24V
ACC power
supply PCB
5V
12V
System power
supply PCB
J2
Noise filter
J210
-1
-3
J201
-1
(option)
Front door switch
SW2
DC power
supply circuit
-5
J3
J4
Fluorescent heater
switch
SW4
Fixing heater
H4
J11
Fixing
heater
driver PCB
AC
Fu1
J3
Cassette heater
H1
J209
J102
Scanning lamp
control/HVT
DC controller PCB
J95
J208
-1
J20
FL1 Scanning lamp

-2
-4
-5
J205-3
J205-3
Developing assembly
Drum
Transfer guide
J206-1
Static eliminator
Transfer roller
T502
J206-4
Fixing assembly
ed.1
J220
Image processor PBA (1/3): inputs and outputs.

Image processor PCB
Analog
processor
PCB
DC
controller
PCB
J1001
J512
Checks are not meant for the field.
J111
J509
Checks are not meant for the field.
J504
-1
-2
-3
J5041
-1
Beam
-2
detection (BD) -3
PCB
J603
J602
5V
BD (input)
J518
J519
Laser driver
PCB
See p. 3-54
Power supply
indicator LED
LEDON
When '1', LED turns ON.

(Turns ON when the main
power switch is ON.)
J91
Power saving
mode switch
J183
Control Card V
(option)
506
TSM Oc 3121
J560
-3
-2
-3
-4
5V
ed.1
508
TSM Oc 3121
DC Control PBA (1/3): inputs
ed.1
510
TSM Oc 3121
ed.1
DC control PBA (1/3): outputs

DC controller PCB
J114
-B4
-B6
-B7
-B5
M1
5V
MMD
MLCK
See p. 3-16
Main motor
24V
0V
J116
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J25
Scanner motor
M3
M2
J112
-6
-7
-8
-5
Laser scanner
motor driver
PCB
24V
0V
Laser scanner motor
J109
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
J49
Fixing Film
M5
J76
Set-back motor
J103-8
-9
-6
-7
-10
-11
M6
J81
Duplexing assembly
inlet motor
M7
J72
Delivery reversing
motor
(GP215 only)
Holizontal motor
M8
J105-B6
-B7
-B4
-B5
-B8
-B9
J69
J105-A8
-A9
-A6
-A7
-A10
-A11
J115-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
M9
J68
See p.3-23
See p. 3-60
24V24V
See p. 3-123
24V24V
See p. 3-110
24V24V
See p. 3-108
24V24V
See p. 3-127
24V24V
See p. 3-114
J99
FIG. 3-111
512
TSM Oc 3121
Registration clutch
Multifeeder pick-up
clutch
Developing clutch
Lower feeding
assembly re-pick up
clutch
J114-B10
J61
J114-B8
J38
J113-B13
-B11
CL2
-B9
CL4
-B14
CL5
-6
J63
J113-B1
J62
J114-B12
SL1
Multifeeder holding
plate releasing
solenoid
-B2
SL3
Re-pick up paper
deflecting plate
solenoid
-B13
J75
J73
J71
J69
SL4
Delivery assembly
paper deflecting plate
solenoid
J105-A4
-A5
J53
Feeding fan
J103-4
-5
SL5
J51
24VU
RGCD*
When '0', CL1 turns ON
24VU
MFCD*
J122-5
Primary charging
roller cleaning
solenoid
J37
CL1
J107-A7
-A8
24VU
DVCD*
24VU
CL5D*
24VU
PCLSD*
24VU
MRSD*
24VU
When '0', SL3 turns ON
RFLD*
24VU
DFLD*
24VU
FMD1*
When '0', FM1 rotates.

15V
FM1
J107-A9
Exhaust fan 1
-A10
FM2
24VU
15V
J107-B1
Exhaust fan 2
-B2
FM3
Laser cooling fan
24VU
The CPU control

mechanism switches
between high-speed and
low-speed modes.
15V
J113-B3
-B4
24VU
The CPU control

mechanism switches
low-speed modes.
15V
FM4
J112-9
System cooling fan
The CPU control

mechanism switches
low-speed modes.
-10
24VU
The CPU control

mechanism switches
low-speed modes.
FM5
ed.1
514
TSM Oc 3121
Main power ON Copy Start key ON

INTR2
Control panel power OFF

SCFW
LSTR
SCFW
STBY SLEEP
SCRV
STBY
SCRV
INTR1
Main motor (M1)

AGC
Fixing heater (H4)
Scanner motor (M2)
Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Scanning lamp (FL1)
Shading measurement
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL2)
Pick-up motor (M4)
Vertical path roller clutch (CL3)
Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS8)
Pre-registration paper sensor (PS5)

Primar
Note1
Note2
Note: 1, A button on the operating panel is pressed. Or, a document is placed
in the DF.
Note: 2, Varies according to the time set in user mode (quiet mode).
ed.1
Period
Purpose
TNTR1
(initial rotation 1)
From when the

machine is switched
ON. Or, when the
front panel is open or
closed. Up to the
commencement of
standby.
SLEEP Economy When the ON/OFF

(sleep) mode
switch on the operat(SLEEP 2) ing panel is OFF and
the main ON/OFF
switch is ON. Fax
reception is enabled
but printer functions
are disabled.
Remarks
Measures the
resistance of
the OPC
Switches OFF
the loads when
the machine is
not used for a
long time (such
as at night).
For details on
power saving
mode see the
appropriate
descriptions
under Power
Supply.
Quick-start When the ON/OFF

mode
switch on the operat(SLEEP 1) ing panel is OFF and
the main ON/OFF
switch is ON. Fax
reception and printer
functions are enabled.
INTR2 (initial rotation 2)
From when the copy

button is pressed, until
the scanner starts to
move forward.
Stabilizes the
drum sensitivity, preparing
for the copying operation.
Executes shading correction.
SCFW (scan forward)
While the scanner is

moving forward.
The distance that the
scanner moves forward varies according
to the selected paper
size and the reproduction ratio.
....
The scanning
lamp illuminates the document. The
reflection is
projected on
the CCD, via
mirrors and
lenses.
SCRV (scan reverse) While the scanner is

moving in reverse.
516
TSM Oc 3121
The forward
movement is
related to the
detection signal
for the vertical
transport.
Returns the
scanner to the
home position,
preparing for
the next copying operation.
Period
Purpose
Remarks
LSTR (last rotation) From the end of

SCRV until the copy
passes the output sensor.
Cleans the surface of the

drum: dissipation of residual charge.
Delivers the last

output.
Two minutes
after the end of
LSTR, the display on the
operating panel
is reset to
standard
screen. (The 2
minute delay is
a variable.)
Detection of errors on the power supply PBA
The power supply PBA has an internal diagnostic function. This checks for errors in the output from the PBA, and the communication with the DC control
PBA.
The results are shown by varying the flash pattern of the LED100. Refer to the
troubleshooting chapter to find out the descriptions.
Electrical adjustments after replacing major PBAs
ed.1
2 Fans
Functions and Operations
Five fans are used in the machine.

No.
Air flow
Function
FM1 Feeding fan
Name
Suction
FM2 Exhaust fan

FM3
FM4 Laser cooling fan
FM5 Electrical unit fan
Suction
Holds the copy paper against the

feeding belt.
Exhausts heat.
FM6 Refeed cooling fan
Exhaust
Suction
Suction
Cools the laser unit.

Exhausts the heat from the electrical
unit.
Cooling the copy paper in the refeed
unit
FM4
FM5
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM6
518
TSM Oc 3121
Star key
ON
INTR SCFW
SCFW
SCRV
INTR1
STBY
Control panel power

switch OFF
LSTR
STBY
SLEEP
SCRV
main power
switch ON
Feedding fan (FM1)

Exhaust fan (FM2/3)
Laser cooling fan (FM4)
*2
*1
Electrical unit cooling fan

(FM5)
High-speed rotation
Low-speed rotation
1: Quite mode is set to either 1 through 9 min; the operation occurs
when
* A key is pressed,
* An original is placed in the feeder, or
* The copyboard cover or the feeder is opened.

2: Varies depending on the setting for quiet mode.
ed.1
3 Power supply
The machines DC power is generated by the composite power supply PBA.
The composite power supply PBA serves as the DC power supply and also as
a lamp unit and a high-voltage transformer unit. The table is a block diagram
of the entire composite power supply PBA, and gives an outline of the DC
power supply.
Power supply PBA: output
Output voltage
Output voltage
24VR
24VU
+7V
+15V
12V
5.1V
+5V
24V5%
24V10%
8.75V26%
15V5%
12V5%
5.1V3%
+5V
Power Supply :SLEEP mode
SLEEP mode = ON/OFF switch on the operating panel is OFF.

There are two possibilities:
SLEEP2 = economy mode, or
SLEEP1 = quick start mode.
Economy mode (SLEEP 2)
Power is supplied only to the CPU on the power supply PBA.

A separate facility is provided for the power required for the printer functions.
Fax reception is enabled.
When a transmission is received, the CI signal is generated in the NCU. The
CI signal is transmitted to the CPU on the power supply PBA, via the Fax
motherboard PBA. This switches on the power supply PBA, to supply power
to the other PBA.
The printer functions are not enabled.
Economy mode is disabled for printer mode. The same applies if the fax mode
is set to start at a specific time of the day.
520
TSM Oc 3121
Quick-start mode (SLEEP 1)
In quick start mode, the image processor PBA and the DC CONTROL PBA
(white areas in figure Outline of Power Supply in SLEEP 1 (quick start
mode)) are supplied with power. In this mode, FAX and printer functions are
enabled.
Outline of the power supply: standby
ed.1
Outline of the power supply: SLEEP1 (quick start mode)
*Power is not supplied to the shaded functions.
522
TSM Oc 3121
Outline of the power supply: SLEEP2 (economy mode)
*Power is not supplied to the shaded functions.
ed.1
4 SLEEP Mode
Four situations apply:
Power OFF = the main ON/OFF switch is OFF.

SLEEP 1 = quick start mode is enabled.
SLEEP 2 = economy mode is enabled.
Standby = the machine is ready for use.
The phasing of these situations is as follows:

1 Power OFF to Standby
When the main ON/OFF switch is switched ON.
2 Standby to SLEEP 1
When the ON/OFF switch on the operating panel is switched ON.

When auto power-off is enabled, or
When a weekly timer is enabled.
3 SLEEP 1 to Standby
When the ON/OFF switch on the operating panel is switched ON, or

During off-hook.
4 SLEEP 1 to SLEEP 2
There are no transmission reservations.

There are no timer operation reservations (e.g., timer polling, timer reporting).
There is no reception document.
When there is no document waiting for printing.
During on-hook.
There is no printer board PBA.
The economy switch is at the bottom position.
5 SLEEP 2 to SLEEP 1
Occurs when an incoming call is detected.
6 SLEEP 2 to Standby
524
During off-hook.
When the ON/OFF switch on the operating panel is switched ON.
When the economy switch is switched ON (moved up).
TSM Oc 3121
State
Description
CPU on the CPU on

power sup- the image
ply PBA
processor
PBA
LCD
FAX
image
memory
Power
OFF
Stops
Stops
Retained None
by battery
SLEEP 2
Operates
SLEEP 1
Device
Standby
ed.1
Stops
Retained Fax reception is

by power enabled; after
supply
receipt, it moves
to sleep 1
Operates
Remote functions are enabled: e.g. fax

transmission, fax
reception, printing.
Operates
All functions are

available
Cycle of SLEEP Mode States
Top:
SLEEP 1
Bottom: SLEEP 2
SLEEP 1
SLEEP 2
526
TSM Oc 3121
5 Signals and Abbreviations

1.
Signals
1RPD0
1RPD1
2RPD0
3RPD1
ACON
APCON
ASCNTP
ASRXD
ASTDX
BD
BKLTON
CBCC
CCV CONNECT
CCV COUNT
CI
CL3D
CL5D
CNT1D
CNT2D
CNT3D
CS10_D
CS11_D
CS12_D
CS13_D
CS14_D
CS20_D
CS21_D
CS22_D
CS23_D
CS24_D
DCH
DCON
DFLD
DSZ1
DSZ2
DSZ3
DSZ4
DVCD
UPPER CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION 0 signal

UPPER CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION 1 signal
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION 0 signal
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION 1 signal
AC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command
AUTO POWER CONTROL ON command
ASSIST COUNTER PULSE signal
ASSIST RECEPTION DATA signal
ASSIST TRANSMISSION DATA signal
BEAM DETECT signal
BACK LIGHT ON signal
COPYBOARD COVER CLOSED signal
CONTROL CARD CONNECT signal
CONTROL CARD COUNTER PULSE signal
CALLING INDICATOR signal
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH 3 DRIVE command
ROLLER CLUTCH 5 DRIVE command
COUNTER DRIVE 1 command
UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 0
LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 0
DC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command
DC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command
DELIVERY DEFLECTION SOLENOID DRIVE signal
DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal 1
DEVELOPING CLUTCH DRIVE signal
ed.1
1.
Signals
FFD
FL_S
FLPRTH
FLPWM
FLTH
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Cassette 5
Cassette 6
FS
HTNG
HTRD
HVTM0
HVTM1
LCSPD
LED 102
LMD
LOCK
LOW DETECT
LSRD
MFCK
MFPD
MFPW
MMCK
MMD
MRSD
PCSD
FIXING FILM DETECTION command

FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE THERMISTOR signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP PWM DRIVE command
FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal
FAN1 (FM1) DRIVE command
EXHAUST FAN2 (FM2) DRIVE command
EXHAUST FAN3 (FM3) DRIVE command
FS signal
HEATER NG signal
HEATER DRIVE command
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER MODE 0
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER MODE 1
LOWER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
PILOT LED DRIVE command
LAZER SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command
LAZER SCANNER MOTOR LOCK signal
ONE TOUCH DIAL LOW DETECTION signal
LASER DRIVE command
MULTIFEEDER CLUTCH DRIVE signal
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH signal
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command
MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE command
PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID
DRIVE command
PAPER DETECTION signal 1
VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal 4
PRE-CONDITIONING EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command
RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
REPICK UP ROLLER SECTION SOLENOID DRIVE signal
REGIST CLUTCH DRIVE signal
DRUM TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
PDP1
PDP3
PDP4
PDP5
PDP6
PDP7
PEXP
RDOD
RFLD
RGCD
RTEMP
528
TSM Oc 3121
1.
Signals
SCHP
SEBON
SH
SL2D
SRGPD
Laser ON
SCANNER HOME POSITION signal

SEPARATION STATIC ELIMINATOR ON command
SAMPLE HOLD signal
SOLENOID DRIVE signal 2
SIDE REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER SWITCH DRIVE command
LIGHT INTENSITY SW0
LIGHT INTENSITY SW1
TONER EMPTY signal
FIXING THERMISTOR 1 signal
FIXING THERMISTOR 2 signal
UPPER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
ONT TOUCH DIAL UP DETECTION signal
CASETTE CERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal
WASTE TONER DETECTION signal
SW0
SW1
TEP
TH1
TH2
UCSPD
UP DETECT
VPPD
WTDT
ed.1
1 Location of the extension boards
1
2
3
10
9
8
7
6
1 SCSI PBA
2 CIST PBA
3 CORE/IP PBA
4 FAX Motherboard PBA
5 Printer PBA
ed.1
6 System motherboard PBA

7 System power supply
8 Protocol control PBA
9 Network interface PBA
10 FAX PBA
Operation
Switching ON.
The copier has two power switches: the ON/OFF switch, and the power switch
on the operating panel. The ON/OFF switch should be operated first.
1 Control panel: ON/OFF switch

2 ON/OFF switch
3 Main power supply lamp
602
TSM Oc 3121
2 Clutches and solenoids
CL4
CL2
CL1
SL3
CL5
SL1
CL3
SL4
SL2
SL5
CL1 Drives the registration roller

CL2 Drives the pick-up roller for specialities
CL1 Drives the vertical transport roller
CL4 Drives the developing roller
CL5 Drives the refeed assembly pick-up
ed.1
SL1 Drives the cleaner for the charging roller

SL2 Lowers the pick-up roller
SL3 Releases the specialities
SL4 Drives the deflecting plate for the re-feed
SL5 Drives the deflecting plate for output
3 Motors
M2
M1
M6
M7
M4
M9
M3
M8
M5
M1 Main motor
M2 Scanner motor
M3 Laser scanner motor
M4 Pick-up motor
M5 Fusing film motor
604
TSM Oc 3121
M6 Motor for the retarding roller

M7 Duplex motor
M8 Motor for the output roller
M9 Horizontal registration: sensor drive motor
4 Fans
FM4
FM5
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM6
FM1 Feeding fan

FM2 Delivery fan 1 (rear)
FM3 Delivery fan 2 (front)
ed.1
FM4 Laser cooling fan

FM5 Electrical unit fan
FM6 Lower feed: inlet fan
5 Sensors
PS3
PS10
PS5
PS4
PS9
SD4
SD3
PS1
PS8
PS14
TS1
PS2
SD1
SD2
PS13
PS12
PS11
PS7
PS1 Detects scanner home position
PS11 Detects paper in front of the re-feed

assembly
PS2 Detects displacement of the fixing film PS12 Detects paper at the refeed unit inlet
PS3 Detects platen cover open or closed
PS13 Detects output of paper
PS4 Detects paper in the speciality tray
PS14 Detects paper at the horizontal registration
PS5 Detects paper in front of the registration TS1 Detects level of remaining toner
assembly
PS7 Detects output from the fuser
SD1 Document size sensor 1
PS8 Detects paper in front of the vertical
transport
PS9 Detects right door open/closed
PS10 Detects waste toner
606
TSM Oc 3121
6 Switches and counters
SW1
FL1
R1
SW4
SW3
VZ1
CNT1
CNT2
CNT3
SW2
SQ1 ON/OFF switch

SW2 Front door switch
SW3 Economy-mode switch
SW4 Cassette heater switch
CNT1 Counter 1
ed.1
CNT2 Counter 2
CNT3 Counter 3
VZ1 Pre-registration guide varistor
R1 High voltage resistor
FL1 Scanning lamp
7 PBAs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
608
Image processor PBA

DC control PBA
Power supply PBA
Analogue processor
PBA
Laser driver PBA
Laser scanner motor
driver
Fusing heater driver
Options power supply
Intensity adjusting sensor
BD PBA
Noise filter
Pick-up unit PBA
Cassette size detection
(upper)
Cassette size detection
(lower)
Pre-exposure lamp
PBA
Speciality paper width
detection PBA
Service switch PBA
LCD intensity adjustment PBA
LCD PBA (control
panel)
CPU PBA (control
panel)
TSM Oc 3121
16
1
7
12
13
11
14
3
10
15
9
17
18
8 Fax related PBAs
6
3
7
2
5
1 CORE/IP PBA
2 FAX Motherboard PBA
3 FAX PBA
4 NCU
ed.1
5 Modular jack PBA

6 Speaker
7 Expansion memory (option 3 MB or 9 MB,
image memory)
8 Expansion memory (option 3 MB, page
memory)
9 Image processor PBA

J502
J504
J509
J507
J501
J561
J508
J527
SW501
J512
J505
J506
J514
J526
J560
J517
J516
J519
J518
100V
AB
OFF
1
SW501
TSM Oc 3121
ON
OFF
1
230V
A
ON
OFF
1
ON
230V
AB/Inch
OFF
1
3
4
610
120V
Inch
ON
10 DC control PBA
VR1
LED100
LED 100 indicates the condition of the power supply PBA, by varying
ON/OFF intervals.
VR1 adjusts the intensity of the scanning lamp when executing factory/R&D
shading under *4* FUNCTION.
11 Power supply PBA
ed.1
12 FAX PBA/NCU
VR1
J100
J5
VR2
J3
J6
(RAM-B)
J4
(RAM-A)
LED1
SW2
SW1
J2
RAM-A is the page memory. It enables the use of ultra-fine mode. (install
RAM-B if RAM-A, 3 MB has been installed).
J3
J2
J1
SW1 to be used with all bits OFF

SW2 to be OFF first when installing expansion memory. Then, ON after the
work.
LED1 ON when 5V is supplied normally.
612
TSM Oc 3121
13 CORE/IP PBA
J502
J510
J503
J501
J504
ed.1
Electrical diagrams
ed.1
22 POWER & CONTROL 1 701
ed.1
ed.1
ed.1
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
23 DRIVE
Contents
Dis-/assembly
1 Removing the main motor
401
1 Main motor control PBA 501

2 Rotation 501
3 Controlling the Speed 502
ed.1
23 Drive
Dis-/assembly
1 Removing the main motor

2 Remove the four screws (2), and disconnect the two connectors (3). Then, re-
move the main motor (1).

1
2
3
ed.1
23 Drive 401
1 Main motor control PBA
Outline
The main motor (M1) is controlled by the drive signal (MMD) generated by
the DC control PBA. The motor drives:
OPC
Developing unit
Feeding unit
Fusing unit
Registration roller
Vertical transport: roller 1/2
Delivery roller 1
Refeed unit: exit roller
The speed of the motor is controlled by the main motor control PBA.
2 Rotation
The main motor is driven by DC + 24 Vu supplied by the composite power supply PCB. When the drive signal (MMD) generated by the DC controller PCB
goes 1, the control circuit on the main motor control PCB turns ON to drive
the drive circuit.
The drive circuit supplies drive current to the main motor. Simultaneously, the
output of the hall IC is returned to the drive circuit. The motor continues rotating.
ed.1
23 Drive 501
3 Controlling the Speed

Motor M1 is a DC motor with an integrated clock pulse generator.
This generates clock pulses (MMCLK signal) in relation to the rotation of the
motor.
The phases of these clock pulses are compared to the phases of a reference signal, and are controlled until they match. This matching controls the current to
the motor, and maintains the rpm of the motor at a fixed level.
The condition in which the phase of the clock pulses generated by the motor
and the phase of the reference pulses match is called locking, in which the
constant speed state signal (MLCK=1) is sent to the DC controller PCB. If a
discrepancy occurs in the revolution for some reason, MLCK will go 0.
If MLCK remains 0 for about 3 sec, a main motor error is detected, causing
all operations to stop. (E010 will be indicated on the control panel.)
Composite power supply
PCB
Main motor driver PCB

+24V
0V
Drive
circuit
DC controller PCB
Drive
current
MMD
J114-B6
Encoder
Control
circuit
MLCK*
J114-B7
Main
motor
(M1)
Hall IC output
Output pulse
Reference signal
502
TSM Oc 3121
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
MISCELLANEOUS
Contents
Miscellaneous
Handling the cables 101

Covers 102
Removing the right cover 103
Inside Cover 104
1
2
3
4
ed.1
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
1 Handling the cables
Exercise care when moving the harness retainer (square cable clip) to avoid
damaging any cables.
ed.1
01 Miscellaneous 101
2 Covers
External View
2
1 Front door
2 Right cover
2
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rear cover
Output unit cover
Left cover
Output tray
Tray cover
Lower output cover
Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the machine.
102
TSM Oc 3121
Miscellaneous
3 Removing the right cover

Note: Skip steps 4) and 5) if the lower right cover is not fitted.
1
2
3
4
5

Open the front door
Slide open the cassette.
Remove the screw (1) from the lower cover.
While pulling the centre of the cover, disengage the hook and remove the cover.
Hook
6 Open the speciality tray

7 Remove the 4 screws and take off the right cover (4).
3
ed.1
4 Inside Cover
1 Remove the screw (1), and slide the two pins (2) out of the hinges to remove
the front door.

2
2 Remove the inner cover (3) from the fuser ( 1 screw ).

3
104
TSM Oc 3121
Miscellaneous
3 Release the lever (5). Unscrew the button (6), and remove the OPC unit.
4 Turn the lever (5), to lock the developing unit.
6
5 Release the feeding unit. Remove the clip (8), the lever (7) and the knob (9).
6 Slide out the upper cassette.

7 Remove the inside cover (5 screws, index 10).
10
10
ed.1
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Contents
Preventive maintenance
Points to note for scheduled servicing

Periodically Replacable Parts 2
Consumables and Durables 2
Scheduled Servicing Work Flow 3
Scheduled Cleaning 4
1
2
3
4
5
ed.1
01 Preventive maintenance
ed.1
Part
Separation claw
Inlet guide
Tools/solvent
Solvent
Solvent
Fixing assembly/delivery assembly
Part
Tools/solvents
Copyboard glass
Alcohol
Original saize sensor Blower brush
Lint-free paper
Scanning lamp
Blower brush
Reflecting plate
No.1 through No.3 mirrors
Work/remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Work/remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Dry wiping
As necessary, dry
wiping with lint-free paper
Tools/solvent
Alcohol
Tools/solvent
Blower brush
Blower brush
Tools/solvent
Moist cloth*
Special brush
Moist cloth*
Work/remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Work/remarks
Cleaning
Work/remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
*Make sure no droplet of water remains. Do not turn on

the power until the part is completely dry.
Part
Transfer guide
Static eliminator
Feeding assembly
base/feeding belt
Transfer/feeding assembly
Part
Developing roll
Developing assembly
Part
Lens
Dust-proofing glass
Optical assembly
1 Points to note for scheduled servicing
01 Preventive maintenance 1
2 Periodically Replacable Parts

The machine does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
3 Consumables and Durables

Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of warranty because of deterioration or wear. Replace them as necessary.
No. Parts
Parts No.
Qty Life
Remarks
(copies)
Lower fusing: separation ....

claw
100,000
Static eliminator
....
100,000
Fusing unit
....
200,000
....
....
200,000
....
....
200,000
....
Fuser, cleaning roller
....
200,000
Included in fuser unit.
lower fusing roller
....
200,000
Included in fuser unit.
Scanning lamp
....
200,000
Transfer roller
....
200,000
Pick-up and feeding

roller
....
100,000
Copies produced
Separation roller
....
200,000
Copies produced
10
Separation pad
....
200,000
11
Pre-exposure lamp
....
200,000
12
Developing roller
....
400,000
....
....
400,000
....
TSM Oc 3121
4 Scheduled Servicing Work Flow
..
Step Adjustments
Checks
Consult the operator
Enquire about machine performance.
Record the counter reading.
Check the copy quality, etc.
Make a series of test copies Check the following:

a Image density
b Background (for minimum)
c Characters (for clarity)
d Leading edge margin (see
Note)
e Fusing, registration, back
(minimum soiling)
f Functioning of the counters
Note:
Standards: 2.5 1.0
mm
Clean the optical system:

Reflector for the scanning lamp
Lens
Mirrors 1, 2 and 3
Aperture glass
Standard white plate
Use a blower brush. If

the dirt cannot be
removed, use alcohol.
Wipe the standard
white plate, using a
dry cloth.
Clean the transfer guide.

Transfer guides, upper
and lower
Guide rail for the transfer
unit
Remove the OPC.
Clean the separation unit

and the refeed unit
Static eliminator
Feeding belt
Clean the fusing and output

unit
Fuser entry
Lower fusing: separation
claw
Check the scheduled parts

for wear and copy production.
Clean the platen.
10
Make a series of test copies
ed.1
Remarks
Step
Adjustments
Checks
11
Carry out the image adjustment procedure.
12
Make a series of test copies
13
Clean up the working area.
14
Record the final counter

reading.
15
Complete the service

report. Release copier for
normal use.
Remarks
5 Scheduled Cleaning
Warning: Do not use unlisted solvents or lubricants.
Unit
Part
Interval
100,000
copies
Remarks
Scanner drive
Scanner rail
Lubricant
Feeding unit
Feeding belt
Clean
The base of the feeding unit
Clean
Transfer guide
Clean
Reflector for the scanning lamp
Clean
The mirrors 1 to 3.
Clean
Lens
Clean
Document size sensor
Clean
Aperture glass
Clean
Developing unit
The developing roller
Clean
Fusing unit
Fuser entry
Clean
Lower fusing: separation claw
Replace
Optical system
TSM Oc 3121
RDF Consumables and durables
Some parts may have to be replaced once or more during the period of warranty because of wear or damage. Replace such parts when they fail.
No. Parts
Parts No.
Qty Life
Remarks
(copies)
Feeding belt
200,000
Pick-up roller
500,000
Separation belt (fax

mode)
250,000
Separation belt (copier

mode)
500,000
Feeding roller (fax mode)
500,000
Feeding roller belt (copier mode, large)
500,000
Feeding roller belt (copier mode, small)
500,000
Separation flapper (rear)
250,000
Separation flapper (front)
250,000
10
Stamp ink cartridge
7,000
If dirt cannot be removed
Note: The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on fu-
ture data.
ed.1
RDF Scheduled servicing

Warning: Do not use other solvents or oils than listed.
Ref.
Part name
Scheduled servicing
100,000
Feeding/reversing roller
Clean
Registration roller
Clean
Registration paper sensor S3
Separation belt (pick-up assembly) Clean
Separation flapper (rear, front)
Clean
Feeding roller
Clean
Original tray paper sensor S1
Delivery roller (copier mode)
Pick-up roller (pick-up assembly)
10
Feeding belt
11
Delivery roller (fax mode)
12
Stamping cartridge
Check/Replace
13
Platen retainer (right)
Clean
14
Platen
Clean
15
Separation front guide
Clean
16
Vertical size plate
Clean
TSM Oc 3121
Remarks
200,000
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
TECHNICAL DATA
Contents
Technical data
SPECIAL FEATURES Screen

Functions 2
Features 7
Specifications 8
1
2
3
4
ed.1
01 Technical data
Technical data
1 SPECIAL FEATURES Screen
SPECIAL FEATURES
screen
Next screen
TWO-PAGE SEPARATION
TRANSP. INTERLEAVING Stack bypass Select
SHIFT
Center Shift, Corner Shift (8
directions), Keypad Setting
SHEET OVERLAY
SHEET OVERLAY
BOOK OVERLAY
DIF. SIZE ORIGINAL/THIN SHEET ORIGINAL
MARGIN
AREA DESIG.
SHARPNESS
FRAME ERASE
IMAGE CREATION
IMAGE COMB.
IMAGE SEPARATION
MODE MEMORY
REC.
ed.1
Remarks
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
Requires a duplexing
unit.
Requires an RDF for
original mix size
mode and an ADF for
thin paper originals.
Left margin, Right margin,

Top mar-gin, Bottom margin
Area Desig. (editor or keypad), Framing, Blanking,
Negative/Positive Reversal
Soft to Hard (9 steps)
Sheet Frame Erasing, Original Frame Erasing, Book
Frame Erase, Binding erase
Mirror Image, Image
Repeat, Negative/Positive
Reversal, Slant image
2-on-1, 4-on-1, 2-on-1
Requires an RDF.
Two-Sided
1-on-2, 1-on-4, 1-on-2 /
Requires an RDF.
One-sided, 1-on-4/One
Sided
M1 through M5
Most Recent, 2nd Most
Recent, 3rd Most Recent
01 Technical data 1
2 Functions
Keys
Key
Description
Page Separation
You can copy both left and right pages of an open

original (book) on separate sheets by a single operation (on a single page basis).
Transparency Interleaf You can add copy paper between transparencies when
copying on transparencies. Set the transparencies in
the multifeeder. (Or, you may use a feeder).
(1) Adding Copy Paper (2) Copying on Copy Paper
Shift:
Center Shift
Corner Shift
Keypad Shift
TSM Oc 3121
You can shift the position of the original anywhere

for copying. For corner shift, you may select one
from eight directions.
Technical data
Key
Description
Overlay:
Sheet Overlay
Book Overlay
You can lay two images on the same side of a single

sheet of copy paper in any of three ways:
Making an overlay copy from two one-sided ordinals.
Making an overlay copy from an open original
(book).
DIF. Size Original
You can use originals of different sizes using a

feeder. (The originals may be of different lengths
but must be of the same feeding width.)
Margin:
Left Margin
Right Margin
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
You may move an image to the front or the rear in sub

scanning direction by specifying a distance so as to
create a margin on the left/right of the output.
The binding width may be adjusted between 1 and 20
mm in 1mm increments.
You may select cover only, back only, or both cover
and back.
Area Desig:
Framing
Blanking
Negative/Positive
Reversal
You can select an area in a specific image for special processing. The X coordinate must be 432 mm
or less and Y, 297 mm or less.
Sharpness
You can emphasize or subdue images.

You may select one from nine different degrees.
Select hard for crisp characters and lines or soft for
photos.
ed.1
01 Technical data 3
Key
Description
Frame Erase:
Sheet Frame Erase
Original Frame Erase
Book Frame Erase
Binding Erase
You can select from among the following four types of

frame erasing:
(1) Original Frame Erase
(2) Sheet Frame Erase
(3) Book Frame Erase
(4) Binding Erase
TSM Oc 3121
Technical data
Key
Description
Image Creation:
Mirror Image
Image Repeat
Negative/Positive
Reversal
Slant Image
You can select any of the following modes after

pressing the Image Create key.
Image Comb.:
2-on-1
4-on-1
2-on-1 Two-Sided
You can reduce two or four originals to copy on a

single sheet of copy paper. For details, see the Operators Manual, as the specifics vary depending on
the copier model and options configuration.
ed.1
01 Technical data 5
Key
Description
Separation image:
1-on-2 One-Sided to
One-Sided
1-on-4 One-Sided to
One-Sided
1-on-2 Two-Sided to
One-Sided
1-on-4 Two-Sided to
One-Sided
You can divide a single original into several parts

for enlargement and copying on one side of several
copies.
Mode Memory:
M1 through M5
You can store as many as five combinations of any

copying modes. In addition, you may store the
name of each mode key.
REC.:
Most Recent
2nd Most Recent
3rd Most Recent
You can recall a copying mode which has been

stored previously for use; as many as three modes
may be recalled.
User Mode:
Auto Sort
You can opt for automatic switching to sort mode

when an original is placed in the RDF.
(This is effective when the Multi Tray 12 and an
RDF are installed).
Face Down Output
You can opt for reversed delivery of copies so that

the backs of the copies are upward.
Photo mode
You can select the use of photo mode. When ON

is selected, the Photo key will be displayed on the
Copier Basic screen.
Standard Key 1/2 setting
You can select up to two Preference keys from

among the extension mode keys for display on the
Copier Basic screen.
Custom Setting Initialize
You can initialize the copier specifications settings

to factory defaults.
TSM Oc 3121
Technical data
Description
Standard settings:
Store
Init.
You can store/initialize the combination of copying

modes in response to power-on or a press on the
Reset key.
Key
ed.1
01 Technical data 7
3 Features
1 Establishes a new set of standards for high-quality imaging at a resolution of
1200 x 600 dpi (equivalent), which is the worlds first.

In copier mode, the resolution is 600 x 600 dpi when reading and 1200 x 600
dpi when writing.
In fax reception mode, the resolution is 600 x 600 dpi (hyper genesis smoothing).
In printer mode, the resolution is 1200 x 600 dpi (new super smoothing technology).
2 Ease of operation and productivity from an integrated design.
The display is a large LCD touch panel for clear viewing and simple operation. (The display intensity may be varied.)
The on-going fax communication status may be indicated while in copier
mode.
The display indicates the status (reception/transmission) job number, fax
number, party number, and number of processing pages at intervals of 1 sec.
3 Power-saving, space saving, and ozone-less considerations for the office and
the environment.
The on-demand fixing method warms up the machine quickly so that sleep
mode may be made use of without the risk of wasting time.
The wait time is 8 sec or less. (at power-on on the control panel; 8.6 sec or
less if the main switch is used)
The machine is appreciably quieter than the existing models for a better office environment.
With the help of its power-saving design, the power consumption is 4 W or
less* in sleep mode, and 57 W or less** in standby.
The roller charging method has enabled ozone-less operation.
The width is only 58.5 cm.
*Sleep state is when the main power is OFF. Fax reception is possible. (Not 4W
if a fax transmission reservation has been made or the printer function has been
added.)
**Standby state is when the main power is on. In copier/fax mode, 57 W or
less. In copier mode, 50 W or less.
TSM Oc 3121
Technical data
4 Specifications
Type
Item
Specifications
Body
Desktop
Copyboard
Fixed
Light source
Fluorescent lamp
Lens
Lens array
Photosensitive medium
OPC
System
Item
Specifications
Copying
Indirect electrophotographic
Charging
AC roller charging
Exposure
Spot laser
Copy density adjustment
Automatic or manual
Development
Dry, single component toner projection
Pick-up
Automatic 2 cassettes
Manual
Multifeeder (about 5 mm deep)
Transfer
Roller charging
Separation
Static (static eliminator) + curvature
Cleaning
Blade
Fixing
SURF
ed.1
01 Technical data 9
Performance
120V
Types of originals
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum size of original
A3, (11 x 17) max.
Reproduction ratio
Direct
1:10.5%
Reduce I
1:0.250
Reduce II
1:0.500
Reduce III
1:0.647
Reduce IV
1:0.737
Reduce V
1:0.786
Enlarge I
1:1.214
1:1.414
Enlarge II
1:1.294
Enlarge III
1:2.000
Enlarge IV
1:4.000
Enlarge V
1:8.000
Zoom
1: 0.250 to 8.000 (25% to 800%, in 1% increments)
Wait time
8.6 sec or less (20C) from main power-on to

start of copying
7.9 sec or less from control panel power-on
(sleep) to start of copying (fax model)
First copy
GP215: 9.2 sec or less (shortest mode)
Continuous copying
100 copies
Copy size
Cassette
pick-up
A3 (297 x 420 mm; max.) / 11x17

(279x432mm:max) A5 (STMT; min.)
Multifeeder
A3 (297 x 431.8 mm; max.) / 11x17

(279x432mm:max) Postcard (A6 vertical)
Paper source
10
230V
TSM Oc 3121
500 sheets in each cassette, 50 sheets in multifeeder (80 g/m2 paper)
Technical data
120V
Types of
copy paper
Cassette
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper *,

colored paper*, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2),
envelope
*May be used but may not feed as expected
Multifeeder
Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2), tracing paper* ,

transparency*, postcard, label sheet, recycled
paper (64 to 80 g/m2), envelope
*May be used but may not feed as expected
Cassette
230V
Two sided/overlay
copying
Automatic
multifeeder
Claw
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2)

Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2)
(no overlay copying)
Non
Regular/univer- 55 mm (max.) stacking height (about 500 sheets

sal
of 80 g/m2 paper)
Multifeeder tray
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Delivery tray
100 sheets (approx.; 80 g/m2)
Nonimage
width
Leading/trailing edge
2.5 mm in Direct
Left/right
2.5 mm in Direct
Auto clear
Provided
Auto shut-off
Provided (2-min standard, may be varied

between 0 an 9 min in 1-min increments)
Option
ed.1
Feeder
RFG1
Sorter
Multi-Output Tray -C1

Multi-Output Tray -B2
Pedestal
Cassette Feeding Unitl-L1

Cassette Feeding Unitl-M1
01 Technical data 11
Others
Operating envire- Temperature

ment
Humidity
Power consumption
Noise
0.8 to 1.0 atm
Maximum
1.5 kW or less
Standby
0.080 kWh (reference only)
Continuous copying
Quick start mode

(SLEEP 1)
Power saving mode

(SLEEP 2)
Copying
66 dB or less (sound power

level)
Standby
40 dB or less (sound power

level)
0.01 ppm or less (average); 0.02
ppm or less (max.)
Width
585 mm (pedestal, copyboard

cover)
Depth
700 mm (pedestal)
Height
571 mm (pedestal, RDF)
Weight
Consumables
12
TSM Oc 3121
5% to 85%
Atmospheric pressure
Ozone
Dimensions
7.5 to 32.5C
Body only 72.4kg (w/ original

glass cover)
With RDF 84.7kg
Copy paper Toner
Keep copy paper wrapped to

protect against humidity.
Technical data
Copying Speed
Reproduction
ratio
Size
Copy paper
size
Copies/min
Direct
A3 (297 x 420mm)
A3
12
A4 (210 x 297mm)
A4
21
A4R (297 x 210mm)
A4R
16
A5 (148.5 x 210mm)
A5
22
A5R (210 x 148.5mm)
A5R
22
B4 (267 x 364mm)
B4
13
B5 (182 x 257mm)
B5
22
B5R (257 x 182mm)
B5R
18
II
A3 - A5
A5R
20
III
A3 - B5
B5R
18
IV
A3 - A4
A4R
15
B4 - B5
B5R
18
B4 - A4
A4R
16
B5 - A5
A5
22
A3 - B4
B4
13
A5 - B5
B5
22
II
A5 - A3
A3
12
III
A4 - A3
A3
12
B5 - B4
B4
14
A4 - B4
B4
14
A5 - B5
B5
22
B4 - A3
A3
12
B5 - B4
B4
14
Reduce
VI
Enlarge
IV
ed.1
01 Technical data 13
Copying Speed (copier only)
Ratio
Size
Copies/min
DIRECT
LTR
20
11x17
11
LGL
14
LTRR
17
STMT
22
STMT-R
20
LGL - LTRR
17
11x17 - LGL
15
11x17 - LTRR
16
11x17 - STMTR
19
11x15 - LTRR
16
LGL - 11x17
12
LTRR - 11x17
12
STMTR - 11x17
12
REDUCE
ENLARGE
Specifications subject to change for product improvement.
14
TSM Oc 3121
Technical data
Oc
Oc 3121/3122
SDS DESCRIPTION
Contents
SDS Description
1 Outline 1
2 Starting Service Mode 2
Keys 3
Using Adjustment Mode and Settings Mode 4
3 *1* DISPLAY (control display mode) 6
*1* DISPLAY 01 Temperature Indication 6
*1* DISPLAY 02 Jam History 1 7
*1* DISPLAY 03 Error/Alarm Indication 10
ALARM (RDF) 10
Overstacking alarm (Multi Tray-12) 12
Partial fault alarm (Multi Tray -12)) 12
Stapler alarm (Multi Tray-12) 13
*1* DISPLAY 04 Version indication 1 14
14
*1* DISPLAY 05 Version indication 2 15
*1* DISPLAY 06 Key/Editor Indication 15
*1* DISPLAY 07 Copy Paper Size Indication 17
4 *2* I/O DISPLAY (I/O display mode) 20
*2* I/O DISPLAY 01 Inputs/Outputs to and from the Image Processor PCB 20
*2* I/O DISPLAY 02 I/O ports on the DC controller PBA 23
*2* I/O DISPLAY 03 28
*2* I/O DISPLAY 04 Gate Array Input/Output of the DC Controller PCB 29
*2* I/O DISPLAY 05 Input/Output Port 1 of the Feeder 29
*2* I/O DISPLAY 06 Input/Output Port 2 of the Feeder 32
*2* I/O DISPLAY 07 Input/Output Port 1 of the Sorter 33
*2* I/O DISPLAY 08 Input/Output Port 2 of the Sorter 35
5 *3* ADJUST (adjustment mode) 36
*3* ADJUST 01 Fine-Adjusting and Entering the Multifeeder Paper Width Basic
Setting 36
*3* ADJUST 02 Primary Charging Roller/Transfer Charging Roller/Developing
Bias 37
*3* ADJUST 03 Back-Up Data for the Composite Power Supply PCB 38
*3* ADJUST 04 Image registration adjustments 39
*3* ADJUST 05 Scanner-, Cassette-, and Laser-Related Items 40
*3* ADJUST 06 Adjusting the AE/Fixing Assembly Settings 42
*3* ADJUST 07 Shading Back-Up Data 43
*3* ADJUST 08 Adjusting the Transfer Charging Roller Bias 43
6 *4* FUNCTION (function mode) 44
*4* FUNCTION 01 Clearing Errors 44
*4* FUNCTION 02 Stirring the Toner 45
ed.1
SDS Description
10
*4* FUNCTION 03 Shading Auto Correction 46

*4* FUNCTION 04 PD Density Auto Correction 47
*4* FUNCTION 05 200PWM Density Auto Correction 48
*4* FUNCTION 06 600PWM Density Auto Correction 49
*4* FUNCTION 07 Registering the Multifeeder Paper Width 50
*4* FUNCTION 08 Checking the Control Panel Indications 51
*4* FUNCTION 09 Laser 52
*4* FUNCTION 10 Test Print 53
*4* FUNCTION 11 Checking the Image Processor PCB 57
*4* FUNCTION 12 Shading Adjustment (for R&D/factory) 58
*4* FUNCTION 13 Downloading Mode (updating FLASH ROM) 59
*4* FUNCTION 14 Adjusting the Fixing Film 60
*4* FUNCTION 15 Measuring the Drum Resistance 61
*4* FUNCTION 16 Resetting the Jam History 61
*4* FUNCTION 17 Initializing the Memory (RAM) 62
*4* FUNCTION 18 Printing the Parameters 62
*5* OPTION (settings mode) 63
*5* OPTION 01 Setting the Copy Count and Shut-Off Slant Mode 63
*5* OPTION 02 Switching the Baud Rate, Drum Resistance Measurements, and
Thick Paper Mode 64
*5* OPTION 03 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U1 Cassette (universal 1
cassette) 66
*5* OPTION 04 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U2 through U8 Cassettes
(universal cassettes 2 through 8) 67
*5* OPTION 05 Setting the Mode of Notation for the LTR/LTRR Cassette 68
*6* COUNTER (counter mode) 69
*6* COUNTER 01 69
*6* COUNTER 02 70
*6* COUNTER 03 70
*6* COUNTER 04 71
*7* ACC (accessory mode) 72
*7* ACC 01 Adjusting the Original Stop Position for the RDF 72
Making Adjustments 73
Adjusting the RDF Sensor/Cleaning the Belt 74
* 8 * FAX 75
*8* #1 SSSW Service Soft Switch 75
* 8 * 2 MENU Menu Switch Settings 76
* 8 * 3 NUMERIC Parameter 77
* 8 * 4 NCU 77
* 8 * 5 TYPE 78
* 8 * 6 GENESIS 78
* 8 * 7 PRINTER 79
Service soft switch settings 79
7 NUMERIC Parameter settings 82
* 8 * 8 CLEAR 84
TSM Oc 3121
Contents
* 8 * 9 ROM Info display 84

* 8 * 10 Test mode 85
* 8 * 10 TEST , 1 DRAM test
To execute a write or read check of data for all area of the D-RAM (D-RAM A
(Q6, Q18), D-RAM B (Q8, Q20). A check will be made on the expansion memory (option), if any. 86
* 8 * 10 TEST , 2 PRINT test 88
* 8 * 10 TEST , 3 VIDEO test 89
* 8 * 10 TEST , 4 MODEM NCU test 89
* 8 * 10 TEST , 5 PRINT Function test (Faculty) 92
(1) LINE DETECT 1 94
(4) VOICE Tx 96
ed.1
SDSDescription
SDS Description
1 Outline
The machines service mode is grouped into the following:

Item
Description
*1* DISPLAY
Display Mode
Indicates the values controlled by the CPU, nature
of control, and version number of the ROM.
*2* I/O DISPLAY
I/O Display Mode

Indicates the elements controlled by the CPU or the
input/output signals to and from options.
*3* ADJUST
Adjustment Mode
Indicates items adjusted in service mode and allows
changes to settings.
*4* FUNCTION
*5* OPTION
Function Mode
Executes machine operations. Indicates items that
may be automatically adjusted through execution
from the screen.
Settings Mode
Indicates items that may be changed for machine
maintenance or items that may be changed to suit
the needs of the user.
*6* COUNTER
*7* ACC
Counter Mode
Indicates the numbers of machine operations.
Options Mode
Indicates items for options, allowing changes to the
settings.
*8* FAX
ed.1
Fax Service Mode

Indicates items to be set/changed or operated for fax
functions from the screen.
SDS Description 1
2 Starting Service Mode

1 Open the front door, and insert the handle of the static eliminator cleaning
brush into the fixing assembly releasing assembly.
cleaning brush
2 Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly.
(If you want to execute a specific mode such as I/O display while making
copies, see the appropriate copying modes).
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
3 Press the service switch with a hex key.
$ will appear in the upper left corner of the LCD, indicating that the machine has started service mode.
4 Press the * key twice.
The LCD changes to the Service Mode Menu screen (initial screen).
5 Press the appropriate item to highlight.

6 Press the OK key to bring up the first screen of the selected screen.
Keys
You will be using the following keys:

:Page Forward key; press it to bring up the next page.
:Page Back key; press it to bring up the previous screen.
:OK key; press it to accept a setting or execute an item.
:Cancel key; press it to bring up the high-order menu screen.
:+ key; press it to move down the levels.
: key; press it to move up the levels.
ed.1
SDS Description 3
Using Adjustment Mode and Settings Mode
In adjustment mode (*3*; ADJUST) and in settings mode (*5*; OPTION), the
settings changed/selected on the control panel are stored in RAM on the image
processor PCB and operation/control is executed according to the settings.
(These settings will be stored permanently when the main power switch is
turned off and on after execution.
The factory default settings of adjustment mode (*3*; ADJUST) are recorded
in the service-label. Be sure to record any new settings if you made changes in
the field. Further, you must enter the settings recorded on the label whenever
you have cleared the RAM.
If you replaced the image processor PCB or the composite power supply PCB,
be sure to enter the settings recorded on the respective label. (You need not do
so when you have replaced only the ROM.)
MF-A6R
DVLP DC OFST
FILM LANK
MF-A4R
H-ADJ
ABC_TBL
MF-A4
V-ADJ
STRD_ADJ
PRI DC (IMG)
REGIST
PPR
PRI DC(on IMG)
RSIDE-SENSHP
W-PLT
DVLP DC (IMG)
PVE-OFST
TRNS_1
DVLP DC (on
IMG)
IC-DENS
TRNS_2TS
TRNS (IMG)
CST-LOOP
TRNS_2OL
TRNS(on IMG)
MF-LOOP
PRI AC (IMG)
DENS-ADJ
PRI AC(no IMG)
ADJ-S
AGS GAIN
LASER OFF
AGS OFST
PWN 600 MIN
PRI DC OFST
PWN 600 MAX
PRI AC OFST1
PWN 200 MIN
PRI AC OFST2
PWN 200 MAX
TRNS OFST
AE-SLOP
FL OFST
FIXER_RESIST
Service Label; attached behind the front door
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
P6L
P6H
P2L
P2H
Service Label; attached to the image processor PBA
APVC GAIN
APVC OFST
PDC OFST
PAC OFST1
PAC OFST2
ATVC OFST
FL OFST
DDC OFST
Service Label; attached to the composite power supply PBA
ed.1
SDS Description 5
3 *1* DISPLAY (control display mode)

Use this mode to display the settings controlled by the CPU or the nature of
control. You cannot change the displayed values or settings.
*1* DISPLAY 01 Temperature Indication
Item
Description
Remarks
DRAM_TH
Indicates the temperature around the photosensitive drum.
Unit: C
MAIN_TH
Indicates the temperature at the middle of the fixing assembly. (output of thermistor TH1)
Unit: C
SUB_TH
Indicates the temperature at the end of the fixing

assembly. (output of thermistor TH2)
Unit: C
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*1* DISPLAY 02 Jam History 1
Use this mode to display a history of jams (jam data) covering the most recent 40 jams in reversed order of occurrence.
Press the
or
key to scan through the levels (screen Nos. 11
through 20, 21 through 30, and 31 through 40).
Item
Description
AA
No. 1 through 40 (the higher, the older
BBBB
Date of occurrence: Example 0801 for August 1
CCCC
Time of occurrence
DDDD
Time of recovery
Location:
0: copier
1: feeder
2: sorter
FFFF
Jam code:
high-order 2 digits: jam type
low-order 2 digits: sensor detecting the jam*
Pick-up position**
HHHHHH
Pick-up counter
IIII
Paper size
ed.1
Example 1012 for 10:12.

DDDD: indicates the time
that the machine entered
stand-by state after jam
removal.
SDS Description 7
Sample Display
01 0821 1430 1435 0
0101
06543 000A4
A4 paper jam
soft counter reading
of the source of paper
1st cassette
jam code (pre-registration delay
jam)
location
time of recovery (14:35)
time of occurrence (14:30)
date of occurrence (August 21)
No.
* A jam code is a 4-digit code, the high-order 2 digits indicating the type of
jam and the low-order 2 digits, the sensor which detected the jam. Set the table below for level 1 classification of the jam codes.
Jam code
FF
High-order 2 digits
Low-order 2 digits
01:delay
01:pre-registration sensor (PS5)
02:stationary
02:vertical path sensor (PS8)
10:residual (at power-on) 03:vertical path sensor (pedestal; Q1603)
32:fixing delivery sensor (PS7)
33:delivery sensor (PS13)
34:delivery tray 2 paper sensor (multi tray 3; PS17)
35:delivery tray 3 paper sensor (multi tray 3; PS 18)
61:Multi tray 3 inlet sensor (PS19)
62:Duplexing unit inlet sensor (PS12)
63:re-pick up paper sensor (PS11)
11:door open
01:front door
02:right door
03:pedestal right door
00:multi tray 12/feeder
See p. 7-51.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
** Pick-Up Location Codes

Code
Pick-up location
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Cassette 5
Cassette 6
Multifeeder
Two-sided/overlay
re-pick up
Multi tray 12-/Feeder-Related Jam Codes

Unit
Jam code
Description
Multi Tray-12
0003
0004
0006
0007
0008
0009
Sorter feeding delay jam

Sorter feeding stationary jam
Sorter staple jam
Sorter power-on jam
Sorter door open jam (paper present)
Sorter door open (paper absent)
RDF
0001
0002
0003
0005
0011
0012
0013
0020
0021
0023
0041
0042
0081
0082
0083
0084
0088
0089
Original pulled out

Registration delay jam
Pick-up delay
Registration delay
Reversal delay 1
Reversal stationary
Reversal delay 2
Reversal paper present
Reversal pick-up delay
Reversal pick-up stationary
Delivery delay
Delivery stationary
Opened with RDF in operation
Upper cover opened during operation
Original circulation fault
Original left behind
Original left behind on the original glass
Re-circulating lever fault
ed.1
SDS Description 9
*1* DISPLAY 03 Error/Alarm Indication
Item
Description
ERR
See the descriptions (Trouble shooting) for self diagnosis.
ALRM
See the table below for the nature of alarm.
BODY
Refers to the copier.
DF
Refers to the feeder (ADF/RDF).
ST
Refers to the sorter.
Copier-Related Alarm
Code
Description
001
Replace the drum unit.
ALARM (RDF)
S1 Original tray paper sensor

S3 Registration paper sensor
10
TSM Oc 3121
S7 Pick-up sensor
S13 Re-circulation sensor
SDS Description
Type
Sensor
Conditions
RF operation
Code
Re-circulating S13
lever idle swing
The re-circulating lever swung

idly without coming into contact with an original immediately after the re-circulating
motor (M4) has started to operate.
Stops immediately
upon detection.
01H
Pick-up fault
S7
The sensor (S7) does not detect

the leading edge of an original
1500 ms after pick-up.
The separation belt,

03H
feeding roller, and
pick-up roller stop
immediately. The RDF
stops after delivering
the copy of the
advance original.
Paper stopper
plate override
S7
The original has ridden over the Stops immediately

paper stopper plate when the
upon detection
original was set.
05H
Different
S3
number of originals after jam
removal
The number of originals set on

the tray is less than the number
of originals copied.
See Supplement.
11H
Wrong number
of originals
The last original cannot be

Stops after counting
detected because the re-circulat- the 100th original
ing lever does not fall through
the original tray.
Reference:
Normally, the original tray
holds 50 sheets of A5, STMT,
A4, B5, or LTR, or 25 sheets of
A3, B4, 11x17, or LGL.
12H
Original forced S13

off
The re-circulating lever dropped Stops immediately

through the original tray while upon detection
an original was being processed.
13H
Wrong original S3
size
The original that has been

picked up is of a non-default
size.
Stops immediately
upon detection
14H
Wrong original S3
size or mixed
sizes in image
composition
mode (see note)
1) The original is of a size that

image composition mode does
not accommodate.
2) The original is of a size different from the first original.
Stops immediately
upon detection. See
supplement.
15H
Not reset when

mode is
changed
1) When executing fax mode

Stops operation imme- 21H
without resetting after copying diately upon detection
mode.
2) When making a copy in the
middle of fax operation or when
making a copy without resetting
after fax mode.
ed.1
S3
Stops immediately
upon detection
SDS Description 11
Note: To reset, remove the originals from the original tray and then open the
RDF.
Overstacking alarm (Multi Tray-12)
Code Nature
Cause
02H
The paper being

Stops upon
stacked during multi detection
tray operation has
overstacking
exceeded the capacity
of a single bin.
Overstacking
of paper
Operation
Display
Resetting
Indicates a
message on
the copiers
control panel
Remove all
paper from the
bin
Partial fault alarm (Multi Tray -12))

Code Nature
Cause
Operation
10H
An error occurred in
the bin unit feeding
motor M2, bin shift
motor M1, guide bar
swing motor M4 or
stapler swing motor
M5; the same type of
error has occurred
after turning off and
on the power
Prohibits
No indication
delivery to the
sorter; however, permits
delivery to the
tray.
12
Partial fault
TSM Oc 3121
Display
Resetting
Remove all
the cause of
the error, turn
off and then
on the power.
SDS Description
Stapler alarm (Multi Tray-12)
Code Nature
Cause
Operation
Display
Resetting
02H
Staple jam The stapler safety sen- Stops stapling Flashes the Wait until the
sor MS6 has turned on
Manual Sta- machine automatifor some reason.
ple key.
cally recovers
Indicates a (about 1 sec after the
The stapler is not
message on stapler safety sensor
securely installed.
the copiers turns off).
control
Open and then close
Normal stapling operpanel.
the stapler cover.
ation is not possible.
03H
Stapling
safety protection
mechanism activation
The stapler safety sen- Stops stasor MS6 has turned on pling.
during stapling operation.
No indication
05H
Over stapling
capacity
The volume of paper

in a single bin has
exceeded the maximum value (20 sheets)
in stapler sorter mode.
Indicates a Remove all paper

message on (stack).
the copiers
control
panel.
06H
Full stapling
capacity.
The volume of paper Operates nor- No indicain a single bin has

mally.
tion
reached the maximum value (20 sheets)
in stapler sorter mode.
Remove all paper

(stack).
07H
Mixed
paper
sizes
Sheets of different
widths have been
placed in the bin.
Finishes sort- No indicaing but stops tion.

without stapling.
Remove all paper

(stack).
09H
Paper in
bin.
Paper is remaining
inside the bin
Indicates a
message if the
stapler sorter
mode is
selected.
Turns on the Remove all paper

Manual Sta- (stack).
ple key.
Indicates a
message on
the copiers
control
panel if the
stapler sorter
mode is
selected in
this condition.
The stapler has run

out of staples.
Prohibits stapling.
Indicates the Replace the staple

Add Staple cartridge.
message.
0AH Staple
absent.
ed.1
Finishes sorting but stops

without stapling.
Remove the cause

that turned on the
stapler safety sensor
MS6; wait until the
machine recovers
automatically in
about 1 sec after the
stapler safety sensor
turns off.
SDS Description 13
*1* DISPLAY 04 Version indication 1
Guide to Version Numbers

xxxx:
yy:
zz:
type of software
version number
R&D control number
Item
Description
IP
Indicates the version number of the ROM DIMM on the image

processor PCB.
DCON
Indicates the version number of the EPROM (IC103, IC104) on

the DC controller PCB.
DF
Indicates the version number of the ROM on the feeder (ADF,

RDF) controller.
SORT
Indicates the version number of the ROM on the sorter controller PCB.
PANEL
Indicates the version number of the ROM on the CPU PCB of

the control panel.
LANG
Indicates a specific language:

COMMON, JAPANESE, ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
DANISH, DUTCH, FINNISH, ITALIAN, NORWEGIAN,
PORTUGESE, SPANISH, SWEDISH
POWER_CPU Indicates the version number of the CPU on the composite

power supply PBA.
14
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*1* DISPLAY 05 Version indication 2
The indication is given when an expansion board is installed and, therefore, no

indication appears in the absence of such a board.
Item
Description
PRCNT
Indicates the version number of the Protocol Control PCB.
NIB
Indicates the version number of the Network Interface Board

(NIB).
PS/PCL
Indicates the version number of the Printer Board (PS/PCL).
SCSI
Indicates the version number of the SCSI Board.
*1* DISPLAY 06 Key/Editor Indication
ed.1
SDS Description 15
Item
Description
KY-CHK
Indicates the code of a specific key that is being pressed (except

the Reset key). (See the next page.)
DF-SIZE
Indicates the size of the original detected by the ADF or the RDF.
EDIT-X
EDIT-Y
Indicates the editor input coordinates.

EDIT-X:X direction
EDIT-Y:Y direction
DOC-SIZE
Indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor.
TKEY
Touch Panel
Press TKEY to highlight; then, press the OK key (All messages
turn off). Then, when the touch panel is pressed the area will become highlighted (reverse video). After the check, press the Reset key to end service mode
KEY-CHK code
Key
Code One-Touch
key
Code One-Touch
key
Code One-Touch
key
Code
Keypad 0
Keypad 1
Keypad 2
Keypad 3
Keypad 4
Keypad 5
Keypad 6
Keypad 7
Keypad 8
Keypad 9
Start
Stop
*
#
Clear
Interrupt
Guide
User Mode
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
50
51
2A
23
3A
53
54
03
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TSM Oc 3121
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
SDS Description
*1* DISPLAY 07 Copy Paper Size Indication
Use this mode to indicate the size of copy paper set in the multifeeder or in the
cassettes and the output readings of the paper size sensors.
Item
Descriptions
MULTI
Refers to the multifeeder.
A/D
Indicates the output (analog) of the multifeeder width sensor.
P-SENS
Indicates the presence/absence of paper.

0:paper absent.
1:paper present.
SIZE
Indicates the A/D input value of the multifeeder in mm.
SW
Refers to a specific cassette (cassette size sensor output; rear to

Table 0-00).
DET
Indicates the paper size.
REMAIN Indicates the volume of paper inside the cassette:

00:full (500 sheets)
10:much
11:little (about 10 mm high)
01:little/absent
CST-1
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Cassette 5
Cassette 6
CST-2
Descriptions
CST-3
Refers to the multifeeder.
CST-4
Indicates the output (analog) of the multifeeder width sensor.
CST-5
Indicates the presence/absence of paper.

0:paper absent.
1:paper present.
CST-6
Indicates the A/D input value of the multifeeder in mm.
ed.1
SDS Description 17
List of Cassette Sizes
18
Configuration
Cassette
Cassette code
AB
Cassette absent
11111
A5
10010
A5R
10000
A4
10001
A4R
10101
A3
10100
B5
10110
B5R
10111
B4
10011
U1:FLSC
OFICIO
A-OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LGL
11011
U2FOLIO
11010
U3A-FLS
11000
SPECAL1
11101
SPECAL2
11100
Envelope 1
11110
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Configuration
Cassette
Cassette code
Inch
Cassette absent
11111
STMT
00010
STMTR
00000
LTR
00001
A-LTR
LTRR
00101
A-LTRR
ed.1
LGL
00100
11*17
00110
U4G-LTR
00111
U5G-LTRR
00011
U6G-LGL
01011
U7K-LGL
01010
U8K-LGLR
01000
SPECAL1
01101
SPECAL2
01100
Envelope 2
01110
SDS Description 19
4 *2* I/O DISPLAY (I/O display mode)

Use this mode to indicate the states of the input/output ports of the image processor PBA and (DC) control PBAs. You cannot change the indicated values/settings.
*2* I/O DISPLAY 01 Inputs/Outputs to and from the Image Processor PCB
Guide to the Screen: IP PA0:XXXXXXX bit 7..... bit 0
20
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Address
bit
Indication
PA0
(input)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
Not used
Not used
PB0
(input)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CORE/IP connect 1
CORE/IP connect 2
editor board connect
CCF connect
PBA internal signal
power saving mode switch
Not used
main power switch
PC0
(input)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIP SW
DIP SW
DIP SW
DIP SW
DIP SW
DIP SW
Not used
Not used
PA1 (output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LCD back light

CCV count
sleep mode switch
PBA internal signal
DIP SW
DIP SW
DIP SW
Interrupt
1: ON
1: count
0: saving mode
0: connect
scanner start
registration roller ON
1: ON (DC controller communication)

2
3
4
5
6
7
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PB1 (output)
ed.1
Logic
0: not connected
1: not connected
0: connected
0: connected
0:ON
0: ON
0: ON
SDS Description 21
22
Address
bit
PC1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PA2 (output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PB2 (output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STOP
B/H
ABC OFF
CS
LD/RS
CLK
SIN/UD
PRESCAN
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
CCD control
PC2 (output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
bias ON
power SW 0
marker ON
PAD OFF
power SW1
area signal switching
laser control
laser control
for editing board
for editing board
laser control
1: w/editing board installed
6
7
Not used
Post ratio change reversal
switching
TSM Oc 3121
Indication
Logic
1: ON
1: ON
SDS Description
*2* I/O DISPLAY 02 I/O ports on the DC controller PBA
Guide to the screen: DC PA0: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX = bit 15 ~ bit 0
Addre
ss
bit
Indication
Signal
Jack
Logic
PA0
(input)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fixing film detect PS2

Copyboard cover PS3
Multifeed paper detect PS4
Pre registration sensor PS5
FFD
CBCC
MFPD
PDP1
PDP3
UCSPD
LCSPD
VPPD
PDP4
RDOP
WTDT
TEP
MLCK
LOCK
-
J109-3
J113-B9
J113-A11
J113-A5
J109-6
J114-10
J114-A11
J114-A12
J113-A2
J113-A8
J113-B6
J117-7
J114-B7
J112-6
-
1: film detected
1: closed
0: paper present
1: paper present
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Upper cassette size detection

Lower cassette size detection
CSZ10
CSZ11
CSZ12
CSZ13
CSZ14
CSZ20
CSZ21
CSZ22
CSZ23
CSZ24
J110-2
J110-3
J110-4
J110-5
J110-6
J110-8
J110-9
J110-10
J110-11
J110-12
PB0
(input)
Fixing unit delivery sensor PS7

Cassette pick-up PBA
Vertical path paper sensor PS8
Right door open/close PS9
Waste toner sensor PS10
Toner sensor TS1
Multifeed pick-up clutch M1
Laser scanner motor M3 PBA
ed.1
1: paper present
1: paper not present
1: paper not present
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: right door close
0: waste toner full
1: toner present
1: locked
1: locked
-
SDS Description 23
Addre
ss
bit
Indication
PC0
(input)
Jack
Logic
re-pick up unit front paper

PDP5
detection PS11
duplexing unit inlet paper detec- PDP6
tion PS12
delivery paper detection PS 13 PDP7
J103-2
0: paper present
J105-B2
0: paper present
J105-A2
0: paper present
J104-4
J104-5
J104-6
J114-B2
bin 2 paper detection *

bin 3 paper detection *
bin 3 inlet paper detection *
horizontal registration paper
detection PS14
bin 3 tray position detection *
lower feeding assembly ID *
lower feeding assembly inlet

unit ID *
multi tray 3 ID *
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
(*: 3-bin delivery unit)
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
PA1
(output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
24
main motor drive M1

laser scanner motor drive M3
registration clutch drive CL1
multifeeder pick-up clutch CL2
vertical path roller clutch CL3
developing clutch CL4
pick-up roller DOWN sol. SL2
multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid SL3
counter 1 drive CNT1
counter 2 drive CNT2
cassette pedestal communication signal
bin 3 shift tray drive
re-pick up paper deflecting plate
solenoid SL4
paper deflecting plate 2 solenoid
delivery assembly paper deflecting plate solenoid
bin 3 flapper solenoid *
(*: 3-bin delivery unit)
TSM Oc 3121
Signal
CRGPD
MMD
RSMD
RGCD
MFCD
CL3D
DVCD
SL2D
PRDSD
J104-7
1: lower feeding
assembly present
1: lower feeding
assembly inlet
present
1: multi tray 3 connected
J114-B6
J112-7
J114-B11
J114-B9
J114-A4
J113-B14
J114-A5
0: rotates
1: rotates
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
J14-B13
CNT1D J107-B4
CNT2D J107-B6
CHOEN
J106-11
J104-8
PFLD
J103-5
1: count
1: count
0: ON
0: ON
3SL2D
DFLD
J104-9
0: ON
J105-A5
J104-10
SDS Description
Addre
ss
bit
Indication
Signal
Jack
PB1
(output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
pick-up motor drive M4

fixing film drive M5
horizontal registration drive M9
feeding fan drive FM1
exhaust fan 1 drive FM2
laser cooling fan drive FM4
PBA internal signal
A
B
M0
M1
A
A*
B
B*
A
A*
B
B*
FMD1
FMD2
FMD4
J114-A6
J114-A7
J114-A8
J114-A9
J109-10
J109-11
J109-12
J109-13
J115-3
J115-4
J115-5
J115-6
J107-A8
J107-A9
J113-B3
PC1
(output)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
set back motor drive M6

duplex unit inlet mot. drive M9
delivery reverse motor drive M8
bin 3 drive motor (3-bin deliv.)
A
A*
B
B*
A
A*
B
B*
A
A*
B
B*
A
A*
B
B*
J103-6
J103-7
J103-10
J103-11
J105-B4
J105-B5
J105-B8
J105-B9
J105-A6
J105-A7
J105-A10
J105-A11
J104-11
J104-12
J104-13
J104-14
ed.1
Logic
SDS Description 25
Addre
ss
bit
Indication
PA2
scanner motor drive (PBA internal signal) M2

scanning reference signal (PBA
internal signal)
internal signal)
internal signal)
internal signal)
not used
re-pick up clutch drive CL5
CLSD
pre-exposure lamp drive LAMP PEXP
not used
fixing heater relay drive
HRRD
image processor communication
signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PB2
(input)
26
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal
Jack
Logic
J122-6
J107-A12
J107-B9
J111-35
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Addre
ss
bit
Indication
PC2
(output)
0
1
2
3
PBA internal signal

PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
primary charging roller cleaning PCLSD
solenoid SL1
counter 3 drive (115V/230V
CNT3D
model) CNT3
electric. unit fan drive (opt.)
FM5
exhaust fan 1 half-speed (PBA
internal signal)
laser fan half-speed (PBA internal signal)
electrical unit fan half-speed
(PBA internal signal)
exhaust fan 2 drive FM3
exhaust fan 2 half-speed (PBA
internal signal)
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ed.1
Signal
Jack
Logic
J113-B2
0: ON
J107-B8
1: ON
J112-9
J107-B1
SDS Description 27
*2* I/O DISPLAY 03
Address
bit
Indication
Signal
Jack
PA0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
primary charging DC bias switching

developing bias DC application mode
transfer output mode 0
transfer output mode 1
primary charging roller ON/OFF
static eliminator ON/OFF
laser scanner motor reference clock M3
developing AC drive
HVPH
HADCH
HVTM0
HVTM1
HVPDC
HVD1
FS
ACON
J102-B9
J102-B8
J102-B7
J102-B6
J102-B5
J102-B4
J112-8
J102-B3
PB0
scanner motor reference clock (PCB internal signal) M2

scanner motor CW/CCW rotation (PCB internal
signal) M2
composite power supply PCB communication signal
zero cross
developing DC drive
Not used.
Not used.
ACK
J102-A6
ZC
J102-A8
CDON
J102-B2
REQ
J102-A7
UCRMN
UCRMN
LCRMN
LCRMN
J122-1
J122-2
J122-3
J122-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
28
composite power supply PCB communication signal

Not used.
upper cassette paper detection 0
upper cassette paper detection 1
lower cassette paper detection 0
lower cassette paper detection 1
Not used.
Not used.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*2* I/O DISPLAY 04 Gate Array Input/Output of the DC Controller PCB
*2* I/O DISPLAY 05 Input/Output Port 1 of the Feeder
Guide to the Screen
ed.1
SDS Description 29
Addr
ess
bit
Indication
Signal
Jack
Logic
DFP4 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
stopper plate solenoid (SL1)

STPSL
paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL3) DFSLD
stamping solenoid (SL4)
STSLD
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
J5-10
J4-2
J14-5
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
DFP6 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
pick-up roller sensor (S5)

delivery sensor 1 (S6)
pick-up sensor (S7)
Not used.
PCB internal signal
PCB internal signal
Not used.
Not used.
PUSP
PSP3
PDP1
J5-2
J9-6
J9-9
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper present
DFP7 0
1
2
original sensor (S1)

registration sensor (S3)
original width detecting VR1
DEP1
PDP2
DMPW
J5-1
J9-20
J8-8
Not used.
reversal sensor (S8)
delivery sensor 2 (S12)
original tray paper sensor (LED1)
registration sensor (LED2)
RVPD
PDP4
J9-12
J8-2
1: paper present
1: paper present
A/D value
stored in adjustment mode
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: light ON
1: light ON
belt motor clock sensor (S10)
BMCLK
J9-18
feeding motor clock sensor (S9)
FMCLK
J9-15
registration roller clock sensor (S11)
RRCLK
J5-5
3
4
5
6
7
PCB internal signal

PCB internal signal
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
3
4
5
6
7
DFP8 0
DFP9 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
30
alternates 1 and
0 during rotation
alternates 1 and
0 during rotation
alternates 1 and
0 during rotation
copier communication signal

Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
a: Input/Output Port of the RDF (2/2)

Addr
ess
bit
DFPA 0
1
2
3
Indication
Signal
Jack
Logic
PBA internal signal

not used
PBA internal signal
belt motor drive signal M3
4
5
PBA internal signal

feeding motor drive signal M2
6
7
PBA internal signal

pick-up motor M1
DFPB 0
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
2
3
4
5
6
7
PBA internal signal

original detection LED S1
PBA internal signal
brake BK1
clutch CL1
paper retaining solenoid SL2
DF
0
ExPA 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
push switch SW1

push switch SW2
push switch SW3
re-circulation sensor S13
upper cover switch MS2
RDF switch MS1
PBA internal signal
DF
0
ExPB 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LED (PBA internal signal)

LED (PBA internal signal)
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
DF
0
ExPO 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIP SW1
DIP SW2
DIP SW3
DIP SW4
DIP SW5
DIP SW6
DIP SW7
DIP SW8
ed.1
1: ON (PBA
internal signal)
1: ON (PBA
internal signal)
1: ON (PBA
internal signal)
1: belt motor
CW rotation
1: pick-up motor
CW rotation
DSD
J8-4
1: ON
BKD
CLD
WSLD
J6-2
J13-2
J5-12
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
J14-1
J3-2
J2-6
1: pressed
1: pressed
1: pressed
1: paper present
1: closed
1: closed
SW1
SW2
SW3
LDD
UPCC1
RFC
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
SDS Description 31
*2* I/O DISPLAY 06 Input/Output Port 2 of the Feeder
Address
Indication
DF-AD0
DF-AD1
DF-AD2
DF-AD3
DF-AD4
DF-AD5
DF-DA0
DF-DA1
original sensor S1
DEP1 J5-7 In hexadecimal notation
registration sensor S3
PDP2 J9-20 In hexadecimal notation
original width volume VR1
DMPS J8-8 In hexadecimal notation
not used
not used
not used
original tray sensor LED1 ON signal
registration sensor LED3 ON signal
32
TSM Oc 3121
Signal Jack
Logic
SDS Description
*2* I/O DISPLAY 07 Input/Output Port 1 of the Sorter
Address Bit Indication
ST-A
ST-B
ST-C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Guide bar motor drive signal 1 M4

Guide bar motor drive signal ON signal
Stapler motor drive signal 1 M5
Stapler motor drive signal 2 M5
Stapler swing motor drive signal M3
Sorter feeding motor drive signal M7
Tray feeding motor drive signal M6
Not used
Add Staple LED ON/OFF
Stapler LED ON/OFF
Not used
Paper on tray indicator
PCB internal signal
Not used
PCB internal signal
Bin feeding motor clock (PI2)
Not used
Tray feeding motor clock (PI6)
Lead cam HP sensor (PI1)
6
7
PCB internal signal

Bin unit delivery sensor (P3)
ed.1
Signal
Jack
Logic
Pulse signal
Pulse signal
Pulse signal
Pulse signal
1: motor ON
1: motor CW
1: motor CCW
1: motor ON
pulse signal
pulse signal
STEMP
SPLOK
J9-5
J9-4
0: ON
0: ON
TRIND
J15-1
1: ON
BFMC
J8-2
pulse input
TFMC
LCHP
J11-11 pulse input

J8-4
1: lead cam horizontal
BPDY
J9-1
0: paper detect.
SDS Description 33
Address Bit Indication
Signal
Jack
Logic
ST-EX-A 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ST-EX-B 0
SPLON
J17-2
1: open
TOP
SPLSFT
SPLPD
TRP
GBHP
SPUHP
SPLHP
J3-3
J17-4
J17-3
J12-7
J4-6
J17-3
J7-8
1: released
1: safety
TBPD
TAPD
TBP
TAP
TFPD
J12-4
J12-1
J12-14
J11-8
J11-5
1: paper present
1: paper present
1: paper detect.
1: paper detect.
1: paper detect.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ST-EX-C 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
34
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Stapler cover open/closed detection
(MS5)
Joint sensor (MS3)
Tray position detection (PI12)
Guide bar HP sensor (PI5)
Stapler HP sensor (MS4)
Stapling HP sensor (MS7)
not used
PBA internal signal
PBA internal signal
tray B paper detection PI11
tray A paper detection PI10
tray B discharge paper detection PI9
tray A delivery detection PI8
tray feeding assembly inlet slot sensor
PI 7
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*2* I/O DISPLAY 08 Input/Output Port 2 of the Sorter
Address
Indication
ST-AD0
ST-AD1
ST-AD2
ST-AD3
ST-AD4
ST-AD5
ST-AD6
ST-AD7
24V motor
Bin paper sensor PT1
not used
for factory/R&D
staple key
push switch SW2
push switch SW1
staple absent
ed.1
Signal
Jack
Logic
BPDN
J4-4
Analog input
MNSPT
J9-6
0: key ON
0: SW2 pressed
0: SW1 pressed
1: staple present
SDS Description 35
5 *3* ADJUST (adjustment mode)

Use this mode to fine-adjust or set back-up data needed for copying operations.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.

Press the
key to accept the selected setting.
Record all new settings on the service label.
When done, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*3* ADJUST 01 Fine-Adjusting and Entering the Multifeeder Paper Width

Basic Setting
Item
MF-A6R
MF-A4R
MF-A4
36
Description
Remarks
Settings
Use it to fine-adjust or enter the mul- If you have replaced the image 0~65535
tifeeder paper width basic setting.
processor PCB, be sure to
enter the value recorded on the
MF-A6R:Indicates the stored A6R
service label.
(105mm) value of the multifeeder
For how to enter a new value
paper width sensor.
after replacement of the
paper width sensor, see servMF-A4R:Indicates the stored A4R
ice handbook p. 2-15.
paper width sensor.
MF-A4:Indicates the stored A4
paper width sensor.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*3* ADJUST 02 Primary Charging Roller/Transfer Charging Roller/Developing Bias
---
Item
Description
PRI DC
(IMG)
Indicates the primary charging DC If you have replaced the image 0~65536
output effective when an image is processor PCB, be sure to enter
exposed.
the value recorded on the service label.
Remarks
Settings
PRI DC (no Indicates the primary charging DC

IMG)
output between sheets.
DVLP DC
(IMG)
Indicates the developing DC output while an image is exposed.
DVLP DC
(no IMG)
Indicates the developing DC output between sheets.
TRNS
(IMG)
Indicates the transfer charging DC

output while an image is exposed.
TRNS (no
IMG)
Indicates the transfer charging DC

PRI AC
(IMG)
Indicates the primary charging AC

output while an image is exposed.
PRI AC (no Indicates the primary charging AC

IMG)
ed.1
SDS Description 37
*3* ADJUST 03 Back-Up Data for the Composite Power Supply PCB
---
Item
Description
Label*
Remarks
Settings
AGS GAIN Indicate APVC gain.
PRI AC
OFST2
PVC GAIN If you have replaced the 0~255

APVC OFST composite power supply PCB, be sure to
Indicates primary charg- PDC OFST enter the value recorded
ing DC offset.
on the label attached to
Indicate primary charg- PAC OFST1 the composite power
supply PCB. (see
ing AC offset 1.
P3-160)
Indicates primary charg- PAC OFST2
ing AC offset 2.
TRSN
OFST
Indicates transfer charg- ATVC OFST

ing offset.
FL OFST
Indicates scanning lamp

offset.
FL OFST
DEV DC
OFST
Indicates developing
bias DC component offset.
DDC OFST
AFS OFST Indicates APVC offset.

PRI DC
OFST
PRI AC
OFST1
* Service label; attached to the composite power supply
38
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*3* ADJUST 04 Image registration adjustments
Item
Description
Settings Remarks
H-ADJ
To fine adjust the CCD reading start position (main scanning direction; book mode)
0~500
unit: 1 mm.
(approx. at
23 mm.)
0~1000
unit: 1 mm.
(approx. at
23 mm.)
An increment shifts the read start position to the right.

V-ADJ
To adjust the image reading start position (sub scanning

direction)
A higher setting delays the registration ON timing.

RESIST Use it to adjust the registration clutch ON timing (leading 0~1000
edge margin).
RSIDESENSHP
Use it to make adjustments if images on paper picked up

from the lower feeding assembly (2nd side of overlay/two-sided copies) are often displaced to the rear or
front.
If the displacement is to the rear, decrease the value (in
units of 23, a single unit being equivalent to 1 mm.)
If the displacement is to the front, increase the value (in
units of 23, a single unit being equivalent to 1 mm.)
PVE-OF Use it to correct offset from the laser centre.

If you have initialized the RAM or replaced the image
ST
processor PBA, enter the value recorded on the service
label.
ed.1
Standard:
2.5 1.0
mm.
0~65535
Within
46
(32x2) of
the factory
adjustment
value.
-200~
+200
SDS Description 39
*3* ADJUST 05 Scanner-, Cassette-, and Laser-Related Items
---
Item
Description
Settings
IC-DENS
Use it to adjust the original slice level

in image create mode (with the image
editing board installed).
50~200
CST-LOOP
Use it to adjust arching (cassette

pick-up; for factory use)
0~65535
MF-LOOP
Use it to adjust arching (multifeeder

pick-up; factory use).
0~65535
DENS-ADJ
Use it to make adjustments if the copy

image is foggy as a result of executing
copy density auto correction.
1~9
40
TSM Oc 3121
Remarks
SDS Description
Item
Description
ADJ-S
Use it to fine-adjust the point at which 50~80

data for shading correction is measured
on the standard white plate.
The adjustment is in units of 1/12
mm.
The presence of scratches on the
standard white plate can cause noticeable white, vertical lines on copies. If
such is the case, shift the point of
measurement in ADJ-S
LASER-OFF
Use it to adjust the laser OFF timing

(trailing edge).
0~65535
PWM 600 MIN

PWM 600 MAX
PWM 200 MIN
PWM 200 MAX
Use it to enter laser basic values

Label on the image processor PBA:
P6L: Value for PWM600MIN
P6M: Value for PWM600MAX
P2M: Value for PWM200MIN
P2L: Value for PWM200MAX
0~65535
ed.1
Settings
Remarks
If you have initialized the RAM or

replaced the image
processor PBA,
enter the value
recorded on the
label attached to
the image processor PBA.
SDS Description 41
*3* ADJUST 06 Adjusting the AE/Fixing Assembly Settings
Item
Description
Settings Remarks
AE-SLOP
When copying in AE mode with priority on

1~19
image quality, some types of originals generate
light images. If such is the case, use this mode to
adjust the copy image density.
FIXER-RES Use it to enter the resistance of the fixing assemIST

bly.
If you have replaced the fixing assembly, enter
the value recorded on the label attached to the
fixing assembly.
Resistance
to enter
FILM
LANK
Use it to enter the film thickness (fixing tempera- 0~4

ture control value).
If you have replaced the fixing assembly, enter
the value recorded on the label attached to the
fixing assembly, thereby setting the fixing temperature control value.
ABC_TBL
Use it to decrease the setting if the text density is 0~9

too low (light image) when executing AE mode
with priority on speed.
Enter a value
higher then the
recorded value
by 1 to 2 if
shiny lines
(vertical) occur
on solid black
copiers.
AE_LIGHT Use it to decrease the setting if the background of 0~40

the original is too conspicuous when using AE
mode with priority on image quality mode.
AE_DARK
42
Use it to increase the setting if the text density is

too low (light image) when executing AE mode
with priority on image quality.
TSM Oc 3121
0~40
SDS Description
*3* ADJUST 07 Shading Back-Up Data
--
Item
Description
Settings
PPR
Indicates the standard paper data (density 0~65535

data of the standard white plate).
W-LTP Indicates the standard white plate data

0~65535
(density data of the standard white plate).
Remarks
If you have initialized the

RAM or replaced the image
processor PBA, be sure to
enter the value recorded on
the service label.
*3* ADJUST 08 Adjusting the Transfer Charging Roller Bias
Item
Description
Settings
TRNS-1 Use it to adjust the transfer

0~10
roller bias occurring when copying on the 1st side.
TRNS-2 Use it to adjust the transfer
0~10
TS
roller bias occurring when copying on the 2nd side of a
two-sided copy.
TRNS2
OL
Use it to adjust the transfer

0~10
roller bias occurring when copying on the 2nd side of an overlay copy.
Remarks
Make adjustments if image faults

occur because of an incorrect transfer roller bias.
Guide
If fogging caused by stray toner occurs in the trailing edge margin, increase the value.
If the density grows higher (darker)
at intervals of about 94 mm when
copying an entirely halftone image,
decrease the value.
Note: Settings are between 0 and 10; however, a value higher than 10 may be
entered. (Any such number will be treated as 5 for control).
ed.1
SDS Description 43
6 *4* FUNCTION (function mode)

Use this mode to operate the machine under a specific set of settings or execute
auto adjustment. (Check to make sure that the machine is in stand-by mode before executing any item.)
Note: For the sorter, you can execute special tests with the DIP-switch on the
sorter control PBA. See 21-SDS for a description
A press on the
and a key on the keypad put the corresponding number
into the parentheses *4* FUNCTION1 > ( ); a press on the
key then
causes a leap to the corresponding page.
*4* FUNCTION 01 Clearing Errors
Item
Description
Clearing E000, E001, E003,

E004, E007-01, or E717
To clear an error indication, press

ERROR on the screen to highlight;
then, press the OK key, and turn
OFF/ON the main power switch.
44
TSM Oc 3121
Reference page
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 02 Stirring the Toner
Item
Description
Reference
page
Press START on the screen to highlight; then,

Stirring toner inside
the developing assem- press the OK key to start stirring the toner inside the
developing assembly.
bly at installation
At the same time, TONER_S [240] (in sec) starts
to decrement; the operation stops at [0].
To stop in the middle, press STOP to highlight,
and press the OK key to stop.
ed.1
SDS Description 45
*4* FUNCTION 03 Shading Auto Correction
Item
Operation
Reference
page
Shading auto correction (for servicing in

the field)
1)Press AUTO SHADING START on the screen to

highlight; then, press the OK key.
2)The notation END indicates the end of the operation.
Guide to the Screen
46
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 04 PD Density Auto Correction
This mode must be executed in combination with 200PWM density auto correction and 600PWM density auto correction.
Item
Description
Remarks
PD density auto
correction
1) Start PD PRINT.
A, B or D not
A 15-gradation test pattern will be generated.
OK:
2) Place a pile of 3 white sheets on the glass platen. Then, suspect:
drum unit
start WHITE MEASURE.
The scanner makes a single scan.
scanning
3) Place the 15-gradation test sheet on the glass platen.
lamp
Then, start DENSITY MEASURE.
laser unit
composite
power supply
analog processor PBA
image processor PBA
See note
4) Check the values under A, B, and D:

20 <= A <=50
40 <= B <= 40
0 <= D <= 8
5)If the values are as indicated, press DATA SET to
highlight, and press the OK key
Note: A, B, and D are approximate values so that optimum images may still be
obtained even if the values are outside the range; you may omit temporary
remedy as long as the images are optimum.
ed.1
SDS Description 47
*4* FUNCTION 05 200PWM Density Auto Correction
You must execute this mode in combination with PD density auto correction
and 600PWM density auto correction.
Item
Description
Remarks
200PWM density
auto correction
1) Start 200PWM PRINT.

2) Place a pile of 5 white sheets on the glass platen.
Then, start WHITE MEASURE.
3) Place the 15-gradation test sheet on the glass
platen. Then, start DENSITY MEASURE.
A, B or D not
OK:
suspect:
drum unit
scanning
lamp
laser unit
composite
power supply
analog
processor
PBA
image processor PBA
See note
4)Check the values under A, B, and D:

20 <= A <=50
40 <= B <= 40
0 <= D <= 8
5)If the values are as indicated, press DATA SET
to highlight, and press the OK key.
48
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 06 600PWM Density Auto Correction
You must execute this mode in combination with PD density auto correction
and 200PWM density auto correction.
Description
600PWM density
auto correction
1) Start 600PWM PRINT.

A, B or D not OK:
suspect:
2)Place a pile of 5 white sheets on the glass platen. drum unit
scanning lamp
Then, start WHITE MEASURE.
laser unit
3)Place the 15-gradation test sheet on the glass composite powplaten. Then, start DENSITY MEASURE.
er supply
analog processor PBA
image processor
PBA
See note
Item
Remarks
4)Check the values under A, B, and D:

20 <= A <= 60
-70 <= B <= 20
0 <= D <= 8
5)If the values are as indicated, press DATA

SET to highlight, and press the OK key.
ed.1
SDS Description 49
*4* FUNCTION 07 Registering the Multifeeder Paper Width
Item
Description
Reference page
Multifeeder
1) Place an A6R sheet* in the multifeeder, and adjust the
See page
paper width basic side guide to A6R.
2-15
value registration *A6 is what you obtain folding A4 into four, with its width
being 105 mm.
2) Check the screen to make sure that the VR output is indicated under AD=xxx as soon as the side guide is adjusted
to A6R.
Then, press MF-A6R to highlight, and press the OK key.
The value will be stored under MF-A6R.
3) Likewise, place and A4R sheet in the multifeeder, and
adjust the side guide to A4R.
4) Check to make sure that the AD value has been indicated;
then, press A4R to highlight, and press the OK key.
The value will be stored under A4R.
5) Then, place an A4 sheet of paper in the multifeeder, and
adjust the side guide to A4.
6) Check to make sure that the AD value has been indicated;
then, press A4; to highlight, and press the OK key.
The value will be stored under A4.
7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
8) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
50
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 08 Checking the Control Panel Indications
Item
Description
Reference
page
LCD-CHK
1)Press LCD-CHK to highlight.
checking for miss2)Press the OK key.
The entire face of the LCD reverses (white video; keys
ing dots on LCD
and notations disappear).
3)Press the area where the OK key was shown.
The entire face of the LCD reverses (black video).
4)Press the area where the OK key was shown.
The LCD will return to normal state.
SCAN_LAMP
1)Press SCAN_LAM to highlight.
checking activation 2)Press the OK key.
of scanning lamp The scanning lamp will turn on.
3)Press the OK key.
The scanning lamp will turn off.
DISP-LED
checking control
panel LEDs
ed.1
1)Press DISP-ED to highlight.

2)Press the OK key.
The LEDs on the control panel will turn on.
3)Press the OK key.
The LEDs on the control panel will turn off.
SDS Description 51
*4* FUNCTION 09 Laser
Item
Description
LSR-MRR
checking laser scanner
motor operation
1) Press LSR-MRR to highlight; then, press

the OK key.
The laser scanner motor will start to rotate
OFF
stopping operation
2) Press OFF to highlight; then, press the

OK key to stop the laser scanner motor (after
10 sec).
52
TSM Oc 3121
Reference page
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 10 Test Print
Item
Description
Test print output
Select the desired test print (press the item to

highlight); then, press the OK key.
L-TEST1: solid black test print
L-TEST2: halftone test print
L-TEST3: blank test print
L-TEST4: 17-gradation test print
L-TEST5: grid test print
L-TEST6: vertical line test print
L-TEST7: horizontal line test print
Reference page
1 L-TEST1: Solid black test print
Use it to check white spots or white lines.

If white spots are noted, suspect dirt on the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator.
If white lines are noted, suspect shading faults because of dirt on the standard
white plate
ed.1
SDS Description 53
2 L-TEST2: Halftone test print
Use it to check for transfer faults, black lines, white lines or uneven intervals.
If transfer faults are noted (vertical white spots), suspect dirt on the transfer
charging roller or the separation static eliminator.
If black lines are noted, suspect scratches on the drum or dirt on the primary
charging roller.
3 L-TEST3: blank test print
54
Use it to check for fogging.

If fogging is noted, suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum, developing
system or laser system.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
4 17-gradation test print
Use it to check gradation and check for fogging, white lines and uneven
(left/right) density.
If gradation is not good, suspect a fault in the laser system.
If fogging is noted, suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum, developing assembly or laser system.
If white bands are noted, suspect a fault in the developing system or dirt on
the transfer charging roller.
If white lines are noted, suspect a shading fault because of dirt on the standard white plate.
If uneven density (left/right) is noted, suspect dirt on the primary charging
roller or a fault in the developing system.
5 L-TEST5: grid test print
Use it to check straight line and angles.

If a discrepancy is noted, suspect a displaced laser beam or a fault in beam
detection.
ed.1
SDS Description 55
6 L-TEST6: Vertical line test print
Use it to check straight lines.

detection.
7 L-TEST7: Horizontal line test print
56
Use it to check straight lines.

detection.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 11 Checking the Image Processor PCB
Description
Image processor PBA

self check
1) Press IP-CHK to highlight.

2) Press the OK key to start a check on the
image processor PBA.
OK or NG will be indicated; if NG, replace the image processor PBA.
Item
ed.1
Reference page
SDS Description 57
*4* FUNCTION 12 Shading Adjustment (for R&D/factory)
Item
Description
Reference
page
R&D/factory
shading auto
correction
1)Place the standard white paper on the copyboard glass.

2)Press AUTO SHADING START on the screen to highlight; then, press the OK key.
3)When a beep is sounded, press the OK key. (LAMP
LEVEL will be indicated on the screen while the lamp is
being adjusted.)
If no beep is heard, turn VR1 on the DC controller PCB so
that a beep will be heard; then, press the OK key.
4)End the operation when END appears on the screen.
Guide to the Screen
58
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 13 Downloading Mode (updating FLASH ROM)
Item
Description
FLASH ROM updating

mode
Reference
page
1) Perform the following in advance:

Turn off the main power switch.
Open the front door, and remove the connector
IP DOWNLOAD:
cover for servicing; then, connect the copier to
for updating FALSH
a PC with an RS232C cable.
ROM on image processor
Insert the handle of the static eliminator cleanPCB
ing brush into the fixing assembly releasing
assembly; then, turn on the main power
PRCON DOWNLOAD:
switch.
for updating FLASH
ROM on protocol control- Press the service switch, and press the * key
twice; select FUCNTION (*4*) so that the
ler
Downloading screen will appear.
2) Press IP DOWNLOAD or PRCON
DOWNLOAD to highlight; then, press the OK
key.
The power will automatically be removed and
then will be supplied.
The following screen will appear to indicate
that the system is ready to accept downloading:
3) Operate according to the instructions on

the PC screen.
ed.1
SDS Description 59
*4* FUNCTION 14 Adjusting the Fixing Film
Item
Description
T-ROLLER FIX
fixing tension roller fixing mode
(Use it to mechanically adjust the pressure of the fixing film drive roller.)
Execute it as part of adjustment performed after replacing the film.
In this mode, the fixing film is rotated idly with

the fixing tension roller being held in place after
returning the film to an appropriate position
(same as in FILMCOMEBACK). While the fixing film is rotated idly, the speed of displacement
to the rear/front of the film is measured, and the
result is indicated under FILM SPEED on the
control panel.
FILM_INIT_ROTATE
fixing film initial rotation mode
(Use it after replacement of the fixing
film or the fixing assembly.)
In this mode, the fixing film will automatically

stop at a specific position, indicating the position
under LOCATION from Top and LEVEL as it
rotates.
FILM_COMEBACK
fixing film displacement recovery mode
(Use it if E007 is indicted when the
fixing film has become displaced for
some reason.)
In this mode, the film is returned to its proper

position. The operation ends when the film has
returned to the proper position or after a specific
period of time has passed. (The rough adjustment
range is not reached in 30 sec; or, the fine-adjustment range is not reached in 60 sec.)
ON-TIME
Indicates the period during which the fixing film

sensor has been ON.
ONE CYCLE
Indicates the time taken by the fixing film to

make a complete rotation.
FILM_SPEED
Indicates the measured film speed.
LOCATION from TOP
Indicates the position of the rear end of the fixing

film from the V-cut.
LEVEL
Indicates the position of the fixing film (4 or 5 is

optimum).
60
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
*4* FUNCTION 15 Measuring the Drum Resistance
Item
Description
Photosensitive drum
1) Bring up the screen, and press the Copy Start key.
resistance measurement The resistance of the photosensitive drum will be measured, and
the result will be indicated.
Execute this mode before changing AGSNON of OPTION in
service mode *5* to 0, so that the measurement may be used as
a reference.
For a guide, see the diagram below.
*4* FUNCTION 16 Resetting the Jam History
Item
Description
Resetting jam history
Use this mode to collectively reset the jam histories shown under
DISPLAY in service mode (*1*).
Press JAM_RLS to highlight; then, press the OK key.
ed.1
SDS Description 61
*4* FUNCTION 17 Initializing the Memory (RAM)
Item
Description
Initializing RAM
Press the appropriate item to highlight; then, press the Clear key,
and press the OK key.
COPY:
Select it to initialize the data needed for the copiers service mode
(*3*, *5*, *6*) and various copying modes to initial values.
ALL:
Select it to collectively initialize the above data. (Executing this
item will initialize the back-up data of both fax and copier.)
*4* FUNCTION 18 Printing the Parameters
Item
Description
Use it to print out the contents of

service mode *3*, *5*, and *6*;
however, the machine must be
installed with a FAX Board.
1)Press PRM_PRINT to highlight; then, press the

OK key.
*3*:ADJUST
*5*:OPTION
*6*:COUNTER
The machine must be equipped with fax functions.
62
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
7 *5* OPTION (settings mode)

Use this mode to set/change various machine settings (specifications).
Each press on the

key brings up the next screen; each press on the
key, on the other hand, brings up the previous screen.
Press the desired item (notation on the screen) to highlight.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.
A press on the
key will permanently store the entered value.
When done, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch.
*5* OPTION 01 Setting the Copy Count and Shut-Off Slant Mode
Item
Function
Description
COPY-LIM
Use it to change the

upper limit imposed on
the copy count.
You may change the upper limit imposed on the

copy count between 1 and 100 (copies).
SHUT_OFF
Use it to enable/disable
the sleep function.
You may disable the auto shift function (time)

to sleep state.
IM-ANGLE
Use it to switch slant

mode.
Copies made in slant mode may become jagged; change the setting of this mode from 0 to
1 if such a problem is noted.
COIN_OPERT
Coin vender switching
Select 1 to support a coin vender.
DRM_MSG
Use this to switch the

Replace Drum message.
0: Will not indicate the Replace Drum message

on the control panel.
(default in 230V model)
1: Will indicate the Replace Drum message.
(default in 120V model)
ed.1
SDS Description 63
*5* OPTION 02 Switching the Baud Rate, Drum Resistance Measurements,

and Thick Paper Mode
Item
Function
BAUD RATE
Use it to change the com- 0: 19200 baud

munication speed of the 1: 9600 baud
RS232C interface for
servicing.
ENV_SW
AGS NON
64
Description
Be sure to set it to 1 if
you have selected a cassette exclusively for envelopes. The switch
determines whether the
machine should recognize an envelope cassette.
0: If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to

the envelope index, the cassette will not be identified as an envelope cassette.
the envelope index, the cassette will be identified
as an envelope cassette.
Use it to specify whether

the density correction
curve should be modified based on the results
of measuring the resistance of the photosensitive drum.
0: Change the density correction curve based on

the results of measuring the resistance of the
photosensitive drum.
1: Do not change the density correction curve.
TSM Oc 3121
Default:1
Guide
If the results of making adjustments according to
the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure are not
good, execute the 15th screen (*4*).
If the indicated value is far off the target value,
set the item in this mode to 1 so normal images
may be obtained.
However, if such a problem occurs, you must
suspect a fault in the image processor PCB, DC
controller PCB, or composite power supply
PCB.
SDS Description
Item
Function
Description
SPCL-PPR
Use it to change thick

paper mode.
0:The thick paper mode remains off.

1:Switching the fixing temperature, the thick
paper mode is supported.
2:The fixing temperature is switched so that
paper thicker than that supported under 1 may
be supported.
However, for 1 and 2, the icon for the special
cassette must be registered using ADDITIONAL FUNCTION (i.e., the third icon from
the middle row).
SCAN_SEL
Use it if parts of an image

are missing in main scanning direction on
large-size papers when
using the feeder and copying a non-default original.
0:Normal copying mode.

7:Priority on paper mode*
*Centre reference output prevents missing
images.
FAX_DOC_F
EED
use it to switch reading

patterns for RDF-G1 fax
originals.
0:The topmost page of the stack of originals will

be picked up and read first and discharged on the
right.
1:The bottom-most page of the stack of originals
will be picked up and read first and returned to
the original tray (same way as copying).
ed.1
SDS Description 65
*5* OPTION 03 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U1 Cassette (universal
1 cassette)
Item
Function
CST-U1
Use it to turn on and off 0: If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to
the U-size cassette paper U1, U1 will be indicated on the LCD.
name.
U1, the abbreviation selected in the following
item will be indicated on the LCD.
CST-U1:
0:FLSC
1:OFI
2:E-OFI
3:A-LGL
4:B-OFI
5:A-OFI
Use it to specify the

U1-size cassette paper
name (abbreviation).
66
TSM Oc 3121
Description
If 1 is set for the previous item, one of the

following may be selected for indication:
0: FLSC, standing for FOOLSCAP.
1: OFFI, standing for OFICIO.
2: OFI, standing for Ecuadorian OFICIO.
3: LGL, standing for Argentine LEGAL.
4: OFFI, standing for Bolivian OFICIO.
5: OFFI, standing for Argentine OFICIO.
SDS Description
*5* OPTION 04 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U2 through U8 Cassettes (universal cassettes 2 through 8)
Item
Function
CST-U2 Use it to turn on/off the

CST-U3 U-size cassette name.
CST-U4
CST-U5
CST-U6
CST-U7
CST-U8
ed.1
Description
0:If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to U2

through U8, U1U8 will be indicated on the LCD.
1:If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to U2
through U8, the following will be indicated:
PaperNotation
U2: FOLIO_FOLIO
U3: A-FLS_FLS
U4: G-LTR_LTR
U5: G-LTRR_LTRR
U6: G-LGL_LGL
U7: LGL_LGL
U8: K-LGLR_LGLR
SDS Description 67
*5* OPTION 05 Setting the Mode of Notation for the LTR/LTRR Cassette
Item
Function
Description
CST-LTR
Use it to select the paper

name notation for the
LTR-size cassette.
0: If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to LTR,

LTR will be indicated on the LCD.
LTR will be indicated to stand for Argentine LETTER.
CST-LTRR
Use it to select the paper

name notation for the
LTRR-size cassette .

LTRR will be indicated on the LCD.
LTRR, LTRR will be indicated to stand for
Argentine LETTER-R.
68
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
8 *6* COUNTER (counter mode)

Use this mode to find out the numbers of specific operations the machine has
performed.
To clear the counter reading, press the item to highlight; then, press the
key.
When a dialogue box appears asking you whether to clear the counter reading, press the OK key to reset the counter reading to 0.
*6* COUNTER 01
Indication
Description
SERV_TOTAL 1
SERV_TOTAL 2
L_TOTAL
L_MULTI
L_CAST1
L_CAST2
L_CAST3
L_CAST4
L_CAST5
L_CAST6
Indicates the servicing total copy count 1.

Indicates the servicing total copy count 2.
Indicates the large-size copy/print count.
Indicates the large-size copy count from the multifeeder.
Indicates the large-size copy count from the cassette 1.
ed.1
SDS Description 69
*6* COUNTER 02
Indication
Description
L_OVLY_TRAY
L_DUP_TRAY
S_TOTAL
S_MULTI
S_CAST1
S_CAST2
S_CAST3
S_CAST4
S_CAST5
S_CAST6
Indicates the large-size overlay copy 2nd side pick-up count.

Indicates the large size two-sided copy 2nd side pick-up count.
Indicates the small-size copy/print count.
Indicates the small-size multifeeder pick-up count.
Indicates the small size copy count from the cassette 1.
Indicates the small-size copy counter from the cassette 2.
Indicates the small-size copy counter from the cassette 4
*6* COUNTER 03
70
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Indication
Description
S_OVLY_TRAY
S_DUP_TRAY
COPY_L_PRINT
FAX_L_PRINT
PDL_L_PRINT
ETC_L_PRINT
COPY_S_PRINT
FAX_S_PRINT
PDL_S_PRINT
ETC_S_PRINT
Indicates the small-size overlay copy 2nd side count.

Indicates the small-size two-sided 2nd side count.
Indicates the large-size copy cont.
Indicates the large-size fax print count.
Indicates the large-size printer print count.
Indicates the large-size print count by other system.
Indicates the small-size copy count.
Indicates the small-size copy count.
Indicates the small-size printer print count.
Indicates the small-size print count by other system.
*6* COUNTER 04
Indication
Description
L_ORG_FEED
S_ORG_FEED
SCAN_TOTAL
COPY_SCAN
FAX_SCAN
PDL_SCAN
ETC_SCAN
PRINT_JAM
DH_JAM
Indicates the large-size original pick-up count.

Indicates the small-size original pick-up count.
Indicates the total scan count.
Indicates the scan count for copier mode.
Indicates the scan count for fax mode.
Indicates the scan count for printer mode.
Indicates the scan count for other system.
Indicates the print jam count.
Indicates the feeder jam count.
ed.1
SDS Description 71
9 *7* ACC (accessory mode)

Use this mode to adjust/operate options.
Use the keypad to enter numerals.

A press on the
key will permanently store the value.
After operation, turn off and then on the rear main power switch.
*7* ACC 01 Adjusting the Original Stop Position for the RDF
This screen is effective only when an RDF is installed.
Item
Function
DOC_ST_T
Use it to adjust the original stop position for upper separation

pick-up.
P_INTRVL_T
Use it to adjust the original stop position for upper separation

pick-up in 2-on-1 mode.
DOC_ST_B
Use it to adjust the original stop position for lower separation

pick-up.
P_INTRVL_B
Use it to adjust the original stop position for lower separation

pick-up in 2-on-1 mode.
When this mode is selected, the sheets set on the RFs original tray will be
picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass. Check how they are stopped,
and make adjustments so that they are stopped correctly.
72
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Making Adjustments
1 Start service mode.
2 Select the appropriate item.
Press the appropriate item to highlight.
3 Place copy paper on the RFs original tray as follows:
In the case of DOC_ST_T or DOC_ST_B, place one A3 sheet of copy paper.

In the case of P_INTRVL_T or P_INTRVL_B, place two A4 sheets of
copy paper.
4 Enter a setting on the keypad.
In the case of DOC_ST_T or DOC_ST_B,
A higher setting will result in a shift to the trailing edge.
A lower setting will result in a shift to the leading edge.
In the case of P_INTRVL_T or P_INTRVL_B,
A higher setting will increase the sheet-to-sheet distance.
A lower setting will decrease the sheet-to-sheet distance.
5 Press the OK key.
The sheet on the original tray will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard
glass.
6 Open the RF slowly, and check where the paper has been stopped.Thereafter,
close the RF without removing the paper. (See below for standards.)
7 Press the OK key.
The sheet on the copyboard glass will be discharged to the RFs original tray.
(However, in the case of DOC-STP-T and P_INTRVL_T, the sheet will
be discharged to the RFs original delivery tray.)
8 To end the work, press the Reset key twice to leave service mode.
ed.1
SDS Description 73
Adjusting the RDF Sensor/Cleaning the Belt
Item
This screen is effective only when an RDF is installed.

Function
Description
SENS_ADJ Use it to execute auto

1) Press SENS_SDJ to highlight.
sensitivity adjustment for 2) Without any original on the RFs original tray,
the RDF sensor.
press the OK key.
Original sensor (S1)
1 will appear under SENS_ADJ, indicating
Registration sensor
that automatic adjustment is being executed.
If 1 remains for 30 sec or more, suspect a fault in
(S3)
the original tray sensor (S1), registration sensor
(S3), or RF controller.
3) If 0 appears under SENS_ADJ, indicating
that the adjustment is over, press the Reset key
twice to leave service mode.
(The foregoing adjustment is the same as using
SW3 on the RF controller PCB.)
S_BCLN_T Use it to execute cleaning 1) Press the appropriate item (S_BCLN_T or
of the separation belt for S_BCLN_B) to highlight.
upper separation.
2) Set a sheet of copy paper whose centre has been
moistened with alcohol on the RDFs tray.
S_BCLN_B Use it to clean the separa- 3) Press the OK key.
tion belt for lower separa- The sheet of copy paper will be picked up and the
tion.
separation belt will be rotated idly.
4)Press the OK key to end the operation.
5)Open the RFs top cover, and remove the sheet of
copy paper.
Then, close the RFs top cover.
The foregoing adjustment is the same as using bit 6
of DIPS1 on the RF controller PCB.
74
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
10 * 8 * FAX
Using the (REPORT) button, a printout can be made of the system data, complete with the FAX SDS settings, dump list, error transmission report and a reception report.
*8* #1 SSSW Service Soft Switch
Warning: This menu contains very detailed fax settings. For example: timing,
tone frequency, protocol specifications, etc. The settings are pre-set, when you
specify the country setting in ( * 5 * TYPE ). No changes need to be made to
this menu.
ed.1
SDS Description 75
* 8 * 2 MENU Menu Switch Settings
NL-EQ:
To turn the NL equaliser ON and OFF. Set to ON if an error frequently occurs,
due to line conditions, during the transmission or receipt of a communication.
MONITOR:
To set the monitor function for the telephone line.
If DIAL is selected, a monitor sound (telephone line) will be generated by
the speaker between the start of a communication and DIS during transmission.
If SERVICEMAN is selected, a monitor sound (telephone line) will be generated by the speaker between the start and the end of a communication.
If OFF is selected, no sound will be generated.
ATT (P)
To set the transmission level (ATT). Increase the transmission level if an error
frequently occurs, due to line conditions, during the transmission or receipt of
a communication.
Note: A lower value increases the transmission level. As the values are in a
logarithmic scale, change the value in single steps.
PCI FREQUENCY
Use it to set the frequency of the pseudo CI signal. Increase the frequency of
the pseudo CI signal if the ringing sound fails, due to the type of extension,
when fax to telephone switching is initiated.
DATE
To change the format of the presentation of the date.
76
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
* 8 * 3 NUMERIC Parameter
The values are set automatically when you select a country in ( * 5 * TYPE ).
* 8 * 4 NCU
The values are set automatically when you select a country in ( * 5 * TYPE ).
ed.1
SDS Description 77
* 8 * 5 TYPE
Selection of the appropriate country in this menu sets all the service data: to
match the countrys domestic telecommunication standards.
* 8 * 6 GENESIS
Do not change the settings. A change could reduce the quality level of the reading image.
78
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
* 8 * 7 PRINTER
Service soft switch settings
SW bit Description
01
~
04
05
setting = 0
setting = 1
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Priority on LTR recording paper
No
Yes
Priority on LGL recording paper
No
Yes
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Prohibit reduction recording on A4 recording

paper
No
Yes
Prohibit reduction on LTR recording paper
No
Yes
Change prohibited
Priority on reverse scanning direction
Yes
No
bit 0
To give priority to LTR recording paper, when an image is received in the same
number of divisions, and could be printed on LTR, A4 or LGL in Direct.
ed.1
SDS Description 79
bit 1
To give priority to LGL recording paper, when an image is received in the same
number of divisions, and could be printed on LTR, A4 or LGL in Direct.
The priority will be in accordance with the settings of bit 0 and bit 1.
bit 0
bit 1
Priority of recording paper
A4> LTR> LGL
LTR> A4> LGL
LGL> LTR> A4
LTR> LGL> A4
bit 2
To specify the use of a cassette, even though there is no recording paper in the
cassette.
bit 3
To specify whether reduced printing should be permitted during copying.
bit 4
To specify whether reduced printing on A4 recording paper should be enabled.
Set to No if reduced printing is to be disabled.
bit 5
To specify whether reduced printing on LTR recording paper should be enabled. Set to No if reduced printing is to be disabled.
bit 6
To specify whether printing of reports should be permitted only when a report
cassette has been specified.
bit 7
Use it to specify whether priority should be given to recording in reverse scanning direction. Set it to No if a B4 image should be printed on B5 recording
paper, through division, when both B5 and A4 are selected.
80
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
SW bit Description
setting = 0
setting = 1
06
Yes
No
Reduction for image division
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
bit 0
To specify whether printing should be on two sheets through reduction, or in
Direct, when a long original consisting of two or more pages (Direct) is received.
SW bit Description
07
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
ed.1
setting = 0
setting = 1
SDS Description 81
SW bit Description
11
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Print after approval
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
Change prohibited
setting = 0
setting = 1
Yes
No
bit 2
To specify how a multiple-page reception document should be printed: whether all pages should be printed in succession, after storage in memory, or the
first three pages should be printed first upon reception in memory, with the
subsequent pages printed on a page-by-page basis.
7 NUMERIC Parameter settings
82
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
Parameter
Setting
Range (mm)
01
Maximum non-image
0 to 9999
04
Leading edge margin
0 to 9999
05
Trailing edge margin
0 to 9999
02
03
06 through 30
No. 1
To specify the non-image area, when a long-length reception image is received.
If you want to avoid a non-image area along the trailing edge, when receiving
a long-length image in excess of the effective recording length, lower the parameter to decrease the non-image range.
When an image longer than the effective recording length is received, the image will be printed in reduce mode. This eliminates the area within the specified range (provided that the length of the reduced image is between the
effective recording length and the setting). Otherwise, the image will be printed in divisions.
No.4
To specify the leading edge margin for the effective recording length.
No.5
To specify the trailing edge margin for the effective recording length.
ed.1
SDS Description 83
* 8 * 8 CLEAR
Item
Description
TEL
To clear the settings registered under TEL registration (i.e.,

one-touch dialling, speed dialling, and group dialling settings).
Execution also clears the settings under: memory control of
user data.
USSW SW
To clear the settings registered in user data, or under SSSW#

through #3.
Execution does not clear the settings under memory control*.
*It will, however, clear the image data in memory.
SERVICE SW
To clear the settings registered in user data, or under SSSW#1

through #3. #6, and #7.
NCU
To clear the settings registered under SSSW#4.
SERVICE
DATA
To clear the contents of the system dump list.
REPORT
To clear the contents of the communications control report.
ALL
To clear all settings and registered data items.
COUNTER
To clear the print count, reading page count and communications control numbers.
* 8 * 9 ROM Info display
The same function as DISPLAY 04 in the copier service mode ( * 1 * ). It

cannot be executed. To check the ROM version, execute DISPLAY 04 in the
copier service mode ( * 1 * ).
84
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
* 8 * 10 Test mode
D-RAM:
To execute a write or read check of data for all areas of the D-RAM (D-RAM
A, D-RAM B). A check will be made on the expansion memory (option), if
any.
PRINT:
Use it to generate a test print.
VIDEO:
To store the scanned images in the image memory, without coding, and then
print them.
MODEM NCU:
To execute a transmission or reception test on the modem and the NCU.
FACULTY:
To run a function test.
DATA SET:
Not available for servicing in the field.
Using the Mode

Press the appropriate item, causing it to highlight.
Press the OK key to invoke the corresponding screen
ed.1
SDS Description 85
* 8 * 10 TEST , 1 DRAM test

To execute a write or read check of data for all area of the D-RAM (D-RAM
A (Q6, Q18), D-RAM B (Q8, Q20). A check will be made on the expansion
memory (option), if any.
Executing a D-RAM test will clear the image data stored in memory. If necessary, print all image data prior to execution.
Using the mode
1 Open the screen. Then press VIDEO RAM . It will highlight. Press OK .
A D-RAM test will be executed.

2 If the results of the test are correct, the following will be displayed:
D-RAM size ( in bytes );

a different value will be
indicated to represent
any increase
86
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
If an error is found during the D-RAM test, the test will be suspended. The error display screen will appear. If this is the case, press OK to run the test
once again. The error end screen will appear.
Error display screen
Notations:
D-RAM: type of RAM with error
WRT: data written
RD: data read
ADR: address
Error end screen
Action to take
If an additional memory is installed, suspect poor contact. Remove and install the memory and then run a D-RAM test once again.
If an error still occurs after running a D-RAM test twice or three times, replace the FAX PBA or the expansion memory.
ed.1
SDS Description 87
* 8 * 10 TEST , 2 PRINT test
The following is the printing mode used for test patterns:

Recording size: A4H
Resolution: Fine
Printing pattern:
AMI pattern (for factory)
STRIPES (vertical lines)
BIAS (slanted lines)
Rotation: yes, if A4H; no if A4R
88
Using the mode

Select the appropriate print pattern on the screen. Then, press OK . A test
print will be made.
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
* 8 * 10 TEST , 3 VIDEO test
To store the scanned images in the image memory, without coding, and printing them.
Position of document: platen or feeder
Document size: A4
Recording paper size: A4 (A4R not permitted)
Resolution: fine
Density: standard
Rotation: set for reading: yes, if original size is A4H; no, if A4R
A4H: document is A
A4R: document is A4R
* 8 * 10 TEST , 4 MODEM NCU test
To run a transmission and reception test on the modem and the NCU. This
mode consists of five items, as shown in the figure.
MODEM NCU menu screen
ed.1
SDS Description 89
Relay test (RELAY)

Press RELAY on the MODEM NCU menu screen. Press OK to start relay test mode, and to invoke the corresponding screen. A press on each item
will activate the appropriate relay.
Frequency test (FREQ)

Press FREQ on the MODEM NCU menu screen. Press OK to start the
frequency test mode, and to invoke the corresponding screen.
Select an item so that the frequency selected by closing the DC circuit will
be transmitted, using the tone transmission function of the modem. Simultaneously monitoring the transmission signal from the speaker. To interrupt,
press the CANCEL key.
90
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
G3 signal transmission test (G3 TX)

Press G3 TX on the MODEM NCU menu screen and press OK . This will
start the G3 signal transmission test mode and invoke the corresponding
screen. Select an item to transmit the frequency selected by closing the DC
circuit, using the G3 signal transmission function of the modem. Simultaneously monitoring the transmission signal from the speaker. To interrupt,
press CANCEL .
DTMF transmission Test (DTMF TX)

Press DTMF TX on the MODEM NCU menu screen and press OK . This
will start the DTMF transmission test mode and invoke the corresponding
screen. Select an item to transmit the frequency selected by closing the DC
circuit, using the DTMF signal transmission function . Simultaneously monitoring the transmission signal from the speaker.
The DTMF signal will be transmitted in relation to the keys on the keypad,
* key and # key.
Pressing any key will highlight the corresponding notation.
The period during which the DRTF signal will be transmitted may be selected as follows: LONG: until the next key is pressed; SHORT: for about 100
ms.
To interrupt, press CANCEL .
ed.1
SDS Description 91
Tone Signal: Reception Test (Tone TX)

Press Tone TX and press OK to start test the tone signal, and to invoke
the corresponding screen.
The frequency selected by closing the DC circuit and the DTMF signal will
be detected. Use is made of the tone detection function of the modem and the
DTMF reception function. The frequencies checked are as follows:
462, tolerance 14 Hz
The notation will change to ON

when the applicable frequency
(1 through 3) is detected.
A notation will be displayed
upon detection of the DTMF
signal.
The tone input source may be
selected as follows: External:
from line; Internal: from remote
* 8 * 10 TEST , 5 PRINT Function test (Faculty)
Use this mode to activate each function for testing.
92
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
G3 signal transmission test (G3 4800 bps TX)

Press G3 4800 Tx and press OK to start the G3 signal transmission test
and to invoke the corresponding screen.
The DC circuit will be closed and a signal of a frequency of 4800 bps will be
transmitted by the G3 signal transmission function of the modem. At the
same time, the transmission signal from the speaker is monitored.
Speaker Test (SPEAKER)

Press SPEAKER and press OK to start the test of the speaker, and to
invoke the corresponding screen.
The speaker will function at the selected frequency as soon as the screen appears.
To interrupt, press FREQ. It will highlight. Each press on the arrow key will
increase the frequency at intervals of 100 Hz. (200 Hz ~ 5000 Hz)
Press VOL . It will highlight. Each press on the arrow key will increase or
decrease the sound between and 9.
ed.1
SDS Description 93
Line Test (LINE DETECT)

Press LINE TEST and press OK to start the line test, and to invoke the
corresponding screen.
This mode tests the sensors around the NCU and the frequency counter.
(1) LINE DETECT 1
Press LINE DETECT 1. Press OK to invoke the corresponding screen

This function will check CI, Fc and hook state (ON/OFF) from the line.
For CI, the appropriate frequency (0 if CI is off; the current CI frequency if
ON).
94
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description
(2) LINE DETECT 2

This function will switch ON the CNL and P-relay. Checking the absence or
presence of a single signal from the line and the frequency of the signal, if any.
Be sure to set the appropriate level, in advance .

Level
Level of detection (dBm)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-25.96 or higher
-30.66 or higher
-32.96 or higher
-35.96 or higher
-38.46 or higher
-40.96 or higher
-44.70 or higher
-49.71 or higher
ed.1
SDS Description 95
(3) LINE DETECT 3

This mode checks the CNG signal by the PLL.
When this mode is executed, a direct current is applied between L1 and L2,
putting the extension telephone into off-hook state. Then 100 Hz (CG) signals
are input from the line or the extension telephone. The notation ON will be
displayed upon detection of the signals.
(4) VOICE Tx
Press VOICE TX. Press OK to invoke the corresponding screen. The functioning of OMG is checked by transmitting two types of OMG to the line and
to the speaker.
96
TSM Oc 3121
SDS Description

OCE 3121 3122 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OCE 3121 3122 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OCE 3121 3122 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oc

Technical Service Manual

Contents TSM Oc 3121

001 Unit positioning

161 Developing roller

361 Fax document separation/

198 Mechanical connections

370 Document separation

038 Mechanical connections

380 Platen glass transport

201 Transfer roller

398 Mechanical connections

278 Mechanical connections

11.Digital Document Handling

281 Image Processor PBA

405 Fax customer environment

318 Mechanical connections

411 * Fax mechanical connections

158 Mechanical connections

General copy quality

ed.1, January 1998, Code no. 0109329

Replace (life time)

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

737 * Mechanical connections

478 Mechanical connections

441 Paper trays main

641 Fixing film

457 Mechanical connections

678 Mechanical connections

ed.1, January 1998, Code no. 0109329

740 2 Bin output tray

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

ed.1, January 1998, Code no. 0109329

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

to sources of fire, or dust or ammonia gas; places subject to direct sunshine.

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

The site must be well ventilated.

2 Unpacking and installation

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

Unpack the machine, and

Holding the copier by the

Open the cardboard box, and

Check the contents:

Remove the screw that is fixing the scanner. There is a

Slide out the cassette.

Open the front door.

Turn the lever, releasing the

Turn the lever to the left,

Scanner fixing screw

Scanner fixing screw

Locking lever for the developing unit

Lever for the feeding unit

Loosen the screw, releasing

Pull the dummy drum out to

Holding the ivory coloured

Confidential 1998 Oc-Technologies B.V.

Shake the toner cartridge several times.

Place the toner cartridge on

While holding the toner cartridge, pull the grip forwards

Press OPTION (5) to

Press FAX (8) to highlight. Then, press OK.

Enter 8 in service mode

Enter 8 FAX in service